Magnet Activ Shim

GE Healthcare
Magnet & Cryogen Manual

for Actively Shimmed Magnets
1.5T R Series Magnets
3.0T W, WB Series Magnets
Operating Documentation
5495019
Revision 01
(5495019TPH REV 01)
Page 1 of 607
GE Healthcare Magnet & Cryogen Manual
Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 2 of 607

Important Information, Language

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ
(BG)
Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.
• Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е да осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на доставчика на услугата,
оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга опасност.
警告
(ZH-CN)
本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
• 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
警告
(ZH-HK)
本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
• 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告
(ZH-TW)
本維修手冊僅有英文版。
• 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE
(HR)
Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
• Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta uslijed strujnog
udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.

VÝSTRAHA
(CS)
Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.
• V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překladu do odpovídajícího
jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu, obslužného
personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respective vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL
(DA)
Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
• Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at sørge for
oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød, mekanisk eller anden
fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING
(NL)
Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.
• Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd geraadpleegd en
begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of een patiënt
gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING
(EN)
This service manual is available in English only.
• If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's responsibility to
provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from electric shock,
mechanical or other hazards.

HOIATUS
(ET)
See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.
• Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab klient tõlketeenuse
osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi vigastamist elektrilöögi,
mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS
(FI)
Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
• Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan käännöksen
hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyttäjän tai potilaan
vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION
(FR)
Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
• Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il incombe au client de le
faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance n'a pas été
consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient des blessures
dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG
(DE)
Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
• Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners
oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ
(EL)
Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
• Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη
του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το
παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον τεχνικό σέρβις, στο
χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS
(HU)
Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
• Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg áramütés, mechanikai vagy
egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN
(IS)
Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
• Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda viðskiptamanns að
skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá raflosti,
vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA
(IT)
Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.
• Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a provvedere
direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente manuale ed averne
compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla manutenzione,
all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici altri rischi.

警告
(JA)
このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
• サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業
者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでくださ
い。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、
感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고
(KO)
본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.
• 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것
은 고객의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지
마십시오.
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서
비스 제공자, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다.
BRĪDINĀJUMS
(LV)
Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
• Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku vai citu faktoru
izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS
(LT)
Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
• Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo paslaugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai dėl elektros šoko,
mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.

ADVARSEL
(NO)
Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.
• Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller pasienten skades
på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE
(PL)
Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
• Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem
klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem serwisowym i zrozumienia
go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta, operatora lub pacjenta w
wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO
(PT-BR)
Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
• Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao cliente fornecer os serviços
de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou paciente decorrentes de
choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO
(PT-PT)
Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do
cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do operador ou do paciente
devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.

ATENŢIE
(RO)
Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.
• Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de datoria clientului să
furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau pacientului în urma
pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО!
(RU)
Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на
английском языке.
• Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на каком-то другом
языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному руководству и
поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что специалист по
техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим током, механическую травму или
другое повреждение.
UPOZORENJE
(SR)
Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
• Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili pacijenta usled strujnog
udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE
(SK)
Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
• Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie prekladateľských služieb je
zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej osoby alebo
pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.

ATENCION
(ES)
Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
• Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés, el cliente deberá
encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el operador o el paciente
sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas de otra naturaleza.
VARNING
(SV)
Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.
• Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden för att tillhandahålla
översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på serviceteknikern, operatören eller
patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO
(SL)
Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
• Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih nevarnosti poškoduje
ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT
(TR)
Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
• Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek
müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, operatör veya hastanın
yaralanmasına yol açabilir.

Revision History
Effective Periodic
Affected Reason for Change or Change
REV Description of Content Changed Author date of review
Page(s) Control Number
Document date
Merger of 2192624, Revision 21

with 2325852, Revision 17 and
5500099, Revision 9. Does not
My
Full rewrite to improve Michelle G. Apply to
01 ALL Initial Release Workshop
document flow. Increased level Sansbury Service
Release
of detail. Number of corrections Manuals
are too numerous to detail
within revision history page.
Yes No NA Enter Validation Information or Rationale if “NO” or “NA” for Validation or Training
Typo or Format Change
Regulatory Filing
Validation Refer to information contained within HII log.
Training No change to existing techniques.
Communication Upon release.
Labeling, (list) Document is a Service Note (classified as Labeling)
Other Documents, (list)
Other (describe)

Chapter 1 - SAFETY
1. Safety
1.1. MR Service Safety Manual, Direction 5452735
1.1.1. Prior to and while performing any actions contained within this document, one must read, review and
follow all guidelines as defined in the MR Service Safety Manual, Direction 5452735. The most current
version of the MR Service Safety Manual should be available at all times while performing any actions
contained within this document.
1.1.2. The latest release of the MR Service Safety Manual can be obtained through the support
documentation library at gehealthcare.com or through your GE Healthcare Field Service
Representative.
1.2. Superconducting Magnets, Introduction

1.2.1. Superconducting magnets contain cryogenic liquids (liquid helium = 4 kelvin (-452° F, -269° C) and
generate a strong three-dimensional magnetic field. These conditions require safety precautions to
be taken to prevent serious injury (cryogenic burns, asphyxiation, fire, shock, ferromagnetic
projectiles, or other magnetic field effects). The safety precautions/requirements contained in the
following sections must be reviewed, understood, and implemented prior to performing any service
on a superconducting magnet. Make sure that all magnet service is performed by trained and
authorized personnel and all safety equipment is in place. All persons working with cryogens and/or
cryogenic liquids should understand the following:
a. Nature and properties of liquid and gaseous helium and nitrogen
b. Specific instructions on the equipment
c. Use and care of protective equipment and protective clothing
d. Safety and first aid
e. Handling emergency situations such as leaks, spills, and fires.
1.2.2. Emergency Situations
a. The magnet technology used on MR Systems may vary from one product design to another
There are three basic magnet technologies used by suppliers today:
◊ Superconducting Magnets,
◊ Permanent Magnets and
◊ Resistive Magnets.
b. Each magnet technology will have emergency response processes unique to that design. For
example, if a person is pinned to the magnet by a ferromagnetic object or that object has
become attached to the magnet, the magnet technology will dictate the appropriate action to be
taken.
c. This document addresses designs relating to Superconducting Magnets.

1.3. Safety Alert Usage

1.3.1. The following ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Z535.4 definitions are applied to notify
users of the potential for personal injury:
INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY. DANGER IS LIMITED TO EXTREME SITUATIONS.
INDICATES A POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY.
INDICATES A POTENTIAL HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT, IF NOT AVOIDED, MAY RESULTING MINOR OR
MODERATE INJURY.
1.3.2. The following ANSI Z535.2 definition is applied to notify users of the potential for property damage
only:
Indicates information or company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the safety of personnel or
protection of property.

1.4. Safety Procedures for Servicing Highly Ferrous Devices

1.4.1. This section introduces an explicit service policy when servicing highly ferrous devices in a magnetic
field. Devices such as docks, longitudinal drive motors, blowers, passive shims and coldheads are
examples of highly ferrous devices that fall under this policy as follows:
When servicing any magnetic equipment, it is critically important that the Service Engineer
consciously plan the path to be taken when moving highly ferrous devices within the magnet
environment. The path should be as far from the magnet as practical and avoid high-flux density
fields.
Safety Requirements:
• Movement of ferrous material in the Magnet Room must follow the GE service procedure for
that device. When exiting, move away from the magnet in the most direct manner possible.
Except when moving ferrous material to/from its native location on or near the magnet, the
static magnetic field in any portion of the service path shall not exceed 200 Gauss.
• Two MR safety-trained personnel must be present at all times when servicing highly ferrous
devices in the areas of magnetic fields.
• In the event a ferrous item becomes attached to the magnet, contact your MR Regional Support
Engineer/ZSE/District leader before attempting any removal.
When planning a service path, it is critical that the path be clear and sufficiently wide. Ensure there
are no trip hazards, obstacles, clutter, slippery surfaces, or any other items even partially restricting
the path. If there are portable obstacles in a path, temporarily remove them from the area and
replace them after the service action is completed. It is required to walk the paths prior to beginning
service to ensure there is sufficient space through which you can pass and the object being
serviced.
1.4.2. Make sure the “Highly Ferrous Material Pre-Work Checklist” is completed to confirm that the required
actions were taken. The second MR trained person also must complete this checklist.
Highly Ferrous Material Pre-Work Checklist

Check When
Action is Taken Action to Take
Make sure two or more qualified people are present to work with highly ferrous materials.
Make sure the service path is outside the 200 Gauss field. Consider marking it with tape or
other visible indicators that can easily be removed after the service event.
Make sure the service path is wide enough to walk through with the device being serviced.
Make sure the service path is free of clutter:
• Remove all trip hazards.
• Remove all obstacles.
• Move portable equipment out of the way, including the phantom cart.
• Look for and clean up slippery surfaces.
Walk the path before beginning the service. Make sure there is sufficient space for you and
the ferrous object you are servicing. The path should be as far from the magnet as
possible.
1.4.3. For more information, refer to Handling of Ferrous Material section of this chapter/manual.

1.5. Magnet Safety

1.5.1. Magnet Safety Considerations, Customer Task
a. Post WARNING signs (which are supplied with the system and are not FRU’s) outside the 5-Gauss
zone alerting persons with cardiac pacemakers, neurostimulators, and other biostimulation
devices of the effect of the magnetic field on these devices.
◊ For DV23.0 and Earlier: Use Magnet Field Exclusion Zone Warning Sign, 5116163.
◊ For DV23.1 and Later: Use Magnet Field Exclusion Zone Warning Sign, 5457590.
b. Post these signs two days prior to the activation of the magnet for maximum impact.
c. Signs should be posted outside the 5-Gauss line alerting personnel of this requirement. Since the
magnetic field is three dimensional, signs should also be posted on the floors above and below
the Magnet Room in which the 5-Gauss line exists.
Magnet Field Exclusion Zone Magnet Field Exclusion Zone

Warning Sign, 5116163 Warning Sign, 5457590

1.5.2. Magnet Safety Considerations, GE Task
a. Post Security Zone signs on both sides of any doors that lead into the Magnet Room to alert
people of the high magnetic field and not to bring ferromagnetic objects into the Magnet Room.

b. For DV23.0 and Earlier
◊ 1.5T Systems: Use Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign, PN 5116165.
◊ 3.0T Systems: use Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign, P/N 5120663. (The 3.0T sign has “3.0T
Magnet” in red lettering under the WARNING text at the top.)
c. For DV23.1 and Later
◊ 1.5T Systems: Use Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign, PN 5458376.
◊ 3.0T Systems: use Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign, P/N 5455191. The 3.0T sign has “3.0T
Magnet” in red lettering under the WARNING text at the top.
Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign, Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign,
PN 5116165 PN 5120663
Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign, Magnetic Field Security Zone Sign,
PN 5458376 PN 5455191

d. Set up the AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL signs (P/N 5116158, supplied with the system and not a
FRU) at the entrance(s) to the Magnet Room prior to the start of magnet service procedures.
Authorized Personnel Sign,

PN 5116158
e. Notify responsible personnel two days prior to the activation of the magnet to allow for
preparatory actions to be accomplished.
f. Do not bring ferromagnetic objects (including tools, pens, tape measures, and vacuum pumps)
into the Magnet Room when the magnet is at field unless otherwise indicated in the GE Service
Methods documentation.
g. Do not take self-winding watches, magnetically-coded credit cards, magnetic recording heads,
magnetic tapes, or cameras near the magnet when it is at field.
h. Do not bring ferromagnetic objects within the 200 Gauss zone, and do not bring ferromagnetic
objects on wheels within the 100 Gauss zone. Refer to the Pre-Installation Manual (PIM) for the 5,
100, and 200 Gauss zones.
i. Use only nonmagnetic cylinders, nonmagnetic cylinder carts, and Dewars when transferring
cryogens into an energized superconducting magnet.
j. Do not bring the magnetic tool kit into the Magnet Room. The case has ferrous components that
will result in being attracted to the magnet in field zones greater than 100 Gauss.
k. Identify the magnetic field strength of the system before entering the Magnet Room to perform
service procedures. For systems with a magnetic field strength of 3.0T and higher, the field
strength is displayed on the security sign posted on the Magnet Room door.
l. The local GE Field Service operation will provide the highly visible (orange, black, and white)
security and warning signs in the primary local languages.

1.5.3. Site Precautions - The Field Service Engineer is responsible to ensure the following items are in
compliance:
a. Magnet Room Venting
◊ Ensure Magnet Room venting has been installed.
◊ Check that there are provisions for exhausting the gas through the magnet vent system for
any service action that releases large quantities of cryogenic gas.
b. Cryogen Venting
◊ Magnet plumbing and the vent system shall be inspected for leaks during magnet
installation.
◊ Secure the door into the Magnet Room in the open position prior to any service action that
will result in the handling or release of cryogens from the magnet. Secure the ceiling hatch
and rear door in the open position if in a mobile van.
◊ Make sure a second person (GE employee or contractor trained in these safety
requirements) is present in the area during magnet service in case of emergency.
◊ Make sure a working phone line accessing an outside line or other means of getting help is
available in case of an emergency.
◊ Set up “Authorized Personnel Only” signs outside the Magnet Room door(s) prior to any
magnet servicing.
◊ Make sure your personal oxygen monitor is calibrated and operating properly before
beginning any magnet service.
◊ Always maintain a clear exit path. If a Dewar is to be used in the Magnet Room, the path
must be wide enough to accommodate the Dewar.
c. Confirm unobstructed access to emergency vacuum port on magnet (lower right hand side,
facing patient end) (cover over port may be present).

1.5.4. Equipment Handling Precautions
a. Do not bring any ferromagnetic equipment, Dewars or cylinders into the Magnet Room when the
magnet is ramped. They will become dangerous projectiles in the presence of the magnetic field.
b. Do not bring any boxes into the Magnet Room without first checking them for ferromagnetic
components.
c. Helium gas cylinders are pressurized to ~2,400 psi. Secure each helium cylinder before removing
the protective cap, and open the main valve very slowly to prevent any possibility of a fatal
release of explosive gas. Make sure gas cylinders are stored in an upright secured position.
d. Firmly hold the unattached end of the gas hose during a purge to prevent the hose’s “whipping”
motion.
e. Keep Dewars in the vertical position at all times. Dewars should have wheels mounted at the
base for transport. If wheels are not present, use a low platform dolly that fully encompasses the
Dewar’s base for moving. Do not slide or roll Dewars. Use a nonferrous hand truck to move gas
cylinders. Use a small hand magnet to check the dolly or hand truck to ensure it will not be
pulled into the magnet before bringing it into the Magnet Room.
f. Make sure the transportation route for Dewars and gas cylinders is clear of obstacles and
restrictions.
g. Check Dewars for high pressure, and follow documented service procedures for reducing
pressure prior to use.
h. Check all equipment, Dewars, and gas cylinders for leaks.
i. Make sure that safety relief valves and regulators are operating properly.
j. Store Dewars in a well-ventilated area as outlined in the room ventilation pre-installation
manual.

1.5.5. Cryogen Handling Precautions
a. Contact of liquid cryogens or their vapors with the eyes can cause severe frostbite, even when
contact is too brief to affect the skin. Always wear safety glasses and a face shield when
handling cryogens.
b. Protective clothing (long sleeve shirt, long pants, protective apron/jacket), dry nonabsorbent
insulated gloves, and face/eye protection (face shield and safety glasses) shall be worn when
handling or being exposed to cryogens to prevent cold burns resulting from contact with the
cryogenic liquid or gas.
c. Make sure a calibrated, functioning oxygen monitor (if present) is installed in the Magnet Room
in conformance with site requirements in the Magnet Room and cryogen storage area. The
position of the O 2 monitor sensor should be at a level that corresponds to the cryogen product
being stored or dispensed (for liquid helium, the sensor should be near the ceiling; for liquid
nitrogen, the sensor should be near the floor).
◊ If the alarm mode of the oxygen monitor (if present) is activated, immediately evacuate the
room. Determine the cause and if ventilation is a problem, correct the situation.
◊ Be sure that the oxygen monitor (if present) is reading a safe level before entering the
affected area to continue with service procedures.
d. For your safety, you have been equipped with a personal oxygen monitor - this monitor should
be worn at all times when working on the magnet or within the magnet room. While performing
service procedures, oxygen monitors are used to detect oxygen levels in the air. The device
alerts you when oxygen levels drop below the critical level.
◊ Perform required personal oxygen monitor checks (as defined in the user manual) before
each day's use.
◊ Note that your personal oxygen monitor and the room monitor may be set at different
alarm points. You must exit the room and proceed to a safe area if any of the alarms
sound.
◊ If the oxygen monitor/meter reads at or below 20.8%, step back and observe the area for
possible issues or leaks.
◊ If the oxygen monitor/meter is at or below 19.5%, YOU MUST EVACUATE the area. Ventilate
the area ONLY if it is safe to do so.
e. Do not enter the room until site emergency response team has declared it safe for entry. Wear
your personal oxygen monitor to verify that the oxygen level is above 19.5%.
f. Smoking is prohibited in the Magnet Room and around cryogens. The extreme low temperatures
of liquid helium and nitrogen cause oxygen from the air to liquefy on cold surfaces (for example,
on the transfer tubes). This produces a highly enriched oxygen liquid. There is a potential fire
danger if grease or oil comes in contact with these surfaces, since they are combustible
substances.
g. When pluming a stinger, always point the stinger toward the ceiling and away from the face at a
45-degree angle.
h. Do not bring more than 1,000 liters or two Dewars (whichever is less) of cryogens into the
Magnet Room.
i. Do not bring nitrogen and helium Dewars into the Magnet Room at the same time.

1.5.6. Magnet Service Precautions
a. Ramp the magnet down to Zero field prior to any service requiring opening/exposure to the
helium vessel and/or cryogenic gas/liquid, except for the removal of fill and ramp lead port caps.
This prevents the possibility of a magnet quench and rapid expulsion of cryogenic helium gas
and liquid.
b. Make sure nonferromagnetic fiber or composition safety shoes are worn in the Magnet Room.
c. Observe the helium vessel pressure gauge and vent the magnet down to less than 0.5 psi before
removing ramp/fill port caps or loosening a component, resulting in the release of cryogenic
helium gas and liquid.
d. Never allow a helium Dewar to empty during a magnet fill, resulting in a magnet quench from
the introduction of warm helium gas.
e. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
f. Use the appropriate service procedure, and exercise caution when inserting ramp leads or a
shim lead into a ramped magnet to prevent a quench.
g. Avoid rapid head and eye movements when working near or inside the magnet bore to minimize
dizziness.
h. Always have a second MR safety-trained person available when:
◊ Specified by service instructions,
◊ Handling highly ferrous parts near a ramped magnet, and
◊ Working with cryogens.
i. Never allow yourself to be positioned between the magnet and any unknown objects that may
be brought into the Magnet Room.
j. Limit the access into the Magnet Room before performing service in the room. This can be
achieved by installing a Yellow and Black Caution Tape across the door opening and placing the
“Authorized Personnel” sign below it.
k. Identify the type of magnet and its field strength before performing service in the Magnet Room.
The Security signs are installed on the entrance doors into the Magnet Room. These signs
indicate the field strength of magnets greater than 1.5T inside the room.
l. Use caution when using the ferrous tools as they are attracted to the magnet at fields over 100
Gauss.
m. Do not bring the magnetic tool kit into the Magnet Room. It will become attracted to the magnet
if exposed to a field greater than 1
n. 00 Gauss.

1.5.7. First Aid/Emergency Situations
a. In the event of an emergency situation:
◊ If a human being is pinned to the magnet by a ferrous object, immediately push the button
on the Emergency / Magnet Rundown Unit (ERU or MRU) to quench the magnet.
◊ Notify proper emergency responders.
◊ Do not attempt to rescue personnel. Rescues must be made by trained personnel.
◊ For immediate treatment, the frostbitten or cold burn area should not be massaged or
rubbed in any way. Flushing by running under a tap/faucet will actually create further
tissue damage due to the impact of the flowing water striking the wounded area. Instead,
the area should be immersed in tepid water rather than flushed. After first aid treatment is
applied, seek proper medical attention.
◊ (For Helium-Only Systems) In case of a magnet cryogenic vent failure during a quench, stay
near the floor where the oxygen will be present, and immediately exit the Magnet Room.
◊ In the event a ferrous item becomes attached to the magnet, contact your MR Regional
Support Engineer/ZSE/District leader before attempting any removal.
b. If in the Magnet Room when a quench occurs, follow these basic rules:
◊ Remain calm; do not panic.
◊ Open the scan room door, prop it open, and exit the room immediately.
◊ Turn on the exhaust fan for the scan room (if not automatically turned on by the oxygen
monitor, if present).
◊ If the door cannot be opened, stay near the floor. This is where the oxygen is located.
1.5.8. Second Person Service Requirements
Two MR safety-trained personnel must be present at all times when servicing highly ferrous devices in
the areas of magnetic fields or when working with cryogens. It is critical that this individual is always
present to ensure everyone’s safety. It is more than just having a second person around while
working. A second person is someone who will maintain communication at all times, and sound the
alarm in case of an emergency, and may even assist in performing the service procedure if qualified.
All individuals selected to perform the task of a second person must comply with the prerequisite
training.
1.5.9. Magnetic Field, Site Precautions
a. Post the AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL warning sign (P/N 5116158) at the Magnet Room entrance
prior to ramping the magnet.
b. Prior to ramping the magnet, ensure all ferromagnetic material (such as the blower box) is either
properly installed as a part of the magnetic resonance system OR completely removed from the
Magnet Room.
c. Prior to ramping the magnet, make sure that the Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) is operating
properly (refer to MRU Operating and Service Manual, 5265188).
d. Do not loosen any ferromagnetic components on a ramped magnet unless specifically called for
in the service documentation.
e. Wear cryogen gloves when opening or closing the coldhead motor shield.
f. Use caution when opening or closing the top half of the coldhead motor shield. Never put your
hand or fingers between the motor shield and mounting bracket.

1.5.10. Magnetic Field, Ramping Precautions
A superconducting magnet at field is a high-energy storage device capable of discharging rapidly
(quenching), creating a high voltage across the main leads. Make sure the following precautions are
observed when ramping a superconducting magnet:
a. When working with the main lead connections that are installed into a ramped magnet, do not
touch both main lead extensions at the same time or allow them to come in contact with one
another.
b. Allow main lead extensions to cool before fully inserting them into a ramped magnet to prevent
any possibility of a quench.
c. Make sure the power supply has passed all functional checks, and the input power cable is
disconnected before connecting it to the main power leads.
d. Make sure the final magnet “parking” current and voltage polarity have been recorded and
retained on site and will be available if a ramp-down is required. An incorrect polarity connection
will result in a magnet quench.
e. Use the appropriate hold-down tool to properly secure ramp leads to the magnet.

1.6. Handling of Ferrous Material

1.6.1. This procedure describes the handling of ferrous objects in the Magnet Room when various conditions
exist. The GE Healthcare MR Pre-Installation Manual (PIM) describes the minimum Magnet Room size,
primarily for the serviceability areas necessary to service devices by the Field Engineer.
1.6.2. There are several components that are ferrous within the Magnet Room. The Blower Box Motor
Assembly is an example of a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) that is ferrous.
1.6.3. All ferrous material handling must comply with magnet safety precautions discussed in MR Service
Safety Manual, Direction 5452735.
1.6.4. When servicing any equipment within the Magnet Room, it is critically important for the Service
Engineer to consciously plan the path to be taken when moving highly ferrous devices in the magnet
environment.
a. The path should be as far from the magnet as practical to avoid high flux-density fields.
b. Movement of ferrous material within the Magnet Room must follow the GE service procedure for
that device. When exiting, move away from the magnet in the most direct manner possible.
Except when moving ferrous material to/from its native location on or near the magnet, the
static magnetic field in any portion of the service path shall not exceed 200 Gauss.
c. Two MR safety trained personnel must be present at all times when servicing highly ferrous
devices in the area of magnetic fields.
d. When planning a service path, it is critical that the path be clear and sufficiently wide. Ensure
there are no trip hazards, obstacles (furniture, cables, clutter), slippery surfaces, or any other
items even partially restricting the path that would force deviation from the planned route.
◊ If there are portable obstacles in a path, temporarily remove them from the area and
replace them after the service action is completed.
◊ It is required to walk the paths prior to beginning service to ensure there is sufficient space
through which to pass for yourself and the object being serviced.
e. No material, other than what is described in Service Methods manual is to be used to remove a
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). Examples: dollies or other devices that may be ferrous.
f. Caution must be taken to prevent the device from moving closer to the magnet or being lifted
above the floor during transportation.
g. Never put yourself between the magnet and the ferrous object at any time.

1.7. Emergency Rampdown of Magnetic Field
ASPHYXIATION HAZARD!
A MAGNET QUENCH WHILE PERFORMING AN EMERGENCY RAMPDOWN OF THE MAGNETIC FIELD OF THE
MAGNET COULD RESULT IN RAPID EXPULSION OF HELIUM GAS THROUGH THE VENT SYSTEM. IF THE VENT
SYSTEM FAILS, THAT GAS RAPIDLY FILLS THE ROOM. MAKE SURE THE MAGNET VENTING SYSTEM IS INSTALLED,
THE MAGNET ROOM EXHAUST FAN IS TURNED ON, AND THE MAGNET ROOM DOORS ARE SECURED IN THE
OPEN POSITION PRIOR TO STARTING AN EMERGENCY RAMPDOWN OF THE MAGNETIC FIELD OF THE MAGNET.
1.7.1. In the event a ferrous item becomes attached to the magnet, contact your MR Regional Support
Engineer/ZSE/District leader before attempting any removal.
1.7.2. Before starting a rampdown:
a. Secure the area. Clear the area of onlookers.
b. Identify the nature and severity of the problem. Explore your available options.
c. If the magnet hardware or enclosures are damaged, secure the equipment to protect personnel
from injury. Tape the edges of damaged equipment. Remove loose hardware.
d. If any type of pressurized cylinder, weapon, or firearm is in the magnet bore, do not attempt to
remove it. Contact your MR Regional Support Engineer/ZSE/District leader for risk assessment
and before attempting any removal.

1.7.3. Method 1: Open the plastic cover on the Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU), and firmly depress the red
Rundown button shown below (on the Primary MRU or Remote MRU). The button stays depressed for
approximately 30 seconds as the magnetic field collapses.
a. After the MRU quench is induced (Rundown button depressed), the magnet main field will quickly
decay to nearly zero.
b. If the magnet does not quench, continue with Method 2.
Field Decay Times

Time After MRU Quench Residual Field at Center of
Main Field (Rundown Button Depressed) Magnet
60 Seconds <10 mT
1.5T (R Series, HM Series)
600 Seconds <1 mT
60 Seconds <50 mT
3.0T (W, WB, UA Series)
600 Seconds <1 mT
Primary MRU Remote MRU

1.7.4. Method 2: Unlock the Shim Lead Assembly from its disengaged position, then rapidly lower and
engage the Shim Lead Assembly in the Sav-Con Connector as shown below. If the Shim Lead cannot
be engaged, proceed to Method 3, Rampdown via Emergency Evacuation Release Tool.
Shim Lead –
Disengaged and Engaged Positions

1.7.5. Method 3: Connect the Emergency Evacuation Release Tool 46-260852G3 to the seal-off valve on the
pump-out port of the magnet. Break the magnet vacuum to ramp the magnet down. After pulling
the handle to horizontal plane to break vacuum (initiating the procedure), immediately evacuate the
area. Do not re-enter the area until oxygen levels are at 19.5% (or other approved life supporting
levels according to local elevation) and it has been determined safe to re-enter.
a. Vacuum Break Tool 46-260852G3 must be stored on-site in a customer visible, readily accessible
location.
b. This method of rampdown will result in a magnet quench, as such, prior to commencing this
process, one must ensure that all room ventilation systems are on and functioning. Make sure
the magnet room door is propped open (or the hatch is opened if a mobile van) before starting
this procedure. All safety procedures must be adhered to at all times while performing this
procedure.
c. If possible, this method should be attempted only after all other approved methods of rampdown
have been attempted (Rampdown via MRU, Rampdown via Shim Lead Engagement).
d. If the Vacuum Break method is used to ramp down the magnetic field, the magnet may be
damaged and has to be warmed up and pumped down before returning it to an operating
condition. The minimum time to restore the magnet to service is one month.
Remove enclosure cover from front of Remove protective cover from

magnet exposing vacuum port. vacuum port.
Slide tool into position over vacuum port. Turn handle Pull handle to horizontal
clockwise (right handed thread) to screw threaded rod into plane to break vacuum.
vacuum port.
Magnet images shown are representative. Actual magnet configuration may vary.

Chapter 2 - INTRODUCTION
2. Introduction
2.1. Direction Application
2.1.1. This document covers the setup, commissioning and service of GE Superconducting Magnets
referenced in the table below.
Magnet Serialization Prefix
1.5T LCC R
3.0T LCC W, WB
2.1.2. This magnet has superconducting coils immersed in a liquid helium vessel which is surrounded by an
insulating cryostat. The coils are ramped to a magnetic field strength of
a. 1.5 Tesla at a nominal, continuous coil current of 730 amperes for 1.5T LCC (R Series) or
b. 3.0T Tesla at a nominal, continuous coil current of 356 amperes for 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series).
2.1.3. Once the magnet is ramped, no external power is required to maintain the magnetic field. The
magnet is used in Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) systems and is designated as Class I equipment
per IEC (International Electrical Code) Standard 60601. MR system components and connections are
covered in the MR Systems Pre-Installation manual.
2.1.4. All electrical installations preliminary to positioning equipment at the site prepared for it shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution
Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare
personnel. The products involved and the accompanying electrical installations are highly
sophisticated; special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these
products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE's electrical work on these
products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE
equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE's field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on
the equipment.
In addition to the GE requirements and procedures documented herein, all installation and commissioning
activities must comply with all local, state, federal and national codes, ordinances, regulations, requirements
and/or standards.
The latest release of manuals can be obtained through the support documentation library at
gehealthcare.com or through your GE Healthcare Field Service Representative.
In accordance with International Standard, IEC 60601-1, the manufacturer is not responsible for any
consequences caused by unauthorized modification of this type B Equipment.
All procedures covered in this manual, other than the indicator lamp checks on the Magnet Rundown Unit,
should be performed by a General Electric authorized service representative.

2.2. Documentation Organization

2.2.1. Documents referenced within this manual are available through the support documentation library at
gehealthcare.com or through your GE Healthcare Field Service Representative.
2.2.2. Photographs and images shown are typical for systems noted – however, component color, valve
locations, panels and/or control dials, etc. may differ slightly.
2.3. Damage in Transportation

2.3.1. All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery.
2.3.2. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or
express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a
hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier
immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and
containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for
damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
a. Call 1–800–548–3366 and use option 8.
b. Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.

2.4. Magnet Commissioning Flowchart

2.5. Vendor Manual Matrix
GE Model Vendor Model GE Manual Part Vendor Manual

Description Vendor Number
Number Number Number
4K Cryocooler CD32ZZ-271K
2218465-3 RDK-408A2 -
Coldhead
4K Cryocooler CD32ZZ-271K
5412719 RDK-408A3 -
Coldhead
F-50H Water CD32ZZ-271K,
5197842 Cooled Sumitomo RE05ZN1306 - CD32ZZ-273H
Compressor Heavy
F-50L Water Industries (SHI)
CD32ZZ-271K,
5366042 Cooled RE05ZN1307 - CD32ZZ-272J
Compressor
CSA-71A Air CD32ZZ-056M,
5497024 Cooled RE71ZH0136 - CD32ZZ-060Q
Compressor
1000 Amp Main
Electronics
Coil Service 452-62-1-ESS
46-260776G4 Measurements, 46-294439P15 83-452-025
Power Supply
Inc. (EMI)
Cabinet
SC Shim Coil Electronics
46-260777G3 Service Power Measurements, 452-62-2 46-294439P7 83-452-011
Supply Cabinet Inc. (EMI)
Auto Ramp
Main Coil -
5395802 RMR7.5-800 DOC0855979
Power Supply
Cabinet
Matsusada
Auto Ramp
Precision Inc.
Main Coil
5395802-100 Power Supply RMR7.5-800-2 DOC0855979 -
Cabinet, CE
Mark
American
Magnet MOD GE -
5196918 Magnetics, Inc. 5265188
Rundown Unit 5196918
(AMI)
Magnet
2394952 Monitor 3
Magnet Advantek NA 5124576 -
2394952-100 Monitor 3 -
ROHS

Chapter 3 – Installation
3. Installation
POTENTIAL FATAL INJURY!

BEFORE BEGINNING AND WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE:
• MAKE SURE TO REVIEW AND FULLY UNDERSTAND ALL SUPERCONDUCTING MAGNET PORTIONS.
• FULLY COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIRED ITEMS IN CHAPTER 1, SAFETY.
• HAVE ALL MR SAFETY TRAINED PERSONNEL COMPLY WITH THE SECOND PERSON SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
AS SPECIFIED IN THE MR SERVICE SAFETY MANUAL, 5452735.
POTENTIAL ASPHYXIATION HAZARD

LARGE QUANTITIES OF GASEOUS HELIUM ARE DISCHARGED FROM THE MAGNET DURING INSTALLATION AND
COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES, WHICH WILL REQUIRE EXHAUSTING TO PREVENT OXYGEN DISPLACEMENT IN
THE MAGNET ROOM. GASEOUS HELIUM IS AN INVISIBLE, ODORLESS GAS THAT CAN CAUSE ASPHYXIATION BY
DEPLETING THE AMBIENT OXYGEN SUPPLY.
BEFORE BRINGING THE MAGNET INTO THE MAGNET ROOM, VERIFY THAT BOTH THE MAGNET ROOM AND
MAGNET VENTING SYSTEMS ARE INSTALLED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE PRE-INSTALLATION
MANUAL'S CRYOGENIC VENTING AND ROOM VENTING SECTIONS.
POTENTIAL COLD BURN HAZARD!

EXPOSURE TO CRYOGENS AND CONTACT WITH COLD OBJECTS IS POSSIBLE DURING THIS PROCEDURE. WEAR
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, NONABSORBENT GLOVES AND GOGGLES WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE.
POTENTIAL INJURY
STANDING DIRECTLY ON THE MAGNET IS DANGEROUS! INJURY MAY RESULT FROM FALLING. DO NOT STAND
ON TOP OF MAGNET! PERFORM ALL SERVICE ACTIONS REQUIRING ACCESS TO TOP OF MAGNET FROM THE
LADDER-PLATFORM SUPPLIED WITH THE MAGNET.
FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL!
LOOSE FERROMAGNETIC OBJECTS IN A STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD CAN BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES.
ONLY REMOVE/MOVE FERROMAGNETIC OBJECTS SUCH AS LIFTING RAILS WHILE THE MAGNET HAS ZERO
MAGNETIC FIELD STRENGTH OR IN ACCORDANCE TO DEFINED SAFETY PROCEDURES.
POTENTIAL PINCH HAZARD

FINGERS PLACED IN THE PATH OF MOVING COMPONENTS WHILE SERVICE PLATFORM IS BEING ASSEMBLED
AND/OR ADJUSTED CAN BE PINCHED. DO NOT PLACE FINGERS IN THE PATH OF ANY SERVICE PLATFORM
COMPONENTS BEING ASSEMBLED AND/OR ADJUSTED.

POTENTIAL SCRATCHES/CUTS
SERVICE PLATFORM MAY HAVE EDGES SHARP ENOUGH TO SCRATCH OR CUT SKIN. WEAR LEATHER GLOVES
WHILE ASSEMBLING, ADJUSTING OR DISASSEMBLING SERVICE PLATFORM TO PROTECT AGAINST
SCRATCHES/CUTS AND KEEP YOUR HANDS CLEAN.
POTENTIAL BACK STRAIN

POOR POSTURE WHEN LIFTING CAN CAUSE BACK STRAIN/DAMAGE. KEEP THE UPPER BODY DIRECTLY OVER
YOUR LEGS AND USE THE SERVICE LADDER’S LIFTING HANDLES WHEN LIFTING AN END OF THE SERVICE
LADDER.
It is essential that the magnet is in its permanent location and leveled before commencing Magnet System
Installation. Procedures for moving the magnet into the magnet room and leveling the magnet
are covered in Direction 5475706, Magnet Handling. The latest release manuals can be obtained through
the support documentation library at gehealthcare.com or through your GE Healthcare Field Service
Representative.
3.1. Service Platform Set-Up

3.1.1. Service Platform provides a ~22.5 in. x 44 in. (~570 mm x 1120 mm) work surface that can hold 500 lb.
(226 kg) at platform heights of 40 in., 50 in. or 60 in. (1016 mm, 1270 mm or 1524 mm). The overall
width of the platform is 24.75 in. (627 mm). Adjustable outriggers in the ladder's base provide for
better stability at higher platform heights. Each safety rail includes a 2.5 in. (63.5 mm) high toe board,
and a 6 in. (152.4 mm) high toe board is provided for the platform side closest to the magnet.
3.1.2. The magnet components will be protected when the side shield is installed on the platform.
3.1.3. All service procedures must be performed from the floor or from the platform of the Service Platform.
The service platform assembly consists of the following (refer to the shipping collector documents for
configuration shipped with the magnet style received):
Part Number Quantity Description
5155291 5155291 (Universal Service Platform)
5155291-2 5155291-2 (HDv Service Platform with Side Plate)
5162573-3 (Service Platform)
5162573-3 & 5366607 1
with 5366607 (Side Protection Plate)
5155291 (Universal Service Platform)
5155291 & 5451642
with 5451642 (Universal Side Protection Plate)
3.1.4. Service Platform Set-Up Tools and Test Equipment

Tools & Test Equipment
1 per
NA Hand Protection/Cut Resistant Gloves
Person
1 per
NA Pair: Nonferrous Safety Shoes
person

3.1.5. Position the ladder components in an open area away from the magnet about 6 feet (1800 mm)
square.
3.1.6. Lay the platform section on the floor with its underside facing up as shown below.
3.1.7. Insert each ladder leg in the ladder sockets on the platform's underside as shown below.
Positioning Ladder Leg Sections to Platform Underside
3.1.8. Securely latch both ladder latches of each ladder leg to the platform.
Ladder Leg Section Latches

3.1.9. Adjust both telescoping ladder legs to the platform height required. Pinning holes are available for 40
in., 50 in. and 60 in. (1016 mm, 1270 mm and 1524 mm) platform heights.
a. Disengage each Telescoping Leg Locking Pin.
b. Simultaneously slide both sides of each ladder section until the pinning hole for the platform
height desired aligns with the Locking Pin.
c. Securely engage all four Locking Pins in their pinning holes.
d. If adjusting the platform to its 60 in. (1524 mm) height, fully extend and securely pin all four
Ladder Outriggers.
e. At the 60 in. (1524 mm) height, the ladder can be located to span over the magnet's Rear
Pedestal or Patient Table for service operations not readily accessible from beside the magnet.
Extending the Ladder Outriggers
3.1.10. Verify that all connections/adjustments are secure, then carefully flip the platform and legs upright.
3.1.11. Use the service platform's lifting handles to lift one ladder end high enough to engage the other
ladder end's wheels.
a. Move the platform into the magnet room before lowering the end lifted back to the floor.
b. Avoid pushing the service platform across the floor, which can mark or damage the floor.
3.1.12. Insert the Long Side Safety Rail into two Pipe Sleeves along the long edge of the platform away from
the magnet (see image below of assembled service platform).
3.1.13. Insert the Short Side Safety Rail into two Pipe Sleeves along a short edge of the platform, typically at
the service end of the magnet (see image below of assembled service platform).
3.1.14. Insert the Magnet Side Shield along the magnet side of the platform OR position the side shield over
the magnet electronics. See image below of assembled service platform(s).
3.1.15. Use the service platform's lifting handles to lift one ladder end high enough to engage the other
ladder end's wheels whenever relocating the assembled Service Platform inside the magnet room.
3.1.16. Disassemble the Service Platform in reverse order of assembling it.
3.1.17. Always return the Service Platform to its designated storage location after use.

Assembled Service Platform
Universal Service Platform with Universal Side Shield

3.2. Shipment Configuration

3.2.1. The magnet arrives at the installation site in a shipping configuration and requires the actions
covered in the Conversion to Operating Configuration procedure to convert it to the operating
configuration.
3.2.2. Domestic shipments (over land) are made with all Helium vent plumbing installed on the magnet and
the Vent Adapter covered.
Domestic Ship Configuration of Upper Magnet, 1.5T Shown
Air and Ocean Ship configuration of Upper Magnet, 1.5T Shown
0.5-in NPT Blanking Plate with 15

Plug psi relief valves
Shim Lead
Assembly
Check
Valve

3.2.3. Air/Ocean shipments are made with
a. The vertical Vent Adapter removed.
b. A blanking plate with 4 relief valves is installed in place of the Burst Disc.
c. The Shim Lead Assembly remains in the magnet with the Shim Lead in engaged position
d. Removed large items are placed either in Box 1 (if the magnet ships with system components) or
in a box in the magnet bore (if the magnet ships alone). The other removed items are shipped in
plastic bag(s) attached to the magnet plumbing.
Large Items Air-Shipped in a Box #1

(or in box placed in Magnet Bore for Magnet Only Shipments)
2253376 1 Vent Adapter, Cast
2245511 1 Burst Disc Flange
2349529 1 Rupture Disc, 10 psig
46-281101P8 1 4.739 in. (120 mm) I.D. Vent Adapter Flange O-Ring
46-281162P11 4 Belleville Washer, 0.375 in. nominal, SS
46-252532P2 4 0.375-16 UNC x 0.625 Hex-Head Bolt, SS
Small Items Attached to Magnet Plumbing

2349683 4 0.375-16 Hex-Head Bolt, SS
46-252635P9 4 Flat Washer, 0.375 in. nominal, SS
46-281387P15 4 Belleville Washer, 0.375 in. nominal, SS
2349677 4 0.375-16 Hex Nut

3.3. Conversion Tooling, Equipment Requirements

1 per Oxygen Sensor, O2 low alarm 19.5 percent volume, high
5393536
Person alarm 23 percent volume
1 per
46-271137G1 Cryogen Safety Wear Kit
person
1 per Set: Nonabsorbent Protective Clothing (long sleeve shirt and
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
46-306734G1 1 Helium Regulator and Hose Kit
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
Refer to Service
1 Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate
Platform Set-Up
Consumables
NA 1 Helium Gas Cylinder, 230 cubic ft.
46-252065P24 1 Vacuum Grease
Replacement Parts
(Part of PED Certified Plumbing Assembly 2340678-2; detached and boxed for air shipment))
2349529 1 Rupture Disc, 10 psig
2245511 1 Burst Disc Flange
2253376 1 Vent Adapter, Cast
46-281101P8 1 Vent Adapter Flange O-Ring, 4.739 in. (120 mm) I.D.
46-281162P11 4 Belleville Washer, 0.375 in. nominal
46-252532P2 4 0.375-16 UNC x 0.625 Hex Head Bolt, SS
3.4. Conversion – Domestic Configuration Shipped Magnets

3.4.1. Remove the magnet Lifting Rails from the magnet feet and store on site outside the MR suite. Inform
the customer of storage requirements. (Notify the customer that the Lifting Rails are part of the
magnet, and need to be stored in an accessible place for future use.)
3.4.2. Immediately continue with Exhaust Gas Vent Connection.

3.5. Conversion – Air and Ocean Configuration Shipped Magnets

3.5.1. Verify that the Cryostat Pressure Gauge reading is comparable to the Magnet Monitor's (if connected)
pressure display. Resolve all issues related to readings that aren't comparable before continuing.
a. If the pressure reading is >0.2 psig, slowly open Vent Valve V2 until the pressure is 0.2 psig
b. Once pressure is <0.2 psig, close V2.
3.5.2. If the site has Magnet Monitor proprietary software:
a. Connect to Magnet Monitor and turn off the alarm for vessel pressure.
b. Turn the vessel pressure control to a high value of 0.5 psig and a low value of 0.4 psig.
3.5.3. Unpack the 10 psig Burst Disc from its shipping box.
a. Inspect it for visible damage (nicks/scratches).
b. Make sure the Burst Disc is part number 2349529 and its rating plate is marked 10 psig.
3.5.4. Make sure the Belleville washers are present and that their orientation is maintained when they are
reinstalled.
3.5.5. The conversion steps (up to but not including lifting rail removal) should be performed rapidly to
prevent condensation and icing within the Vertical Penetration. The plastic bag attached to the vent
plumbing contains four bolts that can be used to quickly attach the Vent Adapter and Burst Disc if the
Blanking Plate bolts are difficult to remove.
3.5.6. Loosen and remove the hex head retaining bolts securing the 15 psig Relief Valves and the Blanking
Plate to the Plenum Flange while holding the Blanking Plate and Flange Disc.
Note: 1.5T system

shown
3.5.7. Remove the Blanking Plate with the four 15 psig Relief Valves.
a. Use caution when removing the Blanking Plate and inserting the new Burst Disc.
b. Make sure not to dislodge the Plenum Flange O-Ring or scratch the sealing surface of the flange.
c. Make sure the Captured Burst Disc Flange is assembled to the Vent Adapter.

3.5.8. Align the Vent Adapter and the flange to the holes in the Plenum.
3.5.9. Install Burst Disc 2349529 (with the Garlok gasket facing the Vent Adapter) in conformance with Burst
Disc (2349529) Replacement Procedure. Use the bolts provided in the plastic bag of small hardware
items. Use caution when following the approved procedure - Do not overtighten the retaining bolts
as continued tightening after the Belleville washers are flattened will result in over torqueing and may
damage the Burst Disc. In addition, bolts must be tightened in a “star” or “opposing” pattern as
clearly defined within the procedure.
3.5.10. Attach the Check Valve to the Vent Adapter as follows:
a. Disconnect the Check Valve Plumbing Subassembly at Point 1 (circled 1),
b. Remove the cap from the end of the Check Valve,
c. Connect the loose Check Valve Plumbing Subassembly to the Vent Adapter at Point 2 (circled 2),
d. Reconnect the plumbing at Point 1 with the Check Valve oriented as shown below.
3.5.11. Adjust the Jack Stud at the base of the Vent Adapter so that it is in contact with the cryostat.
Note: 1.5T system

shown
3.5.12. Remove the magnet Lifting Rails from the magnet feet and store on site outside of the MR suite.
Inform the customer of storage requirements. (Notify the customer that the Lifting Rails are part of
the magnet, and need to be stored in an accessible place for future use.)
3.5.13. Immediately continue with Exhaust Gas Vent Connection.

3.6. Exhaust Gas Vent Connection

3.6.1. In this procedure, the magnet's Vent Adapter is connected to the site's cryogenic vent system.
3.6.2. Large quantities of helium gas are exhausted from the magnet if a magnet quench occurs.
Installation must be done in conformance with the pressure and RF requirements in this procedure.

• HAVE ALL MR SAFETY TRAINED PERSONNEL COMPLY WITH THE SECOND PERSON SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AS
SPECIFIED IN THE MR SERVICE SAFETY MANUAL, 5452735.

A CRYOGENIC VENT SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT MEET THE SPECIFICATIONS FOUND IN THE MAGNET'S PRE-
INSTALLATION MANUAL COULD FAIL IF THE MAGNET QUENCHES, ALLOWING DANGEROUS LEVELS OF HELIUM
GAS TO RAPIDLY ENTER THE MAGNET ROOM. GASEOUS HELIUM IS AN INVISIBLE, ODORLESS GAS THAT CAN
CAUSE ASPHYXIATION BY DEPLETING THE AMBIENT OXYGEN SUPPLY.
POTENTIAL PROJECTILE HAZARD!

FERROMAGNETIC OBJECTS IN A STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD CAN BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES. NEVER
BRING FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL INTO THE MAGNET ROOM. MAKE SURE ALL EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS USED
IN THE MAGNET ROOM ARE NON-FERROMAGNETIC.
POTENTIAL HEALTH HAZARD AND SPIKE NOISE

LOOSE METAL FILINGS PRODUCED DURING DRILLING COULD BECOME A HEALTH HAZARD AND A SOUCE OF
SPIKE NOISE. MAKE SURE TO CLEAN UP AFTER DRILLING. WEAR APPROPRIATE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT (PPE) DURING DRILLING OPERATIONS: GLOVES, SAFETY GLASSES AND SAFETY SHOES.
• Appropriate protection must be provided for any portion of the cryogenic vent system, which may drip
condensation on personnel or ceiling components.
• The 24-inch long flanged vent pipe supplied in this system’s Helium Vent Kit may be shortened if necessary,
but must never be lengthened. Twenty-four inches is the maximum length enabling the Field Engineer access
to the Ventglas joint from the Service Platform Ladder provided with the magnet.

3.6.3. Exhaust Gas Vent Connection Tooling, Equipment Requirements
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
NA 1 Hand Drill
NA 1 No. 17 (4.4 mm) Drill Bit
Titanium Tool Kit, Basic Set 5113258 or
5113258 or 5112581 1 Kit Titanium Tool Kit, Installation Set 5112581 or other non-
ferromagnetic tools (magnets with magnetic fields >1.5T)
Nonmagnetic Tool Kit, Inch/ Metric (magnets with magnetic
fields ≤ 1.5T only)
46-320273G4 1 Kit NOTE: Do not use these tools in the Magnet Room of magnets
with magnetic fields >1.5T whether or not the magnet is
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
Consumables
NA 2 Rolls Duct Tape
NA 5 Clean Rags
Replacement Parts
46-318057G6 (Fixed
Site) or
1 Helium Vent Kit
46-318057G2 (Mobile
Site)
46-318057P1 4 No. 10-16 x 1.0 in. Self-Tapping Sheet Metal Screws

3.6.4. Make sure the area is secure and that all required Warning Signs are posted to meet the safety
requirements stated in the Safety Chapter before starting the Exhaust Gas Vent Connection
procedure.
3.6.5. For a VentGlas installation or replacement the magnet must be ramped down.
3.6.6. Make sure to wear the following personal protective equipment (PPE) during the vent pipe installation
process: safety glasses, gloves and safety shoes.
3.6.7. Measure and cut the Vent Pipe for a proper 1.0 in. ±0.25 in. (25 mm ±6 mm) gap where the Vent Pipe
meets the Ceiling Vent Pipe.
a. The Ceiling Vent Pipe is the pipe coming out of the ceiling into the magnet room.
b. This procedure applies to BOTH mobile and fixed units.
c. The 24-inch long flanged vent pipe supplied in this system’s Helium Vent Kit may be shortened if
necessary, but it must never be lengthened. 24 inches is the maximum length enabling FE access
to the VentGlas joint from the Service Platform Ladder provided with the magnet.
3.6.8. Apply Vacuum Grease 46-252065P24 to the surface of Vent Adapter O-Ring 46-281101P8 and install
the O-Ring on top of the Vent Adapter Flange.
3.6.9. Place the Clamp Ring 2262680 around the Vent Pipe as shown below.
3.6.10. Place a pair of Hose Clamps 46-281972P2 on the Vent Pipe, and place a second pair on the Ceiling
Vent Pipe. Make sure the clamps are at least 4 in. (100 mm) from each pipe's edge.
3.6.11. Loosely connect the Vent Pipe to the Vent Adapter using the six mounting bolts (46-281046P38) with
washers (46-252635P9) supplied.
3.6.12. Adjust the Vent Pipe to Ceiling Vent Pipe alignment by moving the Vent Pipe at the Vent Adapter
flange. The Vent Pipe can be adjusted radially 1 in. (25 mm) in any direction to align with the Ceiling
Vent Pipe.
3.6.13. Tighten the six mounting bolts (46-281046P38) with washers (46-252635P9) installed in an alternating
pattern.

3.6.14. Tape one end of the VentGlas Fiberglass Wrap 46-281971P2, using two pieces of duct tape (as shown
below) over the gap between the Vent Pipe and the Ceiling Vent Pipe.
3.6.15. Wrap the entire roll of VentGlas wrap tightly around the joint.
3.6.16. Install two Hose Clamps 46-281972P2 on each side of the joint to hold VentGlas Wrap in position,
spacing the clamps about 0.5 in. (12 mm) apart and about 1 in. (25 mm) from the joint.
3.6.17. Using a No.17 (4.4 mm) drill bit, drill two starter holes for the sheet metal. Drill these holes close
enough to the hose clamps to seat the screw heads onto the clamps when tightened.
3.6.18. Install two No. 10-16 x 1.0 in. self-tapping sheet metal screws (46-318057P1) into the drilled holes.
a. Make sure the head of the each screw is firmly seated onto the adjoining hose clamp.
b. Loose metal filings produced during drilling could become a health hazard and a source of spike
noise.
c. Use a vacuum cleaner to clean up any metal filings produced during drilling.
3.6.19. Annually inspect (visually) the VentGlas for rips, tears, flaws, & degradation. If damaged, replace the
Ventglas per this procedure.
3.6.20. To remove VentGlas, work in reverse.

3.7. System Leak Test

3.7.1. After the magnet is converted to its operating condition, it is important to identify and eliminate any
leak at installation.
3.7.2. Cryostat pressure can increase up to 5 psig during operation, thereby increasing any leakages. A leak
will slowly deplete the helium supply, possibly causing cryopumping or icing, and may interfere with
Recondenser operation.

• HAVE ALL MR SAFETY TRAINED PERSONNEL COMPLY WITH THE SECOND PERSON SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AS
SPECIFIED IN THE MR SERVICE SAFETY MANUAL, 5452735.

PROCEDURE GENERATES ODORLESS, COLORLESS HELIUM GAS THAT DISPLACES OXYGEN IN THE AIR. MAKE
SURE THE MAGNET ROOM VENT EXHAUST FAN IS ON AND THE MAGNET ROOM DOOR IS PROPPED OPEN (OR
THE HATCH IN A MOBILE VAN IS OPENED), BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.
3.7.3. System Leak Test Tooling, Equipment Requirements

5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
Portable Leak Detector (Optional)
(Commercial leak detector instruments available through
2361919-2 1
HVAC distributors can be used to determine small leaks in the
helium plumbing and venting.)
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up

Consumables
Leak Detection Fluid (e.g. Snoop or Bird Dog Quart Spray PN
DOG-1Q or Big Blue PN Rt100S or RT100G or Leak-Tec)
NA 1 (Commercial leak detector fluids available through HVAC
distributors can be used to determine small leaks in the
requirements stated in the Safety Chapter before starting the System Leak Test procedure.
3.7.5. Verify that there is a functional land-line telephone (with emergency response numbers clearly posted
beside it) in a known and immediately available location near the magnet room before starting this
procedure.
3.7.6. Make sure all hospital personnel and contractors in the area know that the magnet is being
commissioned.
3.7.7. Secure the area from unauthorized personnel. Post signs outside the area alerting of magnet
commissioning.
3.7.8. Post Authorized Personnel Only (2289812) signs at the MR suite entrance.
3.7.9. Secure magnet room doors in an open position. Make sure there is ventilation through the magnet
room flowing towards unoccupied areas.

3.7.10. Pressurize the magnet with helium gas to 4 psig:
a. Connect helium gas hose 46-271135P16 to a secured cylinder (with Regulator 46-258151P1) of
99.999% helium gas (GHe).
b. Remove the 0.50 in. NPT plug on the V3 plumbing. (See illustrations below.)
c. Connect the helium hose's 0.5 inch NPT fitting to V3.
d. Open the cylinder's regulator and pressurize the magnet to 4 psig.
e. When 4 psig magnet pressure is reached, close the cylinder's regulator, and disconnect the hose
from the magnet.
Temporary Helium
Gas Pressurization
Set-Up, LCC Magnet
3.7.11. When the cryostat pressure reaches 4 psig, check the following areas for leaks using a Snoop brand
or leak detector liquid:
a. All Plumbing Joints
b. Vertical Turret and Instrumentation Lead Cover
c. Ramp Lead and Fill Port Caps
d. 360° Around Burst Disc to Plenum Contact
e. Pressure Gauge and Relief Valves
3.7.12. Repair any leaks found prior to commissioning the magnet. Retest to confirm all leaks are eliminated.

3.8. Cryocooler Installation

3.8.1. The Cryocooler comes with a Coldhead already installed and tested on the magnet and a separate
Compressor Unit, which will be located in the Equipment Room. A power cable, gas supply and return
lines connect the two units.
3.8.2. Prior to installation, locate and read the vendor manual(s) supplied with the system. Become
thoroughly familiar with the configuration and procedures of the system.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!

CONTACT WITH CONNECTORS LEADING TO AN ENERGIZED COMPRESSOR CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
WHENEVER THE INPUT POWER TO THE COMPRESSOR IS DISCONNECTED, FOLLOW LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
PROCEDURES TO MAKE SURE POWER IS NOT SUPPLIED TO THE COMPRESSOR.
POISON HAZARD!
ANTIFREEZE IS POISONOUS TO AQUATIC, ANIMAL AND HUMAN LIFE. BECAUSE OF ITS SWEETNESS, ANIMALS
ARE DRAWN TO IT. SINCE IT IS CLASSIFIED AS HAZARDOUS BOTH FOR SHIPMENT AND AS WASTE, IT IS NOT
SHIPPED BY UNTRAINED PEOPLE. CRYOCOOLER COMPRESSORS THAT CONTAIN ANTIFREEZE MUST BE DRAINED
BEFORE BEING RETURNED TO THE SUPPLIER. MAKE ARRANGEMENTS WITH THE HOSPITAL MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT FOR DISPOSAL.
POTENTIAL PROJECTILE HAZARD

FERROMAGNETIC OBJECTS IN A STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD CAN BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES.
AEROQUIP FITTINGS ON FLEXLINES, COLDHEADS AND 3T COLDHEAD RIGHT-ANGLE CONNECTORS ARE
FERROUS AND MAY BECOME PROJECTILES IF DISONNECTED IN THE PRESENCE OF A MAGNETIC FIELD. DO NOT
DISCONNECT 3T COLDHEAD RIGHT-ANGLE CONNECTORS FROM BOTH THE FLEXLINE AND COLDHEAD IN THE
PRESENCE OF A MAGNETIC FIELD.
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD!

FLEXLINES WITH BROKEN AEROQUIP FITTINGS MAY DISCONNECT AND MOVE ERRATICALLY. DO NOT PUT ANY
BENDING FORCE ON AEROQUIP FITTINGS WHILE CONNECTING / DISCONNECTING HELIUM FLEXLINES.
A BENDING FORCE:
• CAN CAUSE AEROQUIP STEMS TO BEND OR BREAK
• WILL CREATE DIFFICULTY IN THE RAPID ENGAGEMENT OR DISENGAGEMENT REQUIRED TO PREVENT HELIUM
LOSS AND SYSTEM CONTAMINATION.

3.8.3. Cryocooler Installation Tooling, Equipment Requirements
1 pair per
NA Hand Protection/Cut Resistant Gloves
person
46-194427P320 1 Brass Master Padlock with Brass Shackle
2387081 1 Brass Master Transition Padlock
1 pkg
46-194427P322 Black & White on Red Lockout Tag
of 25
46-194427P313 1 Transition LOTO Tag
Line Cord Plug Cover, Plugs: ≤3 in. (76 mm) wide x ≤5.875 in.
46-194427P321 1
(149 mm) long, Cords: ≤1.25 in. (31 mm) diameter
46-281088G4 1 Coldhead/Compressor Service Kit
High Pressure Helium Regulator (included in
46-294009P1 1
Coldhead/Compressor Service Kit 46-281088G4)
Helium Line Adapter Hose (included in Coldhead/Compressor
46-294002P1 1
Service Kit 46-281088G4)
5119507 1 MTM-101 Cryogenic Temperature Meter
Digital Voltmeter (DVM), Volt-Ohm Meter (VOM) or Noncontact
NA 1
Voltage Tester
5102120 1 Gas Charging Tool
2361919-2 1 Portable Leak Detector (Optional)
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
Service Methods documentation for the magnet/enclosure
(available through the support documentation library at
NA 1
gehealthcare.com or your local GE Healthcare Service
Representative)
Consumables
Leak Detection Fluid (e.g. Snoop or Bird Dog Quart Spray PN
NA 1
DOG-1Q or Big Blue PN Rt100S or RT100G or Leak-Tec)
46-318068P1 1 pkg Bronze Wool
NA 1 99.999% Helium Gas, 235 SCF Nonmagnetic Cylinder

Replacement Parts
5197842
(Contained within 1 Sumitomo F-50 Shield Cooler Compressor
5314887)
2251611 2 Corrugated Plastic Gas Line Raceway Tubing, 50 ft. (15.24 m)
2154505-2 1 Helium Return Line, 20m ( 65.6 ft)
2154502-2 1 Helium Supply Line, 20m (65.6 ft)
2273967
1 Right Angle FlexLine Connector
(for 3.0T Only)
2273967-2
1 Right Angle FlexLine Connector
(for 3.0T Only)
3.8.4. The Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate must be installed when working on the
magnet to protect side-mounted components from damage.
3.8.5. Unpack the compressor in conformance with the Compressor Vendor Service Manual.
a. Note any visible damage and notify the shipper.
b. LOTO input power to the Compressor immediately after unpacking it.
c. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
d. Do NOT connect the flexlines until the system gas pressure check is performed to prevent line
contamination.
3.8.6. Position the Compressor in the equipment room as required in the site plan. Refer to the site planning
manual.
3.8.7. Install the compressor in conformance with the Compressor Vendor Service Manual.
3.8.8. Remove LOTO, and connect the input power cable in conformance with the vendor manual and the
local electrical code.
3.8.9. Connect the water supply hose to the cooling water inlet connection, and secure with a wormdrive,
screw-type hose clamp or similar secure connection.
3.8.10. Connect and secure the water return hose to the cooling water outlet connection of the compressor
by the same method.
3.8.11. Turn on the cooling water supply, and allow air to purge from the system.
3.8.12. Check and adjust the Cryocooler system static gas pressure in conformance with Cryocooler System
Gas Pressure Adjustments (Replacement and Maintenance Chapter).
a. Systems with the Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) must have the compressor connected according
to Direction 5500097. HEC plumbing diagram can be referenced in DOC0431804.
b. It is recommended to install the Water Flow Meter that is included with the magnet monitor
collector, using the applicable magnet monitor installation document.
c. Verify that the cooling water supply meets all requirements specified in the vendor service
manual.
3.8.13. Check the system for water leaks.

3.8.14. Mark out the Shield Cooler run numbers on all gas lines, keeping visible those numbers listed below.
Gas Lines Power Cables
Coldhead to Compressor to
Supply Line Return Line
Penetration Panel Penetration Panel
2154502-2 2154505-2 2218292 2155316-2
(Run 621) (Run 622) (Run 624) (Run 623)
3.8.15. Feed the gas supply line through the designated 2.17 in. (55 mm) port in the Penetration Panel, and
position the line with one end at the Compressor and the other end at the Coldhead on the magnet.
a. When routing gas lines make sure there is sufficient slack at both ends and any excess length is
not coiled in less than a 12 in. (300 mm) radius to prevent bending force on Aeroquip fittings and
strain that may cause chirping noise on the line.
b. See Helium Flexline Connections and Casing Replacement (Replacement and Maintenance
Chapter) for proper connection of Aeroquip fittings.
3.8.16. Feed the gas return line through the other port in the Penetration Panel, and route parallel with the
supply line.
3.8.17. Adjust the slack on the Helium supply and return flexlines for the most suitable length on both sides of
the Penetration Panel. Loosely coil excess line length in the Equipment Room.
3.8.18. Install RF shielding around each gas line as it passes through the Penetration Panel as shown below.
a. RF shielding of flexlines, as they pass through the Penetration Panel, is performed from the
Equipment Room side of the Panel.
b. Insert Bronze Wool 46-318068P1 around the Helium supply line (top and bottom) over the
thickness of the Penetration Panel.
c. Insert Bronze Wool 46-318068P1 around the Helium return line (top and bottom) over the
thickness of the Penetration Panel.

3.8.19. If Corrugated Plastic Tubing 2251611 does not already cover the length of each flexline, cover both
flexlines completely with this tubing from the Penetration Panel where the lines exit the magnet room
to the helium line fittings at the Coldhead. (See the illustration below.)
a. Corrugated plastic tubing is used to isolate helium gas lines from each other and from Ground to
prevent RF broadband noise.
b. If the supplied tubing does not fully cover the helium gas lines, order additional tubing to fully
cover them.
3.8.20. Connect both helium flexlines to the compressor using the appropriate Aeroquip connection
wrenches.
a. Always use two wrenches: one to hold and one to tighten (see illustration below).
b. The Hold Fast (Jam) wrench maintains the backside adapter connection, making gas leaks in the
system less likely.
3.8.21. Observe the Compressor pressure gauge readings after connecting the gas lines. Readings should
remain constant.
a. Lower pressure gauge readings indicate either the gas lines were not fully charged when
received or one line could be leaking.
b. If a leak is suspected, proceed to System Leak Test.

3.8.22. Route the gas lines through the magnet's rear flange and then in a wide arc to the vicinity of the
Coldhead as shown below.
a. When routing gas lines make sure there is sufficient slack at both ends and that any excess
length is not coiled in a less than 12 in. (300 mm) radius to prevent bending force on Aeroquip
fittings and strain that may cause “chirping" noise on the line.
b. Do not connect the gas lines to the Coldhead until the lines are secured to the Cryocooler Safety
Strap.
Gas Line Routing,

1.5T System shown
3.8.23. Position the gas lines in a gentle curve toward the center of the magnet, and adjust line slack and
angles to keep the lines from kinking and to minimize tension and noise (chirping) as shown above.

3.8.24. Verify that the Cryocooler Safety Strap 2219776 is secured onto the Motorshield Bracket by a 0.50-13
UNC x 1.25 in. stainless steel bolt 46-260950P46, flat washer 46-252635P11, and lock washer 46-
281162P13. (See illustrations below.)
3.8.25. Using tie-wraps, secure the gas return line to the Cryocooler Safety Strap, then the gas supply line.
1.5T System Cryocooler Safety Strap Connections
3.0T System Cryocooler Safety Strap Connections

3.8.26. Connect the gas return line (green mark) to the Coldhead.
a. Make sure the helium gas lines are connected to the Coldhead in the sequence given (Gas
RETURN line connected FIRST).
b. Gas back pressure may prevent the Coldhead from starting if gas lines are connected in the
reverse sequence.
c. Order and technique are important when connecting helium flexlines to prevent inoperative
Coldheads and system contamination.
d. Read and follow Helium Flexline Connections and Casing Replacement (Replacement and
Maintenance Chapter) when connecting or disconnecting Aeroquip fittings.
3.8.27. Connect the gas supply line (yellow mark) to the Coldhead.
3.8.28. Make sure the flexible gas lines are still routed across the magnet approximately as shown above.
3.8.29. Observe the readings of the Compressor pressure gauges:
a. Constant pressure readings at the Two-Stage Coldhead specification: No leakage is suspected.
b. If the readings are above the Two-Stage Coldhead specification provided in the table below and
the compressor does not go into high pressure bypass mode, let the magnet stabilize before
adjusting pressure. If the readings are still too high, vent the pressure down in conformance with
Cryocooler System Gas Pressure Adjustments (Replacement and Maintenance Chapter).
c. If the readings are below those specified in the table below, increase the helium gas charge in
the complete system by supplying helium gas through the Compressor supply fitting in
conformance with Cryocooler System Gas Pressure Adjustments( Replacement and Maintenance
Chapter). Since a leak is suspected, proceed to Cryocooler Leak Test.
RDK-408 4K Compressor Static Gas Pressure at 20° C (68° F)

Two-Stage MPa Kgf/cm²G psig
Coldhead 1.60 to 1.65 16.3 to 16.8 232 to 239
d. If is a leak is suspected, proceed to Cryocooler Leak Test, otherwise, proceed to Cryocooler

Electrical Cable Connections.
e. Refer to vendor manual for acceptable dynamic pressure ranges.

3.9. Cryocooler Leak Test

3.9.1. Refer to Cryocooler Installation for equipment/safety/additional requirements.
3.9.2. If helium pressure continues to drop after increasing the helium charge, remove the flexlines from the
Compressor using the two-wrench technique.
a. Lines suspected of leaking may be tested using a regulator, charging line and manifold.
3.9.3. Connect a regulator, charging line and manifold and purge in conformance with the vendor manual
and Cryocooler System Gas Pressure Adjustments (Replacement and Maintenance Chapter).
3.9.4. Connect one of the flexlines to the appropriate fitting on the manifold, and pressurize to
approximately 100 psig.
3.9.5. Reduce the supply pressure using the regulator control, and observe whether the reduced pressure is
maintained on the manifold pressure gauge.
a. If the pressure continues to drop, that line may have a gas leak.
b. If the Compressor pressure gauge readings drop and stay constant, the charge may be low.
Recharge the system.
3.9.6. Maintain 100 psig with the regulator and check the line with a liquid soap solution or a commercial
leak-testing solution.
3.9.7. Repeat process for the other gas line.

3.10. Cryocooler Electrical Cable Connections

3.10.2. Mark out the Shield Cooler run numbers on all gas lines, keeping visible those numbers listed in the
table below. Do NOT cut through the power cable insulation when removing a non-applicable run
number label.
Gas Lines Power Cables
Coldhead to Compressor to
Supply Line Return Line
Penetration Panel Penetration Panel
2154502-2 2154505-2 2218292 2155316-2
(Run 621) (Run 622) (Run 624) (Run 623)
3.10.3. After the Penetration Panel is installed, disconnect and lockout/tagout input power to the
Compressor.
3.10.4. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
3.10.5. Make sure the wire code (color and number) is properly matched on the noise filter studs on both
sides of the Penetration Panel to prevent improper operation/damage.
3.10.6. Connect the Coldhead Power Cables (Runs 623 and 624) as shown below when the Penetration Panel
is installed.
a. The factory-supplied power cables may be connected to a terminal block to facilitate Cryocooler
operation prior to Penetration Panel installation.
b. If the terminal block is not present, connect the ring terminals via screws or the terminal block of
the same wire color to allow the Cryocooler to operate prior to Penetration Panel installation.

3.10.7. Connect the Run 623 Coldhead cable to the Compressor and the Run 624 cable to the Coldhead.
Flexline 2154502-2
Run 621
Flexline 2154505-2
Run 622
3.10.8. Remove lockout/tagout and connect the Cryocooler Compressor input power cable.
3.10.9. Match cable label numbers 1-4 to filter numbers F1-F4.
3.11. Cryocooler Functional Checks

3.11.2. Turn on the main power.
3.11.3. Turn the Compressor's power switch on. The Coldhead motor should begin operating.
3.11.4. Verify the Coldhead Drive switch is in the OFF position.
3.11.5. Perform the Cryocooler System functional checks covered in the vendor's manual.

3.12. Monitoring Cryocooler Temperatures

3.12.1. Measuring Magnet Temperature using an MTM-101 Magnet Temperature Meter (5119507)
a. Always keep a fresh set of batteries available for the MTM-101 meter, and ensure the meter is in
calibration before using it.
b. Plug the meter's circular DIN connector into the Diode connector on the Instrumentation
Connector Box.
c. To read the upper temperature diode, press the green button on the meter until the SI410D1 LED
is lit, and then read the temperature (in Kelvin) on the meter.
d. To read the lower temperature diode, press the green button on the meter until the SI410D2 LED
MTM-101 Cryogenic
Temperature Meter
(5119507), shown with its
adapter cables
3.12.2. Make sure the first and second stage Coldhead temperatures are cooling down. (When the Cryocooler
Coldhead cools down during magnet installation, or when it is turned on after being shut off for
weeks, it will contract within the Coldhead Sleeve, and the mounting bolts will need to be checked for
tightness to ensure sufficient contact is made at the first and second-stage Heat Stations.)

3.12.3. Monitor the Cryocooler Coldhead first and second stage heat station temperatures until they
stabilize.
a. Check the Coldhead mounting bolts during cool down, and make sure they are hand tight.
b. During the first 15 minutes of Coldhead operation, verify that the Belleville washer gap settings
are within the specified range of 0.003 to 0.005 in. (0.08 to 0.13 mm) shown in the illustration
below. Adjustments may be needed multiple times during the first 15 minutes.
c. If Belleville washer gaps are greater than 0.005 in. (0.13 mm), tighten the Coldhead mounting
bolts in the staggered bolt pattern until even gaps within specification are set for all bolts. Make
sure an even gap is maintained between the Transition and Sleeve Flanges around the full
circumference.
Coldhead Mounting Bolt Gap Setting

3.12.4. Make sure the final temperature readings on the MTM-101 Magnet Temperature Meter (5119507) are
within the following limits:
1.5T LCC 3.0T LCC

R Series W, WB Series
First Stage Coldhead Temp < 45K < 45K
Second Stage Recondenser
< 4.4K < 4.4K
Temp (RuO B)
Second Stage Coldhead
See ΔT See ΔT
Temp (RuO A)
ΔT = RuO B - RuO A 0.0K < ΔT < 0.2K 0.0K < ΔT < 0.2K
a. Second stage Coldhead RuO temperature may show a small oscillation (0.0K - 0.2K) on the
temperature monitor. This is a result of the displacer motion inside the second stage and the
sampling rate of the monitor. Average temperature for all checks:
Second stage temperature = (T max + T min ) / 2
3.12.5. If temperature limits are exceeded, perform the Coldhead Interface Adjustment procedure in Two-
Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement (Replacement and Maintenance Chapter).
3.12.6. Once connected, the coldhead/compressor should remain on at all times unless specifically directed
otherwise within the content of this manual. This is especially important during periods of magnet
storage or idle time (non-use). Cycling of coldhead/compressor power can result in adverse magnet
conditions and should be avoided.

3.13. Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) Installation

3.13.1. An MRU is required to rapidly ramp down the magnet in an emergency situation. The Primary MRU is
installed in the Magnet Room where the magnetic field is ≤200 gauss.
3.13.2. If a Remote MRU is installed, it is located and installed as dictated by local codes and where the
magnetic field is ≤200 gauss. The Remote MRU MUST be connected through the Primary MRU in order
to function.

CONTACT WITH MRU WIRING WHILE POWER IS SUPPLIED CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK. FOLLOW
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES WHILE CONNECTING INPUT POWER WIRES TO THE MRU.
PERSONAL INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD PRESENT.

WHEN SERVICING ANY MAGNETIC EQUIPMENT, IT IS CRITICALLY IMPORTANT THAT THE SERVICE ENGINEER
CONSCIOUSLY PLAN THE PATH TO BE TAKEN WHEN MOVING HIGHLY FERROUS DEVICES IN THE MAGNET
ENVIRONMENT. THE PATH SHOULD BE AS FAR FROM THE MAGNET AS PRACTICAL AND AVOID HIGH FLUX-
DENSITY FIELDS.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
• MOVEMENT OF FERROUS MATERIAL IN THE MAGNET ROOM MUST FOLLOW THE GE SERVICE PROCEDURE FOR
THAT DEVICE. WHEN EXITING, MOVE AWAY FROM THE MAGNET IN THE MOST DIRECT MANNER POSSIBLE.
EXCEPT WHEN MOVING FERROUS MATERIAL TO AND FROM ITS NATIVE LOCATION ON OR NEAR THE MAGNET,
THE STATIC MAGNETIC FIELD IN ANY PORTION OF THE SERVICE PATH SHALL NOT EXCEED 200 GAUSS.
• TWO (2) MR SAFETY TRAINED PERSONNEL MUST BE PRESENT AT ALL TIMES WHEN SERVICING HIGHLY
FERROUS DEVICES IN THE AREAS OF MAGNETIC FIELDS.
• WHEN PLANNING A SERVICE PATH, IT IS CRITICAL THAT THE PATH BE CLEAR AND SUFFICIENTLY WIDE.
ENSURE THAT THERE ARE NO TRIP HAZARDS, OBSTACLES, CLUTTER, SLIPPERY SURFACES OR OTHER ITEMS
EVEN PARTIALLY RESTRICTING THE PATH. IF THERE ARE PORTABLE OBSTACLES IN A PATH, REMOVE THEM FROM
THE AREA AND REPLACE THEM AFTER THE SERVICE ACTION IS COMPLETED. IT IS REQUIRED TO WALK THE PATH
PRIOR TO BEGINNING SERVICE TO ENSURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT SPACE THROUGH WHICH TO PASS FOR
YOURSELF AND THE OBJECT BEING SERVICED.
POTENTIAL MAGNET QUENCH!

• BEFORE CONNECTING THE MRU TO THE MAGNET: MAKE SURE POWER TO THE MRU IS ON AND THE
RUNDOWN BUTTON IS NOT DEPRESSED.
POTENTIAL HEALTH HAZARD AND SPIKE NOISE

LOOSE METAL FILINGS PRODUCED DURING DRILLING COULD BECOME A HEALTH HAZARD AND A SOUCE OF
SPIKE NOISE. MAKE SURE TO CLEAN UP AFTER DRILLING. WEAR APPROPRIATE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT (PPE) DURING DRILLING OPERATIONS: GLOVES, SAFETY GLASSES AND SAFETY SHOES.

3.13.3. MRU Installation Tooling, Equipment Requirements
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Electrically Insulating Gloves
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
5265188 1 MRU Operating and Service Manual
Digital Voltmeter, 3.5 digit (Note: Do not use a volt-ohm
NA 1
meter)
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1 Power Drill
NA 1 0.25-inch (6 mm) Drill Bit
NA 1 Vacuum Cleaner
NA 1 Level, 6-inch (150 mm)
Consumables
NA 20 min. Cable Tie Wraps
NA 1 bottle Isopropyl Alcohol
NA 5 Clean Rags
Replacement Parts
5180313 1 Primary MRU Kit
5180187 1 Remote MRU Kit (only for sites installing a second MRU)
Refer to FRU Manual 1 Primary MRU FRU
Refer to FRU Manual 1 Remote MRU FRU
MRU Mounting Hardware, 0.25 in. or 6 mm diameter (bolts,
4 Sets
NA wall anchors, etc. depending on mounting location); each
per MRU
capable of supporting 32 lb. (14.5 kg)
4 per
NA Flat Washers, 0.25-inch (6 mm) diameter
MRU

3.13.4. Verify that the magnetic field strength where the Primary MRU and optional Remote MRU will be
installed is ≤200 gauss and the Remote MRU location is in compliance with local codes.
3.13.5. LOTO the power feed to all MRUs being installed (Primary and/or Remote).
3.13.7. Install, adjust and mount the Primary MRU inside the Magnet Room and the Remote MRU according
to the customer requirements.
a. Each has to be 60 in. (1,524 mm) above the floor in conformance with the vendor's manual and in
the location called out in the site drawing.
b. A stud finder can help locate wall framing.
c. Shipped MRUs are wired for 115 VAC at 50 to 60 Hz.
d. Refer to the vendor's service manual to install the MRU(s) to comply with local requirements and
to install the fuse (F2) shipped with each MRU.

3.13.8. Route Run 606, Cable 2128699 between the Primary MRU and the magnet with the 4-pin Lemo
Connector P2 at the MRU end and the 5-pin Switchcraft Connector P3 at the magnet end.
3.13.9. Do not connect Run 606 to Connector P2 of the MRU at this time.
3.13.10. Route Run 1266, Cable 5196921 between the Remote MRU and the equipment room side of the
Penetration Panel PP1 at J16 shown below. Make sure the 4-pin Lemo Connector P2 end of Run 1266
is at the MRU.
3.13.11. Do not connect Run 1266 to Connector P2 of the MRU at this time.
3.13.12. Route Run 1265, Cable 5196920 between the magnet room side of the Penetration Panel at J16 and
the Primary MRU. Make sure the 5-pin Switchcraft Connector P3 is at the Primary MRU.
3.13.13. Remove LOTO from both MRUs.
3.13.14. Perform functional and battery checks of each MRU in conformance with the vendor service manual.
Fully recharge the batteries as required.
3.13.15. Verify that input power to MRUs is connected and turned on. Wait at least three minutes before
connecting any other cables to MRU to allow any depressed RUNDOWN button relay to disengage.

3.13.16. Make cable connections - if only a Primary MRU is installed:
a. Connect the 4-pin Lemo Connector P2 end of Cable 2128699 (Run 606) to J2 the Primary MRU,
located behind the MRU's cover.
b. Connect the 5-pin Switchcraft Connector P3 end of Cable 2128699 (Run 606) to J303 (ERU/MRU)
on the Instrumentation Box at the magnet.
3.13.17. Make cable connections - if both a Primary and a Remote MRU are installed:
a. Connect the 4-pin Lemo Connector P2 end of Cable 5128149 (Run 1266) to J1 of the Remote MRU,
located behind the cover of the Remote MRU.
b. Connect the 9-pin D-sub end of Cable 5128149 (Run 1266) to J16 of the Penetration Panel,
located on the Equipment Room side.
c. Connect the 9-pin D-sub end of the Cable 5128150 (Run 1265) to J16 of the Penetration Panel,
located on the Magnet Room side.
d. Connect the 5-pin Switchcraft Connector P3 end of Cable 5128150 (Run 1265) to J6 of the
Primary MRU, located behind the cover of the Primary MRU.
e. Connect the 5-pin Switchcraft connector P3 end of Cable 2128699 (Run 606) to J303 (ERU/MRU)
on the Instrumentation Box at the magnet.
Instrumentation Box

3.13.18. Install MRU Danger Label 5128562 (shown below) centered above the Remote MRU, if one is being
installed. Make sure to clean the surface for the decal with isopropyl alcohol and a clean rag before
adhering the decal to the surface.
3.13.19. Use a vacuum cleaner to clean up in the area where drilling occurred.
3.13.20. MRU Front Panel Layout, Labeling and Control Function Descriptions are shown below:

3.14. Magnet Monitor Installation

3.14.1. The Magnet Monitor monitors the magnet temperatures, pressure and liquid helium level. It also
monitors coldhead compressor status (including water flow, water temperature and power status).
The Magnet Monitor controls magnet pressure and will maintain that pressure at defined (set) values.
3.14.2. Install Magnet Monitor 3 (5267626) in conformance with Direction 5124576, Magnet Monitor 3
Operation & Hardware Installation.
3.14.3. The latest release of service documentation can be obtained through the support documentation
library at gehealthcare.com or your GE Healthcare Field Service Representative.
Cabinet Room Magnet Room

Cable Part Number Run Cable Part Number Run
G 46-328000G980 831 A 2214062 832
H 46-328000G975 824 B 2222797 830
J 46-328000G977 825 C 46-328000G976 829
K 46-328000G978 826 D 46-328000G974 828
L 46-328578P1 827 E 46-328000G979 823
M 46-328000G981 833 F 2204485
N 5419763 (Extension Cable)
O 5419760 (Extension Cable)
Magnet Monitor Interface Diagram

3.15. Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement
POTENTIAL MAGNET QUENCH

A CLOSED NUPRO VALVE DURING SHIM LEAD ENGAGEMENT CAN CAUSE A MAGNET QUENCH. MAKE
SURE THE NUPRO VALVE IS FULLY OPEN AND THE VALVE IS FROSTED BEFORE SLOWLY ENGAGING THE
SHIM LEAD. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHIM LEAD’S ORIFICE CAP THAT CONTROLS THE HELIUM GAS FLOW.
3.15.1. Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement Tools and Equipment

1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
NA 1
Representative)
requirements stated in the Safety Chapter before starting the procedure.
3.15.4. Make sure the magnet room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting.
3.15.5. Make sure the scan room doors are secured in the OPEN position.
3.15.6. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete the procedure.

3.15.7. During normal operation the Shim Lead Assembly will be in the “disengaged" position.
a. To ramp or shim the magnet, engage the Shim Lead according to the “four position method"
described below.
b. These procedures are for use with both the Retractable Shim Lead Assembly (2173354) and the
Reduced Height Retractable Shim Lead Assembly (2285073).
Shim Lead in
Engaged and
Disengaged Positions

3.15.8. Shim Lead Engagement
a. Loosen the Shim Lead compression fitting. Make sure the Shim Lead is held locked in the up
position.
Disengaged and Locked Shim Leads

b. Fully open the NuPro valve to the Connector Housing on top of the Shim Lead and wait until the
housing begins to frost. If shim lead does not start to frost discontinue shim lead engagement
and check valve and orifice. The Shim Lead should be in Position 1 shown in illustration below.
Shim Lead Engage Sequence
c. Pull up slightly on the Shim Lead Connector Housing and rotate clockwise to “unlock" the
assembly. If using the 2.5 meter (98 inch) ceiling height Shim Lead Assembly (2285073), rotate the
Shim Lead Assembly 180° after “unlocking" so that the Connector Housing is at its lowest
orientation as shown in image “Disengaged and Locked Shim Leads.”
d. Carefully push down on the Shim Lead Connector Housing until the assembly is at Position 2.
Leave the Shim Lead in Position 2 for approximately 2 minutes until the shaft begins to frost.
e. Warm the compression fitting with a heat gun to thaw its o-ring.
f. Carefully push down on the Shim Lead Connector Housing until the assembly is at Position 3.
Leave the Shim Lead in Position 3 for approximately 2 minutes until the Shim Lead Box begins to
frost.
g. Warm the compression fitting with a heat gun to thaw its o-ring.
h. Carefully push down on the Shim Lead Connector Housing until the Shim Lead contacts the Sav-
Con Connector as shown in Position 4. The Shim Lead Connector and the mating G10 Sav-Con
Connector are keyed and can only be mated in one position.

i. Seat the Shim Lead fully, after contact is felt, by continuing to push on the Shim Lead Connector
Housing with moderate pressure. To fully engage, the Shim Lead should move downwards
approximately .25 inch (6 mm), after contact is felt.
j. Tighten the Shim Lead compression fitting.
k. Close the NuPro valve.
l. After seating the Shim Lead, perform electrical checks per Magnet Commissioning, Magnet
Electrical Checks.
3.15.9. Shim Lead Disengagement
a. Remove ice around the Shim Lead Assembly and Shim Lead compression fitting with a heat gun,
if required.
b. Loosen the Shim Lead compression fitting.
c. Pull up firmly from the underside of the Shim Lead Connector Housing until the Shim Lead
Assembly unseats.
d. Hand-tighten the Shim Lead compression fitting.
e. Check for leaks.
Shim Lead in
Engaged and
Disengaged Positions

Chapter 4 – Commissioning Checks

4. Commissioning Checks
4.1. 1.5T LCC (R Series Magnet) Magnet Commissioning and Operating Guidelines
4.1.1. The magnet's electrical circuits must be in operating condition prior to filling or ramping. The
cryostat's temperature must be determined prior to filling.
Check/Setting
Element Guideline
Requirements
Minimum: 100 feet (30.5 meters) below sea level
Maximum: 8100 feet (2468.9 meters) above sea level
Operating Altitude
For 8,100 to 11,808 feet (2,468.9 to 3600.0 meters) above sea level: Business approval is
required.
After ramping and
Operation after Shimming: shimming or when out of
15,000 Gauss ±15.0 Gauss (63.864 MHz ±64 kHz) gradient amplifier
Main Field, 1.5T LCC
bandwidth
Magnet
Parking:
Field Report’s (ATR's) Recommended Site Parking Field After ramping
±0.5 Gauss
Main Coil Inductance 10.8 – 11.5 Henries At start of ramping
Magnet Drift ≤ 6.3 Hz/hr. for 1.5T (12 hours after pressure stabilized) Before shimming
Main Power Supply 810 ± 10 mA Main Heater Before ramping up/down
< 2.2V Power Supply Reading @750 A
Ramping Circuit Voltage Before ramping up/down
≤ 100mV Across Ramp Lead Extensions @ 750 A
Main Heater Resistance 20.5 to 25.0 ohms At start of commissioning
New Contact Bands
Ramp Lead Preparation Before ramping up/down
Gas Flow Out Top Holes
3.9 to 4.1 psig
For GE Owned and Operated Sites, improved pressure
After installation, venting,
Stabilized Cryostat configuration may be available. Contact the Regional
Coldhead change-outs,
Pressure Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet
ramping and shimming.
Support Team at the Online Center for additional
information.
First Stage Coldhead Temp < 45K
Second Stage
< 4.4K
Recondenser Temp (RuO B) At installation and
Second Stage Coldhead Coldhead change-outs
See ΔT
Temp (RuO A)
ΔT = RuO B - RuO A 0.0K < ΔT < 0.2K
40% to 100% For an operating system
95% Maximum Top-Off
80% Minimum Ramping Up
Ramping Down for
Helium Level (LHe) 70% Minimum
Maintenance or Upgrade
70% Minimum Shimming
60% Minimum Mandatory Fill Level
40% or lower STOP all scanning
Cryostat Pressure = 1.0 psig
Fill Conditions Dewar <2 psig Helium (LHe) fill/refill
V2 Open
Transverse 1 = 610 mA ± 10 mA
Shim Heater Currents Transverse 2 = 610 mA ± 10 mA Before Shimming
Axial/ BØ = 710 mA ± 10 mA

4.2. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series Magnet) Magnet Commissioning and Operating Guidelines
4.2.1. The magnet's electrical circuits must be in operating condition prior to filling or ramping. The
cryostat's temperature must be determined prior to filling.
Check/Setting
Element Guideline
Requirements
Operating Altitude
required.
Operation:
After Shimming
30,000 Gauss ±26.0 Gauss (127.72 MHz ±110 kHz)
Parking:
Magnet
±0.5 Gauss
Main Coil Inductance 205 – 227 Henries At start of ramping
< 2.2 V Power Supply Reading @375 A
New Contact Bands
3.9 to 4.1 psig
information.
Second Stage
< 4.4K
See ΔT
Temp (RuO A)
95% Maximum Top-Off
95% Minimum, Refill/Top-Off at 65% Ramping Up
Ramping Down for
V2 Open

4.3. Commissioning Tooling, Equipment Requirements

46-301477G2 or Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer Kit (46-301477G2) or
1
46-317543G2 Diode Box (46-317543G2)
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up

4.4. Magnet Electrical Checks

4.4.1. Required Conditions
a. Make sure the magnet is at zero field before starting the Magnet Electrical Checks procedure.
b. All measured superconducting coils must be cold (4.2K) for the Main Coil and Shim Coil resistance
values to be accurate.
c. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Magnet Electrical
Checks.
4.4.2. Engage the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement.
4.4.3. Locate the Shim Lead Connector Housing (shown below, in disengaged position for clarity).
Shim Lead (Main Extension Lead) Housing
4.4.4. Locate the connector pins as noted in the following tables. Use a digital meter to measure the
resistance across the identified connector pins. Take note and utilize the appropriate table for the
unit under test.
a. Magnet Circuits Resistance Checks, Main Coil, Cold (4.2K)
b. Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K), Measured on Shim Lead
c. Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K), Measured on Shim Lead Pigtail Cable
4.4.5. Report any reading outside of the acceptable range to the Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team
Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center for future investigation before ramping the
magnet.

Magnet Circuits Resistance Checks, Main Coil, Cold (4.2K)

R Series Magnets, W and WB Series Magnets
Resistance (Ohms)
Pins Typical
Connector +, - R Series W, WB Series
Main Coil Power Lugs +, - <6 <6
J5-1 on Shim Lead 9, 10 <6 <6
Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K),

Measured on Shim Lead
Function Resistance (Ohms)
Shim Coil Circuit Typical
Shim PS
W, WB Pins R W WB
Setting R Series
Series Connector +, - Series Series Series
AX1 Z1 Z1 1, 19
AX2 Z2 Z2 2, 20
0.2 – 0.6
AX3 Z3 Z3 3, 21
AX4 Z4 Z4 4, 22
AX5 Z5 Z5 5, 23 NA
AX6 Z6 Z6 6, 24 NA
T1-1 C31 Z(X2-Y2) 13, 23
T1-2 C11+ X 16, 19
T1-3 C22+ Z2X 14, 21 0.2 – 0.6
P1-A 0.3 – 0.5 0.2 – 0.8
T1-4 C11- ZX 17, 20
T1-5 C22- X2-Y2 15, 22
T1-6 C33 X3 18, 24 NA
T2-1 S31 ZXY 11, 23
T2-2 S11+ Y 9, 19
T2-3 S22+ Z2Y 7, 21 0.2 – 0.6
T2-4 S11- ZY 10, 20
T2-5 S22- XY 8, 22
T2-6 S33 Y3 12, 24 NA
S/C Switch Heaters Main Switch 1, 2 22 – 27 22 – 27 22 – 27
27 -33 or 12 - 15 or
Axial Shims J5-1 or 5, 6 18 - 22
22 – 28A 8.5 - 12B
J5-2
Transverse 1 7, 6 8 – 10 8.5 - 12 13 - 16
Transverse 2 8, 6 8 – 10 8.5 - 12 13 - 16
A: New switch configuration incorporated around R216.
B: Magnets W00001 - W00024, W00026, W00027, W00030, W00032 - W00035 and W00038 - W00040 only.

S/C Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K) –
Measured on Shim Lead Pigtail Cable
Shim PS
W, WB Pins R W WB
Setting R Series
AX1 Z1 Z1 P2
AA, (K, L)
AX2 Z2 Z2 P2-W
0.2 – 0.7
AX3 Z3 Z3 P2
B, (M, N)
AX4 Z4 Z4 P2-W
AX5 Z5 Z5 P2 NA
C, P
AX6 Z6 Z6 P2-W NA
T1-1 C31 Z(X2-Y2) D, P
T1-2 C11+ X P2 F, (K, L)
T1-3 C22+ Z2X G, (M, N) 0.2 – 0.7
0.3 – 0.6 0.2 – 0.8
T1-4 C11- ZX F, (K, L)
T1-5 C22- X2-Y2 P2-W G, (M, N)
T1-6 C33 X3 D, P NA
T2-1 S31 ZXY E, P
T2-2 S11+ Y P2 H, (K, L)
T2-3 S22+ Z2Y J, (M, N) 0.2 – 0.7
T2-4 S11- ZY H, (K, L)
T2-5 S22- XY P2-W J, (M, N)
T2-6 S33 Y3 E, P NA
A: For R Series ONLY - New switch configuration incorporated around R216.

4.5. Cryostat Temperature Check

4.5.1. This section describes the procedures and equipment used to establish the temperature inside the
Cryostat Helium Vessel. The temperature must be established to determine the cooldown and liquid
helium filling requirements of the Cryostat, Cryostat Cooling and Cryogen Filling Requirements, prior
to the magnet commissioning.
4.5.2. Magnets are equipped with two temperature sensors requiring a 10 microampere current source with
a stability of +0.005 percent. Sensor (Diode) 1 is mounted on top of the patient end of the Magnet
Assembly. Sensor (Diode) 2 is mounted on the bottom of the service end of the Magnet Assembly. The
Magnet Assembly is inside of the Helium Vessel. (These sensor diodes are identical to those found on
the Coldhead Sleeve.)
4.5.3. Verify that any sensing or troubleshooting equipment used does not exceed 10 microamperes.
a. The magnet temperature sensors are designed to be driven by a 10 microampere source. Some
ohmmeters exceed this rating.
b. Do NOT use any sensing or troubleshooting equipment which exceeds 10 microamperes.
c. A voltmeter can also be used to troubleshoot the sensor circuit.
4.5.4. Using the Lakeshore 208 Thermometer Kit:
a. Connect the Lakeshore Model 208 Digital Thermometer to the diode connector on
Instrumentation Connector Assembly 2204623 in conformance with illustration below. Select
Curve 6 (equivalent to DT 470, Curve 10).
Cryostat Temperature Measurement Set-Up
b. Select the Diode to be monitored as shown in table below. A shorted sensor circuit will cause the
meter to display a reading of approximately 400K, whereas an open sensor circuit will cause the
meter display to flash. Check for problems with the instrumentation box connector and external
wiring before deciding the temperature sensing diode is defective.
Lakeshore 208
Stage
Thermometer Kit
Diode 1 Select Channel 1
Diode 2 Select Channel 2

SI410 Diode Voltage to Temperature Conversion, 4K to 20K

SI410 Diode Voltage to Temperature Conversion, 10K to 300K

4.5.5. Measuring Magnet Temperature using an MTM-101 Magnet Temperature Meter (5119507)
a. Always keep a fresh set of batteries available for the MTM-101 meter, and ensure the meter is in
calibration before using it.
b. Plug the meter's circular DIN connector into the Diode connector on the Instrumentation
Connector Box.
c. To read the upper temperature diode, press the green button on the meter until the SI410D1 LED
d. To read the lower temperature diode, press the green button on the meter until the SI410D2 LED
MTM-101 Cryogenic
Temperature Meter
(5119507), shown with its
adapter cables

4.6. Cryostat Cooling and Cryogen Filling Requirements

4.6.1. Use the table below along with the temperature readout obtained in Cryostat Temperature Check
and the reading from the Magnet Monitor to determine the Cryostat cooling and cryogen filling
procedures required.
4.6.2. Do not proceed with Nitrogen Purge-Precool, Liquid Helium Fill, Preparations for Field Measurement,
or initiate magnet ramping prior to establishing the Cryostat cooling and cryogen filling requirements
in conformance with this section.
Required Cryostat Cooling/Cryogen Filling Procedures

Nitrogen Purge-Precool
Gaseous Liquid
Helium
Bottom Diode Nitrogen Nitrogen Liquid
Purge
Temperature Helium Level Purge Pre-Cool Helium Fill
> 220K Yes Yes Yes **
100K to 220K Empty ** - Yes Yes **
- - - Yes
< 100K
> 90% No Action
**Contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online
Center for assistance.

Chapter 5 – Liquid Helium Fill

5. Liquid Helium Fill
Liquid helium is used to cool the magnet when cryostat temperatures are below 100K. Initiate Liquid Helium Fill
when cryogen levels, based upon Cryogen Monitor percentage (%) readings, approach the minimum values for
stated functions listed in the table “Minimum Cryogen Levels (Percent Displayed on Cryogen Monitor)” for the
stated function. Starting levels take into account expected helium loss to maintain the required level during the
operation. For additional information, refer to the chart Volumetric Conversion of Helium Level. Target levels
are established for magnets with a normal or in-spec boil-off rate. Magnets with an out-of-spec boil-off rate
may require emergency fills at Helium levels higher than defined in the table “Minimum Cryogen Levels (Percent
Displayed on Cryogen Monitor).”

• HAVE ALL MR SAFETY TRAINED PERSONNEL COMPLY WITH THE SECOND PERSON SERVICE
REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED IN THE MR SERVICE SAFETY MANUAL, 5452735.
FATAL EXPLOSIVE HAZARD!

GAS CYLINDER RUPTURE/DAMAGE OR OPENING CYLINDER VALVE FAST WILL RELEASE 2400 PSI GAS
FROM CYLINDER. MAKE SURE GAS CYLINDERS ARE SECURE FROM FALLS AND AWAY FROM MOVING
OBJECTS BEFORE USING. ALWAYS OPEN CYLINDER VALVE SLOWLY.

THE PRESSURE INSIDE THE DEWAR BUILDS UP QUICKLY. NEVER LEAVE THE DEWAR UNATTENDED WHEN
USING THE BUILT-IN HEATER. NEVER KEEP THE HEATER POWER SWITCH IN THE ON POSITION FOR MORE
THAN 5 (FIVE) SECONDS AT A TIME.

THE HELIUM FILL PROCEDURE RELEASES LARGE QUANTITIES OF HELIUM GAS, WHICH WILL DISPLACE
OXYGEN IN THE AIR AND POTENTIALLY CAUSE ASPHYXIATION. MAKE SURE SUFFICIENT VENTILATION
EXISTS IN THE MAGNET ROOM TO DISPEL LARGE QUANTITIES OF HELIUM GAS. MAKE SURE THE MAGNET
ROOM VENT EXHAUST FAN IS ON AND THE MAGNET ROOM DOOR IS PROPPED OPEN (OR THE HATCH IN A
MOBILE VAN IS OPENED), BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.
POTENTIAL HIGH PRESSURE GAS RELEASE!

IF A GAS CYLINDER FALLS, THE VALVE OUTLET COULD SHEAR, RELEASING HAZARDOUS HIGH PRESSURE
GAS. SECURE THE GAS CYLINDER BEFORE REMOVING THE PROTECTIVE VALVE CAP.
EXPLOSION HAZARD!
LIQUID CRYOGENS CAN LIQUEFY ATMOSPHERIC OXYGEN, PRODUCING A HIGHLY COMBUSTIBLE OXYGEN
LIQUID. NO SMOKING IN MAGNET AND CRYOGEN STORAGE ROOMS!

POTENTIAL IMPACT INJURIES!

THE UNATTACHED END OF THE GAS LINE MAY EXHIBIT WHIPPING MOTION AND COLLIDE INTO OBJECTS
AND PERSONNEL DURING GAS LINE PURGE. FIRMLY HOLD THE UNATTACHED END DURING GAS LINE
PURGE.

NEVER BRING HELIUM DEWARS OR GAS CYLINDERS THAT ARE MADE FROM FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL
INTO THE MAGNET ROOM.
• MAKE SURE ALL EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS USED IN THE MAGNET ROOM ARE NONFERROMAGNETIC.
• HELIUM GAS CYLINDER (BOTTLE) CAPS ARE FERROUS AND MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE BRINGING THE
CYLINDER INTO THE MAGNET ROOM OF A RAMPED MAGNET.

EXPOSURE TO CRYOGENS AND CONTACT WITH COLD OBJECTS IS POSSIBLE DURING THIS PROCEDURE.
WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, NONABSORBENT GLOVES AND GOGGLES WHILE PERFORMING THIS
PROCEDURE.

BLOWING WARM HELIUM GAS INTO A MAGNET AT FIELD MAY CAUSE THE MAGNET TO QUENCH.
DO NOT ALLOW AN EMPTY DEWAR TO BLOW WARM HELIUM GAS INTO A RAMPED MAGNET.
POTENTIAL MAGNET QUENCH

HELIUM GAS FROM THE HELIUM TRANSFER LINE CAN ENTER THE MAGNET WHILE DEWARS ARE BEING
CHANGED IF THE CRYOSTAT STINGER IS LEFT IN THE FILL PORT. THIS CAN CAUSE A RAMPED MAGNET TO
QUENCH. ALWAYS REMOVE THE CRYOSTAT STINGER FROM THE FILL PORT AND START THE FILL
PROCEDURE OVER AGAIN WHEN CHANGING HELIUM DEWARS WHILE FILLING A RAMPED MAGNET.
Minimum Cryogen Levels (Percent Displayed on Cryogen Monitor)

Fill (250 Liter Dewars at 90% Efficiency)
Mandatory One Two Three
Magnet Ramp Shim Fill Dewar Dewars Dewars
1.5T LCC
80% 70% 60% 90% 78% - 90% 60% - 78%
(R Series)
3.0T LCC 95%, Top-
70% 60% 90% 78% - 90% 63% - 78%
(W, WB Series) Off at 65%
Do NOT operate (scan) magnet below 40% fill level to avoid possible damage from a magnet quench.

5.1. Helium Fill Tools and Test Equipment

5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
46-294513G1 1 Liquid Helium Transfer Line Kit
2166440 1 Liquid Helium Transfer Line, 20 ft. (6.1 m) for Mobile Sites
Helium Regulator and Hose Kit (Situations where built-in
46-308734G1 1
Dewar heaters are not used)
Nonmagnetic Helium Cylinder Cart (Situations where built-in
46-258150P1 1
Dewar heaters are not used)
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
46-318619P1 1 Extended Coupling Nut
46-260272P1 1 Retaining Ring
46-260342P9 1 O-Ring
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
NA 1-4 Liquid Helium Dewars, 250 or 500 liters
Full Aluminum 135 SCF Helium Gas Cylinders (1 GHe per 500
NA 1-2
liters LHe)
5.2. Helium Fill Required Conditions

requirements stated in the Safety Chapter before starting the Liquid Helium Fill procedure.
5.2.3. Make sure the magnet room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting Liquid Helium Fill.
5.2.4. Make sure the magnet room vent exhaust fan is on and the magnet room door is propped open (or
the hatch in a mobile van is opened), before beginning this procedure.
5.2.5. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete the Liquid Helium Fill
procedure.

5.3. 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnet Volumetric Conversion of Liquid Helium Level
1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnet

Volumetric Conversion of Liquid Helium Level (Meter Reading to Liquid Liters Correlation)
Level Liquid Helium Level Liquid Helium Level Liquid Helium Level Liquid Helium
(%) (Litres) (%) (Litres) (%) (Litres) (%) (Litres)
0 412 25 736 50 1080 75 1450
1 424 26 750 51 1094 76 1466
2 435 27 764 52 1108 77 1482
3 447 28 778 53 1112 78 1498
4 459 29 792 54 1136 79 1514
5 471 30 806 56 1150 80 1530
6 482 31 820 55 1164 81 1549
7 494 32 834 57 1178 82 1568
8 506 33 848 58 1192 83 1587
9 517 34 862 59 1206 84 1606
10 529 35 876 60 1220 85 1625
11 543 36 889 61 1235 86 1644
12 556 37 903 62 1250 87 1663
13 570 38 917 63 1265 88 1682
14 584 39 931 64 1280 89 1701
15 598 40 945 65 1295 90 1720
16 611 41 959 66 1310 91 1742
17 625 42 972 67 1325 92 1764
18 639 43 986 68 1340 93 1786
19 652 44 999 69 1355 94 1808
20 666 45 1013 70 1370 95 1830
21 680 46 1026 71 1386 96 1852
22 694 47 1040 72 1402 97 1874
23 708 48 1053 73 1418 98 1896
24 722 49 1067 74 1434 99 1918
100 1940

1.5T LCC (R Series)

Volumetric Conversion of Liquid Helium Level
2000
1900
1800
1700
1600
1500
Volume of Liquid Helium in Vessel (Liters)
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Liquid Helium Meter Reading (Percentage)

5.4. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnet Volumetric Conversion of Liquid Helium Level
3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnet

Volumetric Conversion of Liquid Helium Level (Meter Reading to Liquid Liters Correlation)
Level Liquid Helium Level Liquid Helium Level Liquid Helium Level Liquid Helium
(%) (Litres) (%) (Litres) (%) (Litres) (%) (Litres)
0 164 25 475 50 930 75 1385
5 211 30 558 55 1026 80 1464
10 266 35 646 60 1122 85 1538
15 329 40 738 65 1214 90 1609
20 398 45 834 70 1302 95 1675
100 1735
3.0T LCC (W, WB Series)

Volumetric Conversion of Liquid Helium Level
2000
1900
1800
1700
1600
Volume of Liquid Helium in Vessel (Liters)
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Liquid Helium Meter Reading (Percentage)

5.5. Fill Method, Stinger Engaged in Full Tube Fill (Bottom Fill)
5.5.1. Helium fills should be performed as Stinger Engaged in Full Tube Fills using the indicated equipment
regardless of the liquid level inside the magnet or magnet ramp status (ramped or unramped). This
approach eliminates the liquid splashing, which causes considerable liquid loss. It also creates
transient pressure effects inside the magnet helium vessel and can create localized icing of the
helium level sensors. Top fill will ONLY be used on the magnet when there is an urgent need and the
proper equipment to perform a Stinger Engaged in Full Tube Fill is not available.
Vacuum Jacketed Helium Transfer Line and Dewar/Cryostat Stinger Assemblies,

Stinger Engaged in Full Tube Fill Configuration
a. For a low-ceiling option site, use two 8 in. (203 mm) stinger extensions instead of the 16 in. (406
mm) stinger extensions. Insert the 8 in. (203 mm) stinger extensions into the Magnet, and screw
onto the 7 in. (178 mm) Cryostat Stinger Assembly.
b. Stinger Engaged in Full Tube Fill: Make sure the 16 in. (406 mm) Cryostat Stinger Extension and
Teflon Tip are firmly secured during installation to prevent them from loosening and falling into
the magnet.
c. Top Fill: A Teflon Tip is installed on each cryostat stinger and stinger extension to protect the
threads. Cryostat Stinger Teflon Caps must be removed from threads prior to fill.

d. At Mobile Sites: Use the arrangement shown below. Filling at mobile sites must be performed
from the front of the magnet. The mobile module will not accommodate 500 liter Dewars.

Mobile Site Fill Configuration

5.5.2. Liquid helium in the Dewar needs to be pressurized to transfer it from the Dewar into the magnet.
This can be done in two different ways: by using the built-in Dewar heaters or by using pressurized
helium gas. Using the built-in heaters is simpler and eliminates the need for additional pure helium
gas. However, some Dewars may not have heaters, in which case pressurization using compressed
gas bottles is the only option. You need to make sure the Dewar has heaters or you need to order gas
bottles.
5.5.3. Refer to Volumetric Conversion of Helium Level (included in this chapter) to determine the
approximate quantity of liquid helium required to fill the cryostat. An empty and partially warmed
cryostat will require an additional quantity of liquid helium to cool the cryostat down to the 4.2K
temperature, where liquid helium will begin to collect in the cryostat.
5.5.4. If there is no helium in the magnet, refer to Magnet Commissioning Checks Chapter to check shield
temperatures.
5.5.5. If bottom diode temperature is >100K, contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader
or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center for assistance.
5.5.6. Make sure the Magnet Monitor sample rate is set to 11. (Refer to the vendor's manual for Magnet
Monitor calibration.)
5.5.7. Obtain a full LHe Dewar. Check the Dewar's pressure gauge.
a. If pressure is above 1 psig, slowly open Dewar's Vent Valve and reduce Dewar pressure to 1 psig.
b. If Dewar pressure does not vent down to 1 psig, verify that the Dewar pressure relief valve is left
in the open position. Contact the cryogen supplier immediately.
c. The Pressure Relief Valve is normally open during shipping and storage to prevent excessive
build up of pressure in the Dewar. Always reopen the Pressure Relief Valve after using a Dewar.
d. If 99.999% (five nines) Helium Gas is used, the purity of the gas remaining in the cylinder will
degrade (to something less than 99.999%) as a result of this process.
Dewar Connections

5.5.8. Additional Preparation if Using Pressurized Helium Gas
a. Obtain one full aluminum 135 SCF cylinder of helium gas for every two 250 liter LHe Dewars
required.
b. Connect a Helium Regulator and Hose Assembly (46-306734G1) to the Valve Outlet (CGA 580) on
the GHe cylinder.
c. Make sure the Regulator's adjusting handle is fully backed out, then slowly open the GHe
cylinder's valve.
d. Observe the Regulator's high pressure gauge. Make sure the indicated pressure is approximately
2000 psig, indicating a full cylinder.
e. Vent the magnet by temporarily opening Helium Vent Valve V2 as required to obtain 1.0 to 1.5
psig pressure.
5.5.9. Additional Preparation if Using Built-In Dewar Heaters

a. Make sure helium Dewars with operational built-in heaters to pressurize the liquid are ordered.
b. Make sure there is a suitable electrical extension cord to energize the Dewar heaters.

5.6. Liquid Helium Fill Using Pressurized Gas

5.6.1. Verify that the Dewar's Liquid Helium Outlet Valve is in the closed position.
5.6.2. Remove the ½-inch cap and adapters, exposing the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar.
5.6.3. Loosen the 5/ 8 -inch threaded brass locking collar.
5.6.4. Verify that the Pressure Relief Valve is in the open position.
Dewar Connections
Helium Dewar Transfer Line

Extension Connection

5.6.5. Make sure the Dewar Stinger Assembly's Valve is closed.

5.6.6. Insert the Dewar Stinger Assembly through the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar until the Stinger Tip contacts
the Helium Outlet Valve.
5.6.7. Open the Helium Outlet Valve.
5.6.8. Slowly insert the Dewar Stinger Assembly into the Dewar until the Stinger Tip contacts liquid helium.
(Contact is indicated by a pressure increase on the Dewar's pressure gauge and by expulsion of gas
from the Pressure Relief Valve Port.)
5.6.9. Continue to insert the Dewar Stinger Assembly at a rate that maintains a maximum 5 psig reading on
the Dewar's pressure gauge.
5.6.10. When the Dewar Stinger Assembly contacts the bottom of the Dewar, raise the Stinger Assembly 1 in.
(25 mm), and securely tighten the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar.
a. If Magnet Room ceiling height prohibits insertion of the Dewar Stinger Assembly into the Dewar,
the Dewar must be moved to an area with a higher ceiling height, the Stinger Assembly inserted,
and the Dewar transported back to the Magnet Room.
5.6.11. When Dewar pressure stabilizes ≤5 psig, close the Pressure Relief Valve.
5.6.12. Attach the selected Cryostat Stinger Assembly to the Helium Transfer Line.
a. 46-294511P1 for 250 liter helium Dewars
b. 46-294511P2 for 500 liter helium Dewars
5.6.13. Install the threaded Coupling Nut 46-318619P1, Retainer Ring 46-260272P1, and O-Ring 46-260342P9
onto the Cryostat Stinger.

5.6.14. Attach the opposite end of the Helium Transfer Line onto the Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.6.15. The next two steps will provide a helium rich environment for connecting the GHe line to the Helium
Gas Pressurizing Port.
a. Purge Helium Regulator and Hose Kit 46-306734G1 by alternately turning the regulator handle
fully in and out 3 times. Upon completion of the purge, back the regulator out until a minimal
flow is felt exiting the hose.
b. Open the helium Dewar's Vent Valve to allow a small amount of gas flow.
5.6.16. Attach the purged Helium Regulator and Hose Kit to the helium Dewar's GHe Pressurizing Port.

5.6.17. Back out the regulator handle all the way.

5.6.18. Open Helium Vent Valve V2 on the magnet. Turn the Magnet Monitor key switch to the Fill (horizontal)
position. Vent the magnet cryostat pressure to <1.0 psig.
5.6.19. Partially open the Dewar Stinger Assembly's valve and:
a. Allow the liquid helium to purge and precool the Transfer Line Assembly until a liquid plume is
observed exiting the assembly.
b. Allow Dewar pressure to decrease no more than 3 psig before continuing.

5.6.20. With the plume present, uncap Fill Port V1, fully insert the Cryostat Stinger Assembly, then securely
tighten Fill Port V1's compression fitting. When Stinger Engaged in Full Tube Filling and ceiling height
prevents Cryostat Stinger insertion in this step:
a. Install a Brass Blanking Cap on the Cryostat Stinger Assembly,
b. Remove the Extension from the Cryostat Stinger,
c. Place a brass alligator clip near the top end of the Cryostat Stinger,
d. Partially insert the Extension into Fill Port V1, and
e. Reattach the Extension.
5.6.21. Fully open the Dewar Stinger Assembly Valve.

5.6.22. If gas is observed escaping from the compression fitting on Fill Port V1 or on the helium Dewar, use a
heat gun to warm the compression fitting and recheck the compression fitting tightness.
5.6.23. Open the Vent Valve at the Dewar's GHe Pressurizing Port. (Maximum transfer efficiency occurs when
Dewar pressure is near 2 psig.)
5.6.24. Verify that the GHe cylinder valve is fully open, and adjust the GHe cylinder regulator to obtain a
Dewar pressure which is 1.5 psig above the cryostat pressure during the entire fill. (Do not set Dewar
pressure above 3.5 psig.)
a. Normal cryostat pressure during helium fill is approximately 1 psig.
b. Cryostat pressure will rise to just above 1 psig at the beginning of the fill, and then slowly drop
back to around 1 psig. Make sure cryostat pressure never exceeds 1.5 psig during fill.
c. If the cryostat pressure gauge reads >2.0 psig, stop the fill immediately and check fill equipment
for loss of vacuum, high Dewar pressure, etc.
d. If frost is detected on the transfer line, stop the fill immediately (as if the Dewar is empty) to
avoid a magnet quench.
e. Helium Vent Port V2 should frost up, indicating there is no restriction in the venting circuit.

5.6.25. Check the Magnet Monitor for an increase in the helium level. (Handheld meter may also be used to
make this check.) During the fill process monitor cryogen level readings once every minute for the first
5 minutes of the fill and once every 3 minutes thereafter.
5.6.26. If the Magnet Monitor's helium level reading is not increasing, check the magnet and fill equipment
for frosting or blockage. If the Magnet Monitor reading is decreasing:
a. Stop the fill immediately,
b. Remove the Stinger from the magnet, and
c. Contact Service.
5.6.27. Monitor the Dewar transfer for one or more of the following to prevent blowing helium gas into the
helium vessel:
a. Listen for a whistling sound coming from the transfer line indicating the Dewar is empty.
Depending on equipment and conditions, the whistle may not always be heard.
b. Monitor the Dewar pressure gauge and watch for a decrease in pressure (a decrease in cryostat
pressure could also be caused by an empty gas cylinder).
c. Monitor the percent change on the Magnet Monitor. Stop the transfill when there is no positive
(increasing) change in the meter reading.
d. Make sure the Dewar Stinger remains frost free during the transfill. Frost on the Stinger is one
indicator for passing helium vapor. Stop transfill if frost is present.
5.6.28. When the cryostat is full or when changing helium Dewars:
a. Close the valve on the Dewar Stinger Assembly,
b. Close the GHe cylinder valve,
c. Close the Dewar's Vent Valve, and
d. Open the Dewar's Pressure Relief Valve.
5.6.29. Remove the Cryostat Stinger from Fill Port V1, and immediately replace the Fill Port Cap.
5.6.30. If additional Dewars are required, change Helium Dewars in conformance with Section, Changing
Helium Dewars, before continuing with the Liquid Helium Fill procedure. A heat gun may be required
to remove frost from the Fill Port V1 assembly before removing the Stinger.
5.6.31. Tighten Fill Port V1's compression fitting to prevent a leak from occurring.
5.6.32. Disconnect the Helium Transfer Line Assembly from the Helium Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.6.33. Make sure the helium Dewar is under 1 psig, then remove the Helium Dewar Stinger Assembly from
the helium Dewar.
5.6.34. Close the GHe cylinder valve.
5.6.35. Disconnect the Helium Gas Line from the Dewar's Helium Gas Pressurizing Port.
5.6.36. Back off the GHe cylinder Pressure Regulator's adjusting handle (CCW) until no resistance is felt.
5.6.37. Verify the following Dewar configuration:
a. Liquid Helium Outlet Valve: closed
b. Helium Vent Valve: closed
c. Pressure Relief Valve: open
d. Replace all adapters on Liquid Helium Valve Outlet
5.6.38. Remove the GHe cylinder Regulator from the helium gas cylinder and install the protective valve cap
on the cylinder.
5.6.39. Turn the Magnet Monitor key switch to the normal (vertical) position. (Put Magnet Monitor into “Post
Fill” mode.)
5.6.40. Make sure the vessel pressure is increasing at a rate of 0.11 psig/hour.

5.7. Changing Helium Dewars

5.7.1. If performing the fill on a ramped magnet, please take note:
a. Helium gas from the helium transfer line can enter the magnet while Dewars are being changed
if the Cryostat Stinger is left in the Fill Port. This can cause a ramped magnet to quench.
b. Always remove the Cryostat Stinger from the Fill Port and start the Fill Procedure over again
when changing helium Dewars while filling a ramped magnet.
5.7.2. Close Helium Vent Valve V2 on the magnet.
5.7.3. Remove the Stinger and cap the Fill Port V1.
5.7.4. Obtain a full liquid helium Dewar. Check the Dewar pressure gauge.
a. If the pressure is >1 psig, slowly open the Dewar Vent Valve and reduce Dewar pressure to 1
psig.
b. If Dewar pressure does not vent down to 1 psig, verify that the Dewar pressure relief valve is left
in the open position. Contact the cryogen supplier immediately.
c. If a new GHe aluminum cylinder is required, connect a Helium Regulator and Hose Assembly (46-
306734G1) to GHe cylinder's Valve Outlet (CGA 580).
d. The Pressure Relief Valve is normally open during shipping and storage to prevent excessive
build up of pressure in the Dewar. Therefore, always reopen the Pressure Relief Valve after using
a Dewar.
e. If 99.999% Helium Gas is used, the purity of the gas remaining in the cylinder will degrade (be
something less than 99.999%) as a result of this process.

5.7.5. Observe the high pressure gauge on the GHe cylinder Regulator. Make sure the indicated pressure is
>1000 psig, indicating sufficient gas volume for transferring a full 250 liter helium Dewar.
5.7.6. Make sure the Regulator's adjusting handle is fully backed out, then slowly open GHe cylinder valve.
5.7.7. Observe the cryostat pressure gauge. Temporarily open Vent Valve V2 as required to obtain a
pressure of ≤0.5 psig.
5.7.8. Verify that the Helium Outlet Valve is closed on the full Dewar.
5.7.9. Loosen the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar on the full Dewar.
5.7.10. Remove the ½-inch cap and adapters, exposing the 5/ 8 -inch brass locking collar.
5.7.12. Verify that the Dewar Stinger Assembly Valve is in the closed position, and disconnect the Helium
Transfer Line from the Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.7.13. Remove the Dewar Stinger Assembly from the empty Dewar.
5.7.14. Wipe off frost or moisture on the Dewar Stinger, and insert the Dewar Stinger Assembly through
the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar until the Stinger Tip contacts the Helium Outlet Valve in the full Dewar.


(Contact is indicated by a pressure increase on the Dewar pressure gauge and by expulsion of gas
the Dewar pressure gauge.
5.7.18. When the Dewar Stinger Assembly contacts the bottom of the Dewar, raise the Stinger Assembly 1 in.
(25 mm) and securely tighten the threaded 5/ 8 -inch locking collar.
a. If Magnet Room ceiling height prohibits insertion of the Dewar Stinger Assembly into the Dewar,
the Dewar must be moved to an area with a higher ceiling height, the Stinger Assembly inserted,
and the Dewar transported back to the Magnet Room.
5.7.19. When Dewar pressure stabilizes at 5 psig, close the Pressure Relief Valve.
5.7.20. Attach the Helium Transfer Line onto the Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.7.21. Disconnect the Helium Gas Line from the empty Dewar.
a. Purge the GHe cylinder Regulator and Hose Assembly by alternately turning the Regulator's
handle fully in and out three times.
b. Upon completion of the purge, back the Regulator out until a minimal flow is felt exiting the hose.
5.7.22. Slightly open the GHe Vent Valve to allow helium gas to flow from the Dewar.
5.7.23. Attach the purged Gas Line Assembly to the Dewar's Helium Gas Pressurizing Port. Fully back out the
Regulator's adjusting handle.
5.7.24. Attach the Cryostat Stinger to the Transfer Line.
5.7.25. Prepare the empty Dewar as follows:

5.8. Changing Helium Gas Bottles

5.8.1. Change the helium gas bottle when bottle pressure drops below 5 psig. Approximately one 235 SCF
helium gas bottle is needed to pressurize a 500 liter liquid helium Dewar.
5.8.2. Close the Dewar vent valve and remove the gas hose.
5.8.3. Close the main valve and regulator on the helium gas bottle.
5.8.4. Bring a full helium gas bottle into the magnet room. Make sure the cylinder is safely secured PRIOR to
reconnecting the regulator and hoses. Reconnect the regulator and hoses.
5.8.5. Purge the hose before reconnecting to the Dewar.

5.9. Liquid Helium Fill Using Built-In Dewar Heaters

5.9.1. Verify that the Dewar’s liquid helium outlet valve is in the closed position.

5.9.2. Remove the ½-inch cap and adapters, exposing the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar.
5.9.3. Loosen the 5/ 8 -inch threaded brass locking collar.

5.9.5. Make sure the Dewar Stinger Assembly’s Valve is closed.

5.9.6. Insert the Dewar Stinger Assembly through the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar until the Stinger Tip contacts
the Helium Outlet Valve.
(Contact is indicated by a pressure increase on the Dewar’s pressure gauge and by expulsion of gas
the Dewar’s pressure gauge.
5.9.10. When the Dewar Stinger Assembly contacts the bottom of the Dewar, raise the Stinger Assembly 1-
inch (25 mm), and securely tighten the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar.
a. If the Magnet Room ceiling height prohibits insertion of the Dewar Stinger Assembly into the
Dewar, the Dewar must be moved to an area with a higher ceiling height, the Stinger Assembly
inserted, and the Dewar transported back to the Magnet Room.
5.9.11. When the Dewar pressure stabilizes at ≤ 5 psig, close the Pressure Relief Valve.
5.9.12. Attach the selected Cryostat Stinger Assembly (46-294511P1 for 250 liter helium Dewars or 46-
294511P2 for 500 liter helium Dewars) to the Helium Transfer Line.
5.9.13. Install the threaded Coupling Nut 46-318619P1, Retainer Ring 46-260272P1 and O-Ring 46-260342P9
onto the Cryostat Stinger.

5.9.14. Attach the opposite end of the Helium Transfer Line onto the Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.9.15. Make sure the power switch on the electrical control box on the Dewar is in the Off position.
5.9.16. Attach the power extension cord to the power input of the electrical control box on the Dewar.
a. The Dewar heaters are to be “pulsed” in order to control the pressure. Pulsing means turning on
(energizing) the Dewar heaters for 3 (three) seconds and then turning them off (de-energizing).
b. The Dewar pressure must be observed after each pulse. If the Dewar pressure is not high
enough, repeat the pulsing until the desired pressure is reached. Allow 5 to 10 second gaps
between pulses to observe the pressure inside the Dewar.
c. The pulsing should be done during the entire filling process to keep a steady pressure inside the
Dewar. The need for pulsing will vary depending on the amount of liquid inside the Dewar. More
pulsing will be required as the liquid level drops.
5.9.17. Open Helium Vent Valve V2 on the magnet. Turn the Magnet Monitor key switch to the Fill (horizontal)
position. Vent the magnet cryostat pressure to < 1.0 psig.
5.9.18. Partially open the Dewar Stinger Assembly’s valve, and:
a. Allow the liquid helium to purge and precool the Transfer Line Assembly until a liquid plume is
observed exiting the Assembly.
b. Control the Dewar pressure above the magnet pressure by 1.5 psig by “pulsing” the Dewar
heater. Apply the pulsing procedure described in the NOTE above.
c. Never exceed a pressure of 3.5 psig inside the Dewar.
5.9.19. With the plume present, uncap Fill Port V1, fully insert the Cryostat Stinger Assembly, and then
securely tighten the compression fitting on Fill Port V1. If the ceiling height prevents Cryostat Stinger
insertion:
a. Install a Brass Blanking Cap on the Cryostat Stinger Assembly.
b. Remove the Extension from the Cryostat Stinger.
c. Place a brass alligator clip near the top end of the Cryostat Stinger.
d. Partially insert the Extension into Fill Port V1.
e. Reattach the Extension.
5.9.20. Fully open the Dewar Stinger Assembly Valve. If gas is observed escaping from the compression
fitting on Fill Port V1 or on the helium Dewar, use a heat gun to warm the compression fitting and
recheck the tightness of the compression fitting.
5.9.21. Pulse the Dewar heaters to maintain the pressure inside the Dewar. (Maximum transfer efficiency
occurs when the Dewar pressure is near 2 psig.)
a. Normal cryostat pressure during helium fill is approximately 1 psig.
b. Cryostat pressure will rise to just about 1 psig at the beginning of the fill, and then slowly drop
back to around 1 psig.
c. Make sure the cryostat pressure never exceeds 1.5 psig during the fill. If the cryostat pressure
gauge reads > 2.0 psig, stop the fill immediately and check fill equipment for loss of vacuum,
high Dewar pressure, etc.
d. If frost is detected on the transfer line, stop the fill immediately (as if the Dewar is empty) to
avoid a magnet quench.
e. Helium Vent Port V2 should frost up, indicating there is no restriction in the venting circuit.
5.9.22. Check the Magnet Monitor for an increase in the helium level. During the fill process, monitor cryogen
level readings once every minute for the first 5 minutes of the fill and once every 3 minutes thereafter.

5.9.23. If the Magnet Monitor’s helium level reading is not increasing, check the magnet and fill equipment
for frosting or blockage. If the Magnet Monitor reading is decreasing:
a. Stop the fill immediately.
b. Remove the Stinger from the magnet.
c. Contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the
Online Center for additional guidance.
5.9.24. Monitor the Dewar transfer for one or more of the following to prevent blowing helium gas into the
helium vessel:
a. Listen for a whistling sound coming from the transfer line indicating the Dewar is empty.
Depending on equipment and conditions, the whistle may not always be heard.
b. Monitor the Dewar pressure gauge and watch for a decrease in pressure (a decrease in cryostat
pressure could also be caused by an empty gas cylinder).
c. Monitor the percent change on the Magnet Monitor. Stop the transfill when there is no positive
(increasing) change in the meter reading.
d. Make sure the Dewar Stinger remains frost free during the transfill. Frost on the Stinger is one
indicator that helium vapor is being passed. Stop the transfill if frost is present.
5.9.25. When the cryostat is full or when changing helium Dewars:
a. Close the valve on the Dewar Stinger Assembly.
b. Make sure the Dewar heater is OFF.
c. Close the Dewar’s Vent Valve.
d. Open the Dewar’s Pressure Relief Valve.
5.9.26. Remove the Cryostat Stinger from Fill Port V1, and immediately replace the Fill Port Cap. A heat gun
may be required to remove frost from the Fill Port V1 assembly before removing the Stinger.
5.9.27. If additional Dewars are required, change helium Dewars in conformance with Section Changing
Helium Dewars while Using Dewar Heaters before continuing with the Liquid Helium Fill procedure.
5.9.28. Tighten Fill Port V1’s compression fitting to prevent a leak from occurring.
5.9.29. Disconnect the Helium Transfer Line Assembly from the Helium Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.9.30. Make sure the helium Dewar is under 1 psig, and then remove the Helium Dewar Stinger Assembly
from the helium Dewar.
5.9.31. Disconnect the power cord from the Dewar heater control box.
5.9.32. Verify the following Dewar Configuration:
5.9.33. Turn the Magnet Monitor key switch to the normal (vertical) position.
5.9.34. Make sure the vessel pressure is increasing at a rate of 0.11 psig/hour.

5.10. Changing Helium Dewars while Using Dewar Heaters

5.10.1. If performing the fill on a ramped magnet, please take note:
a. Helium gas from the helium transfer line can enter the magnet while Dewars are being changed
if the Cryostat Stinger is left in the Fill Port. This can cause a ramped magnet to quench.
b. Always remove the Cryostat Stinger from the Fill Port and start the Fill Procedure over again
when changing helium Dewars while filling a ramped magnet.
5.10.2. Close Helium Vent Valve V2 on the magnet.
5.10.3. Remove the Stinger and cap Fill Port V1.
5.10.4. Obtain a full liquid helium Dewar. Check the Dewar pressure gauge.
a. If the pressure is > 1 psig, slowly open the Dewar Vent Valve and reduce Dewar pressure to 1
psig.
b. If Dewar pressure does not vent down to 1 psig, verify that the Dewar pressure relief valve is in
the open position. Contact the cryogen supplier immediately.
c. The Pressure Relief Valve is normally open during shipping and storage to prevent excessive
build up of pressure in the Dewar. Therefore, always reopen the Pressure Relief Valve after using
a Dewar.
5.10.5. Obtain appropriate Helium Fill equipment for fill method.
5.10.6. Observe the cryostat pressure gauge. Temporarily open Vent Valve V2 as required to obtain a
pressure of ≤ 0.5 psig.
5.10.7. Verify the Helium Outlet Valve is closed on the full Dewar.
5.10.8. Loosen the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar on the full Dewar.
5.10.9. Remove the ½-inch cap and adapters, exposing the 5/ 8 -inch brass locking collar.
5.10.11. Verify that the Dewar Stinger Assembly Valve is in the closed position, and disconnect the Helium
Transfer Line from the Dewar Stinger Assembly.

5.10.13. Remove the Dewar Stinger Assembly from the empty Dewar.
5.10.14. Wipe off frost or moisture on the Dewar Stinger, and insert the Dewar Stinger Assembly through
the 5/ 8 -inch locking collar until the Stinger Tip contacts the Helium Outlet Valve in the full Dewar.


(Contact is indicated by a pressure increase on the Dewar pressure gauge and by the expulsion of gas
the Dewar's pressure gauge.
5.10.18. When the Dewar Stinger Assembly contacts the bottom of the Dewar:
a. Raise the Stinger assembly 1 inch (25 mm) and securely tighten the threaded 5/ 8 -inch locking
collar.
b. If the Magnet Room ceiling height prohibits the insertion of the Dewar Stinger Assembly into the
Dewar, the Dewar must be moved to an area with a higher ceiling height, the Stinger Assembly
inserted, and the Dewar transported back to the Magnet Room.
5.10.19. When the Dewar pressure stabilizes at 5 psig, close the Pressure Relief Valve.
5.10.20. Attach the Helium Transfer Line onto the Dewar Stinger Assembly.
5.10.21. Attach the Cryostat Stinger to the Transfer Line.
5.10.22. Prepare the empty Dewar as follows:
d. Replace all adapters on Liquid Helium Valve Outlet.

Chapter 6 – Preparations for Field Measurement

6. Preparations for Field Measurement
A Teslameter Probe and Teslameter or a Probe Array and shimming software is used whenever measuring or
monitoring the strength of the magnet's magnetic field. Use a single Teslameter Probe accurately positioned at
the magnet's isocenter whenever measuring the magnet's overall magnetic field strength. Use a Probe Array to
map the magnet's magnetic field strength at a large number of angles within a spherical volume during magnet
shimming. If Universal Field Mapping Fixture is available, install it in conformance with Preparations for Field
Mapping, before ramping the magnet to field. The mapping fixture includes a single probe mounting board for
use during ramping. Both the mapping fixture and Shim Camera Kit are required for shimming.

CONTACT WITH CONNECTORS LEADING TO AN ENERGIZED TESLAMETER CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL
SHOCK. WHENEVER THE INPUT POWER TO THE TESLAMETER IS DISCONNECTED, FOLLOW
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES TO MAKE SURE POWER IS NOT SUPPLIED TO THE TESLAMETER.

NEVER BRING FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL INTO THE MAGNET ROOM. MAKE SURE ALL EQUIPMENT
AND TOOLS USED IN THE MAGNET ROOM ARE NON-FERROMAGNETIC.
Direction 5495019, Revision 001

Page 113 of 607
6.1. Preparations for Field Measurement, Tools and Equipment
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
46-251865G5 1 MetroLab Teslameter Kit
5266042-4 1 Universal Field Mapping Fixture Kit
Field Service Shim Camera, Dual 1.5T and 3.0T
2386028-2 1
(2386028 may be used if working on the 3.0T unit)
Digital Voltmeter (DVM), Volt-Ohm Meter (VOM) or non-
NA 1
contact voltage tester
NA 1 Oscilloscope (optional)
5395802 or 1 of the
Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply (5395802 or 5395802-100)
5395802-100 noted
46-260776G4 and configura 1000 Amp ESS 7.5-1000-2-D-1236 Main Power Supply,
46-260777G3 tions (46-260776G4) and Manual Shim Power Supply (46-260777G3)
Cardboard box or nonferromagnetic frame (for field
NA
measurement/monitoring)
Non-ferromagnetic Tape Measure, 6 feet (2 meters) long,
NA
minimum
ramped.
NA 1
Representative)
NA 1 Stopwatch or other timer
Consumables
NOALOX Compound Lubricant (46-252065P65) or mechanical
46-252065P65 1
grease
NA 1 Felt Tip Marker
NA 1 Bottle Isopropyl Alcohol
NA 1 Roll Masking or Duct Tape
10
NA Cable Tie-Wraps
minimum

Page 114 of 607
6.2. Preparation for Field Measurement
When a measurement of overall magnetic field strength is required, only a Single Probe accurately placed
at the isocenter of the magnet is necessary. If performing Field Mapping soon after field
measurement/monitoring (and Universal Field Mapping Fixture is available), set up for field mapping in
conformance with Preparations for Field Mapping, before ramping and use the single probe mounting
board of the mapping fixture during ramping.
requirements stated in the Safety Chapter before starting rampdown procedure.
6.2.2. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete the Connections for
Ramping procedure. Refer to the appropriate Service Methods documentation (available through the
support documentation library at gehealthcare.com or your local GE Healthcare Service
Representative) before continuing with this procedure if cover removal is required.
6.2.3. If needed, undock the Patient Cradle/Table from the magnet dock.
6.2.4. Store the Patient Cradle/Table so access is not restricted to the magnet or entrance to the Magnet
Room.
6.2.5. The Magnet Bore should be clear for mounting and operating the Field Mapping Fixture.
6.2.6. Mount the appropriate Probe on a cardboard box or non-ferromagnetic frame. Images shown below
(Teslameter Probe Set-Up, Mapping Fixture).
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: Use the No. 5 Teslameter Probe (46-255839P104)
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit : Use the No. 6 Teslameter Probe (2295525-5)
Teslameter Probe Set-Up for

Field Measurement/Monitoring

Page 115 of 607
Universal Mapping Fixture 5266042-4

(MR750 configuration shown)
6.2.7. Position the box or frame along the magnet's Z-Axis half way between the bore's patient and service
ends.
6.2.8. Verify that the Probe is centered on the magnet's X, Y and Z Axes.
6.2.9. Make sure input power to the Teslameter is disconnected. Lockout/tagout Teslameter input power.
Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
6.2.10. Connect the probe to the Teslameter and set up the Teslameter in conformance with Teslameter
Adjustment and Resynchronization.

Page 116 of 607
6.3. Teslameter Adjustment and Resynchronization
6.3.1. Make sure input power to the Teslameter is disconnected. Lockout/tagout Teslameter input power.
6.3.2. Mount and center the Teslameter Probe in the magnet's bore.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit : Use the No. 6 Teslameter Probe (2295525-5)
♦ If a detailed map of the magnet's magnetic field is required, assemble Universal Field Mapping
Fixture Kit (5266042-4) and mount the Probe in conformance with Passive Shimming.
6.3.3. Use R = 0 and Z = 0 measurements to check that the Teslameter Probe is at the physical center of the
magnet bore.
6.3.4. If you are using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply (5395802 or 5395802-100):
♦ Set the DIP switches on the back of the Teslameter (shown below). Set switches 1 and 7 to ONE
and the other DIP switches to ZERO.
♦ Connect the DB25 end of the RS232 cable to the RS232 port on the back of the Teslameter.
♦ Connect the DB9 end of the RS232 cable to the connector on the back of the Auto-Ramp Shim
power supply.
♦ If Teslameter communication is not detected, the software will not enable the Auto-Ramp+Park
feature.
6.3.5. Remove lockout/tagout and connect input power to the Teslameter.
6.3.6. Turn on AC power to the Teslameter. (Shown below.)
Teslameter Front and Back Views

Page 117 of 607
6.3.7. Set the Manual/Auto Switch to the appropriate position:
♦ If using the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply (5395802 or 5395802-100), set the Teslameter to the
Auto mode, not Manual mode.
♦ If using a manual ramp power supply (46-260776G4), set the Teslameter in the Manual mode.
♦ If the Manual/Auto Switch is not in its Manual position when magnetic field search begins during
ramping, its sweep is in the ±1 Tesla range, and the system could lock on to the mechanical
oscillation harmonic of the Shield Cooler Coldhead resulting in an erroneous reading.
♦ If the probe locks on incorrectly go to Teslameter Resynchronization.
6.3.8. Set the Coarse and Fine Field Search controls fully counterclockwise (CCW ).
6.3.9. Set the Freq./Field Switch to the “Field” position.
♦ The Teslameter is now set up and prepared to start monitoring magnetic field strength.
♦ The Teslameter will not lock in on the probe's signal until the magnetic field is ≈ 0.7T when using
a #5 probe or 1.5T when using a #6 probe.

Page 118 of 607
6.4. Teslameter Adjustment for Ramp Up
Skip this section if you are using the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply (P/N 5395802 or 5395802-100).
6.4.1. Once ramping has started, monitor the Power Supply's Current Meter until an indication of
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≈ 355 amps
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≈ 175 amps
is approached, then start monitoring the Teslameter.
6.4.2. As the developing magnetic field approaches the lower limit of the Teslameter probe
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≈ 0.7 Tesla with the No. 5 Probe (46-255839P104)
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≈ 1.5 Tesla with the No. 6 Probe (2295525-5)
the “Strobe Lock” LED will start blinking.
♦ When this LED goes out, reposition the Manual/Auto Switch to the “Lock" position.
♦ If the signal does not lock in, reposition of the Probe Modulation Switch.
6.4.3. As the magnetic field continues to increase, the "HI" LED above the Coarse Field Search control will
light. Turn the Coarse Field Search control clockwise (CW) until the LED is extinguished (goes out).
6.4.4. As the magnetic field increases, the resonant frequency of the probe sample will increase above the
Teslameter's range setting.
♦ Periodically increase the setting of the Coarse Field Search control to keep the Teslameter locked
on the probe sample.
♦ The Fine Field Search control does not function when the Manual/Auto Switch is in the “Locked”
position.

Page 119 of 607
6.5. Teslameter Adjustment for Ramp Down
Skip this section if you are using the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply (P/N 5395802 or 5395802-100).
6.5.1. Increase the Coarse Field Search control setting until a magnetic field reading of
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≈ 1.5 Tesla
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≈ 3.0 Tesla
is obtained. This should occur near but slightly below the actual magnetic field.
6.5.2. Slowly start increasing the Fine Field Search control. When the “Strobe Lock” LED stops blinking and
remains out, reposition the Manual/Auto Switch to the “Locked" position. If the signal will not lock on,
reposition of the Probe Modulation Switch.
6.5.3. Once the Teslameter is locked onto the magnetic field, either the “LO" or “HI" LED will be lit. Turn the
Coarse Field Search control counterclockwise (CCW) if the “LO” LED lit or clockwise (CW) if the “HI” LED
is lit. Slowly the lit LED will go out and stay out.
6.5.4. As the magnetic field decreases, the resonant frequency of the probe sample will decrease below
Teslameter's range setting.
♦ Periodically decrease the Coarse Field Search control to keep the Teslameter locked on the probe
sample.
♦ The Fine Field Search control does not function when the Manual/Auto Switch is in the “Locked”
position.

Page 120 of 607
6.6. Teslameter Resynchronization
If the Teslameter should go out of sync while ramping the magnet up (or down), it can easily be
resynchronized by the following procedure.
6.6.1. Manual Resynchronization
a. Reposition the Manual/Auto Switch to “Manual".
b. The “Strobe Lock” LED will be on and both the “LO" and “HI" LEDs will be oscillating, indicating a
search mode.
c. Read the Main Power Supply's Current Meter.
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Multiply the meter's present current reading by 20 gauss (since there's ≈
20 gauss/amp).
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Multiply the meter's present current reading by 50 gauss (since
there's ≈ 50 gauss/amp).
d. Reset the Current Meter to this calculated value.
e. Slowly start increasing (if ramping up) the Coarse and/or Fine Field Search control while
monitoring the “Strobe Lock” LED.
f. Once the “Strobe Lock” LED light extinguishes, quickly place the Manual/Auto Switch to the
“Locked" position. The meter will now be synchronized.
g. If the “HI" LED is lit, the Coarse Field Search control will have to be turned clockwise (CW) until
the LED goes out. Repeat this adjustment as required until the parking field Is reached.
6.6.2. Manual Resynchronization Using an Oscilloscope
a. An oscilloscope can be set up near the Teslameter to display and trigger on the Field Modulation
signal from a jack on the Teslameter's front panel. Adjust the time base to display one or two
ramp waveforms. On the second channel, display the “NMR Signal" from the Teslameter's front
panel.
b. Leave the Teslameter's Manual/Auto Switch in the “Locked" position.
c. Slowly turn the Coarse Field Search control in the direction the magnetic field is going (i.e., if the
magnetic field is increasing, turn the control towards the higher numbers; if the magnetic field is
decreasing, turn the control towards the lower numbers).
d. As the meter is approaching the actual magnetic field, the baseline of the "FID" display will start
to wander. Once the meter is in range of the magnetic field, the "FID" will appear on the scope
trace as the meter locks on.
e. When locked on, the “Strobe Lock” LED will be out. Slightly readjust the Coarse Field Search
control counterclockwise (if the “LO” LED lit) or clockwise (if the “HI” LED is lit) until the lit LED
goes out.
f. Maintain tracking through end of ramp sequence.

Page 121 of 607
Chapter 7 – Ramping
7. Ramping


PROCEDURE GENERATES ODORLESS, COLORLESS HELIUM GAS THAT DISPLACES OXYGEN IN THE AIR.
MAKE SURE THE MAGNET ROOM VENT EXHAUST FAN IS ON AND THE MAGNET ROOM DOOR IS
PROPPED OPEN (OR THE HATCH IN A MOBILE VAN IS OPENED), BEFORE BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.
POTENTIAL ASPHYXIATION HAZARD OR COLD BURN HAZARD!

INTERNAL CRYOSTAT PRESSURE BUILD-UP TO >5.25 PSIG WILL OPEN THE 5.25 PSIG RELIEF VALVE.
BEFORE REMOVING EITHER RAMP OR FILL PORT CAPS OR LOOSENING ANY COMPONENT RESULTING IN
THE RELEASE OF CRYOGEN PRESSURE:
1. OBSERVE THE INTERNAL CRYOSTAT PRESSURE GAUGE READING,
2. SET MAGNET MONITOR PRESSURE TO 0.5 PSIG.

PROCEDURE.
EXPLOSION HAZARD!
LIQUID CRYOGENS CAN LIQUEFY ATMOSPHERIC OXYGEN, PRODUCING A HIGHLY COMBUSTIBLE
OXYGEN LIQUID. NO SMOKING IN MAGNET AND CRYOGEN STORAGE ROOMS!

CONTACT WITH CONNECTORS LEADING AN ENERGIZED POWER SUPPLY TO CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL
SHOCK.
• ALWAYS WEAR APPROPRIATE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) - ELECTRICALLY INSULATED
GLOVES, NONFERROUS SAFETY SHOES AND SAFETY GLASSES/GOGGLES - WHILE PERFORMING THE
CONNECTIONS FOR RAMPING PROCEDURE.
• FOLLOW LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES WHILE MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO A MAIN
POWER SUPPLY.

Page 122 of 607

TOUCHING BOTH MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS AT THE SAME TIME OR ALLOWING THEM TO CONTACT EACH
OTHER WHILE THE MAGNET IS AT FIELD WILL RESULT IN A RAPID DISCHARGE THROUGH THEIR
CONTACT POINTS IF THE SWITCH HEATER IS ACTIVATED OR CIRCUIT RESISTANCE DEVELOPS AT THAT
MOMENT. DO NOT TOUCH BOTH MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS AT THE SAME TIME. DO NOT ALLOW THE
MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS TO CONTACT EACH OTHER.

DO NOT ALLOW EXPOSED BODY AREAS TO COME IN CONTACT WITH THE CRYOSTAT OR PLUMBING
WHILE INSERTING OR EXTRACTING THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS.
HIGH VOLTAGE POTENTIAL

WHEN USING THE RAMP SUPPLY TO BUILD PRESSURE IN THE MAGNET, MAKE SURE THAT THE RAMP
LEADS ARE DISCONNECTED, PLACE ELECTRICAL TAPE ON THE RAMP LEAD SUPPLY OUTPUTS AND DO
NOT ENERGIZE THE MAIN RAMP SUPPLY BY TURNING THE SWITCH ON THE FRONT OF THE RAMP
SUPPLY ON. THE POWER SWITCH ON THE REAR OF THE RAMP SUPPLY IS THE ONLY SWITCH THAT
NEEDS TO BE TURNED ON TO POWER THE AXIAL/BØ SWITCH HEATER.
HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD!

CARDIAC PACEMAKERS, NEUROSTIMULATORS (OR OTHER BIOSTIMULATORS), STEEL PLATES AND
FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS WILL BE ADVERSELY AFFECTED BY THE STRONG
MAGNETIC FIELD.
• NOTIFY SITE ADMINISTRATION BEFORE RAMPING THE MAGNET THAT ALL MAGNETIC SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN.
• POST WARNING SIGNS OUTSIDE THE 5 GAUSS ZONE TO ALERT PERSONNEL WITH CARDIAC
PACEMAKERS, NEUROSTIMULATORS OR OTHER BIOSTIMULATORS NOT TO PROCEED INTO THE
DESIGNATED AREA. POST THESE SIGNS ON THE MAGNET ROOM LEVEL AS WELL AS AREAS BELOW THE
MAGNET TO WHICH THE 5 GAUSS ZONE EXTENDS. SEE CHAPTER 1, MR MAGNET - SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS.
• POST “RAMPED MAGNET” AND “AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY” WARNING SIGNS AT THE MAGNET
ROOM ENTRANCE AND AT THE MR SUITE ENTRANCE, RESPECTIVELY, PRIOR TO RAMPING THE MAGNET.
WARNINGS ARE TO ALERT PERSONNEL THAT NO FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL OR INDIVIDUALS WITH
CARDIAC PACEMAKERS, NEUROSTIMULATORS OR STEEL PLATES ARE ALLOWED IN THE MAGNET ROOM
WHEN THE MAGNET IS RAMPED.

BE PREPARED FOR EMERGENCIES.
MAKE SURE THE MAGNET RUNDOWN UNIT (MRU) IS INSTALLED AND OPERATIONAL TO ENABLE THE
MAGNETIC FIELD TO BE QUICKLY DISCHARGED IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY.

Page 123 of 607

IMPROPER ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT OF THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS WITH THE MAIN LEAD
PINS CAN CAUSE A RAMPED MAGNET TO QUENCH. INSERT MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS ONE AT A TIME
AND, IF THE MAGNET IS AT FIELD, ALLOW THEM TO COOL SUFFICIENTLY (A FOG OR WATER VAPOR
FORMS AROUND THE LEAD EXTENSIONS) BEFORE THEY CONTACT THE MAIN LEAD PINS.

MISWIRING CAN RESULT IN A MAGNET QUENCH.

THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH, RAPIDLY RELEASING CRYOGENIC GASES, IF ITS LIQUID HELIUM LEVEL
DROPS TOO LOW DURING THE RAMPING PROCEDURE. MAKE SURE THE MAGNET MEETS HELIUM LEVEL
REQUIREMENTS BEFORE STARTING THE RAMPING PROCEDURE.

THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH AND THE COILS BECOME DAMAGED IF THE AXIAL/BØ SWITCH HEATERS
ARE NOT ON DURING RAMPING. MAKE SURE THE AXIAL/BØ SWITCH HEATERS ARE ON DURING
RAMPING TO PREVENT COIL DAMAGE AND A MAGNET QUENCH. (GE POWER SUPPLIES HAVE
PROTECTIVE CIRCUITRY TO PREVENT RAMPING VOLTAGE WITH THE AXIAL HEATER SWITCH IN THE OFF
POSITION.)

PLUGGING THE FLOW HOLE OF AN ENGAGED MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS WILL CAUSE THE MAGNET TO
QUENCH. DO NOT INSERT FLOW HOLE SCREWS INTO MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS UNTIL AFTER
EXTENSIONS ARE REMOVED.

Page 124 of 607

UNACCEPTABLE INTERNAL CONTACT RESISTANCE AT THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS CAN RESULT IN
MAGNET QUENCH. HIGHER RESISTANCES WILL ADD MORE HEAT TO THE MAGNET, INCREASING BOIL-
OFF AND POSSIBLY CAUSING A QUENCH DURING RAMPING. MAKE SURE THE VOLTAGE READINGS ARE
≤100mV AT 750 AMPS FOR THE 1.5T LCC (R SERIES) MAGNET OR ≤100mV AT 375 AMPS FOR THE 3.0T
LCC (W, WB SERIES) MAGNET.

CONTACT BETWEEN THE BRASS BOLTS SECURING THE POWER CABLES TO THE MAIN LEAD
EXTENSIONS (46-294204G1) AND THE FILL PORT (V1) CAP CAN QUENCH THE MAGNET. MAKE SURE THE
BRASS BOLTS ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY.

EXCESS POWER CABLE MOTION DURING RAMPING MAY DISRUPT CONTACT BETWEEN THE MAIN LEAD
EXTENSIONS AND THE MAIN LEAD CONTACT PINS. THIS CAN CAUSE THE MAGNET TO QUENCH. SECURE
THE MAIN POWER CABLES USING TIE-WRAPS AND THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS USING A RAMP LEAD
HOLD DOWN TOOL.

THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH IF THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY EXPERIENCES LARGE OUTPUT FLUCTUATIONS
AND/OR EXCESSIVE RIPPLE. MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS ROUTINELY CALIBRATED AT AN
APPROVED FACILITY.

BLOCKED MAIN LEAD EXTENSION VENT HOLES CAN ALLOW THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN THE MAIN LEAD
EXTENSIONS AND THE MAIN LEAD CONTACT PINS TO DROP. THIS CAN CAUSE THE MAGNET TO
QUENCH. MAKE SURE THE VENT HOLES IN THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS ARE NOT BLOCKED.

Page 125 of 607
7.1. Ramping, Tools and Test Equipment
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
5395802 or 1 of the
5395802-100 noted
46-294204G1 or Fixed Main Lead Extension (46-294204G1) or Flexible Main
1
2287029 Lead Extension (2287029, for low ceiling height sites)
2353394-3 1 1000 Amp Ramp Cable Kit with Ground (2353394-4)
Hold-Down Tool (2193922) or
Short Version (2276755) for sites with Low Ceiling Height or
2193922 or
LCC300 Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool (5116737) (only for use
2276755 or 1
when LHe top-off is planned immediately after parking at the
5116737
end of Initial Rampdown; included in Field Service Tools
Collector 5103278)
2135558 1 Field Shim Kit
Retractable Shim Lead Assembly (2173354) or
2173354 or
1 Retractable Shim Lead Assembly, Short (2285073) for site with
2285073
low ceiling height
NA 1 Digital Volt Meter

Page 126 of 607
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Direction 5124576, “Magnet Monitor 3 Operation & Hardware
5124576 1
Installation” if site has Magnet Monitor 3
NA 1 Stopwatch or other timer
Consumables
NA 6 Cable Tie-Wraps
46-318068P1 1 pkg Bronze Wool
NA 1 Scotch-BriteTM Scour Pads (or equivalent)
Replacement Parts
Main Lead Extension Contact Band (included in Magnet
46-281256P1 2
Ramping Equipment Kit 46-260703G7)

Page 127 of 607
7.2. Ramping, Required Conditions
7.2.1. Make sure the Power Supply Cabinets are installed and checked in conformance with the supplier's
manual that is supplied with the unit before making any power supply connections to the magnet.
7.2.2. Engineering advises that all ramp power supplies be powered through the PDU at the supplied
outlets.
requirements stated in the following document before starting Connections for Ramping procedure.
7.2.4. Perform the Shim Lead Connector and Vertical Penetration Deicing subsection of the Ice Removal
procedure to make sure the Shim Lead connector plug (P100) is functional prior to making power
supply connections. Remove ice as required.
7.2.6. If the site Magnet Monitor is configured for proprietary mode, set the Magnet Monitor 3 into service
mode via the front display soft keys. In the “controls” section of the MM3 proprietary software set the
heater off pressure to 0.5 psi and the heater on pressure to 0.4 psi.
7.2.7. The Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate with side shield must be installed when
working on the magnet to protect side-mounted components from damage.
7.2.8. Locate the Main Power Supply outside the magnet room, and remove all loose ferromagnetic
materials from the magnet room before starting to ramp the magnet to field.
7.2.9. Make sure the liquid helium level is
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≥80%
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≥95%
before starting the Ramping Procedure.
7.2.10. Make sure the magnet room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting the Ramping
Procedure.
7.2.11. Make sure the magnet room door is propped open (or the hatch is opened if a mobile van) before
starting the Ramping Procedure.

Page 128 of 607
7.2.12. Perform Shim Lead Electrical Checks
♦ Make sure the magnet is at zero field before starting the Magnet Electrical Checks procedure.
♦ All measured superconducting coils must be cold (4.2K) for the Main Coil and Shim Coil resistance
♦ Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Magnet Electrical
Checks.
a. Engage the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
b. Locate the Shim Lead Connector Housing (shown below, in disengaged position for clarity).
c. Locate the connector pins as noted in the following tables. Use a digital meter to measure the
resistance across the identified connector pins. Take note and utilize the appropriate table for
the unit under test.
◊ Magnet Circuits Resistance Checks, Main Coil, Cold (4.2K)
◊ Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K), Measured on Shim Lead
◊ Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K), Measured on Shim Lead Pigtail
Cable

Page 129 of 607
d. Report any reading outside of the acceptable range to the Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC)
Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center for future investigation before
ramping the magnet.

Resistance (Ohms)
Pins Typical
J5-1 on Shim Lead 9, 10 <6 <6

Shim PS
W, WB Pins R W WB
Setting R Series
AX1 Z1 Z1 1, 19
AX2 Z2 Z2 2, 20
0.2 – 0.6
AX3 Z3 Z3 3, 21
AX4 Z4 Z4 4, 22
AX5 Z5 Z5 5, 23 NA
AX6 Z6 Z6 6, 24 NA
T1-1 C31 Z(X2-Y2) 13, 23
T1-2 C11+ X 16, 19
T1-3 C22+ Z2X 14, 21 0.2 – 0.6
P1-A 0.3 – 0.5 0.2 – 0.8
T1-4 C11- ZX 17, 20
T1-5 C22- X2-Y2 15, 22
T1-6 C33 X3 18, 24 NA
T2-1 S31 ZXY 11, 23
T2-2 S11+ Y 9, 19
T2-3 S22+ Z2Y 7, 21 0.2 – 0.6
T2-4 S11- ZY 10, 20
T2-5 S22- XY 8, 22
T2-6 S33 Y3 12, 24 NA
27 -33 or 12 - 15 or
22 – 28A 8.5 - 12B
J5-2
Transverse 1 7, 6 8 – 10 8.5 - 12 13 - 16
Transverse 2 8, 6 8 – 10 8.5 - 12 13 - 16

Page 130 of 607
Shim PS
W, WB Pins R W WB
Setting R Series
AX1 Z1 Z1 P2
AA, (K, L)
AX2 Z2 Z2 P2-W
0.2 – 0.7
AX3 Z3 Z3 P2
B, (M, N)
AX4 Z4 Z4 P2-W
AX5 Z5 Z5 P2 NA
C, P
AX6 Z6 Z6 P2-W NA
T1-1 C31 Z(X2-Y2) D, P
T1-2 C11+ X P2 F, (K, L)
T1-3 C22+ Z2X G, (M, N) 0.2 – 0.7
0.3 – 0.6 0.2 – 0.8
T1-4 C11- ZX F, (K, L)
T1-5 C22- X2-Y2 P2-W G, (M, N)
T1-6 C33 X3 D, P NA
T2-1 S31 ZXY E, P
T2-2 S11+ Y P2 H, (K, L)
T2-3 S22+ Z2Y J, (M, N) 0.2 – 0.7
T2-4 S11- ZY H, (K, L)
T2-5 S22- XY P2-W J, (M, N)
T2-6 S33 Y3 E, P NA

Page 131 of 607
7.3. Connections for Ramping
7.3.1. Make sure the Shim Lead Assembly is engaged in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
7.3.2. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Shim Coil Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is present by
using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
7.3.3. Connect electrical cabling to the S/C Shim Coil Power Supply.
Shim Power Supply Connections
7.3.4. Remove LOTO from Shim Coil Power Supply.

Page 132 of 607
7.3.5. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Coil Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is present by
7.3.6. If you are using a manual power supply (P/N 46-260776G4), connect electrical cabling to the Main Coil
Power Supply as shown below.
a. Connect red cables to the positive (+) Bus Bar and black cables to the negative (-) Bus Bar. (Three
red and two black cables are connected in parallel to the bus bars for a 1,000 amp power
supply.)
b. Make sure the cable lugs and/or exposed wire from the Ramp Cables are not touching the case
of the Main Coil Power Supply.
c. Either Heater Connector J5-1 or J5-2 can be used to turn on the heater(s). Do not connect two
heater cables at the same time.
7.3.7. If you are using an auto power supply (5395802 or 5395802-100), connect electrical cabling to the
Main Coil Power Supply as shown below.
a. Connect red cables to the positive (+) Bus Bar and black cables to the negative (-) Bus Bar. (Two
red and two black cables are connected in parallel to the bus bars).
b. Make sure the cable lugs and/or exposed wire from the Ramp Cables are not touching the case
of the Main Coil Power Supply.
c. Either Heater Connector J5-1 or J5-2 can be used to turn on the heater(s). Do not connect two
heater cables at the same time.
Magnet Power Supply Connections,

Auto Ramp Supply Shown

Page 133 of 607
7.3.8. Using brass wool or scouring pads, clean all connections on the Main Leads and Main Lead Extensions
to prevent high resistance contacts and minimize voltage drops. Pay special attention to clean the
pin contact area/pin interface area.
7.3.9. Make sure all nuts are tightened sufficiently to prevent a high resistance contact.
7.3.10. Visually inspect ramping cables; ensure they are intact & free of cuts, burns, damage.
7.3.11. Replace the Contact Bands on the Main Lead Extensions in conformance Main Lead Extension Contact
Band Replacement before starting the ramp procedure.
7.3.12. Make sure the gas flow holes are not blocked on the main lead extensions.
7.3.13. Make sure Main Lead Extensions 46-294204G1 are used for the Connections for Ramping procedure
when the ceiling height is >103 in. (2616 mm) as measured from finished floor to lowest point above
magnet. Use Flexible Main Lead Extensions 2287029 in low ceiling height conditions.
Main Lead Extensions
Contact Bands
(Pin Interface Area)

Page 134 of 607
7.3.14. Connect Power Supply Jumper Cable.
♦ Note: Always install the Pre-Ramp Grounding Circuit and verify Main Lead Extension grounding
to Cryostat ground before inserting or extracting any Main Lead Extension.
♦ Note: Once the Main Lead Extensions are inserted, disconnect and remove the Power Supply
Jumper Cable from the power supply while wearing non-absorbent leather gloves with NO holes
or tears. This removes the short across the power supply and enables magnet ramping up and
down. The Power Supply Grounding Cable should remain connected while ramping up and down.
a. Disconnect the female twist connector lugs from the 3ft (1M) Power Supply Jumper Cable and
connect the lugs to the positive (+) and negative (-) power supply output terminals. See
illustration below.
Power Supply
Female Twist Female Twist

Connector Connector
Negative (-)
Terminal Positive (+) Terminal
Power Supply Ground
Negative (-) Cable
Power Cables
Positive (+) Power
Cables
b. Connect one twist connector lug of the Power Supply Jumper Cable to the power supply’s
positive (+) terminal. Make sure the twist connector is fully engaged. See below.
Female twist
connector
with lug
Male twist connector
c. Connect the other twist connector lug of the Jumper Cable to the power supply’s negative (-)
terminal. Make sure the twist connector is fully engaged.
d. Connect the 0.375in. lug of the 50ft. Power Supply Grounding Cable to the power supply’s
positive (+) terminal.

Page 135 of 607
e. Connect the Grounding Cable’s 0.5in. lug to the magnet’s grounding lug. See below for images of
grounding stud location example on the magnet feet. NOTE: If the magnet’s grounding
connected to the RF Common Bus Bar at the Penetration Panel, the 50ft. Power Supply
Grounding Cable can be connected between the power supply and the magnet or PDU ground
wire clamp on the RF Common Bus Bar if more convenient. If the magnet is not grounded to the
Penetration Panel, the Grounding Cable must be connected to the Cryostat Grounding Stud.
f. Verify that the resistance between the Vacuum Vessel at the Vertical Penetration and each Main
Lead Extension connection is an open circuit as read on a DVM or equivalent. See below.
Vertical Penetration DVM Main Lead Extension (1

shown)

Page 136 of 607
7.3.15. When using ONLY Fixed Main Lead Extensions 46-294204G1, connect the other end of the Main Power
Cables to the Main Lead Extensions with the 1 inch (25.4 mm) brass bolts as shown below. Secure the
bolts with the brass nuts and brass washers provided. Tighten the connections sufficiently to provide
a good electrical connection.
Hardware Mounting on Fixed Main Lead Extensions 46-294204G1
Contact Band
(Pin Interface Area)
7.3.16. Only use brass washers when connecting Main Leads to the Main Lead Extensions to keep voltage
drop to a minimum. Note: Main Lead connections for Flexible Main Lead Extensions 2287029 are
made after lead insertion.
7.3.17. Install the 10-32 UNF Gas Flow Hole Screws into the gas flow holes on each Main Lead Extension.

Page 137 of 607
7.3.18. Open the Vent valve V2, ensure the Controlled Zero Boil-Off (C0BO) heater on the Magnet Monitor is in
the Off position, and vent to < 0.5 psig.
7.3.19. Close vent valve V2.

7.3.20. Remove the Positive (+) Ramp Port Cap located on the magnet's vertical stack. (Shown below.) Make
sure the gasket inside the cap does not get lost.
Ramp and Fill Ports
Positive (+) Negative (-)

Ramp Port Cap Ramp Port Cap
Helium Fill
Port Cap

Page 138 of 607
7.3.21. If the magnet is at zero field, insert Main Lead Extension straight down until it engages the power pin.
DO NOT let the lead sit partially inserted and get cold. If the magnet is at NON-zero field, insert Main
Lead Extensions slowly (over a one minute duration) giving enough time to let them cool-down.
Engage Power Pins when Main Lead Extensions are cold.
♦ While doing so, monitor the pressure gauge and do not allow pressure variation to exceed 1.0
psig. Open V2 as required to vent.
♦ The Main Lead Extensions will depress approximately 1 in. (25 mm) from the point of contact to
the fully engaged position.
♦ A firm resistance will be felt when fully engaged.
♦ Do not rotate the Main Lead Extensions excessively when in the engaged position as internal
contact band wear could result.
♦ If using Flexible Main Lead Extensions 2287029, bend the lead extension to a 45° angle in order
to clear the ceiling when inserting the lead. Allow the flexible lead to straighten out and pre-cool
before full insertion. The lead must be in its straight position to prevent cooling exhaust helium
from escaping the coils.
7.3.22. Loosely screw the compression nut onto the Ramp Lead Port.
7.3.23. While pressing down on the top of the lead, rotate it back and forth (about 15° in each direction from
initial position), raise it 0.5 inch up, re-engage it and rotate again.
7.3.24. Repeat process for the Negative (-) Ramp Lead.
7.3.25. When using Flexible Main Lead Extensions 2287029 (only), connect the other end of the Main Power
Cables to the Main Lead Extensions with the 1 inch (25.4 mm) brass bolts as shown below. Secure the
bolts with the brass nuts and brass washers provided. Tighten the connections sufficiently to provide
a good electrical connection. Only use brass washers when connecting Main Leads to the Main Lead
Extensions to keep voltage drop to a minimum.
Hardware Mounting
on Flexible Main Lead
Extensions 2287029

Page 139 of 607
7.3.26. Connect the Voltage Sense Leads to the Main Lead Extension's Voltage Sense Screw Lugs (shown
below and in Hold-Down Tool illustration) to allow for correct placement of the Ramp Lead Hold-Down
Tool. Terminate the other end of the Voltage Sense Leads to a DVM or VOM placed near the Main Coil
Power Supply.
7.3.27. Remove the flow hole screws.

7.3.28. Make sure gas flow holes in the Main Lead Extension are not blocked and that helium gas is exiting
the holes.

Page 140 of 607
7.3.29. Install a Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool:
a. Make sure the heads of the Main Lead Extensions are oriented to match the grooves or them in
the underside of the hold-down tool being used.
b. Screw the mounting studs of the Hold-Down Tool into the mounting holes welded onto the Main
Lead Base Plate. See illustration below.
c. Install the Hold-Down Tool onto the mounting bolts. Make sure that the Main Leads fit into the
slots on the plate. See illustration below.
d. Tighten the Nuts on top of the Hold-Down Tool to lock the tool firmly in place and prevent Main
Lead motion. While tightening the nuts, adjust the leveling screw to keep the tool level. See
illustration below.
Hold-Down Tool

Page 141 of 607
7.3.30. Using a Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool is required to minimize motion of the Main Leads and aid in
getting good contact resistance. Excess power cable motion during ramping may disrupt contact
between the Main Lead Extensions and the Main Lead Contact Pins. This can cause the magnet to
quench.
7.3.31. Verify that the vent holes in the Main Lead Extensions are not blocked. Blocked Main Lead Extension
vent holes can allow the voltage between the Main Lead Extensions and the Main Lead Contact Pins
to drop. This can cause the magnet to quench. Make sure the vent holes in the Main Lead Extensions
are not blocked.
7.3.32. After installing the Main Leads and Hold-Down Tool, secure the Main Power Cables using tie-wraps (a
field-supplied item). The cables should be secured to each other and to convenient fixed points, such
as the shroud rails, to prevent their movement.
7.3.33. Disconnect Power Supply Jumper Cable.

Page 142 of 607
7.4. Preparations for Ramping Magnet to Field
7.4.1. Make sure Magnet Monitor's Level 1 and Level 2 helium level readings are approximately equal.
♦ If problems are found, troubleshoot before ramping.
♦ Refer to Direction 5124576, Magnet Monitor 3 Operation & Hardware Installation for Magnet
Monitor 3 (or the appropriate Service Methods documentation) if Magnet Monitor calibration is
required.
before starting the Ramping Procedure. If necessary, fill the magnet in conformance with Liquid
Helium Fill.
7.4.3. Set up the MetroLab Teslameter (46-255839P2) and appropriate Teslameter Probe for general
magnetic field strength monitoring in conformance with Preparations for Field Measurement.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: Use the No. 6 Teslameter Probe (2295525-5)
7.4.4. Check for ice on the Shim Lead Connector and the Recondensor. Deice in conformance with the Shim
Lead Connector and Sav-Con (vertical penetration deicing) subsection of Replacement and
Maintenance Chapter before ramping the magnet.
7.4.5. Make sure the Shim Lead Assembly is Engaged in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
7.4.6. Make sure the Vent Valve V2 is closed before ramping the magnet.
Location of V2 Valve
7.4.7. Make sure that the Main Power Supply and Shim Power Supply is installed, checked, and adjusted in
conformance with the vendor manual supplied with the unit.
7.4.8. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply (and to the Shim Power Supply at mobile
sites). Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
7.4.9. Connect the Main Power Supply (and to the Shim Power Supply at mobile sites) to the magnet by
making all cable connections in conformance with Connections for Ramping.

Page 143 of 607
7.4.10. Set all heater switches on the power supply to the OFF position. Set the Current Adjust and Voltage
controls to zero (fully CCW).
7.4.11. Remove LOTO and connect input power to the Main Power Supply (and to the Shim Power Supply at
mobile sites).
ESS7.5-1000-2-D-1236 Superconducting Main Coil Service Power Supply Cabinet,

Manual Power Supply (46-260776G4)
Auto Ramp Shim Power Supply Power Connections (5395802 or 5395802-100)

Page 144 of 607
Shim Coil Power Supply Controls

(Front Panel)
Magnet Polarity Ramped Normal

Page 145 of 607
7.5. Ramping and Parking with Manual Ramping Power Supply (P/N 46-260776G4)
7.5.1. Make sure the magnet is at zero field before starting the pre-ramp Magnet Electrical Checks. All
measured superconducting coils must be cold (4.2K) for the Main Coil and Axial/BØ Coil resistance
7.5.2. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Magnet Electrical
Checks. Refer to the Cover Removal section within this manual or the appropriate Service Methods
documentation (available through the support documentation library at gehealthcare.com or your
local GE Healthcare Service Representative) before continuing with this procedure if cover removal is
required.
7.5.3. For 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnets: Closely monitor the liquid helium level in the magnet during
ramp. When the level is reduced to 65%, immediately stabilize the field, park the magnet and
disconnect/remove ramping connections and top-off magnet as instructed within the content of this
procedure.
7.5.4. Make sure the Current Adjust and Voltage Adjust controls on the Main Power Supply are OFF (fully
CCW).
7.5.5. Set the Main Power Supply's Main Power and Power On switches to ON. There are duplicate Main
Power and Power On switches on the front and back of the Main Power Supply.
7.5.6. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF, then set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to I (On).
7.5.7. Ensure the Axial/BØ heater current rises in the Main Power Supply Ammeter to verify circuit
continuity. Reading should be in the following range:
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 600 to 620 mA
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 600 to 620 mA
7.5.8. Confirm that the Digital Voltmeter (DVM) has been connected to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads
(see Connections for Ramping).
7.5.9. Confirm gas flow holes in the Main Lead Extension are not blocked and that helium gas is exiting the
holes.
7.5.10. Set the Current Adjust Coarse Control on the power supply to maximum (fully CW).
7.5.11. Use Voltage Adjustment to obtain a Main Coil current of
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 750 Amps
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 375 Amps
through the Main Leads, Main Lead Extensions, and persistent Main Switch.
♦ Slowly turn the Voltage Adjust control clockwise until CURRENT display reads the desired value.
7.5.12. Observe the contact resistance voltage on the DVM. Voltage Requirements are as follows:
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≤ 150 millivolts at 750 Amps
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps

Page 146 of 607
7.5.13. If the DVM voltage exceeds the required level, perform one or more of the following to reduce contact
resistance:
♦ Required Levels:
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≤ 150 millivolts at 750 Amps
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps
a. Wait approximately 1 minute with current running; readings may drop as the Main Lead
Extensions cool.
b. Tighten the nuts (one flat at a time) on top of the Hold-Down Tool while measuring DVM
readings.
7.5.14. If the reading still exceeds required level:
a. Turn the Voltage and Current Adjust Controls to zero (fully CCW).
b. Turn off the Main Power Supply input power. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main
Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
c. Check and tighten the bolts securing the Ramp Cables to the Power Supply and Main Leads
Extensions.
d. Remove LOTO and reconnect input power to the power supply.
c. Dis-engage hold down tool.
d. Re-engage each lead by raising it up-to 1 inch and lowering down.
e. While pressing down, rotate each lead twice: 15⁰ back and 15⁰ forth from initial position.
(approximately)
f. Repeat re-engagement of each lead by raising it up-to 1 inch up (approximately) and lowering
down.
g. While pressing down, rotate each lead twice: 15⁰ back and 15⁰ forth from initial position
(approximately).
h. Re-engage hold down tool.
i. Remove LOTO and reconnect input power to the power supply.
7.5.16. Repeatedly failing the contact resistance check may indicate one of the following:
♦ The Main Lead Extension Contact Bands replaced as directed in Connections for Ramping are
not performing correctly and need replacing in conformance with Main Lead Extension Contact
Band Replacement.
♦ The Main Leads are damaged and need replacing.
7.5.17. Do not proceed until after the DVM voltage is
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps.

Page 147 of 607
7.5.18. Set the power supply's Voltmeter Select Switch to the MAIN POWER SUPPLY position. This will display
the output at the output lugs of the power supply monitored. A voltage of
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): < 2.2V at 750A
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): < 2.2V at 375A
indicates acceptable system resistance.
7.5.19. If the voltage exceeds the above noted requirements during the test, follow the procedures above for
decreasing contact resistance.
7.5.20. Turn the Current Adjust and Voltage controls OFF (fully CCW).
7.5.21. Commence with Ramping taking note that
♦ Make sure the Axial/BØ switch heaters are on during ramping to prevent coil damage and a
magnet quench. (GE power supplies have protective circuitry to prevent ramping voltage with
the axial heater switch in the OFF position.)
♦ If a quench occurs during ramping, immediately:
a. Turn the Main Power Supply Voltage and Current Controls to zero (fully CCW),
b. Turn off the Power Supply
c. FOR MOBILE UNITS: Turn the Transverse 1 (T1) and Transverse 2 (T2) Shim Heater Switches
on the Shim Power Supply to O (Off) and turn Off the Shim Power Supply,
d. Leave the Magnet Room,
e. Turn off the Cryocooler Compressor outside the magnet room. Do not reenter the magnet
room until the quench is over and the magnet room has been deemed safe for entry.
♦ Ice will form around the flow holes in the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool during ramping. Remove
ice as needed to maintain helium gas flow.
7.5.22. FOR MOBILE UNITS: When both Main (Ramp) and Shim Power Supplies are used at a mobile site, the
shim heater circuits of the two power supplies are connected in parallel. This puts a resistance load
across the Main Coil Voltmeter of approximately 30 ohms. The Main Coil Voltmeter display will be
approximately 90% of the actual voltage across the Main Coil. The ramp profile used in this
subsection compensates for this condition.
7.5.23. Make sure the power supply controls are set as follows:
a. Voltage Adjust Control: zero (fully CCW)
b. Current Adjust Control:
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): maximum (Fully CW)
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 400 Amps
c. Main Power Switches on the Main Power Supply: ON
d. FOR MOBILE UNITS:
◊ Main Power Switches on the Shim Power Supply: ON
◊ Transverse 1 (T1) Shim Heater Switch on the Shim Power Supply: I (On)
◊ Transverse 2 (T2) Shim Heater Switch on the Shim Power Supply: I (On)
◊ The Axial Switch Heater current is supplied by the Main Power Supply. The Transverse 1 and
Transverse 2 Switch Heaters currents are supplied by the Shim Supply. Do not use the Axial
Heater on the Shim Supply as this will increase boil-off.
e. Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch on the Main Power Supply: I (On)
f. Voltmeter Select Switch on the power supply: Main Coil position

Page 148 of 607
7.5.24. Set the Heater 1 Main Switch to I (On), and wait 3 minutes. Heater current should be approximately
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 810 ± 10 mA
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 810 ± 10 mA
7.5.25. Use the appropriate Teslameter Probe to monitor magnetic field strength.
♦ The probe will lock on when the magnet current rises to about
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: 325 amps - this usually occurs around 0.7 Tesla.
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: 175 amps - this usually occurs around 1.5 Tesla.
♦ Visually confirm the Teslameter has locked on before parking the magnet. The Teslameter
indicator turns green when the Metrolab Teslameter is locked onto the magnet frequency/field.
7.5.26. Ramp the magnet in conformance with the Ramping Profile as defined by the appropriate table below
as follows:
a. Slowly turn the power supply's Voltage Control to obtain the Main Coil (Ramp) Voltage value
shown in the table, starting with Stage 1 Main Coil (Ramp) Voltage.
◊ FIXED SITE UNITS ONLY: Three minutes after reaching 6 volts, turn the Main Heater Off, and
adjust as required to maintain the ramp voltage no greater than the ramp profile specified.
b. Monitor the power supply's Current Meter. When the limit of the current range for the voltage
setting is reached, slowly (control the adjustment speed so that the main coil current does not
drop from the present level) turn the Voltage Control to obtain the Main Coil Voltage for the next
current range.
1.5T LCC (R Series) Ramping Profile – FIXED SITE

Main Coil (Ramp) Main Coil (Ramp) Magnet Field
Stage Procedure Change
Voltage Current Range Strength Reached
Three minutes after reaching 6
1 6.00 volts 0 to 100 amps -
volts, turn “OFF” Main Heater
2 5.60 volts 100 to 200 amps
3 5.20 volts 200 to 300 amps
4 4.70 volts 300 to 400 amps
5 4.30 volts 400 to 500 amps
6 3.50 volts 500 to 550 amps
- -
7 3.00 volts 550 to 600 amps
8 2.35 volts 600 to 625 amps
9 2.00 volts 625 to 650 amps
10 1.00 volts 650 to 675 amps
11 0.75 volts 675 to 700 amps
12 0.50 volts 700 to 720 amps
13 0.30 volts 720 to 730 amps When 200 Gauss below Recommended Site Parking
Slowly lower from Field is reached or voltage drops below 0.50 Volts,
14 730 amps turn the Main Switch Heater “ON.
0.30 to 0.10 volts
15 0.10 volts -
Set voltage as
required to Use the “Recommended Site Parking Field” frequency stated in the Field
16
maintain constant Report (ATR).
field

Page 149 of 607
1.5T LCC (R Series) Ramping Profile – MOBILE SITE
1 5.40 volts 0 to 100 amps
2 5.04 volts 100 to 200 amps
3 4.68 volts 200 to 300 amps
4 4.23 volts 300 to 400 amps
5 3.87 volts 400 to 500 amps
6 3.15 volts 500 to 550 amps
7 2.70 volts 550 to 600 amps
8 2.12 volts 600 to 625 amps -
-
9 1.80 volts 625 to 650 amps
10 0.90 volts 650 to 675 amps
11 0.68 volts 675 to 700 amps
12 0.45 volts 700 to 720 amps
13 0.27 volts 720 to 730 amps
Slowly lower from
14 730 amps
0.27 to 0.09 volts
15 0.09 volts - 1.499 Tesla
Set voltage as
required to Use the “Recommended Site Parking Field” frequency stated in the Field
16
maintain constant Report (ATR).
field

Page 150 of 607
3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Ramping Profile

Three minutes after reaching 6
1 6.00 volts 0 to 300 amps
volts, turn “OFF” Main Heater
2 4.00 volts 300 to 335 amps
3 2.00 volts 335 to 350 amps
4 1.00 volts 350 to 355 amps
When the magnet field reaches 200 Gauss below the
“Recommended Site Parking Field” in the Field Report
(ATR) or voltage drops below 0.50 Volts, Turn Main
Switch Heater “ON” and wait for switch to open and
355 amps to final
5 0.50 volts continue ramp until magnet field reaches ±0.5 Gauss
field
of the “Recommended Site Parking Field” in the
Field Report (ATR) then slowly adjust the Voltage
Adjustment Control for 0.1 volts main coil driving
voltage as indicated on the power supply's Voltmeter.

Page 151 of 607
7.5.27. FOR 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnets: Monitor/check the liquid helium level in the magnet every 15-
20 minutes during ramp. When the level is reduced to 65%, immediately stabilize the field, park the
magnet and disconnect/remove ramping connections and apparatus as follows:
a. Turn Main Switch Heater “ON” and wait for switch to open.
b. Slowly adjust the Voltage Adjust control to stabilize the magnet field. The last two digits on the
Teslameter should be the only digits changing.
c. Maintain the field at the stable setting for five minutes before proceeding to the next step.
◊ Observe the Power Supply Voltmeter reading with the Voltmeter Select Switch in the MAIN
COIL position. When the switch goes persistent, the voltage across the magnet terminals
stabilizes at 0.00 V.
d. Turn off the Main Switch Heater, and wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the switch to fully cool
and go persistent.
e. Make note of the current, frequency and lead extension voltage values at which the switch went
persistent in the Magnet Ramping and Parking Current Log.
f. When the switch is persistent, slowly turn the Main Power Supply's Voltage Adjust control to zero
(fully CCW) over a two-minute period.
◊ Check that the Teslameter reading does not decrease as the Voltage Adjust control is
turned to zero. Only the last two digits on the Teslameter should change.
◊ If the field decreases as the Voltage control is reduced, the Main Coil Switch is not
persistent.
◊ Slowly adjust the Voltage control to return to parking field. (The field drops approximately 1
kHz when the power supply is being dialed down to zero amps.)
g. Gradually turn the Current Adjust control to zero over a one-minute period.
h. Set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to O (off).
i. Set the Main Power and Power On switches on the Main Power Supply to OFF.
j. Disconnect and LOTO the input power to the Main Power Supply. Use a DVM (or equivalent
measuring device) to check that no voltage is present.
k. Connect Power Supply Jumper Cable (as detailed in Appendix, “Connect Power Supply Jumper
Cable”). Always install the Pre-Ramp Grounding Circuit and verify Main Lead Extension
grounding to Cryostat ground before inserting or extracting any Main Lead Extension.
l. Remove the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool.
◊ Fixture 2343081 (Ramp Lead Clamping Fixture) allows for immediate helium fill while the
Main Lead Extensions are in place. If this fixture is being used, this step does not apply.
m. Remove the Main Lead Extensions and cap the Ramp Lead Ports.
n. Fill the magnet to 95% in conformance with Liquid Helium Fill. The magnet requires
approximately two 250 liter Dewars of liquid helium, and the fill takes approximately one hour.
o. Make sure the Shim Lead Assembly is engaged in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
p. Make sure the Vent Valve V2 is closed before continuing with ramping the magnet.
q. Make sure that the Main Power Supply and Shim Power Supply is installed, checked, and
adjusted in conformance with the vendor manual supplied with the unit.
r. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is present by

Page 152 of 607
s. Connect the Main Power Supply to the magnet by making all cable connections in conformance
with Connections for Ramping.
t. Set all heater switches on the power supply to the OFF position. Set the Current Adjust and
Voltage controls to zero (fully CCW).
u. Remove LOTO and connect input power to the Main Power Supply.
v. Make sure the Current Adjust and Voltage Adjust controls on the Main Power Supply are OFF
(fully CCW).
w. Set the Main Power Supply's Main Power and Power On switches to ON. There are duplicate Main
x. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF, then set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to I (On).
y. Observe the current rise in the Main Power Supply Ammeter to verify circuit continuity.
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 660 to 720 mA
z. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads.
aa. Confirm gas flow holes in the Main Lead Extension are not blocked and that helium gas is exiting
the holes.
bb. Set the Current Adjust Coarse Control on the power supply to maximum (fully CW).
cc. Use Voltage Adjustment to obtain a Main Coil current of
dd. Slowly turn the Voltage Adjust control clockwise until CURRENT display reads the desired value.
ee. Observe the contact resistance voltage on the DVM. Voltage Requirements are as follows:
ff. If the DVM voltage exceeds the required level, follow “Adjust Contact Resistance” procedure
detailed in Appendix to reduce/achieve required contact resistance. Required Level:
gg. Do not proceed until after the DVM voltage is
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps.
hh. Set the power supply's Voltmeter Select Switch to the MAIN POWER SUPPLY position. This will
display the output at the output lugs of the power supply monitored. A voltage of
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): < 2.2V at 375A
ii. If the voltage exceeds the above noted requirements during the test, follow the procedures
above for decreasing contact resistance.
jj. Turn the Current Adjust and Voltage controls OFF (fully CCW).
kk. Adjust the power supply's Voltage Control until the CURRENT display matches the previously
parked current.
ll. Turn On the Main Switch Heater. Allow approximately three minutes for the Main Switch to go
resistive.
mm. Continue with Ramping taking note that
◊ Make sure the Axial/BØ switch heaters are on during ramping to prevent coil damage and a
magnet quench. (GE power supplies have protective circuitry to prevent ramping voltage
with the axial heater switch in the OFF position.)

Page 153 of 607
7.5.28. 1.5T LCC (R Series): When the Main Coil (Ramp) Current reaches 200 Amps, estimate the system
inductance by measuring current change over a 10 second ramping interval:
♦ L Inductance = 10 x Voltage / Current Change
♦ This method will give inaccurate values of inductance when the current is less than 200 Amps.
♦ Inductance for 1.5T LCC (R Series): 10.8 H to 11.5 H
♦ If inductance (L) is outside the range noted, discontinue ramping, measure Main Coil resistance
in conformance with Magnet Electrical Checks, and contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen
(MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center.
7.5.29. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): When the Main Coil (Ramp) Current reaches 50 Amps, estimate the system
inductance by measuring current change over a 60 second ramping interval:
♦ L Inductance = 60 x Voltage / Current Change
♦ This method will give inaccurate values of inductance when the current is less than 50 Amps.
♦ Inductance for 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 205 H to 227 H
♦ If inductance (L) is outside the range noted, discontinue ramping, measure Main Coil resistance
in conformance with Magnet Electrical Checks, and contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen
(MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center.
7.5.30. 1.5T LCC (R Series) FIXED SITE Unit:
a. When the magnet current reaches 730 Amps, slowly lower the Voltage Adjustment Control from
a 0.3 V to 0.1 V Main Coil voltage.
b. When magnetic field strength reaches 0.200 Tesla below Recommended Parking Field, observe
the Tesla Meter while monitoring the Voltage on the power supply.
c. When the Magnet reaches 0.200 Tesla below the Recommended Parking Field or Voltage Drops
below 0.50 Volts, turn the Main Switch Heater "ON."
d. Slowly adjust the Voltage Control to a 0.1 V Main Coil voltage.
7.5.31. 1.5T LCC (R Series) MOBILE SITE Unit:
a. When the magnet current reaches 730 Amps, slowly lower the Voltage Adjust Control from a
0.27 V to a 0.09 V Main Coil voltage.
b. When magnetic field strength reaches 1.499 Tesla, Slowly adjust the Voltage Control to a 0.023 V
Main Coil voltage.
7.5.32. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit:
a. When the magnet field reaches 200 Gauss below the “Recommended Site Parking Field” in the
Field Report (ATR) or voltage drops below 0.50 Volts, Turn Main Switch Heater “ON” and wait for
switch to open.
b. Continue ramp until magnet field reaches ±0.5 Gauss of the “Recommended Site Parking Field” in
the Field Report (ATR) then slowly adjust the Voltage Adjustment Control for 0.1 volts main coil
driving voltage as indicated on the power supply's Voltmeter.

Page 154 of 607
7.5.33. The magnet's Field Report (ATR) gives the optimum magnet on-site parking field next to
“Recommended Site Parking Field.” The parking field is generally 25 gauss above the final magnetic
field strength to compensate for correction coil currents.
7.5.34. If there are neighboring systems that share the same Equipment Room, the frequencies of the
systems must be offset from each other to avoid cross talk. Contact the Magnet Support Team at the
Online Center for further instructions on how to address this situation.
7.5.35. 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: Slowly adjust the Voltage Control as required to bring the magnetic field to
the frequency shown in the Field Report (ATR) as the “Recommended Site Parking Field." The total
current will be approximately 745 Amps
7.5.36. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: When the magnet field reaches ±0.5 Gauss of the recommended site
parking field in the Field Report (ATR), stabilize the field and park the magnet:
a. Slowly adjust the Voltage Adjust control for 0.025 volts main coil driving voltage as indicated on
the Main Power Supply's Voltmeter.
b. Adjust the voltage to maintain ±0.5 Gauss of the recommended site parking field in the Field
Report (ATR). The optimum magnet parking field can be predicted from the correction coil
currents used in Florence. Refer to the Field Report (ATR) for the target parking frequency.
7.5.37. Allow the magnetic field to stabilize. The last two digits on the Teslameter should be the only digits
changing.
7.5.38. Maintain this field for a minimum of 5 minutes.
a. Observe the Power Supply Voltmeter reading with the Voltmeter Select Switch in the Main Coil
position.
b. When the switch goes persistent, the voltage across the magnet terminals will stabilize at 0.00 V.

Page 155 of 607
7.5.39. Turn off the Main Switch Heater. Wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the switch to fully cool and go
persistent.
7.5.40. Observe the power supply voltmeter reading with the select switch in main coil position. When the
switch goes persistent, the voltage across the magnet terminals will stabilize at 0.00 V.
7.5.41. When the switch goes persistent, gradually turn the Voltage Adjust Control to zero (over a one-minute
period); then gradually turn the Current Adjust Control to zero (over a one-minute period).
♦ Check that the Teslameter does not decrease as the Voltage Adjust Control is turned to zero.
Only the last two digits on the Teslameter should change.
♦ If magnetic field strength decreases as the Voltage Adjust Control is turned, the Main Coil Switch
is not persistent; slowly adjust the Voltage Control to return to parking field.
♦ The magnetic field will drop approximately 1 kHz (0.235 Gauss or 0.0000235T) when the power
supply is being dialed down to zero Amps.
7.5.42. Set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to O (Off).
7.5.43. Set the Main Power and Power On switches on the Main Power Supply to OFF.
7.5.44. 1.5T LCC (R Series) MOBILE SITE Unit: Set the Main Power and Power On switches on the Shim Power
Supply to OFF.

Page 156 of 607
7.5.45. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is present by
illustration below.
Power Supply

Connector Connector
Negative (-)
Power Supply Ground
Negative (-) Cable
Power Cables
Positive (+) Power
Cables
Female twist
connector
with lug

Page 157 of 607

shown)
7.5.47. Remove the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool.

Page 158 of 607
7.5.48. After parking the magnet and disconnecting the Main Power Supply, remove one Main Extension at a
time in the following sequence (follow the next step precisely in order to avoid an excessive heat load
being applied to the magnet cartridge and a possible quench following a magnet ramp):
a. If the magnet pressure is greater than 1.0 psig, open Valve V2 to bring the pressure below 1.0
psig.
b. Remove all ice around the ramp lead port compression fitting on the Main Lead Extension that is
being removed first, as shown below.
c. Unscrew the ramp lead port compression fitting and remove the first Main Lead Extension from
the magnet. Immediately replace the cap onto the Ramp Lead Port.
d. Remove all ice around the ramp lead port compression fitting on the other Main Lead Extension.
e. Unscrew the ramp lead port compression fitting and remove the second Main Lead Extension
from the magnet. Immediately replace the cap onto the Ramp Lead Port.
f. Install the flow hole screws in the flow hole of both Main Lead Extensions after both leads are
removed. Plugging the flow hole of an engaged main lead extension will cause the magnet to
quench. Do not insert flow hole screws into main lead extensions until after extensions are
removed.
g. Check the Main Leads and fill port cap for leaks.
h. Apply tape to cap chains to prevent spike noise (white pixels).
i. Cryostat exhaust flow rate and pressure must be checked and adjusted as required after
magnet installation, ramping and shimming to ensure that proper cooling conditions are
maintained and no leaks are present in the Helium Exhaust System or Vent Valve V2.
Main Lead Extension Ramp and Fill Ports

Helium Fill
Tape Chains
Port Cap
(not shown)

Page 159 of 607
7.5.50. Plug in the heater on the Magnet Monitor with a setpoint of 4.0 psig, and allow the magnetic field to
settle.
♦ If a shorter pressure rise time is needed, turn on the Axial Heater on the Main Power Supply.
♦ Make sure any currents induced in the Transverse Coils during ramping are removed in
conformance with the Magnet Stability Check subsection of Shim Current Adjustment before
centering the Teslameter Probe and shimming the magnet.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) MOBILE SITE Unit:
◊ In the case of the Shim Power Supply, turn on both the Axial and the Transverse Heaters.
Both the Axial and Transverse Heaters are available on the Shim Power Supply.
7.5.51. Proceed to Shim Current Adjustment.

Page 160 of 607
7.6. Ramping and Parking with the Auto Ramp Power Supply (P/N 5395802 or 5395802-100)
7.6.1. The process of using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply in auto mode is Class M and applies only to
customers who have a Class M License. Only GE personnel may perform this procedure; GE personnel
performing this procedure MUST have completed the required on-line training.
7.6.2. Make sure the magnet is at zero field before starting the pre-ramp Magnet Electrical Checks. All
measured superconducting coils must be cold (4.2K) for the Main Coil and BØ Coil resistance values to
be accurate.
7.6.3. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Magnet Electrical
documentation (available through the support documentation library at gehealthcare.com or your
local GE Healthcare Service Representative) before continuing with this procedure if cover removal is
required.
disconnect/remove ramping connections and top-off magnet as instructed within the content of this
procedure.
7.6.5. Before starting the Auto-Ramp Shim Software, verify that:
♦ The laptop computer is connected to the power supply with the ethernet cable.
♦ The laptop computer is connected to a power source. Do not rely on battery power.
♦ The screen saver on the laptop computer is turned off.
♦ ALL power saver features on the laptop computer are turned off.
♦ The laptop computer language preference is set to “English.”
♦ There are NO known computer issues that can cause the computer to “hang” or malfunction.
♦ There are NO other programs open.
♦ ONLY Metrolab Teslameter Model PT2025 (as specified in kit 46-251865G5) shall be used. The
baud rate shall be 2400 (the default setting for the PT2025). If the baud rate has been changed
from the default value, refer to the Metrolab PT2025 manual to change the setting back to 2400.
♦ The Teslameter is connected to power supply with the DB9-DB25 RS232 cable.
♦ The Teslameter is in the Auto Search mode with the units in Tesla.

Page 161 of 607
7.6.6. Set the Current Adjustment and Voltage Controls for the main current to zero (OFF) on the front of the
supply.
7.6.7. Set the Power Supply's three main power switches to ON.

Page 162 of 607
7.6.8. In the dist directory, start the Auto-Ramp Shim software by clicking the Auto_Ramp_Shim_Ver_1_1.jar
file.
7.6.9. Initialize the Auto-Ramp Shim Software as follows:
a. Enter the Magnet Series and Serial Number.
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Magnet Series “R”
◊ 3.0TLCC (W, WB Series): Magnet Series “W” or “WB”
b. Select location: Field
c. Select the Magnet in configuration
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Series_R_1_5T_Ramp_Up
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Series_W_3_0T_Ramp_Up
d. Click the [Initialize the Software] button to begin.
e. Click the [Manual & Auto-Ramp Tool] button to begin the ramping part of the program.
Initial Setup Screen for Auto Ramp Software

(3.0T MR750w (UA Series) Shown)

Page 163 of 607
7.6.10. Change to the Ramp Controls tab.
7.6.11. Click the [Test Communication] button at the top to ensure the communication with the supply and
Teslameter. Make sure the result comes back reporting Pass next to the test communication button.
7.6.12. Click the [SET] button to set a maximum current point at:
7.6.13. In the bottom parking profile box, input the desired parking field in the Field2(T) box as shown below.
This value is given on the Field Report (ATR) as the “Recommended Site Parking Field” in Tesla.
♦ The Teslameter display on the laptop should display the same value as the Metrolab Teslameter.
♦ This indicates proper communication between the laptop and the Teslameter.
Auto-Ramp Shim Software Ramp Controls Tab

(1.5T LCC (R Series) Shown)
Parking Field
7.6.14. If the magnet is not at field, check Switch Heater and Shim Coil resistances in conformance with
Magnet Electrical Checks.
7.6.15. Make sure the Current and Voltage Adjustment Controls on the Ramp Control Screen show the Main
Coil Voltage and Current are zero.
7.6.16. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF on the software screen and that the front of the power
supply shows 0 amps.
7.6.17. Set the Axial / BØ Heater Switch to ON by clicking the slider bar.

Page 164 of 607
7.6.18. Enable the ramp supply output by pressing the Output button on the front of the power supply. The
supply will output power only if the red LED is lit.
Output
Button on
Auto-
Ramping
Power Supply
7.6.19. Observe the current rise in the Axial Heater Power Supply Ammeter (800 to 820 mA) to verify circuit
continuity.
below) to allow for correct placement of the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool.
holes.
Hardware Mounting
Extensions 2287029

Page 165 of 607
7.6.22. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current of
through the main leads.
♦ Use the two arrows on the coarse and fine adjustments to reach the desired voltage. (See the
following illustration.)
♦ Slowly adjust the Voltage to set the above noted current through the Main Leads, Main Lead
Extensions, and persistent Main Switch.
♦ Make sure that the Axial / BØ heater is ON.
Manual Control of the Auto-Ramp Power Supply


Page 166 of 607
resistance:
♦ Required Levels:
a. Wait approximately 1 minute with current running; readings may drop as the Main Lead
Extensions cool.
b. Tighten the nuts (one flat at a time) on top of the Hold-Down Tool while measuring DVM
readings.
a. Turn the Voltage and Current Adjust Controls to zero.
Extensions.
(approximately)
down.
(approximately).
Band Replacement.

Page 167 of 607
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): < 2.2 at 750A
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): < 2.2 at 375A
7.6.31. Turn the Voltage controls OFF).
7.6.32. On the Ramp Controls tab of the Auto-Ramp Shim software, input the desired parking field in the
Field2(T) box as shown below. This value is given on the Field Report (ATR) as the “Recommended Site
Parking Field” in Tesla. (The Teslameter field on the Auto Ramping screen should display the same
value as the Metrolab Teslameter. This indicates proper communication between the Teslameter and
the laptop.)
7.6.33. Make sure Main Coil [A] and Main Coil [V] on the Ramp Control Screen show the Main Coil Voltage and
Current are zero.
Auto-Ramp Shim Software – Auto Ramping


Page 168 of 607
7.6.34. Make sure the power supply controls are set as follows:
♦ Current Set Point:
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 800 Amps
♦ Main Coil Voltage : 0 Volts
♦ Main Power Switches on the Main Power Supply : ON
♦ Axial/BØ Heater : ON
7.6.35. Set the Main Switch ON using the Main Heater menu and wait 3 minutes.
7.6.36. Use the appropriate Teslameter Probe to monitor magnetic field strength.
♦ The probe will lock on when the magnet current rises to about
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 325 amps - this usually occurs around 0.7 Tesla.
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 175 amps - this usually occurs around 1.5 Tesla.
♦ Visually confirm the Teslameter has locked on before parking the magnet.
♦ The Teslameter reading on the laptop turns green when the Metrolab Teslameter is locked onto
the magnet.

Page 169 of 607
7.6.37. If using automated ramping, check the Auto ramp + park box to choose to have the power supply
Auto-ramp the magnet, then click the [Start] button (see Ramp Controls Tab illustration).
♦ If the automation needs to be stopped, click the [Stop] button on the ramp controls section and
then adjust the voltage manually as needed.
♦ To resume automatic ramping, click the [Start] button.
♦ After reaching maximum current in auto mode, the software switches to ramping and parking
based upon readings from the Teslameter. If the Teslameter doesn’t lock or lost lock in auto
mode, the software prohibits further ramping and holds the magnet at 0 Volts. If this occurs,
close Main Heater and wait 15 minutes. This makes the magnet park. Unselect the “Auto ramp
+ park” box and use the coarse and fine voltage adjustment arrows to dial out current from the
leads. Exit the software. Fix the Teslameter issue. Once the lock is established, continue
remaining ramp and park process using voltage adjustment arrows manually.
Auto-Ramp Shim Software – Auto Ramping


Page 170 of 607
7.6.38. To manually ramp the magnet, use the voltage and heater controls (Manual Control of the Ramp
Power Supply illustration) to follow the procedure in Ramping with Manual Ramping Power Supply.
7.6.39. If the magnet quenches and the ramping needs to be stopped, click the [Exit/Quench] button on the
upper right part of the ramping tool screen.
7.6.40. When the Main Coil (Ramp) Current reaches approximately 200 amps, the software will estimate the
system inductance by measuring current change over a 10-second ramping interval:
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): L Inductance = 10 x Voltage / Current Change
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): L Inductance = 60 x Voltage / Current Change
♦ Check the Ramp – Summary tab as shown in the following illustration to obtain the calculated
inductance.
♦ This method will give inaccurate values of inductance when the current is less than 200 amps
(for the 1.5T LCC (R Series) or 100 amps for the 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series).
7.6.41. If inductance (L) is outside the range noted below, discontinue ramping, measure Main Coil resistance
in conformance with Magnet Electrical Checks, and contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC)
Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Inductance: 10.8 H to 11.5 H
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Inductance: 205 H to 227 H
Ramp-Summary Tab

Page 171 of 607
disconnect/remove ramping connections and apparatus as follows:
a. Turn Main Switch Heater “ON” and wait for switch to open.
b. Slowly adjust the Voltage Adjust control to stabilize the magnet field. The last two digits on the
Teslameter should be the only digits changing.
c. Maintain the field at the stable setting for five minutes before proceeding to the next step.
◊ Observe the Power Supply Voltmeter reading with the Voltmeter Select Switch in the MAIN
COIL position. When the switch goes persistent, the voltage across the magnet terminals
stabilizes at 0.00 V.
d. Turn off the Main Switch Heater, and wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the switch to fully cool
and go persistent.
e. Make note of the current, frequency and lead extension voltage values at which the switch went
persistent in the Magnet Ramping and Parking Current Log.
f. When the switch is persistent, slowly turn the Main Power Supply's Voltage Adjust control to zero
over a two-minute period.
◊ Check that the Teslameter reading does not decrease as the Voltage Adjust control is
turned to zero. Only the last two digits on the Teslameter should change.
◊ If the field decreases as the Voltage control is reduced, the Main Coil Switch is not
persistent.
◊ Slowly adjust the Voltage control to return to parking field. (The field drops approximately 1
kHz when the power supply is being dialed down to zero amps.)
g. Gradually turn the Current Adjust control to zero over a one-minute period.
h. Set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to O (off).
i. Set the Main Power and Power On switches on the Main Power Supply to OFF.
j. Disconnect and LOTO the input power to the Main Power Supply. Use a DVM (or equivalent
measuring device) to check that no voltage is present.
k. Remove the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool.
◊ Fixture 2343081 (Ramp Lead Clamping Fixture) allows for immediate the helium fill while the
Main Lead Extensions are in place. If this fixture is being used, this step does not apply.
l. Remove the Main Lead Extensions and cap the Ramp Lead Ports.
m. Fill the magnet to 95% in conformance with Liquid Helium Fill. The magnet requires
approximately two 250 liter Dewars of liquid helium, and the fill takes approximately one hour.
n. Check for ice on the Shim Lead Connector and the Recondensor. Deice in conformance with the
Shim Lead Connector and Sav-Con (vertical penetration deicing) subsection of Replacement and
Maintenance Chapter before ramping the magnet.
o. Make sure the Shim Lead Assembly is Engaged in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
p. Make sure the Vent Valve V2 is closed before continuing with ramping the magnet.
q. Make sure that the Main Power Supply and Shim Power Supply is installed, checked, and
adjusted in conformance with the vendor manual supplied with the unit.
r. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is present by

Page 172 of 607
s. Connect the Main Power Supply to the magnet by making all cable connections in conformance
with Connections for Ramping.
t. Set all heater switches on the power supply to the OFF position. Set the Current Adjust and
Voltage controls to zero.
u. Remove LOTO and connect input power to the Main Power Supply.
v. Make sure the Current Adjust and Voltage Adjust controls on the Main Power Supply are OFF.
w. Set the Main Power Supply's Main Power and Power On switches to ON. There are duplicate Main
x. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF, then set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to I (On).
y. Observe the current rise in the Main Power Supply Ammeter to verify circuit continuity.
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 660 to 720 mA
z. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads.
aa. Confirm gas flow holes in the Main Lead Extension are not blocked and that helium gas is exiting
the holes.
bb. Set the Current Adjust Coarse Control on the power supply to maximum.
cc. Use Voltage Adjustment to obtain a Main Coil current of
dd. Slowly turn the Voltage Adjust control clockwise until CURRENT display reads the desired value.
ee. Observe the contact resistance voltage on the DVM. Voltage Requirements are as follows:
ff. If the DVM voltage exceeds the required level, follow “Adjust Contact Resistance” procedure
detailed in Appendix to reduce/achieve required contact resistance. Required Level:
gg. Do not proceed until after the DVM voltage is
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps.
hh. Set the power supply's Voltmeter Select Switch to the MAIN POWER SUPPLY position. This will
display the output at the output lugs of the power supply monitored. A voltage of
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): < 2.2V at 375A
ii. If the voltage exceeds the above noted requirements during the test, follow the procedures
above for decreasing contact resistance.
jj. Turn the Current Adjust and Voltage controls OFF.
kk. Adjust the power supply's Voltage Control until the CURRENT display matches the previously
parked current.
ll. Turn On the Main Switch Heater. Allow approximately three minutes for the Main Switch to go
resistive.
mm. Continue with Ramping taking note that
◊ Make sure the Axial/BØ switch heaters are on during ramping to prevent coil damage and a
magnet quench. (GE power supplies have protective circuitry to prevent ramping voltage
with the axial heater switch in the OFF position.)

Page 173 of 607
7.6.43. Once the “Recommended Site Parking Field” is achieved, the Auto-Ramp program will hold the
parking field for 15 minutes. Do not terminate the automation in this period.
7.6.44. After holding for 15 minutes, Auto-Ramp program will turn off the main heater. When the switch goes
persistent, the Main Coil [V] reading will stabilize at 0.00 V.
7.6.45. Auto-Ramp program will continue to hold the main current for 15 minutes. Do not terminate the
automation in this period.
7.6.46. After holding for 15 minutes, Auto-Ramp program will dial the main current down to zero amps over
an approximate 1 minute period. The Main Coil [A] reading will stabilize at a small value that is close
to 0A.
7.6.47. Click the [STOP] button on the Auto-Ramp program screen to terminate the automation.
7.6.48. Use the [Fine adjustment] voltage adjustment button to drive the main current reading to 0.0A.
7.6.49. Set the Axial / BØ Heater Switch to OFF.
7.6.50. Set the Main Power Switches on the back of the supply to OFF.

Page 174 of 607
illustration below.
Power Supply

Connector Connector
Negative (-)
Power Supply Ground
Negative (-) Cable
Power Cables
Positive (+) Power
Cables
Female twist
connector
with lug

Page 175 of 607

shown)

Page 176 of 607
time in the following sequence (Follow the next step precisely in order to avoid an excessive heat load
being applied to the magnet cartridge and a possible quench following a magnet ramp):
a. If the magnet pressure is greater than 1.0 psig, open Valve V2 to bring the pressure below 1.0
psig.
c. Unscrew the ramp lead port compression fitting and remove the first Main Lead Extension from
e. Unscrew the ramp lead port compression fitting and remove the second Main Lead Extension
removed. Plugging the flow hole of an engaged main lead extension will cause the magnet to
quench. Do not insert flow hole screws into main lead extensions until after extensions are
removed.
g. Check the Main Leads and fill port cap for leaks.
i. Cryostat exhaust flow rate and pressure must be checked and adjusted as required after
Main Lead Extension

Ramp and Fill Ports
Negative (-)
Ramp Port Cap
Positive (+)
Ramp Port Cap
Helium Fill
Port Cap Tape Chains (not shown)
to prevent spike noises

Page 177 of 607
7.6.56. Plug in the heater on the Magnet Monitor with a setpoint of 4.0 psig, and allow the magnetic field to
settle.
♦ If a shorter pressure rise time is needed, turn on the Axial Heater on the Main Power Supply.
♦ Make sure any currents induced in the Transverse Coils during ramping are removed in
conformance with the Magnet Stability Check subsection of Shim Current Adjustment before
centering the Teslameter Probe and shimming the magnet.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) MOBILE SITE Unit:
◊ In the case of the Shim Power Supply, turn on both the Axial and the Transverse Heaters.
Both the Axial and Transverse Heaters are available on the Shim Power Supply.
7.6.57. Proceed to Shim Current Adjustment.

Page 178 of 607
7.7. Building Pressure
7.7.1. DO NOT turn off the Coldhead/Compressor in order to build pressure. The Coldhead/Compressor
must remain ON at all times during the ramping process.
7.7.2. Verify that the Magmon 3 is properly installed and configured for the appropriate magnet type.
7.7.3. Check the magnet helium level, and add liquid helium in conformance with Liquid Helium Fill, if
needed.
7.7.4. Set the Magmon 3 to post fill mode with a set-point of 4.0 psig.
7.7.5. Wait until magnet is at 4.0 ± 0.1 psig before continuing with settling or shimming the magnet.
7.7.6. Proceed with Field Stability Check.

Page 179 of 607
7.8. Field Stability Check
The following check is made to determine the main field drift of the magnet.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: This check requires at least two hours between the first and second
measurements.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: This check requires at least twelve hours between the first and
second measurements.
7.8.2. Verify that Magnet Monitor is on and operational.
♦ If using proprietary Magnet Monitor software, verify that Magnet Monitor Pressure Control is
enabled and operational.
♦ Pressure is required to be stable in the 4.0 ± 0.1 psig for this procedure.
7.8.3. Post “Authorized Personnel Only” signs (2289812) in conformance with Chapter 1, MR Magnet - Safety
Requirements to indicate a magnetic drift test is in progress.
7.8.4. Set up the MetroLab Teslameter and appropriate probe for single-point field measurement in
conformance with Preparations for Field Measurement, ensuring the probe is at the physical center (R
= 0, Z = 0) of the magnet.
7.8.5. If the Teslameter was turned off, turn it on and wait one hour for stabilization before continuing with
this process.
7.8.6. Set the Teslameter switch to NMR Frequency (Hz), and allow the Teslameter to stabilize within a 10 Hz
band and wait three minutes.
7.8.7. Magnet pressure must be stable at 4.0 psi when running the Field Stability Check. Magnet pressure is
considered stable once the Heater LED on Magmon3 begins to cycle (Heater LED turns on and off) and
the pressure remains within 4.0 ± 0.1 psi.
7.8.8. Before turning on the Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply, make sure all current controls are set
to zero (fully counterclockwise).
7.8.9. Remove LOTO and connect input power to the S/C Shim Coil Power Supply.
7.8.10. Turn on (I) all Shim Coil Switch Heaters for five minutes to dump any residual Shim Currents.
7.8.11. Turn off (O) the Switch Heaters. Allow 3 to 5 minutes for the switch heaters to go persistent before
continuing to next step.
7.8.12. Disconnect the Heater Cable (P703) from the Shim Coil Power Supply.
7.8.13. Turn off the Shim Coil Power Supply.
7.8.15. Measure and record the magnetic field (center frequency).
♦ This is Frequency 1.
♦ The Frequency 1 measurement should be taken as soon after ramping as possible.

Page 180 of 607
7.8.16. Do not move the probe between the first and second measurements.
7.8.17. Do not move or rearrange any articles or equipment in or near the Exam Room during the test.
7.8.18. Repeat reading after “N” hours. This is Frequency 2.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: N= at least 2 (i.e. repeat reading after at least 2 hours; if 3 hours elapse
between readings, N=3)
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: N=12 (i.e. repeat reading after at least 12 hours; if 18 hours elapse
♦ More frequency data points can be taken (possibly in 1, 4, 6 or 12 hour increments) when it is
convenient.
♦ However, ensure that the two data points (Frequency 1 and 2) chosen for drift rate calculation
are 24 hours apart.
7.8.19. Calculate the 24-hour main field drift rate by using points that are 24 hours apart and the following
formula:
ppm (Freq 1 -Freq 2) × 106
♦ Drift Rate ( ) =
hr Freq 1 × N
Hz (Freq 1 - Freq 2)
hr N
Where
◊ Freq 1 = Initial Reading (Hz)
◊ Freq 2 = Reading (Hz) after N Hours
◊ N = Number of hours between readings
7.8.20. The drift rate specification is
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: ≤ 6.3 Hz/hr (0.1ppm/hr)
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: ≤ 1.96 Hz/hr (0.1ppm/hr).
over a the elapsed period defined above. It is a rolling 24 hour average.
7.8.21. If the drift rate is greater than the above noted rate, the drift rate is outside the guidelines. If the
magnet has not recently been ramped and settled, contact the Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC)
Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center. High drift rates will require frequent
field adjustment and reshimming. If the magnet has recently been ramped, continue monitoring until
the magnet has settled within specification.
7.8.22. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Teslameter. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM
or equivalent measuring device.
7.8.23. Disconnect the Teslameter from the probe. Store the Teslameter and probe.
7.8.24. Remove and store the “Authorized Personnel Only” signs.

Page 181 of 607
Chapter 8 – Shim Current Adjustment

8. Shimming and Shim Current Adjustment
Shimming is the process of measuring the magnetic field over a fixed volume and using the acquired data to
improve the field homogeneity. This improvement is accomplished through changes to the shim currents or
additions of steel into the bore as directed by shimming programs. The magnet is shimmed to specification at
the factory on a 45 cm DSV for the 1.5T Actively Shielded Magnet and on a 50 cm DSV for the 3.0T Actively
Shielded Magnet. On-site shimming is performed after the magnet is energized to its nominal magnetic field
strength and stabilized in conformance with Ramping Magnet to Field, or when environmental changes
significantly reduce the homogeneity of the magnet. Allow the magnet to stabilize to <0.1 ppm/hr. main field
drift before shimming. Perform other commissioning functions during this time. Intially after ramping the
magnet, the factory currents from the Field Report (ATR) should be installed back into the magnet prior to any
further site shimming. The minimum helium level to start shimming is 70%.
• If passive shimming is required (first install for a LCC300 3.0T magnet or an MR450 upgrade) follow the
next sections for passive shimming. Passive shimming is the process of measuring the magnet's field
over a fixed volume, then calculating and installing passive(steel) shims and active shim current
changes to improve field homogeneity. It is important to perform shimming after the magnet is sited
and ramped with the magnetic field stabilized. Use the ShimTool Software (GE PN 5102783) to calculate
any additional shimming required on site. Always use the most recent revision of GE ShimTool Software.
Before beginning the shimming process and after each shim iteration always confirm the shim trays
are fully engaged (inserted) and locked. Rotate the shim tray knob 90° clockwise to secure the
connection. The shim trays should remain in the gradient for the initial shim iteration.
• For other cases where installing the currents and shimming with the system LV shim software is
needed, use the LV Shim Current Adjustment sections following the passive shim instructions. Shim
Current Adjustment provides the procedure for changing the shim currents in the 1.5T & 3.0T LCC
Active Shield Magnets. The LVShim program (found on the system and instructions on the Service
Methods DVD) is used along with this Shim Current Adjustment procedure to shim the magnet. One
should always put the factory shim currents into the S/C Shim Coils after ramping. The factory shim
current data can be found in either the Field Report (ATR) or the Staging Test Report (STR for staged
magnets). If both reports are on site, use the STR data.

Page 182 of 607

PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD!

INCORRECTLY INSERTING AND EXTRACTING SHIM TRAYS CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
PERSONAL INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! STRONG MAGNETIC FIELD

WHEN SERVICING ANY MAGNETIC EQUIPMENT, IT IS CRITICALLY IMPORTANT THAT THE SERVICE
ENGINEER CONSCIOUSLY PLAN THE PATH TO BE TAKEN WHEN MOVING HIGHLY FERROUS DEVICES IN
THE MAGNET ENVIRONMENT. THE PATH SHOULD BE AS FAR FROM THE MAGNET AS PRACTICAL AND
AVOID HIGH FLUX-DENSITY FIELDS.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
• MOVEMENT OF FERROUS MATERIAL IN THE MAGNET ROOM MUST FOLLOW THE GE SERVICE
PROCEDURE FOR THAT DEVICE. WHEN EXITING, MOVE AWAY FROM THE MAGNET IN THE MOST DIRECT
MANNER POSSIBLE. PASSIVE SHIM TRAY MUST BE INSERTED/REMOVED WITH THE SHIM TRAY POINTED
TOWARDS THE MAGNET. THE SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD NEVER BE BETWEEN THE SHIM TRAY AND
THE MAGNET. NOR SHOULD ANY SERVICE PERSONNEL BE ON THE SERVICE END OF THE MAGNET
WHEN TRAYS ARE BEING INSERTED.
• TWO (2) MR SAFETY TRAINED PERSONNEL MUST BE PRESENT AT ALL TIMES WHEN SERVICING
HIGHLY FERROUS DEVICES IN THE AREAS OF MAGNETIC FIELDS.
• WHEN PLANNING A SERVICE PATH, IT IS CRITICAL THAT THE PATH BE CLEAR AND SUFFICIENTLY
WIDE. ENSURE THAT THERE ARE NO TRIP HAZARDS, OBSTACLES, CLUTTER, SLIPPERY SURFACES OR
OTHER ITEMS EVEN PARTIALLY RESTRICTING THE PATH. IF THERE ARE PORTABLE OBSTACLES IN A
PATH, REMOVE THEM FROM THE AREA AND REPLACE THEM AFTER THE SERVICE ACTION IS
COMPLETED. IT IS REQUIRED TO WALK THE PATH PRIOR TO BEGINNING SERVICE TO ENSURE THAT
THERE IS SUFFICIENT SPACE THROUGH WHICH TO PASS FOR YOURSELF AND THE OBJECT BEING
SERVICED.
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY!

THE BØ POWER SUPPLY CONTAINS HIGHLY FERROUS MATERIAL. ANY FIELD STRENGTH >200 GAUSS
WILL FORCIBLY ATTRACT THE BØ POWER SUPPLY. DO NOT BRING THE BØ POWER SUPPLY INTO THE
MAGNET ROOM IF THE MAGNET IS RAMPED. REFER TO MAGNETIC FIELD SAFETY DOCUMENTATION
FOR DETAILS.

Page 183 of 607

STEEL SHIMS IN A MAGNETIC FIELD ARE SUBJECT TO A FORCE PROPORTIONAL TO THE STEEL'S MASS
AND STRENGTH. IN A 1.5 TESLA FIELD FORCES >50 POUNDS (22.6 KG) MAY BE ENCOUNTERED. AN
ATTRACTING FORCE PULLING A SHIM TRAY INTO THE MAGNET WILL BE ENCOUNTERED WHEN A
LOADED TRAY IS BROUGHT WITHIN 3 FT. (1 M) OF THE MAGNET BORE. AN ATTRACTING AND/OR
REPELLING FORCE WILL BE ENCOUNTERED WHEN INSERTING/REMOVING A LOADED SHIM TRAY
INTO/FROM A TRACK INSIDE THE MAGNET BORE. A REPELLING FORCE ON A SHIM TRAY INSIDE THE
MAGNET'S BORE MAY PROPEL THE TRAY OUT FROM THE MAGNET WHEN THE TRAY IS RELEASED FROM
ITS FIXED POSITION. MAKE SURE TO FOLLOW THESE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS DURING PASSIVE SHIM
INSTALLATION/REMOVAL:
• ASSEMBLE ALL EQUIPMENT AND CHECK THE FUNCTIONALITY IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE PASSIVE
SHIM INSTALLATION PROCEDURE,
• LOAD THE SHIM TRAYS OUTSIDE THE MAGNET ROOM AND NEVER LOOSEN THE INDIVIDUAL SHIMS
INSIDE THE MAGNET ROOM,
• SECURE THE SHIMS IN THE SHIM TRAYS AND INSTALL THE TRAYS INTO THE MAGNET IN STRICT
CONFORMANCE WITH THE PASSIVE SHIM INSTALLATION PROCEDURE,
• WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES/GLASSES DURING SHIM TRAY INSTALLATION/REMOVAL TO PREVENT EYE
INJURY FROM SUDDEN TRAY MOVEMENT,
• HOLD THE SHIM TRAYS FIRMLY IN PLACE WHEN RELEASING THE INSTALLED TRAYS, AND MAKE SURE
ALL LOADED SHIM TRAYS ARE RESTRAINED (BY HAND, SHIM TRAY PULLER, OR FIXED INTO ITS TRACK),
ESPECIALLY THE TRAYS MARKED ON THE END FLANGE AS MOUNTED IN AN OUTWARD REPELLING
FORCE,
• INSERT/REMOVE THE SHIM TRAYS WITH A GRADUAL MOTION,
• TWO PERSONS ARE REQUIRED TO INSTALL/REMOVE THE TRAYS,
• DO NOT LOAD THE SHIM TRAYS WHILE ANYONE IS DIRECTLY IN LINE WITH THE TRAY ON EITHER END
OF THE MAGNET, AND
• NEVER POSITION YOURSELF BETWEEN A SHIM TRAY AND THE MAGNET.
• A CLEAR PATH PER CHAPTER 1, SAFETY, IS REQUIRED FOR PASSIVE SHIM REMOVAL AND INSERTION.

NEVER BRING FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL INTO THE MAGNET ROOM. MAKE SURE ALL EQUIPMENT AND
TOOLS USED IN THE MAGNET ROOM ARE NON-FERROMAGNETIC.

BE PREPARED TO MANAGE THE EFFECTS OF THE MAGNETIC FIELD ON THE SHIM TRAY DURING TRAY
INSERTION/REMOVAL. ADHERE TO ALL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
POTENTIAL SKIN INJURY!

FIBERGLASS FROM THE SHIM TRAYS CAN SPLINTER WHILE INSERTING/REMOVING TRAYS. WEAR NO-
SLIP GLOVES DURING SHIM TRAY INSERTION/REMOVAL TO PROTECT AGAINST FIBERGLASS SPLINTERS
FROM TRAYS.

Page 184 of 607
8.1. Shimming Tools and Equipment
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
5395802 or 1 of the
5395802-100 noted
configura
46-260777G3 Manual Shim Power Supply (46-260777G3)
tions
2353394-3 1 1000 Amp Ramp Cable Kit with Ground
2386028 (for 3.0T) or
3.0T: LCC300 Shim Camera Kit
2386028-2 (for 1.5T or 1
1.5T or 3.0T: LCC Shim Camera Kit
3.0T)
5102783 1 GE ShimTool Software
5266042-4 1 HDv Passive Shimming Kit
1 of the
5263916 HDv Field Passive Shim Kit
noted
configura
2385710 LCC300 Field Passive Shim Kit and
tions
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
Optional Field-Supplied Item: 10 mil thick flexible, plastic
sheets (x-ray film, Mylar or equivalent), 10 in. x 14 in. (250 mm
NA 1
x 350 mm) minimum; must be free of sharp edges and bent
corners

Page 185 of 607
8.2. Shimming Flow

Page 186 of 607
8.3. Shimming, Required Conditions
requirements.
8.3.2. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete this procedure. Refer
to the appropriate Service Methods documentation (available through the support documentation
library at gehealthcare.com or your local GE Healthcare Service Representative) before continuing
with this procedure if cover removal is required.
8.3.3. Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
8.3.4. Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open before starting this procedure.
8.3.5. Verify that the magnet's magnetic field drift rate is <0.1 ppm/hr. before starting Section Running
ShimTool.
before starting this procedure. Fill the magnet in conformance with Liquid Helium Fill, if required.
8.3.7. Verify that Magnet Monitor is on and operational at required operating pressure (e.g. 3.9 psig - 4.1
psig) and stable to within 0.1 psig. If using proprietary Magnet Monitor software, verify that Magnet
Monitor Pressure Control is enabled and operational.
8.3.8. Verify that the magnet's magnetic field drift rate is <0.1 ppm/hr. in conformance with Section Field
Stability Check before starting the Shimming procedure.
8.3.9. Make sure to reestablish the S/C Shim Currents stated in the Field Report (ATR) in conformance with
Re-establishing Field Report (ATR) Shim Currents section before starting the Shimming procedure. If
worling with a MR450 Upgrade, zero currents before starting the shimming procedure.
8.3.10. Moving articles or equipment in the Magnet Room may affect field readings. Do NOT move articles or
equipment in the Magnet Room while shimming.
8.3.11. ONLY use nonmagnetic tools when working in the Magnet Room.
1.5T LCC (R Series) Shimming Prerequisites:

 Magnet Pressure: At operating pressure (e.g.  Magnet Temperature and Humidity within
3.9 psig - 4.1 psig) and stable to within 0.1 psig specifications defined in the Pre-Installation
 Drift Rate: < 0.1 ppm/hr Manual
 Helium Level ≥ 70%  Keep Electronics ON During Shimming
 Front Endbell Removed (Passive Shimming  HEC Connected to Gradient Coil and Running
Only) (Passive Shimming Only)
 Dock Installed
3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Shimming Prerequisites:

 Magnet Pressure: At operating pressure (e.g.  Magnet Temperature and Humidity within
3.9 psig - 4.1 psig) and stable to within 0.1 psig specifications defined in the Pre-Installation
 Drift Rate: < 0.1 ppm/hr Manual
 Helium Level ≥ 70%  Keep Electronics ON During Shimming
 Front Endbell Removed (Passive Shimming  HEC Connected to Gradient Coil and Running
Only) (Passive Shimming Only)
 Shim Trays Installed  Field Report (ATR) S/C Currents Re-
 Dock Installed established

Page 187 of 607
8.4. Preparations For Shimming
8.4.1. Prepare for field mapping in conformance with Preparations for Field Measurement before shimming
if not already done.
8.4.2. Check magnetic field stability in conformance with Field Stability Check. Allow the magnet to stabilize
to <0.1 ppm/hr. main field drift before shimming. Perform other commissioning functions during this
time.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): This will take at least 2 hours.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): This will take at least 12 hours.
8.4.3. Turn the Cryocooler off for 10 minutes. (This quenches the Superconducting Shield around the
Coldhead.)
♦ Turn off the Cryocooler only before the initial shimming and not between each shimming
iteration.
8.4.4. Verify that the Shim Lead Pigtail Cable (2135362) is connected to P1-A on the Shim Lead Assembly in
conformance with the Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply Connections to Magnet subsection of
Connections for Ramping and Shimming. (See illustration below.)
Shim Power Supply Connections to P1-A
Disengagement.
8.4.6. Open the Nupro Shim Lead Vent Valve to increase the ability of the Shim Leads to carry current.

Page 188 of 607
8.4.7. Verify that connectors P2 and P2W on Superconducting Shim Coil Cable 46-260726G1 (Run 603) are
connected to the J2 and J2-W Shim Output connectors on the back of the Shim Power Supply Cabinet.
8.4.8. Verify that connectors J2 and J2-W on the other end of Superconducting Shim Coil Cable 46-
260726G1 are connected to the Shim Lead Pigtail Cable 2135362. (See illustration above.)
8.4.9. Connect P703 on Switch Heater Cable 46-260724G1 (Run 604) to connector J3 on the back of the
Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply Cabinet. (See illustration below.)
8.4.10. Verify that connector P5 on the Switch Heater Cable (run 604) is connected to connector J5-1 or J5-2
on the Shim Lead Assembly. (See illustration below.)
Shim Power Supply

Connections to J5-1

Page 189 of 607
8.4.11. If using the Manual Shim Power Supply (46-260777G3):
a. Remove LOTO and connect input power to the S/C Shim Coil Power Supply. Verify that the heater
currents are set to
◊ Transverse 1 (T1) = 610mA ± 10mA
◊ Axial Coils (Axial) = 710mA ± 10mA
◊ If any current level is not correct, adjust the adjustment screw on the rear of the Shim
Power Supply.
b. After sufficient cooling of the Shim Lead Assembly, verify that all six Shim Power Supply Channels
operate at both positive and negative 250 mA for the Axial, Transverse 1, and Transverse 2 shim
groups.
c. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Shim Coil Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is
present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
8.4.12. If using the Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply (5395802 or 5395802-100):
a. The process of using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply in auto mode is Class M. Only GE
personnel may perform this procedure; GE personnel performing this procedure MUST have
completed the required on-line training.
b. Before starting the Auto-Ramp Shim Software, verify that:
◊ The laptop computer is connected to the power supply with the ethernet cable.
◊ The laptop computer is connected to a power source. Do not rely on battery power.
◊ The screen saver on the laptop computer is turned off.
◊ ALL power saver features on the laptop computer are turned off.
◊ The laptop computer language preference is set to “English.”
◊ There are NO known computer issues that can cause the computer to “hang” or
malfunction.
◊ There are NO other programs open.
◊ ONLY Metrolab Teslameter Model PT2025 (as specified in kit 46-251865G5) shall be used.
The baud rate shall be 2400 (the default setting for the PT2025). If the baud rate has been
changed from the default value, refer to the Metrolab PT2025 manual to change the setting
back to 2400.
◊ The Teslameter is connected to power supply with the DB9-DB25 RS232 cable.
◊ The Teslameter is in the Auto Search mode with the units in Tesla.

Page 190 of 607
c. Set the Current Adjustment and Voltage Controls for the main current to zero (fully CCW) on the
front of the supply.
d. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Shim Coil Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is
e. Set the Main Power Switches to the On position on the back of the Auto-Ramp Shim power
supply as well as the main switch on the front. See illustration above.
f. In the dist directory, start the Auto-Ramp Shim software by clicking
Auto_Ramp_Shim_Ver_1_1.jar file.

Page 191 of 607
g. Initialize the Auto-Ramp Shim Software as follows:
1. Enter the Magnet Series and Serial Number.
∗ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Magnet Series “R”
∗ 3.0TLCC (W, WB Series): Magnet Series “W” or “WB”
2. Select location: Field
3. Select the Magnet in configuration
∗ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Series_R_1_5T_Ramp_Up
∗ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Series_W_3_0T_Ramp_Up
4. Click the [Initialize the Software] button to begin.
5. Click the [Manual & Auto-Shim Tool] button to begin the shim control part of the program.


Page 192 of 607
h. Click the [Test Communication] button at the top of the screen to ensure the communication
with the supply and Teslameter. Make sure the result comes back reporting Pass next to the test
communication button as shown below.
Shim Control Screen in the Control Software
i. From the Select the shim group drop down, select Axial.
j. Input 0.25A into each of the Old values for the Axial coils.
k. After sufficient cooling of the Shim Lead Assembly, click [Enable Power Supply -0A] to enable the
supply. Then click [Set Old Currents] to put 250mA into each coil to check the continuity. Verify
on the front of the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply that current is being delivered from each of
the six correction coil power supplies.
l. As the currents are being input into the magnet, verify that the heater currents are set to
m. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] to turn down the supply.
n. For the Old values, change all currents to -0.25A. Repeat the following to ensure negative
currents can be entered.
1. After sufficient cooling of the Shim Lead Assembly, click [Enable Power Supply -0A] to
enable the supply. Then click [Set Old Currents] to put 250mA into each coil to check the
continuity. Verify on the front of the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply that current is being
delivered from each of the six correction coil power supplies.
2. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] to turn down the supply.
o. Repeat the above process for the Transverse 1 and Transverse 2 banks to verify continuity.

Page 193 of 607
8.4.13. Connect the Shim Camera to the PC's COM port. Make sure all connections are secure.
8.4.14. Install the Mapping Fixture's Probe Array (if not done already) in conformance with Preparations for
Field Measurement.
8.4.15. If the most recent version of GE Shimtool Software is not installed on the computer being used:
a. Insert the CD into the computer, automatically launching the installation program (install.cmd).
b. When asked, select the installation drive for the computer in use. The CD should automatically
install all ShimTool files at
◊ D:\MRshim or
◊ C:\MRshim.
c. Always use the most recent revision of GE Shimtool Software.
8.4.16. Double-click the ShimTool*.exe listing in the ShimTool directory in Windows Explorer.
8.4.17. When the Register Magnet Type screen displays:
a. Check that the entry next to Series:
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnets: Enter R
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnets: Enter W or WB as appropriate
b. Type W into the box next to Test Cell:. (Use W for all shimming done at a customer's site.)
c. Type or adjust the numerical value next to Number: to the serial number of the magnet to be
shimmed.
d. If there is a suffix on the Magnet Serial Number (e.g. R4520A), enter the suffix (e.g. A) in the He
Vessel field. If no suffix, leave as 0 (zero).
e. Click [OK].
Register Magnet Type Screen
Enter R, W or WB
As appropriate
Enter Serial Number

(Numeric Field) Enter Magnet Suffix
As appropriate (if present) – if no
suffix, leave as 0
(zero).

Page 194 of 607
8.4.18. ShimTool automatically creates a subdirectory for storing all .map, .cur, and .shm files at
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnets: D:\MRshim\R####0
♦ 3.0T LCC (W Series) Magnets: D:\MRshim\W0####0
♦ 3.0T LCC (WB Series) Magnets: D:\MRshim\WB####0
♦ Note that some installations/operating systems may use the C:\ drive instead of the D:\ drive.
♦ Software code will add extra zeros as necessary to make sure the subdirectory name is seven
characters/numbers long. That is, the subdirectory for W series magnet 22 should be W000220.
8.4.19. Load the previous shim files (*.lvs, *.shm or *.cur) that was created when the magnet was shimmed at
the Florence facility (or obtained from previous site shimming) onto the laptop.
♦ This file is stored on the Field Report (ATR) DVD. Load the .psm file into the proper directory for
the magnet type (as noted in previous step).
8.4.20. Select [Camera Controls] (fifth button from right) when the ShimTool main screen displays, shown
below.
ShimTool Main
Screen Button
Definitions
8.4.21. Make sure the Magnetic Field Camera Controls window (see illustration Magnet Field Camera
Controls: PC-Probe Communication) displays
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnets: Center Freq: of 63.8 MHz (rounded).
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnets: Center Freq: of 127.7 MHz (rounded)

Page 195 of 607
8.4.22. If the program did not find a camera attached to the PC's COM port (Port – NONE displays in upper left
of illustration Magnet Field Camera Controls: PC-Probe Communication):
a. Check that power to the camera is turned on and all connections between the probe array,
camera, and PC are secure.
b. Click the [Find Port] button to reestablish Camera-PC communications.
c. Exit any programs that Windows Task Manager (accessed by pressing <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete>)
is running on the PC besides ShimTool and Windows Explorer (and Auto Ramp software, if
appropriate).
Magnet Field Camera Controls: PC-Probe Communication

3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Example shown

Page 196 of 607
8.4.23. Choose an option on the Magnetic Field Camera Controls screen shown above:
a. Click the [Field Search] button to automatically find the center frequency of the magnet, and
update the Center Freq: field shown in illustration Magnet Field Camera Controls (After Choosing
Field Search Button). An initial listing from left to right in the scrolling text box:
◊ Probe number: #,
◊ Frequency in MHz: Freq (MHz),
◊ Magnetic field strength in Gauss: Field (G),
◊ Standard deviation in Gauss, and
◊ Measurement count readings from each probe. (The measurement counts should all read
close to the number next to Measurements: at the top of the screen.)
Magnet Field Camera Controls (After Choosing Field Search Button)

8.4.24. Click the [OK] button to finish the camera setup and close the Magnetic Field Camera Controls screen.
8.4.25. Proceed to Re-establishing Field Report (ATR) S/C Shim Currents.

Page 197 of 607
measurements.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: This check requires at least twelve hours between the first and second
measurements.
8.5.2. Post “Authorized Personnel Only” signs (2289812) in conformance with Chapter 1, Safety, to indicate a
magnetic drift test is in progress.
this process.
the pressure remains within 4.0 +/- 0.1 psi.

Page 198 of 607
formula:
hr Freq 1 × N
hr N
Where
over a the elapsed period defined above.

Page 199 of 607
8.6. Re-establishing Field Report (ATR) Shim Currents Using Manual Shim Power Supply (PN
46-260777G3)
8.6.1. Do NOT move articles or equipment in the Magnet Room while shimming.
8.6.2. Verify that the heater currents are set to
♦ Transverse 1 (T1) = 610mA ± 10mA
♦ Axial Coils (Axial) = 710mA ± 10mA
♦ If any current level is not correct, adjust the adjustment screw on the rear of the Shim Power
Supply.
8.6.3. Before turning on the shim coil power supply and applying shim currents, ensure the following
conditions exist to prevent irreparable damage to the vapor-cooled Shim Leads:
♦ Make sure the Shim Lead Assembly is engaged in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement and that the Shim Lead Nupro Vent Valve is open.
♦ Shim Lead is frosting and venting.
♦ Shim Power Supply current controls are set to zero (fully CCW).
8.6.4. The Recommended Total Current values found on the Field Report (ATR) that shipped with the magnet
must be entered into the S/C Correction Coils before performing field mapping and any further active
(superconducting) or passive shimming. The coil groups are:
♦ Transverse 1 Coils: T1-1 to T1-6
♦ Axial Coils: AX1 to AX6
Each coil group is connected to one heater circuit on the shim power supply. Therefore, if the only
current change was in the Axial 2 Coil, turning the Axial Switch Heater on would dump the currents in
Axial Coils (AX1 to AX6) and the appropriate currents for each Axial Coil would need entering. Always
check the ATR for any possible magnet-specific current settings.
8.6.5. After ensuring that vapor is escaping from the Shim Lead and the lead is frosted, turn on the power
supply.

Page 200 of 607
8.6.6. Repeat the following to input the Field Report (ATR) shim currents for each shim group in the
recommended sequence: T1, T2, and Axial. (See the table below.)
a. Set the Shim Group Select Switch to the appropriate group: T1, T2 or Axial as shown in the table
and illustration that follow.
Superconducting Shim Groups

Transverse 1 Shim Transverse 2 Shim
Course/Fine Adjust Axial Shim Group
Group Group
Potentiometer &
Polarity Light Shim Group Select Switch Setting - Coil (Circuit)
Switch Middle Bottom Top
1 T1-1 T2-1 AX1
2 T1-2 T2-2 AX2
3 T1-3 T2-3 AX3
4 T1-4 T2-4 AX4
5 T1-5 T2-5 AX5*
6 T1-6* T2-6* AX6*
* No applicable to W0 Series Magnets
Shim Power Supply Controls (Front
b. Confirm the Course/Fine Current Adjust potentiometers on the Shim Power Supply are set to zero
amps (fully CCW).
◊ The polarity relays do not change polarity if there is any current flowing through their
respective channels.
◊ Reduce the current to zero before the relays change to the position indicated by the
external switches on the power supply.
◊ Magnet damage is possible if heater currents are not set correctly.
◊ Failure to accurately set the Power Supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the
number of plotting iterations (i.e., time to shim the magnet).

Page 201 of 607
c. Turn on the selected group's Switch Heater (Transverse 1, Transverse 2 or Axial) and wait 30
seconds for the switches to go resistive.
d. Set the polarities for the shim coil group according to the Field Report (ATR).
e. Set the Field Report (ATR) total currents for the shim coil group.
f. Allow the shim current to settle for the time shown in the table below.
◊ The W, WB Series magnet correction coils have a greater time constant (inductance:
resistance ratio) than those of a 1.5T magnet. Therefore, a longer settling time is required
for the shim currents.
◊ It is important that the shim current settling time is in conformance with the table below to
prevent subsequent current drift after settling. For Axial Currents, proceed to next
processing step (as indicated by “For Axial Currents Only.”
Shim Current Settling Times (Re-establishing Field Report (ATR))

Shim Coil Group Settling Time
T1 20 Minutes
T2 20 Minutes
Axial* 45 Minutes*
* Axial times represent minimum times. Axial coupling may require longer
wait times to meet the magnetic field stabilization requirements stated in (For
Axial Currents) step below.
g. Verify the Field Report (ATR) currents, turn off the heater group, and wait five minutes. Failure to
accurately set the power supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the number of
plotting iterations (time to shim the magnet).
h. After waiting five minutes, gradually turn the power supply Current Adjust Potentiometers down
to zero.
i. Repeat for next coil group.

Page 202 of 607
8.6.7. For Axial Currents Only:
a. Monitor the magnetic field drift until it stabilizes, <2 Hz change in total magnetic field strength
over a two-minute period.
b. Click [Continuously Monitor Field] (second button from right) from the ShimTool main screen
shown below.
c. Ensure the probe array is in the 15° position (Slice/Arc 2 in the table below).
d. Select Probe 22.
Field Camera Mapping Slices (Positions)
Slice/Arc Slice/Arc Slice/Arc Slice/Arc
Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees
Position Position Position Position
0 0/360 6 90 12 180 18 270
1 15 7 105 13 195 19 285
2 30 8 120 14 210 20 300
3 45 9 135 15 225 21 315
4 60 10 150 16 240 22 330
5 75 11 165 17 255 23 345
• The Slice/Arc Position number shown here and in ShimTool corresponds with the number stamped on the
mapping fixture’s positioning wheel.
• The remote box flashes slower at the 0/360°, 90°, 180° and 270° positions.
e. Click [Start] on the screen that displays to beginning measuring field strength and drift. Note the
starting frequency for use later in this section.
f. Wait two minutes, then click [Stop] and record the change between the starting and present
frequencies.
◊ If the change is ≥2 Hz, repeat “For Axial Currents Only” process.
◊ If the change is <2 Hz, continue.
g. Once the magnetic field is stable and the Axial settling time stated in Table “Shim Current
Settling Times (Re-establishing Field Report (ATR))” elapses, turn off the Axial Switch Heater and
allow the Heater to cool for five minutes.
h. Slowly turn all the Course/Fine Current Adjust potentiometers on the Shim Power Supply back
down to zero amps (fully CCW).
8.6.8. Close the Shim Lead's Nupro Vent Valve.
8.6.9. Continue with Running ShimTool – Field Map Acquisition.

Page 203 of 607
8.7. Re-establishing Field Report (ATR) Shim Currents Using Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply
(PN 5395802 or 5395802-2)
8.7.1. Do NOT move articles or equipment in the Magnet Room while shimming.
♦ Shim Power Supply current controls are set to zero.
supply.

Page 204 of 607
8.7.6. Open the Shim Control panel for the auto-ramp shim power supply control program. Use the Field
Report (ATR) .cur/.shm files as “Previous Shim File” for re-establishing the Field Report (ATR) S/C
currents.
8.7.7. If an LVS shim or ShimTool shim file exists on this computer (or copied over from the Field Report
(ATR), or system), load in the last file using the file input on the left side as shown in the following
illustration, and then click [Zero out Old] to set the Old values to zero. If a file is not available, enter
the last recorded values in the boxes shown under the New values.
8.7.8. Verify the values are correct with zero in the Old column and the New column corresponding to the
desired currents for all three groups (Axial, Transverse 1, and Transverse 2). Make sure the current
polarities are correct as well.

Page 205 of 607
8.7.9. If entering the transverse currents with automation:
a. Set the settling time box for the Transverse 1 bank to the values shown in the table below.
Shim Current Settling Times (Re-establishing Field Report (ATR))

T1 20 Minutes
T2 20 Minutes
Axial* 45 Minutes*
b. From the Select groups drop down menu (under the Automation parameters section of the
screen), select Transverse1.
c. Check the Auto Load box and then click [Start] to change the currents in the magnet as shown in
the illustration above.
d. Repeat process for Transverse 2 then proceed to manual entry of Axial currents.
◊ Failure to accurately set the power supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the
number of plotting iterations (the time to shim the magnet will increase).
8.7.10. If entering the currents manually, repeat the following steps for each Shim Coil Group in sequence:
a. From the Select groups drop down menu (under the Automation parameters section of the
screen), select the shim coil group for which you are entering currents (Transverse 1, Transverse
2, or Axial).
b. Ensure the Old and New current values are shown correctly, and then click [Enable Power Supply
– 0A]. Set the existing current in the Shim Coils by clicking [Set OLD Currents] and check that all
currents are shown on the front of the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply.
c. Click [Open Heater] to turn the heater on. Wait 30 seconds.
d. Click [New Currents] to load the new currents into the coils.
e. Allow the shim currents to settle for the time shown in table above. (For Axial currents, proceed
to Step “For Axial Currents Only.”)
f. Verify the new currents, and then click [Close Heater] to turn off the heater group. Wait five
minutes.
g. After the five minute wait, click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] button to dial the currents down.
◊ If repeated iterations of the shim program call for the same change in current in a shim coil
(indicating the Shim Switch is not going resistive), one of the two following actions may help
drive the Shim Switch resistive:
∗ Make sure the Heater current is set properly, or
∗ Set 20 amps in the coil, then lower current to the required value. (Adjust slightly as
required; 1 mA high is better than 1 mA low.)
h. Repeat for next coil group.

Page 206 of 607
a. Monitor the field drift until it stabilizes (that is, the, change in total magnetic field during two
minutes is <2 Hz).
b. Make sure the Field Camera is in the 15° position.
c. Click [Continuously Monitor Field] (second button from right) on the ShimTool main screen.
d. Select Probe 22.

e. Click [Start] on the screen that displays to beginning measuring field strength and drift. Note the
starting frequency for use later in this section.
f. Wait two minutes, then click [Stop] and record the change between the starting and present
frequencies.
g. Once the magnetic field is stable, click [Close Heater] to turn off the switch heater and allow the
Heater to cool for five minutes.
h. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] to dial the currents down.

Page 207 of 607
8.8. Zeroing Shim Currents Using Manual Shim Power Supply (PN 46-260777G3)
8.8.1. Do NOT move articles or equipment in the Magnet Room while adjusting shim currents.
Supply.
supply.
8.8.5. Set the Course/Fine Current Adjust potentiometers on the Shim Power Supply to zero amps (fully
CCW).
♦ The polarity relays do not change polarity if there is any current flowing through their respective
channels.
♦ Reduce the current to zero before the relays change to the position indicated by the external
switches on the power supply.
♦ Magnet damage is possible if heater currents are not set correctly.
♦ Failure to accurately set the Power Supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the number
of plotting iterations (i.e., time to shim the magnet).
8.8.6. Turn on all Switch Heater groups (T1, T2, and Axial) with current output set to zero (0), wait five
minutes, then turn them off.
Shim Power Supply Controls (Front Panel)


Page 208 of 607
8.9. Zeroing Shim Currents Using Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply (PN 5395802 or 5395802-2)
supply.
8.9.5. Open the Shim Control panel for the auto-ramp shim power supply control program.
8.9.6. Click [Zero Out All] to have all inputs at zero. Select the Transverse 1 group.
8.9.7. Click [Enable Power Supply 0V], then click [Set Old Currents], and then click [Open Heater].
8.9.8. After 5 minutes, click [Close Heater], and then click [Disable Power Supply - 0V].
8.9.9. Select the Transverse 2 group. Click [Enable Power Supply 0V], and then click [Open Heater].
8.9.10. After 5 minutes, click [Close Heater] and then click [Disable Power Supply - 0V].
8.9.11. Select the Axial group. Click [Enable Power Supply 0V], and then click [Open Heater].
8.9.12. Wait 5 minutes, click [Close Heater]. Allow the switch to cool for 5 minutes, and then click [Disable
Power Supply – 0V].

Page 209 of 607
8.10. Running Shim Tool – Field Map Acquisition
8.10.1. Items to Note:
♦ The magnet’s center frequency must be stable in conformance with Field Stability Check before
running field maps.
♦ Moving articles or equipment in the Magnet Room may affect readings of magnetic field
strength.
♦ Locate the Mapping Fixture and Shim Camera at the magnet’s approximate center in
conformance with Preparations for Field Measurement before centering the probe array using
ShimTool.
♦ Make sure you are using the correct probe array for the magnet:
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnets: Use 2276277-12 (45 cm probe array, array marking: 64 MHz)
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnets: Use 2276277-13 (50 cm probe array, array marking: 127
MHz)
8.10.2. Click [Acquire Field Map] (fourth button from right) on the ShimTool main screen. (Shown below.)
Acquire Field Map Button on ShimTool Main Screen
8.10.3. Click the [Static] radio button on the Acquire Field Map screen (shown below), then select
W_CoronaCamera50dsv (for the 3T Magnet) or LCC-Camera (for the 1.5T Magnet) (as appropriate)
from the Map/Camera Type: drop-down menu.
♦ Do not change the default number for Slices:
♦ Do not change the default filename for Map Name:
Static Button on Acquire Field Map Screen

Do not change the
default number for Slices
Set to Static
Do not change the default

filename for Map Name
Select Appropriate
Map/Camera Type from
Menu

Page 210 of 607
8.10.4. Make sure the curved part of the field camera’s probe array faces directly up (0° position).
8.10.5. Moving any articles or equipment in or near the Magnet Room may affect the field map. Do not allow
nonessential conversation/distractions during the map acquisition. If an error occurs during field map
acquisition:
a. Click the [Abort] button on the Acquire Progress window shown in illustration below.
b. Press the field camera’s remote box switch one more time.
c. Retake the map from the beginning.
8.10.6. Click [OK] to begin mapping the magnet’s magnetic field.
♦ The Field Map screen displays with the Acquire Progress window overlaid as shown below.
♦ The field camera’s remote box switch should start to repeatedly flash.
Field Map Being Acquired
8.10.7. Press the field camera’s remote box switch when it starts to flash repeatedly. (The light stops flashing
and remains illuminated while the system acquires one slice of the field map. After the last slice, the
light goes off).
8.10.8. When the camera’s remote box switch starts to flash repeatedly again, slowly and smoothly rotate
the camera one position (15°) clockwise.

Page 211 of 607
8.10.9. Repeat the above two steps (copied below) to take 24 map slices: Slice 0 at 0°/360° through Slice 23 at
345°. Refer to Table “Field Camera Mapping Slices (Positions)” for a summary of the slices.
a. Step 1: Press the field camera’s remote box switch when it starts to flash repeatedly. (The light
stops flashing and remains illuminated while the system acquires one slice of the field map. After
the last slice, the light goes off).
b. Step 2: When the camera’s remote box switch starts to flash repeatedly again, slowly and
smoothly rotate the camera one position (15°) clockwise.
Field Camera Mapping Slices (Positions)

Slice/Arc Slice/Arc Slice/Arc Slice/Arc
Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees
Position Position Position Position
0 0/360 6 90 12 180 18 270
1 15 7 105 13 195 19 285
2 30 8 120 14 210 20 300
3 45 9 135 15 225 21 315
4 60 10 150 16 240 22 330
5 75 11 165 17 255 23 345
• The Slice/Arc Position number shown here and in ShimTool corresponds with the number stamped on the
mapping fixture’s positioning wheel.
• The remote box flashes slower at the 0/360°, 90°, 180° and 270° positions.
8.10.10. After taking all 24 slices, the finished map displays on the Field Map screen shown below. The
ShimTool automatically assigns a sequential alphabetic filename (at the start of the map) to both the
displayed map and the .map file it creates.
♦ For Magnet Series: and Number: entered on the Register Magnet Type screen: W0 + 0009
becomes W00009, WB + 0009 becomes WB0009. (for example).
♦ A sequential alphabetic character A, B, ... C becomes: 0000A, 0000B, ... 0000C.
♦ For Test Cell: entered on the Register Magnet Type screen: Use W when shimming at a customer
site.
♦ Plus the .map file extension.
Sample First Field Map Screen for Axial Centering

3.0T (UA Series) Example shown

Page 212 of 607
8.10.11. If this is the first field map taken since the mapping fixture was installed or moved in any substantial
way, use this map to axially center the probe array.
a. Select the Harmonics menu (fourth item from the left at the top of Field Map Screen (above) and
click Decompose (F6).
b. Click [OK] when the Select Harmonics screen displays, shown below.
Field Map Harmonics
Select Harmonics Screen

Page 213 of 607
c. Look at the PPM value displayed on the right side of line 11 when the Field Map Harmonics
screen shown above displays.
◊ If the PPM value on line 11 is
∗ 1.5T LCC (R Series): > -0.8 ppm and < +0.8 ppm
∗ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) : > -1.0 ppm and < +1.0 ppm
the probe array is centered axially.
1. Close Shim Tool’s Harmonics window.
2. Use this centered map to run ShimTool.
3. Proceed with “Running Shim Tool – Acquiring a Shim File.”
◊ If the PPM value is outside of the desired specification noted, verify that the Positioning
Wheel on the Mapping Fixture is in the groove labeled LCC (shown below).
DO NOT use Use for 1.5T LCC

this groove or 3.0T LCC
d. Divide the PPM value obtained above for line 11 (see example below)
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series): divide by 0.75
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) : divide by 1.7
1.5T LCC (R Series)
PPM Value on Line 11 Number of Turns of Mapping Fixture's Axial Positioning

=
0.75 Screw Required to Axially Center Probe Array
3.0T LCC (W,WB Series)
PPM Value on Line 11 Number of Turns of Mapping Fixture' s Axial Positioning

=
1.7 Screw Required to Axially Center Probe Array

Page 214 of 607
e. Loosen the Axial Positioning Screw Locking Wheel, carefully turn the Axial Positioning Screw (see
Mapping Fixture illustrations) the number of full turns calculated with the above formula, with
either formula, or the average of both formulas.
◊ For a positive (+) PPM value: Turn the Axial Positioning Screw clockwise.
◊ For a negative (-) PPM value: Turn the Axial Positioning Screw counterclockwise.
◊ Turning in increments smaller than a quarter turn is not necessary.
f. Tighten the Locking Wheel.
Universal Mapping Fixture, 5266042-4

(MR750 Configuration Shown)
2380758 Mapping Fixture

Page 215 of 607
g. Close the ShimTool Harmonics window(s).
h. Repeat process to verify axial centering of the probe array.
i. Take another map to verify.
Sample Field Map Screen for Shimming

Page 216 of 607
8.11. Running Shim Tool - Acquiring a Shim File
8.11.1. Click [GO] (button farthest left) on the ShimTool main screen, shown below.
GO Button on ShimTool Main Screen
8.11.2. If the following menu appears, click [Shim or Reshim a Magnet], and then click [GO].

Page 217 of 607
8.11.3. When the Select the Type of Shim to Perform screen (shown below) displays:
a. Check that the Magnet Type: field reads Cylindrical.
b. Select the appropriate Subtype:
Trays/ Correct Choices
Series
Positions Magnet Subtype Passive Calibration File Active Calibration File
R 45 LCC-R-1.5T-XRMB12 XRMB_0_25mm.cal RS393SC.cal
W 36 CoronaXRMB XRMB_0_25mm.cal W_CoronaSC.cal
WB 36 WB_XRMB XRMB_0_25mm.cal WB_CoronaSC_MarkIII.cal
W 18 CoronaXRMB_18T XRMB_0_25mm.cal W_CoronaSC.cal
WB 18 WB_XRMB_18T XRMB_0_25mm.cal WB_CoronaSC_MarkIII.cal
W 25 Corona W_CoronaP.cal W_CoronaSC.cal
W 41 CoronaP41 W_CoronaP41.cal W_CoronaSC.cal
WB 41 G3_41 W_CoronaP41.cal WB_CoronaSC_MarkIII
c. Check that the Magnet Type and Subtype were selected correctly - it is impossible to change
these fields once the [Add and Subtract (Re-Shim)] radio button (shown below) is selected.
d. For MR450 Upgrades, select [New] for the first iteration shim file. Otherwise, check the [Add and
Subtract (ReShim)] radio button.
Select the Type of Shim

to Perform Screen
Magnet Type:
Cylindrical
Subtype:
Select from Drop
Down List

Page 218 of 607
Directory Path, Filenames and File Format

Directory Path to File
Magnet Series File Type C Drive D Drive
SC C:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.cur D:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.cur
1.5T LCC R Passive C:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.shm D:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.shm
Map C:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.map D:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.map
SC C:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.cur D:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.cur
W Passive C:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm D:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm
Map C:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm D:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm
3.0T LCC
SC C:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.cur D:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.cur
WB Passive C:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm D:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm
Map C:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm D:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm
Format for Directory Path: Drive letter + :\MRshim\ + seven character (maximum) subdirectory name + \ + filename.
Format for Seven-Character Subdirectory Name: Series number (box beside Series: + Magnet number (box beside
Number:) + Helium vessel number (assigned at the factory).
e. Do NOT use incorrect filenames.

f. Keep track of filenames and iterations used (and what they were used for).
g. Use the ATR .cur / .shm filenames as Previous Shim File for the first iteration of ShimTool after
the ATR superconducting currents are re-established. Make sure these files are copied to the
computer's subdirectory for the magnet (created earlier) before starting the iteration.
8.11.4. If the output file is not located as stated in Table “Directory Path, Filenames and File Format” and the
full path to the correct shim file cannot be recalled, click [Browse], locate the correct file, select it, and
open the file.
8.11.5. Accurately select the “Previous Shim File” name (the last file with a .SHM or .CUR extension) from the
list beside “Previous Shim File”.
8.11.6. Check that all information on the Select the Type of Shim to Perform screen (see illustration “Select
the Type of Shim to Perform Screen,” above) is accurate, then click [Next >].

Page 219 of 607
8.11.7. When the Select the Input Field Map screen (see below) displays, accurately enter the filename of the
last field map with .map extension taken in Section Field Map Acquisition.
♦ If the output file is not located as stated in Table “Directory Path, Filenames and File Format” and
the full path to the correct map file cannot be recalled, click [Browse], locate the correct file,
select it, and open the file.
Select the Input Field Map Screen
8.11.8. Click [Next >].

a. The ShimTool looks at the data contained in the file specified.
b. If that map file contains bad data, the alert shown below displays. (If the specified map file is
good, this alert should not display.)
c. Click [No], and retake the map in conformance with Section Field Map Acquisition. Ensure that all
connections are good and the cable is not wrapping around the mapping fixture.

Page 220 of 607
8.11.9. Click Unified/Multi-Volume Shimming when the Shim Target and Tolerance Controls screen shown
below displays.
8.11.10. Ensure the Map Type: field reads (as appropriate)
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): LCC-4vol-393Unified
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): G3UnifiedTarget or G3Unified5V for surface shim.

Page 221 of 607
8.11.11. Select the [Target (TOL) File] radio button.
♦ If the ATR was produced using Tolerance Shimming, the path to the .tol file displays in the field
for Target (TOL) File:.
♦ If the ATR was produced using Surface Shimming, a string of five numbers (see illustration above)
separated by commas displays for Target (TOL) File:.
♦ The path to the tolerance file should be
Directory Path, Filenames and File Format

Directory Path to File
Magnet Series File Type C Drive D Drive
SC C:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.cur D:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.cur
1.5T LCC R Passive C:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.shm D:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.shm
Map C:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.map D:\MRshim\R0####0\R0####0.map
SC C:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.cur D:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.cur
W Passive C:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm D:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm
Map C:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm D:\MRshim\W0####0\W0####0.shm
3.0T LCC
SC C:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.cur D:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.cur
WB Passive C:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm D:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm
Map C:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm D:\MRshim\WB####0\WB####0.shm
Format for Directory Path: Drive letter + :\MRshim\ + seven character (maximum) subdirectory name + \ + filename.
Format for Seven-Character Subdirectory Name: Series number (box beside Series: + Magnet number (box beside
Number:) + Helium vessel number (assigned at the factory).
◊ Note that some installations/operating systems may use the C:\ drive instead of the D:\
drive.
♦ If the correct tolerance file is not located there and the full path to the correct location cannot be
recalled, click [Browse], locate the correct file, select it, and open the file.
♦ The choice between Tolerance and Surface Shimming is made at the factory to give the best
shimming results. This choice only affects the Shim Target and Tolerance Controls screen, the
ShimTool text file, and the quantity of shims used, but has no procedural impact on the Field
Engineer.

Page 222 of 607
8.11.12. Click [Next >] to proceed to the “Select the Calibration File” screen (example shown below).
8.11.13. Select the .cal file from the Passive Calibration File scrolling list (see above) to match the file stated
above. (Table “Magnet Subtype and Calibration File Choices” shows the correct selection choices.)
♦ If the Passive Calibration file does not display in the scrolling list, click [Browse], locate the
correct file, select it, and open it.
♦ The path to the calibrations files should be D:\MRshim\Shimtool\*.cal (where the * represents the
correct calibration file as stated in Table “Magnet Subtype and Calibration File Choices).” (Note
that some installations/operating systems may use the C:\ drive instead of the D:\ drive.)
♦ Shim tray positions are shown in the “Passive Shimming” section.

Page 223 of 607
8.11.14. If only performing one type of shimming (passive or active) during this iteration, click [Disable] for the
type of shimming not being done.
♦ Click [Disable] next to Passive Shim Calibration File if preparing to only perform S/C (active)
Shimming
8.11.15. Click [Next >].
8.11.16. If the Disable Shims/Change Limits screen appears (example shown below), Click [Next>] without
making changes.

Page 224 of 607
8.11.17. If the Couple Passive Shim Positions (Optional) screen appears (shown below), Click [Next>] without
making changes.
8.11.18. Check that the Output File name on the Select Shim Target PPM screen (see example below) that
displays next matches the .map filename, but with a .shm or .cur extension.
♦ Make no other changes on this screen.
♦ The output file will be stored in the same directory as the *.map file.

Page 225 of 607
8.11.19. Click [<Back] as needed to review and verify that all entries and choices on the previous screens are
correct.
8.11.20. Click [Finish] to begin processing the shimming information with ShimTool.
♦ A Shim Status window displays while the ShimTool is processing, and closes when processing is
completed.
8.11.21. Click [Dismiss] when the Shim Summary screen (similar to below) displays.

Page 226 of 607
8.11.22. When the more complete display of the shim iteration results displays (similar to illustration below),
print the ShimTool results.
♦ The .cur/.shm text file is automatically saved by the ShimTool.
♦ One can print the file from NotePad, WordPad, or a word processor for pages similar to
illustration below.
♦ “Show the output SHM file” in the Shim dropdown menu will open the current shim file in a
viewer.
♦ Print lists (File dropdown menu) will print the shim file as shown in the illustrations below.
♦ Previous shim file can be opened with the Open command (File dropdown menu).
Shim Iteration Results Displays

Page 227 of 607
8.11.23. To obtain a multi-page paper version of the ShimTool results that look similar to illustration below:
a. Select Print Lists... from the File menu (select landscape mode), and
b. Click [OK].
♦ The multi-page paper version may be easier to use while placing shims in the shim trays.
♦ Passive Shims–Incremental Rounded Shim information on Page 3 and Passive Shims–Total
Rounded Shim information on Page 4 of the ShimTool printout (see illustrations below) is the
same information contained under Incremental–Quantized (for Incremental Rounded Shim) and
Total–Quantized (for Total Rounded Shim) in the .shm file (see illustrations below, which now
shows the amount of change and the resulting total at each shim position to be changed).
♦ The .cur files do not contain incremental information for passive shims as only the active shims
are changed in these files.
Sample ShimTool Printed Report - Pages 1 and 2

Page 228 of 607
Example: Sample ShimTool Printed Report – 36-Tray Passive Shimming, Pages 3 and 4
Change in Total after

this iteration this iteration
Shim Tray Locations for 36-Tray and 18-Tray
8.11.24. Use these ShimTool results for Section Passive Shim Installation.

Page 229 of 607
8.11.25. Shim mass (shims) refers to the total number of shims in all shim tray positions.
8.11.26. If all volumes listed under “The recomp field inhomogeneity is ...” are within specification, the magnet
is shimmed and if the screen shown below displays, Click [No].
a. Exit the ShimTool.
b. Proceed with Shim Finalization.
c. (The Congratulations! screen indicates the magnet is shimmed to within specification. Writing a
Field Report (ATR) file is not needed after the magnet has left the factory.)
8.11.27. On the first iteration, using the centered map and set to calculate S/C Shimming only, look at the four
volumes listed under “Quantized: (Predicted)” Compare these values to the specifications shown
below.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): The 45 cm DSV volume displayed when the Field Report (ATR) includes
Surface Shimming is not important during field shimming and can be ignored.
♦ This step corresponds to the diamond-shaped decision box labelled Are PPM Values For All 4
Volumes Under “Quantized (Predicted)” Within Spec? (on Shimming Flowchart).
1.5T LCC (R Series)

Volumetric Specifications
Elliptical Volume Peak-to-Peak or ppm Specification
48 Axial < 10 ppm (Peak to Peak)
45 cm DSV Within ± 6 ppm
35 cm DSV Within ± 0.8 ppm

Elliptical Volume Peak-to-Peak Specification
48.0 x 45.0 cm DSV 12.00 ppm
40 cm DSV 4.00 ppm
30 cm DSV 1.20 ppm
20 cm DSV 0.30 ppm

Page 230 of 607
8.11.28. If all four volumes listed under Quantized (Predicted) are within specification:
a. Apply the S/C Shim Currents called for by ShimTool in conformance with Superconducting Shim
with Shim Tool Software section.
b. Return to Field Map Acquisition Section to take a new map and run ShimTool for S/C Shimming
only.
8.11.29. If any volume listed under Quantized (Predicted) is not within specification:
a. Return to Acquiring a Shim File section, and run ShimTool for both passive and S/C Shimming.
b. After running ShimTool set for both passive and S/C Shimming, look at the values for Net Mass
Change and the Changed Number of Shim Positions in the ShimTool reports, printed .cur / .shm
files, or ShimTool printout. Compare these values to the values shown in the table below.
◊ This step corresponds to the diamond-shaped decision box labelled Passive Shim Change <
5 mm and < 5 Positions? in Shimming Flowchart.
Passive Shim Change Limits

Net Mass Change <5
Changed Number of Shim Positions < 5 Positions
c. If the limits in the table above are not met (either Net Mass Change is ≥5 or Changed Number of
Shim Positions is ≥5):
I. Install the passive shims called for by ShimTool in conformance with Section Passive
Shim Installation.
II. Once the passive shims are installed, apply the S/C Shim Currents called for by the
ShimTool in conformance with Section Superconducting Shimming with ShimTool
Software.
III. Return to Section Field Map Acquisition to take a new map and run the ShimTool for
both Passive and S/C Shimming.
IV. Repeat process beginning at Step “After running ShimTool set for both passive and S/C
Shimming…” above.
d. If the specifications in the table above are met (both Net Mass Change is <5 and Changed
Number of Shim Positions is <5):
I. Return to Section Acquiring a Shim File to run ShimTool for S/C Shimming only.
II. Apply the S/C Shim Currents called for by the ShimTool in conformance with Section
Superconducting Shimming with ShimTool Software.
III. Return to Section Field Map Acquisition to take a new map, and run the ShimTool for
superconducting shimming only.

Page 231 of 607
a. Look at the ShimTool text file's four volumes listed under “The recomp field inhomogeneity....”
1. Compare these values to the specifications shown in Volumetric Specifications Table.
1.5T LCC (R Series)

Elliptical Volume Peak-to-Peak or ppm Specification
48 Axial < 10 ppm (Peak to Peak)
45 cm DSV Within ± 6 ppm

Elliptical Volume Peak-to-Peak ppm Specification
48.0 x 45.0 cm DSV 12.00 ppm
40 cm DSV 4.00 ppm
30 cm DSV 1.20 ppm
20 cm DSV 0.30 ppm
2. If any volume is not within specification, return to Section Field Map Acquisition, to take a
new map and run ShimTool for S/C Shimming only.
3. If all volumes are within specification, the screen shown below displays.
I. Click [No].
II. Exit the ShimTool and continue with Shim Finalization, Step 1.
• NOTE: The Congratulations! screen means the magnet is shimmed within
specification. Writing a Field Report (ATR) file is not needed after the magnet has
left the factory.

Page 232 of 607
8.12. Passive Shim Tray Removal, Loading and Reinsertion
8.12.1. Do not attempt to superconductive shim a magnet without reading, understanding, and following the
shimming safety alerts and notices as referenced within this manual (Chapter 1, Safety) and within
the Shimming and Shim Current Adjustment section.
8.12.2. XRM Gradient Shim Trays (MR450 and MR750):
a. Slide the Shim Tray Puller over the shim tray to be removed. Rotate the puller 90 degrees
counterclockwise to secure the connection.
b. Carefully pull the shim tray straight out from its track. Have the work assistant hold onto the tray
as soon as possible.
c. Work Assistant: Securely hold the shim tray, and carry the tray and the puller away from the
magnet's field to a shim tray loading area in another room. Load shims into the shim tray in a
room away from the magnet's field.
XRM Shim Tray Puller
Shim Tray Removal

Page 233 of 607
8.12.3. Warm Bore Shim Trays (LCC300):
a. Align LCC300 Shim Tray Puller 2379661 with the shim tray to be pulled. (See the illustration
below.)
b. Insert the shim tray puller's tray engage screw into the threads at the end of the shim tray, then
turn the puller's tray engage wheel to fully engage the screw with the tray. (See the following
illustration.)
c. Push the shim tray puller's push handle to release the locking prongs on the tray.
d. Carefully slide the shim tray straight out from its track. Have the work assistant hold onto the
tray as soon as possible.
e. Work Assistant: Securely hold the shim tray, and carry the tray and the puller away from the
magnet's field to a shim tray loading area in another room. Load shims into the shim tray in a
room away from the magnet's field.
LCC300 Shim Tray Puller
Release Shim Tray Puller

Engage Shim Tray Puller with Shim Tray
LCC300 Shim
Tray Puller
Shim Tray Removal
LCC300 Shim
Tray Puller

Page 234 of 607
8.12.4. First person: Identify which component shims are required to meet the incremental shim mass
change specified by ShimTool for each position in each tray.
♦ Load shims into the shim tray in a room away from the magnet's field.
♦ See illustrations “Sample ShimTool Printed Report, Pages 3 and 4” for a sample ShimTool
shimming report.
♦ illustration “Sample ShimTool Printed Report, Pages 3 and 4” shows the D:\ drive directory paths
used by ShimTool installations. (Note that some installations/operating systems may use the C:\
drive instead of the D:\ drive.)
Example ShimTool Printed Report, 18-Tray Passive Shimming: Pages 3 and 4
Change in
this iteration
Total after
this iteration

Page 235 of 607
Shim Tray Layout

45 Position Shimming
45/41

Page 236 of 607
8.12.5. Securely screw the component shim arrangement to the shim tray position as shown in illustration
“Assembly of Component Shims Per Shim Position.”
a. Torque each screw to 10 lb-in. using Torque Screwdriver 46-294167P81.
b. Make sure screws holding shims to shim tray are fully tightened. Loose screws/shims can cause
white pixels.
c. Orient every position in each tray identically (screw heads facing the same way, etc.)
8.12.6. Second person (NOT first): Check that the incremental shims were added/subtracted in conformance
with the Passive Shims–Incremental Rounded Shim information on Page 3 of the ShimTool printout
(examples of illustrations above).
8.12.7. First and Second Person, Separately: Check that the total shims at each tray position equals the total
shims for that tray position specified in the Passive Shims - Total Rounded Shim information on Page
4 of ShimTool printout (examples of illustrations above).
a. If the actual shim totals in each position match ShimTool printout/.shm file, continue with shim
tray insertion.
b. If the incorrect shims were installed on this iteration, correct the shims.
c. If the actual shim totals do not match the ShimTool printout/.shm file in any position:
1. Edit this iteration's Total - Quantized .shm file pages to reflect the actual steel on the trays.
2. Save the edited .shm file using its existing name.
∗ Do NOT change the name of the .shm file.
∗ During the next shimming iteration ShimTool uses the steel quantity/location
information from this iteration's .shm file and a new map of the field with that steel
installed to calculate its new report.
3. Continue with the next section, Passive Shim Tray Insertion.

Page 237 of 607
Assembly of Component Shims Per Shim Position


Page 238 of 607
Assembly of Component Shims Per Shim Position

41 Position Shimming, 25 Position Shimming

Page 239 of 607
8.12.8. XRMB Shim Tray Insertion (MR450, MR750)
a. Securely carry the puller and tray to the magnet – follow all safety guidelines.
b. Begin to carefully slide the shim tray straight into its track using both hands as shown below.
◊ Have the work assistant help guide the tray into the track.
◊ Visually make sure the tray does not touch the gradient coil wrap as the tray enters the
track.
Hand Guidance of Shim Tray Insertion
c. Slide the shim tray puller over the shim tray to be inserted.
d. Fully insert the shim tray into the magnet. (Illustration below shows Shim Tray 6 not fully
inserted.) Keep the tray straight and moving slowly to prevent the shim pieces in full pockets
from being damaged by the gradient coil.
Shim Tray Not Fully Inserted
e. Rotate the shim tray knob 90° clockwise to secure the connection.
f. Disengage the puller from the shim tray.

Page 240 of 607
8.12.9. Warm Bore Shim Tray Insertion (LCC300)
a. If 10 mil thick flexible plastic sheets (x-ray film, Mylar or equivalent), 10 in. x 14 in. (250 mm x 350
mm) minimum are available, bend 1.5 in. (40 mm) of one short edge to ~ 90°. Carefully slide the
sheet between the shim tray guide of the tray to be inserted and the gradient coil wrap to
protect the gradient coil wrap from damage.
◊ Field-supplied flexible plastic sheets must be free of sharp edges and bent corners.
b. Screw the shim tray puller to the end of the shim tray.
◊ Reconnect the shim tray puller to the shim tray in a room away from the magnet's field.
c. Securely carry the puller and tray to the magnet.
d. Align the end of the shim tray with the tray's track. Orient every tray in conformance with
illustration below.
Proper Shim Tray

Orientation – Warm
Bore Shim
e. Begin to carefully slide the shim tray straight into its track using a flat hand or fist as in the
following illustration.
1. Have the work assistant help guide the tray into the track.
2. Visually make sure the tray does not touch the gradient coil wrap as the tray enters the
track.
3. Make sure the passive shim trays do not touch the gradient coil wrap during insertion to
prevent damage to the gradient coil wrap.
f. Pull the shim tray puller's push handle back to allow the locking prongs on the tray to re-engage.
g. Turn the shim tray puller's wheel until the puller is disengaged from the tray.

Page 241 of 607
Hand Guidance of Shim Tray Insertion – Warm Bore Shim

Page 242 of 607
8.13. Passive Shim: Superconducting Shimming with Shim Tool Software Using Manual Shim
Power Supply (PN 46-260777G3)
Supply.
8.13.5. The coil groups are:
supply.

Page 243 of 607
8.13.7. Repeat the following to input the Field Report (ATR) shim currents for each shim group in the
recommended sequence: T1, T2, and Axial. (See the table below.)
a. Set the Shim Group Select Switch to the appropriate group: T1, T2 or Axial as shown in the table
and illustrations that follow.
Superconducting Shim Groups

Transverse 1 Shim Transverse 2 Shim
Course/Fine Adjust Axial Shim Group
Group Group
Potentiometer &
Polarity Light Shim Group Select Switch Setting - Coil (Circuit)
Switch Middle Bottom Top
1 T1-1 T2-1 AX1
2 T1-2 T2-2 AX2
3 T1-3 T2-3 AX3
4 T1-4 T2-4 AX4
5 T1-5 T2-5 AX5*
6 T1-6* T2-6* AX6*
* No applicable to W0 Series Magnets

Page 244 of 607
Example ShimTool
Printed Report, W Series
LCC300: Pages 1 and 2
Example ShimTool
Printed Report, WB
Series LCC300: Pages 1
and 2

Page 245 of 607
b. Match the Shim Power Supply polarity and current of each channel (coil) in each group to the
present current and polarity in the selected shim coil group.
1. The present current/polarity, referred to in the following steps, is the current/polarity that
presently exists in each shim coil.
2. The present currents/polarities are those ShimTool positions calculated/reported in the
previous column under Active Shim Currents (shown in illustrations below) in the previous
iteration, then loaded into the shim coils.
3. These illustrations show the C:\ drive directory (Windows 2000) or D: \ drive directory
(Windows XP) paths used by ShimTool installations.
4. Set the Polarity Toggle Switches (Up = normal/positive polarity; Down = reversed/negative
polarity) as required to match the present polarity for the each coil in the group.
5. Set the Course/Fine Current Adjust potentiometers on the power supply to match the
present current level for the each coil in the group.
6. The polarity relays do not change polarity if there is any current flowing through their
respective channels. Reduce the current to zero before the relays can change to the
position indicated by the external switches on the power supply.
c. Check that all shim power supply currents/polarities match the currents/polarities in the
selected shim coil group.
1. Magnet damage is possible if heater currents are not set correctly.
2. When the Switch Heaters are turned on, any existing currents in the Shim Coils are
discharged into the power supply.
3. To prevent dumping excessive currents through the Shim Leads, match the existing shim
currents at the power supply with those in the magnet before turning on the Switch
Heaters.
4. Adjust the current to the required new levels after activating the Switch Heaters.
d. Turn on the selected group's Switch Heater (Transverse 1, Transverse 2 or Axial), and wait 30
seconds for the switches to go resistive.
e. Set the new Total currents and polarities for the shim coil group using ShimTool's latest Active
Shim Currents values (currents listed in the column labeled New on the Active Shim Currents
page of the ShimTool report shown in earlier illustrations).
f. If there is a polarity change from the present to the new current, set the current to zero before
changing the polarity switch.

Page 246 of 607
g. Allow the shim currents to settle for the time shown in the table below.
1.5T LCC (R Series)

Settling Times for New Shim Currents After Re-establishing ATR Shim Currents
or Zeroing Shim Currents
10 Minutes (First Iteration)
T1
5 Minutes (Additional Iterations)
T2
5 Minutes (Additional Iterations)
20 Minutes* (First and Additional
Axial*
Iterations)
* Axial times represent minimum times. Axial coupling may require longer wait times to
meet the magnetic field stabilization requirements stated in (For Axial Currents) step below.
◊ The 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) magnet correction coils have a greater time constant
(inductance:resistance ratio) than those of a 1.5T magnet. Therefore, a longer settling time
is required for the shim currents. It is important that the shim current settling time is in
conformance with the table below to prevent subsequent current drift after settling.

Settling Times for New Shim Currents After Re-establishing Field Report (ATR)
T1 10 Minutes
T2 10 Minutes
Axial* 20 Minutes*
* Axial times represent minimum times. Axial coupling may require longer wait times to
meet the magnetic field stabilization requirements stated in (For Axial Currents) step below.
h. For Transverse banks, verify the new currents, then turn off the Heater Group and wait five
minutes.
i. After waiting five minutes, gradually turn the power supply Current Adjust Potentiometers down
to zero.
◊ If repeated iterations of the shim program call for the same current increment in a shim
coil, indicating the Shim Switch is not going resistive, one of the two following actions may
help drive the Shim Switch resistive:
∗ Set 20 amps in the coil, then lower the current to the required value.
∗ Adjust slightly as required (1 mA high is better than 1 mA low). Failure to accurately set
the power supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the number of plotting
iterations (i.e., time to shim the magnet).

Page 247 of 607
8.13.8. Make sure the field camera is in the 0° position.
a. Monitor the field drift until it stabilizes, <2 Hz change in total field over a two-minute period.
b. In some cases, the frequency could vary as much as 100 Hz. Shutting off the Coldhead
Compressor during acquisition/mapping of shim data may help reduce the frequency change.
c. Click [Continuously Monitor Field] (second button from right) from the ShimTool main screen
shown below.
d. Select Probe 22.

e. Click [Start] on the screen that displays to begin measuring field strength and drift. Note the
starting frequency for use in the next step.
f. Wait two minutes, click [Stop], and record the change between the starting and present
frequencies.
g. Once the magnetic field is stable, turn off the last Switch Heater that was turned on, and allow
the Heater to cool for five minutes.
h. Slowly turn all the Course/Fine Current Adjust potentiometers on the shim power supply back
down to zero amps (fully CCW).
8.13.10. When S/C (active) Shimming is complete, turn off the power supply.
♦ The axial shim currents may quench if the Shim Switch is in the Axial position when the Shim
Power Supply is turned off.
♦ Make sure the Shim Power Supply's Shim Switch is in the Transverse 1 or Transverse 2 position
before turning it off.
8.13.11. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Shim Coil Power Supply. Check that no voltage is present by
8.13.12. Disconnect all leads between the magnet and the Shim Coil Power Supply (P2, P2-W, Heater Cable).
8.13.13. Close the Shim Lead Nupro Vent Valve.
8.13.14. Retract the Shim Lead in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement, tighten the
brass cap, and check for leaks. Make sure the cap is replaced and does not leak and result in gaseous
helium loss or frosting.

Page 248 of 607
8.14. Passive Shim: Superconducting Shimming with Shim Tool Software Using Auto-Ramp
Shim Power Supply (PN 5395802 or 5395802-2)
supply.
8.14.7. The present current/polarity, referred to in the following steps, is the current/polarity that presently
exists in each shim coil.
♦ The present currents/polarities are those ShimTool positions calculated/reported in the Previous
column under Active Shim Currents (shown in illustrations below) in the previous iteration, then
loaded into the shim coils.
♦ These illustrations show the C:\ drive directory (Windows 2000) or D: \ drive directory (Windows
XP) paths used by ShimTool installations.

Page 249 of 607
Example ShimTool
Printed Report, W Series
LCC300: Pages 1 and 2
Example ShimTool
Printed Report, WB
Series LCC300: Pages 1
and 2

Page 250 of 607
8.14.8. If a shim file (*.cur or *.shm or *.lvs) exists on this computer, load in the last shim file using the file
input on the left side of the Shim Control screen as shown in the following illustration. If a file is not
available enter the values in the boxes shown under the Old and New values,
8.14.9. Verify the values are correct for both the Old and New columns corresponding to the currents in the
magnet and recommended currents for all three groups (Axial, Transverse 1, Transverse 2). Make sure
the current polarities are correct as well.

Page 251 of 607
8.14.10. If entering the transverse currents with automation:
a. Set the settling time box for the Transverse 1 bank to the values shown in the table below.
Settling Times for New Shim Currents After Re-establishing Field

Report (ATR) or Zeroing Shim Currents
T1
5 Minutes (Additional Iteration)
T2
20 Minutes*
Axial*
(First and Additional Iterations)
b. Note: For the first iteration of an MR450 upgrade, use the times given for inserting Field Report
(ATR) currents.
c. From the Select groups drop down menu (under the Automation parameters section of the
screen), select Transverse1.
d. Check the Auto Load box and then click [Start] to change the currents in the magnet as shown in
the following illustration.

Page 252 of 607
e. Repeat process for Transverse 2 then proceed to next step for manual entry of Axial currents.
1. As the Correction Coil currents are set, make sure each power supply is delivering the
appropriate amount of current at the correct polarity. If repeated iterations of the shim
program call for the same change in current in a shim coil, indicating the Shim Switch is not
going resistive, one of the two following actions may help drive the Shim Switch resistive:
2. Failure to accurately set the power supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the
number of plotting iterations (that is, the time to shim the magnet will increase).
8.14.11. If entering the currents manually, repeat the following steps for each Shim Coil Group in sequence:
2, or Axial). See illustration above.
e. Allow the shim currents to settle for the time shown in Table below. (For Axial currents, proceed
to “For Axial Currents Only” step.)
Settling Times for New Shim Currents After Re-establishing Field

Report (ATR) or Zeroing Shim Currents
T1
T2
20 Minutes*
Axial*
(First and Additional Iterations)
f. Verify the new currents, and then click [Close Heater] to turn off the heater group. Wait five
minutes.
g. After the five minute wait, click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] button to dial the currents down.
◊ If repeated iterations of the shim program call for the same change in current in a shim coil
(indicating the Shim Switch is not going resistive), one of the two following actions may help

Page 253 of 607
8.14.12. For Axial Currents Only
a. Monitor the field drift until it stabilizes (that is, the, change in total magnetic field during two
minutes is <2 Hz).
b. Make sure the Field Camera is in the 0° position.
c. Click [Continuously Monitor Field] (second button from right) on the ShimTool main screen.
d. Select Probe 22.
e. Click [Start] on the screen that displays to begin measuring field strength and drift. Make a note
of the starting frequency for use in the next step.
f. Wait two minutes, click [Stop], and record the change between the starting and present
frequencies.
g. Once the magnetic field is stable, click [Close Heater] to turn off the switch heater and allow the
h. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] to dial the currents down.
8.14.13. When shimming is complete:
a. Turn off the Power Supply.
b. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Shim Coil Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is
c. Disconnect all leads between the magnet and the Shim Coil Power Supply (P2, P2-W, Heater
Cable).
brass cap and check for leaks. Make sure the cap is replaced and does not leak, which could result in
gaseous helium loss or frosting.

Page 254 of 607
8.15. Passive Shim Finalization
8.15.1. Make sure the shimming results are available to other personnel for future shimming:
♦ Copy all .map, .cur and .shm files generated during shimming to a CD,
♦ Copy the .map, .cur and .shm files to the system in directory /usr/g/service/data
♦ Paste the .map, .cur and .shm files to the console.
♦ Keep track of the directory path of the files copied to the console on site, and
♦ Leave the CD on site with this Magnet and Cryogens Subsystem manual.
8.15.2. Return the magnet to its normal operating condition in conformance with Field Adjustments After
Shimming and the appropriate Service Methods documentation.
8.15.3. Turn off the power to the field camera at the Field Camera Power Supply.
8.15.4. Ensure the input power to the field camera is disconnected. Use a DVM (or equivalent measuring
device) to check that no voltage is present.
8.15.5. Disconnect the cables from the Field Camera.
8.15.6. Dismount the shaft of the mapping fixture from the support brackets. Remove the shaft from the bore
of the magnet.
8.15.7. Dismount the Probe Array or the No. 6 Probe and Single Probe Mounting Board and from the shaft of
the mapping fixture.
8.15.8. Dismount the patient end support bracket of the mapping fixture.
8.15.9. Dismount the service end support bracket of the mapping fixture.
8.15.10. Reinstall any enclosure components removed during the process.

Page 255 of 607
8.16. LV Shim: Shim Current Adjustment, Required Conditions
requirements.
8.16.3. Verify that Magnet Monitor is on and operational. If using proprietary Magnet Monitor software, verify
that Magnet Monitor Pressure Control is enabled and operational.
8.16.4. Make sure the Controlled Zero Boil-Off (COBO) heater on the Magnet Monitor is turned on.
before starting the Shim Current Adjustment Procedure. If necessary, fill the magnet in conformance
with Liquid Helium Fill.
8.16.6. Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting to shim the magnet.
8.16.7. Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open (or the hatch is opened if a mobile van) before
starting this procedure.
8.16.8. Ensure Field Stability. The drift rate specification is
◊ 1.5T LCC (R Series) Unit: ≤ 6.3 Hz/hr (0.1ppm/hr)
◊ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: ≤ 12.7 Hz/hr (0.1ppm/hr).
over the elapsed period defined above.
a. If the drift rate is greater than the above noted rate, the drift rate is outside the guidelines. If the
magnet has not recently been ramped and settled, contact the Regional Magnet & Cryogen
(MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center. High drift rates will
require frequent field adjustment and reshimming. If the magnet has recently been ramped,
continue monitoring until the magnet has settled within specification.

Page 256 of 607
8.17. LV Shim: Shim Coil Power Supply Adjustments with Manual Shim Coil Power Supply (P/N
46-260777G3) for LV Shim
8.17.2. Allow the magnet to stabilize to <0.1 ppm/hr. (6.3 Hz/hr) main magnetic field drift before shimming.
This will take 4 to 12 hours. Other commissioning functions can be performed during this time.
Disengagement.
8.17.6. Open the Shim Lead Vent Valve to increase the ability of the Shim Leads to carry current.

Page 257 of 607
8.17.7. Remove LOTO, connect power to the Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply and set the Heater
Currents:
♦ T1 = 610 mA ± 10 mA
♦ T2 = 610 mA ± 10 mA
♦ Axial = 710 mA ± 10 mA.
◊ Always check the Field Report (ATR) for any possible magnet-specific current settings.
◊ Do NOT connect input power to the Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply until it is
verified that ALL current controls are set to zero (turned fully counterclockwise) and the
supply is turned off.
◊ Connecting the Superconducting Shim Coil Harness to the magnet when the
Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply is turned on may cause irreparable damage to the
vapor-cooled shim leads.
8.17.8. After sufficient cooling of the Shim Lead Assembly, verify that all six shim power supply channels
operate at both positive and negative polarities for the Axial, Transverse 1 and Transverse 2 Shim
groups. (See illustration below.)
Shim Power Supply Controls (Front Panel)

Page 258 of 607
connected to the J2 and J2-W Shim Output connectors on the back of the Shim Power Supply Cabinet.
260726G1 are connected to the Shim Lead Pigtail Cable 2135362. (See illustration below.)
Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply Cabinet. (See illustration below.)
on the Shim Lead Assembly. (See illustration below.)
Shim Power Supply

Connections to J5-1

Page 259 of 607
8.17.14. At the Magnet Monitor, check magnet pressure, and make sure it is maintained within the 3.9 to 4.1
psig range when taking maps of the magnetic field.
♦ Shimming is affected by magnet pressure.
♦ Make sure the Magnet Monitor Pressure Controller is functioning properly and magnet pressure
is steady at 3.9 to 4.1 psig before starting to shim the magnet.
8.17.16. In order to quench the Superconducting Shield around the Coldhead, turn the Cryocooler off for 10
minutes. This only needs to be done before initial shim current adjustment, not between each
subsequent iteration of shim current adjustment.
8.17.17. Before turning on the Shim Coil Power Supply and applying shim currents, make sure the following
conditions exist to prevent irreparable damage to the vaporcooled Shim Leads:
♦ Shim Lead is frosted, and
♦ Power supply current controls are set to zero (fully CCW).
8.17.18. Make sure vapor is escaping the Shim Lead before proceeding to add currents.
8.17.19. Input shim currents for one group at a time in conformance with the next process step. The
suggested order is:
♦ Transverse 1 (T1)
♦ Axial Coils (Axial)

Page 260 of 607
8.17.20. Repeat the following steps for each Shim Coil Group in the following recommended sequence:
a. Set the Shim Group Select Switch to the appropriate group: T1, T2, then Axial (on the Shim Power
Supply Control Front Panel).
b. Set the existing current in the Shim Coils with the knobs on the Shim Power Supply as follows:
1. First Iteration (no currents in Shim Coils): Set the power supply knobs to zero amps (fully
CCW).
2. Subsequent Iterations:
I. Set the polarity toggle switches as required for positive or negative current.
II. Set the power supply Coarse and Fine control knobs to match the current level existing
in the coils.
III. NOTE: The polarity relays will not change polarity if there is any current flowing through
their respective channels. The current must be reduced to zero before the relays will
change to the position indicated by the external switches on the power supply.
c. Turn on the appropriate Switch Heater. Verify that the heater current is
◊ T1 = 610 mA ± 10 mA
◊ T2 = 610 mA ± 10 mA
◊ Axial = 710 mA ± 10 mA.
When the Switch Heaters are turned on, any existing currents in the Shim Coils will be
discharged into the power supply. To prevent dumping excessive currents through the Shim
Leads, match the existing shim currents with the power supply before turning on the heaters.
The current will be adjusted to the required new levels after the heaters are activated.
1. If it is not correct, adjust it with the adjustment screw located on the rear of the Shim Power
Supply.
2. Allow five minutes for the heater to drive the switches resistive. Make sure Shim Lead
Extension is frosted.
d. Adjust the appropriate Shim Power Supplies to the RECOMMENDED TOTAL CURRENT values listed
by the shim program. (See also Calculated Shim Coil Correction Currents section.)
e. After all the Correction Coil currents are set, make sure each power supply is delivering the
appropriate amount of current at the correct polarity.
1. If repeated iterations of the shim program call for the same change in current in a shim coil,
indicating the Shim Switch is not going resistive, one of the two following actions may help
2. Make sure the Heater current is set properly, or
3. Set 20 amps in the coil, then lower current to the required value. (Adjust slightly as required;
1 mA high is better than 1 mA low.)
4. Failure to accurately set the power supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the
number of plotting iterations (i.e., time to shim the magnet). In some cases, the Teslameter
frequency in the next substep could vary as much as 100 Hz. Shutting off the Coldhead
Compressor during acquisition/mapping of shim data may help reduce the frequency
change.

Page 261 of 607
f. Check the frequency reading on the Teslameter to make sure the Correction Coils are stable (i.e.,
change in total magnetic field during two minutes is <2 Hz).
◊ If the current in a coil (especially an axial coil) is changed by a large amount, the necessary
time for the current to reach the full value and stabilize could take as long as 15 to 18
minutes.
◊ A Teslameter must be used to determine when the correction magnetic field of the Shim
Coil has reached a stable condition.
g. Once the magnetic field is stable (i.e., change in total magnetic field during two minutes is <2 Hz),
turn OFF the last Switch Heater that was turned on, and allow the Heater to cool for five minutes.
h. Slowly turn all the Shim Power Supplies back down to zero amps (fully CCW).
i. Repeat process for the remaining coil groups.
8.17.21. When all currents are set:
c. Disconnect all leads between the magnet and the Shim Coil Power Supply (P2, P2-W, Heater
Cable).
brass cap and check for leaks.

Page 262 of 607
8.18. LV Shim: Shim Coil Power Supply Current Adjustments with Auto Ramping Shim Coil
Power Supply (P/N 5395802 or 5395802-2)
The RECOMMENDED TOTAL CURRENT values calculated by the shim program must be entered into the S/C
Correction Coils before performing subsequent magnetic field mapping. The Correction Coils are organized
in groups, each connected to one heater circuit. For example, when the Axial Switch Heater is on, the
current in all of the Axial Coils (1 through 6) is dumped. If the only current change was in the Axial 2 (AX2)
Coil, the complete Axial Set (1 through 6) would have to be dumped, and the appropriate currents adjusted
for each. The coil groups are:
• Transverse 1 (T1): Transverse Coils T1-1 through T1-6
• Transverse 2 (T2): Transverse Coils T2-1 through T2-6
• Axial (AX): Axial Coils AX1 through AX6
8.18.2. Allow the magnet to stabilize to <0.1 ppm/hr main magnetic field drift before shimming. This will take
4 to 12 hours. Other commissioning functions can be performed during this time.

Page 263 of 607
Disengagement.
8.18.6. Open the Shim Lead Vent Valve to increase the ability of the Shim Leads to carry current.
connected to the J2 and J2-W Shim Output connectors on the back of the Power Supply Cabinet. (See
above.)
260726G1 are connected to the Shim Lead Pigtail Cable 2135362. (See above.)
Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply Cabinet. (See below.)

Page 264 of 607
on the Shim Lead Assembly. (See below.)
Shim Power Supply

Connections to J5-1


Page 265 of 607
8.18.12. Set the Current Adjustment and Voltage Controls for the main current to zero on the front of the
supply (see below).
8.18.13. Remove LOTO, connect power to the Superconducting Shim Coil Power Supply.
8.18.14. Review the Field Report (ATR) for any possible Magnet-Specific current settings.
8.18.15. Set the Main Power Switches to the On position on the back of the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply as
well as the main switch on the front. See illustration above.

Page 266 of 607
file.
e. Click the [Manual & Auto-Shim Tool] button to begin the shim control part of the program.


Page 267 of 607
8.18.18. Change to the Shim Controls tab.
8.18.20. Verify continuity -
a. From the Select the shim group drop down list, select Axial.
b. Input 0.25A into each of the Old values for the Axial coils.
c. After sufficient cooling of the Shim Lead Assembly, click [Enable Power Supply -0A] to enable the
supply. Click [Set Old Currents] to put 250mA into each coil to check the continuity. Verify on the
front of the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply that current is being delivered from each of the six
correction coil power supplies.
d. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] to turn down the supply.
e. Change all currents to -0.25A for the Old values and repeat Step 19 through to ensure negative
currents can be entered.
8.18.21. Repeat continuity verification for the Transverse 1 and Transverse 2 banks.
Shim Controls Screen in the Control Software

Page 268 of 607
8.18.22. At the Magnet Monitor, check magnet pressure, and make sure it is maintained within the 3.9 to 4.1
psig range when taking maps of the magnetic field.
♦ Shimming is affected by magnet pressure.
♦ Make sure the Magnet Monitor Pressure Controller is functioning properly and magnet pressure
is steady at 3.9 to 4.1 psig before starting to shim the magnet.
8.18.24. In order to quench the Superconducting Shield around the Coldhead, turn the Cryocooler off for 10
minutes. This only needs to be done before initial shim current adjustment, not between each
subsequent iteration of shim current adjustment.
8.18.25. Make sure the Nupro Valve is fully open and the valve is frosted before slowly engaging the Shim
Lead. Always engage/disengage the Shim Lead in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
♦ Shim Lead is frosting and venting, and
♦ Power supply current controls are set to zero.
8.18.27. Make sure vapor is escaping the Shim Lead before proceeding to add currents.
8.18.28. If an LVS shim file exists on this computer, load in the last LV Shim file using the file input on the left
side of the Shim Control screen as shown in the following illustration. If a file is not available enter the
values in the boxes shown under the Old and New values.
Shim Controls Screen in the Control Software

Page 269 of 607
8.18.29. Verify the values are correct for both the Old and New columns corresponding to the currents in the
magnet and recommended currents for all three groups (Axial, Transverse 1, Transverse 2).
♦ Make sure the current polarities are correct as well.
♦ Failure to accurately set the power supply currents and polarity can greatly increase the number
of plotting iterations (that is, the time to shim the magnet will increase).
8.18.30. Input shim currents for one group at a time in conformance with the next process step. The
suggested order is:
♦ Axial Coils (Axial)
8.18.31. Repeat the following steps for each Shim Coil Group in sequence:
a. From the Select the Shim Group drop down list, select the appropriate group: Transverse 1,
Transverse 2, or Axial. (See illustration above.)
– 0A]. Set the existing current in the Shim Coils by clicking [Set OLD Currents] and waiting a few
minutes.
c. Click [Open Heater] to turn the heater on. Wait five minutes.
e. After all the Correction Coil currents are set, make sure each power supply is delivering the
1. If repeated iterations of the shim program call for the same change in current in a shim coil,
indicating the Shim Switch is not going resistive, one of the two following actions may help
2. Make sure the Heater current is set properly, or
3. Set 20 amps in the coil, then lower current to the required value. (Adjust slightly as required;
1 mA high is better than 1 mA low.)
f. Check the frequency reading on the Teslameter to make sure the Correction Coils are stable
(that is, the change in total magnetic field during two minutes is <2 Hz).
◊ If the current in a coil (especially an axial coil) is changed by a large amount, the necessary
time for the current to reach the full value and stabilize could take as long as 15 to 18
minutes.
g. Once the magnetic field is stable, click [Close Heater] to turn off the switch heater. Allow the
h. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] button to dial the currents down.
i. Repeat process for the remaining coil groups.
8.18.32. When shimming is complete:
c. Disconnect all leads between the magnet and the Shim Coil Power Supply (P2, P2-W,Heater
Cable).
brass cap and check for leaks.

Page 270 of 607
9. Field Adjustments After Shimming

The final magnetic field strength for the magnet is as follows:
• 1.5T LCC Magnet (R Series) is 15,000 Gauss ±15.0 Gauss (63.864 MHz ±64 kHz)
• 3.0T LCC Magnet (W, WB Series) is 30,000 Gauss ± 26 Gauss (127.72 MHz ±110 kHz)
If the magnetic field is out of range after performing LV shimming, magnetic field adjustment is required.



THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH, RAPIDLY RELEASING CRYOGENIC GASES, IF IT’S LIQUID HELIUM LEVEL
DROPS TOO LOW DURING THIS PROCEDURE. MAKE SURE THE MAGNET ≥70% FULL OF LIQUID HELIUM
BEFORE STARTING THIS PROCEDURE.

TURNING ON THE MAIN HEATER SWITCH WHILE PERFORMING THESE RESISTANCE CHECKS WILL
CAUSE A MAGNET QUENCH. MAKE SURE THE MAIN HEATER SWITCH STAYS OFF DURING RESISTANCE
CHECKS.

INCORRECT CONNECTION POLARITY AND POWER SUPPLY CURRENT SETTINGS CAN CAUSE THE
MAGNET'S MAIN COILS TO QUENCH AND CAN BURN UP THE POWER SUPPLY WHEN TURNING ON THE
MAIN SWITCH.

IF THE AXIAL SHIM HEATER SWITCH IS NOT “ON” DURING THE ENTIRE MAIN FIELD ADJUSTMENT
PROCESS, A MAGNET QUENCH CAN OCCUR AND IRREPARABLE SHIM COIL DAMAGE CAN RESULT. THE
POWER SUPPLY WILL NOT PASS CURRENT TO THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS WITH THE AXIAL SHIM
HEATER OFF. MAKE SURE THE AXIAL SHIM HEATER SWITCH REMAINS “ON” DURING THIS ENTIRE
PROCEDURE.

Page 271 of 607

PLUGGING THE FLOW HOLE OF AN ENGAGED MAIN LEAD EXTENSION WILL CAUSE THE MAGNET TO
QUENCH. DO NOT INSERT FLOW HOLE SCREWS INTO MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS UNTIL AFTER
EXTENSIONS ARE REMOVED.


THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH IF THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY EXPERIENCES LARGE OUTPUT
FLUCTUATIONS AND/OR EXCESSIVE RIPPLE. MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS ROUTINELY
CALIBRATED AT AN APPROVED FACILITY.


CONNECTING THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS WHILE THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS ON WILL CREATE A
RAPID ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE OF 100 VOLTS OR MORE. MAKE SURE INPUT POWER TO THE MAIN
POWER SUPPLY IS DISCONNECTED WHEN CONNECTING THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS.



Page 272 of 607

PROCEDURE.

SHOCK.
POWER SUPPLY.
If a Quench occurs during change of magnetic field, immediately turn the Voltage Adjust and Current
Adjust controls to zero.

Page 273 of 607
9.1. Field Adjustments After Shimming, Tools and Equipment
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
5395802 or 1 of the
5395802-100 noted
2353394-3 1 1000 Amp Ramp Cable Kit with Ground
2193922 or
2276755 or 1
5116737
Collector 5103278)
NA 1 Digital Volt Meter
NA 1 Ammeter
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1 Cardboard Box or Nonferromagnetic Frame
NA 1
Representative)

Page 274 of 607
9.2. Field Adjustments After Shimming, Required Conditions
requirements stated in the following document before starting this procedure.
9.2.3. The Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate with side shield must be installed when
working on the magnet to protect side-mounted components from damage.
9.2.4. Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
9.2.5. Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open before starting this procedure.
9.2.6. Teslameter must be installed (in position) in the magnet.
before starting this procedure.
9.2.8. Confirm power supply/ramping connections compete per ramping set-up requirements.
Disengagement.
9.2.10. Set Shim Power Supply heater currents to the following:

Page 275 of 607

Page 276 of 607
9.3. Removing Transverse and Axial Shim Currents with Manual Ramp Shim Power Supply
(P/N 46-260777G3)
9.3.2. Replace the Main Lead Extension's contact bands in conformance with Main Lead Extension Contact
Band Replacement.
Lead.
Disengagement.
9.3.6. Make sure the Ramp and Shim Power Supplies are checked and adjusted in conformance with the
vendor manuals supplied with each unit. (Refer to the vendor manuals for power supply control
locations and descriptions.)
9.3.7. Make sure the Shim Lead Vent Valve is open, and frost is present on the Shim Lead Connector Housing
before removing shim currents.
9.3.8. Disconnect and LOTO input power to both the Ramp and Shim Coil Power Supplies. Verify that no
voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
9.3.9. Measure the present Base Frequency of the magnet's magnetic field; from this subtract the desired
Center Frequency to calculate the Delta Frequency.
𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 = 𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 − 𝐶𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
9.3.10. Connect the Shim Power Supply to the magnet in conformance with the Preparations for Shim
Current Adjustment subsection of Shim Current Adjustment.
9.3.11. Remove LOTO and connect the input power cable to the Shim Power Supply.
9.3.12. Switch on main power to the Shim Power Supply.

Page 277 of 607
9.3.13. Set the Shim Group Select Switch to the appropriate group (T1, T2, and Axial). (See the illustration
below.) It is recommended that the Transverse Coils be ramped down first, then the Axial Coils.
9.3.14. Dial all last recorded Shim Currents into the Shim Power Supply from Calculated Shim Coil Correction
Currents section. Make sure the shim current polarities are correct.
9.3.15. Turn on appropriate Switch Heater (T1, T2 or Axial) on the Shim Power Supply.
Supply.
9.3.17. Allow five (5) minutes for the Switch Heater to drive the switches resistive.
9.3.18. Slowly adjust the Current Controls for the appropriate shim group (T1, T2 or Axial) to zero.
9.3.19. Turn off the appropriate Switch Heater (T1, T2 or Axial).
9.3.20. Repeat process for the Transverse 2 Coils, then for the Axial Coils.
9.3.21. Turn off main power to the Shim Power Supply.
9.3.22. Disconnect the heater cable from Shim Power Supply.
9.3.23. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Shim Coil Power Supply, and verify that no voltage is present
by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
9.3.24. Proceed with Resistance Checks.

Page 278 of 607
9.4. Resistance Checks with Manual Ramping Power Supply (PN 46-260777G4)
9.4.1. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply, and verify that no voltage is present by
9.4.2. Confirm that the Power Supply Jumper Cable is present prior to inserting main lead extensions.
9.4.3. If resistance checks were not previously performed on the ramping circuit, connect the Main Power
Supply and Main Lead Extensions to the magnet in conformance with Connections for Ramping.
9.4.4. Make sure all power supply Heater Switches are set to OFF, shown below.

9.4.5. Make sure the Current Adjust and Voltage Adjust controls on the Main Power Supply are OFF (fully
CCW).
9.4.6. Remove LOTO and connect input power to the Main Power Supply.
9.4.7. Disconnect the Power Supply Jumper Cable.
9.4.8. Set the Main Power Supply's Main Power and Power On switches to ON. There are duplicate Main
9.4.9. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF, then set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to I (On).
9.4.10. Observe the current rise in the Main Power Supply Ammeter to verify circuit continuity.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 810mA ± 10 mA
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 810mA ± 10 mA
♦ If the heater current is not correct, adjust it with the Current Adjustment Control on the rear of
the power supply.

Page 279 of 607
9.4.11. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads, as shown below.
9.4.12. Set the power supply voltmeter toggle switch to the MAIN COIL position.
9.4.13. Set the Current Adjust Coarse Control on the power supply to maximum (fully CW).
9.4.14. Use Voltage Adjustment to obtain a Main Coil current of
♦ Slowly turn the Voltage Adjust control clockwise until CURRENT display reads the desired value.

Page 280 of 607
resistance:
a. Required Levels:
b. Wait approximately 1 minute with current running; readings may drop as the Main Lead
Extensions cool.
c. Tighten the nuts (one flat at a time) on top of the Hold-Down Tool while measuring DVM
readings.
Extensions.
e. While pressing down, rotate each lead twice: 15⁰ back and 15⁰ forth from initial position
(approximately).
down.
(approximately).
Band Replacement.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps.

Page 281 of 607
9.4.23. Turn the Current Adjust and Voltage controls OFF (fully CCW).
9.4.24. Proceed with Main Field Adjustments.

Page 282 of 607
9.5. Main Field Adjustment with Manual Ramping Shim Power Supply (PN 46-260777G4)
9.5.1. Retrieve the last Main Coil Connection Polarity.
♦ 1.5T LCC: The Center Frequency will change by about 86 kHz per Amp of change in Main Coil
current.
current when measured with the system and phantoms.
current when measured with the Range 6 probe.
♦ Main magnetic field will have either increased or decreased by the Delta Frequency calculated
earlier. For example, a Delta Frequency of +21.288 kHz indicates the main magnetic field is too
high and will have to be decreased by this amount.
9.5.2. Make sure the Axial Shim Heater is on.

9.5.3. Make sure the Main Leads are connected with the polarity from previous ramp.
9.5.4. Set the power supply's Voltmeter Select Switch to the MAIN COIL position.
9.5.5. Set the power supply's Current Adjust Controls to maximum (fully CW).
9.5.6. Adjust the power supply's Voltage Adjust Control to the previous Parking Current.
9.5.7. Make sure the Axial Shim Switch Heater power supply is on and remains on throughout the Main Field
Adjustment procedure.
9.5.8. Turn ON the Main Switch Heater.
9.5.9. Allow approximately three minutes for the Main Switch to go resistive.
9.5.10. When the Main Switch is resistive, slowly adjust the Voltage Adjust Control until the measured main
magnetic field Base Frequency matches the desired Center Frequency.
9.5.11. For example, where the Delta Frequency calculated earlier is +21.288 kHz, the main magnetic field
Base Frequency requires a -21.288 kHz adjustment to match the desired Center Frequency.
9.5.12. Allow five minutes for the magnetic field to stabilize, then turn off the Main Switch Heater.
9.5.13. Wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the switch to fully cool and go persistent, then record/retain the
current value at which the switch went persistent on site.

Page 283 of 607
9.5.14. When the switch goes persistent, slowly turn the power supply's Voltage Adjust Control to zero (fully
CCW) over a two-minute period.
♦ Only the last two digits of the Teslameter reading should change while Voltage Adjust Control is
turned to zero.
♦ Any larger decrease in Teslameter reading indicates the Main Coil Switch is not persistent, and
the Voltage Adjust Control must be slowly returned to the magnet's parking field.
9.5.15. Turn OFF the Axial Shim Heater.
9.5.16. Gradually turn the Current Adjust Controls to zero (fully CCW) over a one-minute period.
9.5.17. Turn the Main Power Supply OFF.
9.5.18. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply, and verify that no voltage is present by
9.5.20. Follow the next steps precisely to avoid an excessive heat load being applied to the magnet cartridge
and a possible quench following a magnet ramp.
9.5.21. After parking the magnet, disconnecting and applying LOTO to input power of the Main Power Supply
and verifying that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device, remove one
Main Extension at a time in the following sequence:
a. Open Valve V2, and bleed vessel pressure below 1.0 psig. (Do not allow pressure to go below 0.5
psig for the 1.5T LCC (R Series) or 0.2 psig for the 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) as read on the magnet
pressure gauge or Magnet Monitor.) Close V2.
Main Lead Extension

Ramp and Fill Ports
Negative (-)
Ramp Port Cap
Positive (+)
Ramp Port Cap
Helium Fill
c. Unscrew the ramp lead port compression fitting, and remove the first Main Lead Extension from

Page 284 of 607
e. Unscrew the ramp lead port compression fitting, and remove the second Main Lead Extension
removed.
g. Check the Main Leads and Fill Port Cap for leaks.
i. Disconnect Power Supply Jumper Cable.
j. Cryostat exhaust flow rate and pressure must be checked and adjusted as required after
9.5.22. Proceed with Input Shim Currents.

Page 285 of 607
9.6. Input Shim Currents with Manual Ramping Shim Power Supply (P/N 46-260777G3)
Lead.
♦ Shim Lead is frosted, sufficiently cooled (to frost the Shim Lead, open the Shim Lead Vent Valve)
♦ Power supply current controls are set to zero (fully CCW).
9.6.3. Remove LOTO and reconnect the Shim Power Supply to the magnet in conformance with Connections
for Ramping and Shimming.
9.6.4. Switch on the main power to the Shim Power Supply.
9.6.5. Input shim currents for one group at a time in the following recommended sequence:
♦ Transverse 1 (T1): Coils T1-1 through T1-6 as a group
♦ Transverse 2 (T2): Coils T2-1 through T2-6 as a group
♦ Axial (AX): Coils AX1 through AX6 as a group
9.6.6. Note that when the Switch Heaters are turned on, any existing currents in the Shim Coils will be
discharged into the Power Supply. To prevent dumping excessive currents through the Shim Leads,
match the existing shim currents with the power supply before turning on the heaters. The current
can be adjusted to the required new levels after the heaters are activated.

Page 286 of 607
9.6.7. Repeat the following steps for each group in sequence:
a. Set the Shim Group Select Switch to the appropriate group: T1, T2 or Axial. (See above.)
b. Make sure the Shim Lead Extension is frosted and all currents are set to zero, then turn on the
appropriate Switch Heater.
c. Verify that the T1, T2 and Axial heater currents are within range
Use the adjustment screw on the rear of the Shim Power Supply to make sure the current is
within range.
d. Allow five (5) minutes for the heater to drive the switches resistive.
e. Dial the last recorded shim currents and polarities from Calculated Shim Coil Correction Currents
into the power supply. Make sure the shim current polarities are correct.
f. After all the Correction Coil currents are set, make sure each power supply is delivering the
g. Check the Teslameter's frequency reading to make sure the Correction Coils are stable (i.e., no
more than a 20 Hz change in the total magnetic field over a two-minute period).
h. Once the magnetic field is stable, turn off the Switch Heater and allow the heater to cool for 5
minutes.
i. Turn the Shim Power Supply back down to zero amps (fully CCW).
j. Repeat process for the Transverse 2, then for the Axial Shim Coil groups.
9.6.8. Proceed with Field Adjustments after Shimming Finalization.

Page 287 of 607
9.7. Removing Transverse and Axial Shim Currents with Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply (P/N
5395802 or 5395802-2)
9.7.1. The process of using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply in auto mode is Class M. Only GE personnel
may perform this procedure; GE personnel performing this procedure MUST have completed the
required on-line training.
9.7.3. Replace the Main Lead Extension's contact bands in conformance with Main Lead Extension Contact
Band Replacement.
Lead.
Disengagement.
9.7.7. Make sure the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply is checked and adjusted in conformance with the
vendor manuals supplied with each unit. (Refer to the vendor manuals for power supply control
locations and descriptions.)
9.7.8. Make sure the Shim Lead Vent Valve is open, and frost is present on the Shim Lead Connector Housing
before removing shim currents.
9.7.9. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Auto-Ramp Shim Coil Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is
9.7.10. Measure the present Base Frequency of the magnet's magnetic field; from this subtract the desired
Center Frequency to calculate the Delta Frequency.
𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 = 𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 − 𝐶𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
9.7.11. Connect the Auto Ramp Shim Power Supply to the magnet in conformance with the Preparations for
Shim Current Adjustment subsection of Shim Current Adjustment.

Page 288 of 607
supply.
9.7.14. Remove LOTO and connect the input power cable to the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply.
9.7.15. Set the Main Power Switches to the On position on the back of the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply as
well as the main switch on the front. See illustration above.
9.7.16. In the dist directory, start the Auto-Ramp Shim software by clicking Auto_Ramp_Shim_Ver_1_1.jar
file.

Page 289 of 607
1. 1.5T LCC (R Series): Magnet Series “R”
2. 3.0TLCC (W, WB Series): Magnet Series “W” or “WB”
1. 1.5T LCC (R Series): Series_R_1_5T_Ramp_Up
2. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Series_W_3_0T_Ramp_Up

9.7.18. Click the [Test Communication] button at the top of the screen to ensure the communication with the
supply and Teslameter. Make sure the result comes back reporting Pass next to the test
communication button as shown in the Shim Control Screen in the Control Software illustration
below.

Page 290 of 607
9.7.19. You need to remove the correction coil currents. If an LVS shim or ShimTool shim file exists on this
computer with the last currents put into the magnet, load in the last file using the file input on the left
side as shown below, then click the [Old <- New] button to transfer the new values to the old
locations. If a file is not available, enter the last recorded values in the boxes shown under the Old
values.
9.7.20. Verify the values are correct with the Old column corresponding to the currents in the magnet for all
three groups (Axial, Transverse 1, Transverse 2). Make sure the current polarities are correct as well.
9.7.21. Click [Zero Out New] to set the New values to zero.

Page 291 of 607
9.7.22. When removing currents manually, repeat the following steps for each Shim Coil Group in sequence:
2, or Axial).
d. Click [New Currents] to remove currents from the coils.
e. Verify the new currents (should be zero), and then click [Close Heater] to turn off the heater
group. Wait five minutes.
f. After the five minute wait, click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] button to dial the currents down.
g. Repeat for next coil group.
9.7.23. Once all the shim currents from all three groups are out, set the Main Power Switches on the power
supply to Off.
9.7.24. Disconnect all cables, and LOTO input power. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or
equivalent measuring device.
9.7.25. NOTE: The frequency displayed on the Teslameter after the shim currents are removed is the target
frequency when the magnet is re-ramped. Make note of this value for future reference.
9.7.27. Proceed with Resistance Checks.

Page 292 of 607
9.8. Resistance Checks with Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply (PN 5395802 or 5395802-100)
using a DVM or equivalent measuring device. Confirm that the Power Supply Jumper Cable is present
prior to inserting main lead extensions.
9.8.3. Connect the Main Power Supply and Main Lead Extensions to the magnet in conformance with
Connections for Ramping.
supply. See the illustration below.
Auto Ramp Shim Power Supply Power Connections
9.8.6. Remove LOTO and connect the input power cable for the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply.
9.8.8. Set the Power Supply's three Main Power switches to ON.

Page 293 of 607
file.
e. Click the [Manual & Auto-Ramp Tool] button to begin the ramping part of the program.

(3.0T MR750w (UA Series) Shown)

Page 294 of 607
9.8.12. Change to the Ramp Controls tab.
9.8.14. Click the [SET] button to set a maximum current point at:
♦ 3.0T LCC (UA Series): 400 Amps
9.8.15. In the bottom parking profile box, input the desired parking field in the Field2(T) box as shown below.
♦ The Teslameter display on the laptop should display the same value as the Metrolab Teslameter.
♦ This indicates proper communication between the laptop and the Teslameter.
Auto-Ramp Shim Software Ramp Controls Tab

Parking Field
9.8.16. Make sure the Current and Voltage Adjustment Controls on the Ramp Control Screen show the Main
Coil Voltage and Current are zero.
9.8.17. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF on the software screen and that the front of the power
supply shows 0 amps.
9.8.18. Set the Axial / BØ Heater Switch to ON by clicking the slider bar.

Page 295 of 607
Output
Button on
Auto-
Ramping
Power Supply
9.8.20. Observe the current rise in the Axial Heater Power Supply Ammeter (810 ± 10 mA) to verify circuit
continuity.
below) to allow for correct placement of the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool.
holes.
Hardware Mounting
Extensions 2287029

Page 296 of 607
9.8.23. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current of
through the main leads.
a. Use the two arrows on the coarse and fine adjustments to reach the desired voltage. (See the
following illustration.)
b. Slowly adjust the Voltage to set the above noted current through the Main Leads, Main Lead
Extensions, and persistent Main Switch.
c. Make sure that the Axial / BØ heater is ON.


Page 297 of 607
resistance:
a. Required Levels:
Extensions cool.
readings.
Extensions.
(approximately)
down.
(approximately).
Band Replacement.

Page 298 of 607
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): < 2.2 at 750A
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): < 2.2 at 375A
9.8.32. Turn the Voltage controls OFF.
9.8.33. Proceed with Main Field Adjustment.

Page 299 of 607
9.9. Main Field Adjustment with Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply (PN 5395802 or 5395802-
100)
9.9.3. Retrieve the last Main Coil Connection Polarity.
current.
current when measured with the system and phantoms.
current when measured with the Range 6 probe.
♦ Main magnetic field will have either increased or decreased by the Delta Frequency calculated
earlier. For example, a Delta Frequency of +21.288 kHz indicates the main magnetic field is too
high and will have to be decreased by this amount.
9.9.4. Make sure the Axial/BØ Shim Heater is on and the Main Leads are connected with the polarity
obtained previous step.

Page 300 of 607
9.9.5. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current matching the previous parking current
through the main leads. Use the two arrows on the coarse and fine adjustments to reach the desired
voltage. (See illustration below.) Slowly adjust the Voltage to set the previous parking current through
the Main Leads, Main Lead Extensions, and persistent Main Switch. Current will not be delivered if the
Axial/BØ shim heater is not on.

Page 301 of 607
9.9.6. Set the Heater 1 Main Switch ON using the drop-down menu shown in the illustration below and wait
3 minutes.
Ramp Controls Tab
9.9.7. Make sure the Axial/BØ Heaters power supply is ON and remains ON throughout the Main Field
Adjustment procedure.
9.9.8. When the Main Switch is resistive, slowly adjust the Voltage Adjustment Control until the measured
main magnetic field Base Frequency matches the desired Center Frequency. Use the controls shown
in illustration above.
For example, where the calculated Delta Frequency is +21.288 kHz, the main magnetic field Base
Frequency requires a -21.288 kHz adjustment to match the desired Center Frequency.
9.9.9. Allow six (6) minutes for the magnetic field to stabilize, then turn OFF the Main Switch Heater using
the drop down menu.
9.9.10. Wait a minimum of 15 minutes for the switch to fully cool and go persistent.
9.9.11. When the switch goes persistent, slowly adjust power supply's voltage to zero over a two minute
period.
♦ Only the last two digits of the Teslameter reading should change while the Voltage Adjustment
Control is turned to zero.
♦ Any larger decrease in the Teslameter reading indicates the Main Coil Switch is not persistent,
and the Voltage Adjustment Control must be slowly returned to the magnet's parking field.

Page 302 of 607
9.9.12. On the Ramp Controls tab of the software, turn OFF the Axial/BØ Shim Heaters switch.
9.9.13. Exit the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply software.
9.9.14. Set the Main Power Switches on the back of the supply as well as the main switch on the front to OFF
(see the illustration below).
Auto Ramp Shim Power Supply Power Connections
9.9.15. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is

Page 303 of 607
time in the following sequence:
a. Open Valve V2, and bleed vessel pressure below 1.0 psig. (Do not allow pressure to go below 0.5
psig for the 1.5T LCC (R Series) or 0.2 psig for the 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) as read on the magnet
pressure gauge or Magnet Monitor.) Close V2.
Main Lead Extension

Ramp and Fill Ports
Negative (-)
Ramp Port Cap
Positive (+)
Ramp Port Cap
Helium Fill
removed.
i. Disconnect Power Supply Jumper Cable.
j. Cryostat exhaust flow rate and pressure must be checked and adjusted as required after
9.9.18. Proceed with Input Shim Currents.

Page 304 of 607
9.10. Input Shim Currents with Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply (P/N 5395802 or 5395802-2)
9.10.1. The process of using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply in auto mode is Class M and applies only to
Lead.
Disengagement.
9.10.5. Shim Lead is frosted, sufficiently cooled (to frost the Shim Lead, open the Shim Lead Vent Valve).
9.10.6. Power supply current controls are set to zero.
supply.
9.10.9. Remove LOTO and reconnect the Shim Power Supply to the magnet in conformance with Connections
for Ramping and Shimming.
9.10.10. Set the Main Power Switches to the On position on the back of the Auto-Ramp Shim power supply.

Page 305 of 607
9.10.11. In the dist directory, start the Auto-Ramp Shim software by clicking Auto_Ramp_Shim_Ver_1_1.jar
file.
1. 1.5T LCC (R Series): Magnet Series “R”
2. 3.0TLCC (W, WB Series): Magnet Series “W” or “WB”
1. 1.5T LCC (R Series): Series_R_1_5T_Ramp_Up
2. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Series_W_3_0T_Ramp_Up

supply and Teslameter. Make sure the result comes back reporting Pass next to the test
communication button as shown below.

Page 306 of 607
9.10.14. You need to re-input the correction coil currents. If the last LVS shim or ShimTool shim file which
contains the correct currents exists on this computer, load it using the file input on the left side as
shown below, then click the[ Zero out old] button to set the old currents to zero. If a file is not
available, enter the last recorded values in the boxes shown under the new values.
9.10.15. Verify the values are correct with the Old column set to zero and the New column corresponding to
last shim the currents in the magnet for all three groups (Axial, Transverse 1, Transverse 2). Make sure
the current polarities are correct as well. Select the Transverse 1 group in the Select the shim group
drop down list as shown above.
9.10.16. Click [Enable Power Supply – 0A], and then click [Set OLD Currents] since the old values are zero.
9.10.17. Click [Open Heater] to turn the heater on. Wait five minutes.
9.10.18. Click [New Currents] to load the new currents into the coils.
9.10.19. After all the Correction Coil currents are set, make sure each power supply is delivering the
9.10.20. Check the Teslameter's frequency reading to make sure the Correction Coils are stable (that is, no
more than a 2 Hz change in the total magnetic field over a two-minute period).
Shim Current Settling Times (Re-establishing Currents)

T1 20 Minutes
T2 20 Minutes
Axial* 45 Minutes*

Page 307 of 607
9.10.21. Once the magnetic field is stable, click [Close Heater] and allow the heater to cool for 15 minutes.
9.10.22. Click [Disable Power Supply – 0A] to dial the currents down.
9.10.23. Repeat process for the Transverse 2 and Axial Shim groups.
9.10.24. Once all the shim currents from all three groups are set, turn the Main Power Switch on the power
supply to Off.
9.10.25. Proceed with Field Adjustments after Shimming Finalization.

Page 308 of 607
9.11. Field Adjustments after Shimming Finalization
9.11.1. Disconnect all cables between the magnet and the power supply(s).
9.11.2. Make sure the Ramp Lead Port Caps are closed, sealed and do not leak in order to prevent gaseous
helium loss and/or frost and ice formation in the Vertical Penetration.
9.11.3. Close the Shim Lead’s Nupro Valve. Make sure the Shim Lead Assembly is disengaged in conformance
with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement.
9.11.4. Turn off input power to the power supply(s), disconnect and LOTO all power supply cables, and verify
that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
9.11.5. Check the magnet's helium level, and add liquid helium in conformance with Liquid Helium Fill if the
level is <60%.
9.11.6. Verify that the Magmon 3 is properly installed and configured for appropriate magnet type. Set the
Magmon 3 to post fill mode with a set point of 4.0 psig. 4.0 ± 0.1 psig magnet pressure is required for
imaging. (Note that for GE owned and operated sites, improved (alternative) pressure configurations
may be permissible. Contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet
Support Team at the Online Center for more information pertaining to alternative pressure
configurations.)

Page 309 of 607
Chapter 10 – Magnet Functional Checks

10. Magnet Functional Checks

• HAVE ALL WORK ASSISTANTS OR WORK OBSERVERS COMPLY WITH THE SECOND PERSON SERVICE

3. VENT CRYOSTAT DOWN TO 0.2 PSIG THROUGH VENT VALVE V2.

ODORLESS, COLORLESS HELIUM GAS IS RELEASED DURING LEAK TROUBLESHOOTING. HELIUM GAS
WILL DISPLACE OXYGEN. MAKE SURE THE MAGNET ROOM VENT EXHAUST FAN IS ON AND THE
MAGNET ROOM DOOR IS PROPPED OPEN (OR THE HATCH IN A MOBILE VAN IS OPENED), BEFORE
BEGINNING THIS PROCEDURE.

SKIN CONTACT WITH A COLD VENT SYSTEM CAN CAUSE COLD BURNS. WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING,
NONABSORBENT GLOVES AND GOGGLES WHEN REPLACING THE BURST DISC ON A COLD VENT
SYSTEM.

FERROUS MATERIALS CAN BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES IN THE PRESENCE OF THE MAGNETIC
FIELD PRODUCED BY THE MAGNET. THE RUO TEMPERATURE MONITOR CONTAINS FERROUS
MATERIALS. KEEP METER AWAY FROM THE MAGNET BORE.

CONTACT WITH CONNECTOR PINS WHILE THE MAGNET IS RAMPED MAY CAUSE A MAGNET COIL
QUENCH.
MAKE SURE THE MAIN AND SHIM COILS ARE RAMPED DOWN TO ZERO AMPS BEFORE STARTING THE
MAGNET ELECTRICAL CHECKS PROCEDURE.

Page 310 of 607

SHOCK.
CONNECTIONS TO A POWER SUPPLY.
• FOLLOW LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES WHILE MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO A POWER
SUPPLY.

Page 311 of 607
10.1. 1.5T LCC (R Series Magnet) Magnet Commissioning and Operating Guidelines
The magnet's electrical circuits must be in operating condition prior to filling or ramping. The cryostat's
temperature must be determined prior to filling.
Check/Setting
Element Guideline
Requirements
Operating Altitude
required.
After ramping and
Operation after Shimming: shimming or when out of
15,000 Gauss ±15.0 Gauss (63.864 MHz ±64 kHz) gradient amplifier
bandwidth
Magnet
Parking:
±0.5 Gauss
Main Coil Inductance 10.8 – 11.5 Henries At start of ramping
< 2.2V Power Supply Reading @750 A
New Contact Bands
3.9 to 4.1 psig
information.
Second Stage
< 4.4K
See ΔT
Temp (RuO A)
95% Maximum Top-Off
80% Minimum Ramping Up
Ramping Down for
V2 Open

Page 312 of 607
10.2. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series Magnet) Magnet Commissioning and Operating Guidelines
The magnet's electrical circuits must be in operating condition prior to filling or ramping. The cryostat's
temperature must be determined prior to filling.
Check/Setting
Element Guideline
Requirements
Operating Altitude
required.
Operation:
After Shimming
30,000 Gauss ±26.0 Gauss (127.72 MHz ±110 kHz)
Parking:
Magnet
±0.5 Gauss
Main Coil Inductance 205 – 227 Henries At start of ramping
< 2.2 V Power Supply Reading @375 A
New Contact Bands
3.9 to 4.1 psig
information.
Second Stage
< 4.4K
See ΔT
Temp (RuO A)
95% Maximum Top-Off
95% Minimum, Refill/Top-Off at 65% Ramping Up
Ramping Down for
V2 Open

Page 313 of 607
measurements.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Unit: This check requires at least twelve hours between the first and
second measurements.
10.3.3. Post “Authorized Personnel Only” signs (2289812) in conformance with Chapter 1, Safety, to indicate a
magnetic drift test is in progress.
this process.
the pressure remains within 4.0 ± 0.1 psig.

Page 314 of 607
♦ More frequency data points can be taken (possibly in 1, 4, 6 or 12 hour increments) when it is
convenient.
♦ However, ensure that the two data points (Frequency 1 and 2) chosen for drift rate calculation
are 24 hours apart.
formula:
hr Freq 1 × N
hr N
Where
over the elapsed period defined above. It is a rolling 24 hour average.
10.3.22. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Teslameter. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM
or equivalent measuring device.
10.3.23. Disconnect the Teslameter from the probe. Store the Teslameter and probe.
10.3.24. Remove and store the “Authorized Personnel Only” signs.

Page 315 of 607
10.4. Temperature, Pressure & Leak Initial Troubleshooting
Helium loss on a Zero Boil-Off magnet should be insignificant (i.e., not measurable) over a period of weeks
or months. If significant helium loss is suspected, the following is required to define and quantify the
suspected loss:
• The magnet must be in a normal operating mode and stabilized after a ramp or fill.
• Two sets of data must be taken over time (2 days to 2 weeks, depending on the size of the leak) with
known and calibrated instrumentation and at the same vessel pressure to establish the extent of the
problem.
If high pressure or helium loss is established, use the troubleshooting guidelines that follow to determine
the root cause(s) of the problem and to resolve the issue(s).
10.4.1. Temperature, Pressure & Leak Troubleshooting Tools and Test Equipment

2362622 1 Portable Liquid Helium Level Meter
2361919-2 1 Leak Detector
2174214 1 Plexiglas Heat Exchanger Cover Plate
As
NA Helium Gas Tubing
Required
46-281088G4 1 Coldhead Maintenance Kit
46-294047G1 1 Field Vacuum Pump Kit
2356202 1 Magnet Monitor Pin Tester
46-320470P10 1 M10 Allen Wrench
Plus those items required by the procedure(s) needed to fix the problem.
Consumables
Snoop or Bird Dog Quart Spray PN DOG-1Q or Big Blue PN
Rt100S or RT100G or Leak-Tec
NA 1 (Commercial leak detector fluids available through HVAC
As
NA Small Balloon
Required
As
NA Small Sponge
Required
Replacement Parts
As
5265652 O-Rings included in Field Spares Kit
Required
46-281247P1 1 Transition Flange O-Ring

Page 316 of 607
10.4.2. Temperature, Pressure & Leak Troubleshooting Required Conditions
Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Magnet Electrical
documentation (available through the support documentation library at www.gehealthcare.com or
your local GE Healthcare Service Representative) before continuing with this procedure if cover
removal is required.
10.4.3. Magnet Thermal System Schematic

The illustration below shows a thermal system schematic of an installed magnet, including the path
of liquid helium (LHe) and gaseous helium (GHe) through the helium vessel and plumbing.

Page 317 of 607
10.4.4. Initial Troubleshooting
a. Second stage coldhead (RuO A) and Recondenser (RuO B) readings MUST be taken using a
handheld RuO meter, either the MTM-101 Cryogenic Temperature Meter (5119507) connected
directly to the RuO outputs on the coldhead and sleeve.
b. Either temperature meter may show small oscillations while reading the second stage coldhead
resulting from Displacer motion inside the coldhead sleeve and the monitor’s sampling rate. The
average temperature reading: (T min + T max ) / 2.
Critical Magnet Conditions

Condition Specification LED on MTM-101
First Stage Coldhead Temp < 45K SI410 D1
Second Stage Recondenser Temp (RuO B) < 4.4K RuO
Second Stage Coldhead Temp (RuO A) See ΔT RuO
ΔT = RuO B - RuO A 0.0K < ΔT < 0.2K NA
Second Stage Recondenser Temp (SI410) NA SI410 D2
Magnet Helium Pressure 4.0 psig ± 0.1 psig Magnet Monitor

Page 318 of 607

Page 319 of 607
10.5. Chiller and Compressor Checks
High Pressure/Temperature Troubleshooting Flowchart: Site Problems and

Chiller/Compressor Checks
Start Chiller &
Compressor Checks
If out of specification, Refer to SHI

Check Water Chiller
have Chiller repaired Compressor Manual
Refer to Pre-Magnet
Verify Water Direction Correct Water
Delivery System
to Compressor Direction
Installation Manual
LOW
Recharge
Leak Check
Compressor
Check Compressor Pressure Refer to SHI
Operation Low or High? Compressor Manual
Check for Reduce pressure
Contamination To Specification
HIGH
Has
Compare “Run Time” Report to Site
Compressor Been YES
to “Actual Time” Management
OFF?
NO
High Ambient Room Report to Site Ambient Room Temperature

Temperature Management < 28°C or 82°F
Compressor Space Too Report to Site Refer to SHI

Small (Air-Cooled Only) Management Compressor Manual
Incorrect Compressor Report to Site Refer to SHI

Input Power Management Compressor Manual
Dirty Compressor Vacuum Air Filter (Air- Refer to SHI

(Air Filter) Cooled Compressors) Compressor Manual
Connections tight, O-
Helium Flexline Refer to SHI
Rings in place, Lines ≤
Connections & Lengths Compressor Manual
85.3 ft (26 mtrs) long
Refer to SHI CSA/CSW-71: Change adsorber if use time >20,000 hrs

Adsorber Use Time
Compressor Manual F50: Change adsorber if use time >30,000 hrs
Check Dynamic
A. Bleed, Run and Recharge Compressor
By-Pass Solenoid Valve Pressure
B. If By-Pass Light not lit, replace filament.
Stuck Open (Watch Last Digit of
C. If By-Pass Light still not lit, replace compressor.
Pressure Display)
Proceed to Advanced Refer to SHI

Troubleshooting Compressor Manual
He Loss
or High Pressure
Persists
YES
Proceed with
Magnet Checks

Page 320 of 607
10.6. Magnet Checks
10.6.1. High Pressure/Temperature Troubleshooting Flowchart: Magnet and Coldhead Interface Checks (Part
1)

Page 321 of 607
♦ Use the flowchart “High Pressure/Temperature Troubleshooting Flowchart: Magnet and
Coldhead Interface Checks (Part 1)” in conjunction with the temperature-pressure graph to
determine if vapor pressure is consistent with RuO readings.

Page 322 of 607
10.6.2. High Pressure/Temperature Troubleshooting Flowchart: Magnet and Coldhead Interface Checks (Part
2)

Page 323 of 607
10.7. Coldhead Checks
10.7.1. Only perform Coldhead Checks after completion of Chiller and Compressor Checks.

Page 324 of 607

Page 325 of 607
10.8. Leak Troubleshooting
10.8.1. Operation of the magnet in the CØBO (Controlled Zero Boil-Off) mode with internal helium pressure
>4.1 psig increases the potential of helium leaks. A number of small helium leaks will have a
significant effect on boil-off and result in the measurable loss of helium over time.
♦ Ice or condensation on plenum plumbing indicates a leak in the helium plumbing.
♦ Major helium leaks will depressurize the helium vessel and can result in cryopumping and icing
inside the vessel.
10.8.2. Observe Magnet Monitor helium level data over a month or more. A slow helium level decrease is
evidence of leaking helium.
Helium Loss Detected Leak Troubleshooting Flowchart,

Helium Loss and Normal Pressure
Helium
Pressure
NORMAL
PRESSURE
If not in “CØBO” mode, turn off

Leak Check Plumbing Cryocooler and allow pressure in
helium vessel to build to 3.9-4.1 psig
Main Lead Extensions Leak Check O-Ring, Tighten or replace

YES
and Fill Port Caps Observed as necessary to eliminate leak(s)
External Plumbing at Leak Tighten or Replace as necessary Refer to “Plumbing and O-Ring
YES
Vent Adapter Observed to eliminate leak(s) Leaks” Subsection
HIGH
PRESSURE
Burst Disc at Vent Leak Tighten or Ramp Magnet Down Refer to “Plumbing and O-Ring
YES
Stack Exhaust Observed and Replace Burst Disc Leaks” Subsection
Check O-Ring, Tighten or Ramp

Leak Magnet Down and Replace O- Refer to “Plumbing and O-Ring
Main Lead Extensions YES
Observed Rings as necessary to eliminate Leaks” Subsection
leak(s)
Vertical Turret & Check O-Ring, Tighten or replace

Leak
Instrumentation Lead YES as necessary to eliminate leak(s)
Observed
Housing
Check for Ice
Main Lead Extensions Leak Check O-Ring, Tighten or replace

YES
and Fill Port Caps Observed as necessary to eliminate leak(s)
External Plumbing at Leak Tighten or Replace as necessary Refer to “Recondenser

YES
Vent Adapter Observed to eliminate leak(s) De-Icing Procedure

Page 326 of 607
10.8.3. Commercial leak detector fluids or instruments available in the HVAC industry can be used to
determine small leaks in the helium plumbing and venting. Some examples available through HVAC
distributors are Bird Dog Quart Spray (P/N DOG-1Q), Big Blue (P/N Rt100S or Rt100G), Snoop, Portable
Leak Detector.
10.8.4. Check Magnet Monitor operation if pressure is <3.9 psig. Helium pressure <3.9 psig indicates a leak.
When the pressure is <3.9 psig, check the following areas for leaks with a leak detector fluid or
instrument: (If using leak detector fluid, make sure to keep each location being checked completely
covered (i.e., using a sponge) for sufficient time to identify slow leaks.)
♦ All External Plumbing Joints
♦ Vertical Turret, Instrumentation Lead Cover and the Feed-Through Pins
♦ Main Lead and Fill Port Caps
♦ Pressure Gauge
10.8.5. Additional locations to check for leaks:
10.8.6. Repair any leaks found, then test the repairs.

Page 327 of 607
10.8.7. Plumbing and O-Ring Leaks
♦ Replacement O-rings and a Burst Disc are contained in the Field Spare Parts Kit 5265652.
a. Remove the outlet plumbing (Vent Adapter side) for the 5.25 psig relief valve and the 7.25 psig
bypass valve.
b. Remove the cap from the Nupro valve at the top of the Shim Lead.
c. Attach a small balloon tightly to the exhaust side of the 5.25 psig relief valve, 7.25 psig bypass
valve, and the Nupro valve.
d. Observe any expansion of the balloon from leaking helium gas.
e. Replace any valve with suspected leaks, and retest the new valve for leaks.
10.8.8. Leaks at Burst Disc
♦ Small (micro) bubbles may appear between the gasket and flange. This is normal for this gasket
material. Make sure the Belleville washers are flattened and no major leaks (continuous bubbles
over 0.08 in. or 2 mm in diameter) are present. Foamlike bubbles may be present.
a. Ramp the magnet down to zero field in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.
b. Remove the Vent Adapter.
c. Check the Burst Disc for cracks or significant leaks around the gasket. Replace any cracked or
leaking Burst Disc in conformance with Burst Disc (2349529) Replacement.

Page 328 of 607
10.8.9. If the root cause of an issue is not found after completing troubleshooting, collect the information
below, and call the Online Center for assistance.
Item Information
System ID
Magnet Serial Number
Magnet Installation Date
Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader
Serial Number
Install Date
Two-Stage Run Time
Cryocooler Static Pressure
Compressor Dynamic Pressure
Inlet Water Flow
Water Temperature at Inlet
Serial Number
Second Stage Temperature (Hand-Held RuO)
Recondenser Temperature (Hand-Held RuO)
ΔT
Two-Stage
First Stage Temperature
Cryocooler
Coldhead Sleeve Vacuum
Number of Getter Bags (Charcoal Packets)
Date Getter Bags (Charcoal Packets) Last
Changed
Noise
Magnet Pressure
Helium Level, Cylindrical
Frost of Plumbing
Magnet Monitor Heater Operation Verification
Comments:

Page 329 of 607
10.9. Temperature Sensor Checks Using the Handheld MTM-101 Cryogenic Temperature Meter
(5119507)

46-301477G2 or Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer Kit 46-301477G2 or
1
46-317543G2 Diode Box 46-317543G2
46-301619P1 1 Cable
2300866 1 SI-410 Diode Temperature Readout Cable
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
10.9.1. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Temperature Sensor
Checks. Refer to the appropriate Service Methods documentation (available through the support
documentation library at gehealthcare.com or your local GE Healthcare Service Representative)
before continuing with this procedure if cover removal is required.
10.9.2. When troubleshooting thermal issues on magnets, using the MTM-101 meter is mandatory.
Measurements made with the MagMon3 are not accurate enough for this purpose. There are two
points for temperature measurements (see illustration below):
♦ Coldhead – This point allows the measurement of RuO A (also known as the second stage
coldhead temperature).
♦ Recondenser – This point allows the measurement of:
◊ RuO B (also known as the recondenser temperature)
◊ The shield temperature diode (also known as the first stage coldhead temperature)
◊ The second stage coldhead temperature

Page 330 of 607
10.9.3. Connect the meter to a measurement point.
10.9.4. Press the green button on the meter until the LED on the meter indicates that the meter is measuring
the temperature you want to measure. The table below shows how the LED indicates which
temperature is being measured.
♦ For example, if you want to measure the first stage coldhead temperature, connect the meter to
the recondenser measurement point, and press the green button twice.
♦ To measure the second stage coldhead temperature, press the green button a third time.
MTM-101 Indicator LEDs

For this connector: This LED on the MTM-101 Meter Indicates the meter is measuring:
Coldhead RuO Second stage coldhead temperature (RuO A)
Recondenser RuO Recondenser temperature (RuO B)
Recondenser SI-410D1 First Stage Coldhead Temperature
Recondenser SI-410D2 Recondenser Temperature
1.5T – R Series
Connection Points for
Temperature
Measurements
3.0T – W, WB Series
Connection Points for
Temperature
Measurements

Page 331 of 607
10.10. Temperature Sensor Checks Using Portable RuO Temperature Monitor (2171219)

RuO Temperature Monitor Kit (includes RuO Temperature
2189710 1
Monitor 2171219)
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) - Must be able to supply 10
NA 1
microamps or less current.
46-301477G2 or Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer Kit 46-301477G2 or
1
46-317543G2 Diode Box 46-317543G2
46-301619P1 1 Cable
2300866 1 SI-410 Diode Temperature Readout Cable
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1 Service Methods documentation for the magnet/enclosure
Representative)
10.10.1. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Temperature Sensor
Checks. Refer to the appropriate Service Methods documentation (available through the support
10.10.2. RuO Temperature Monitor readings will increase slightly if the meter is cold. For best results, the
meter should be at or near room temperature.
10.10.3. The RuO Temperature Monitor contains ferrous materials. Keep meter away from the magnet bore.
10.10.4. Attach either cable of Portable RuO Temperature Monitor 2171219 to the CAL Receptacle located in
the upper left side of the monitor shown below.
RuO Temperature Monitor (2171219) Connections

Page 332 of 607
10.10.5.Press the [Push to Read] button. The reading for the first cable should be 3.95K to 4.05K.
10.10.6.Attach the Portable RuO Temperature Monitor's other cable to the CAL Receptacle.
10.10.7.Press the [Push to Read] button. The reading for the second cable should be 3.95K to 4.05K.
10.10.8.Place the RuO Temperature Monitor on the magnet's left hand (service) side, close enough to the
Coldhead for the monitor's cables to reach the Coldhead's connection ports. (The RuO Temperature
Monitor contains ferrous materials. Keep meter away from the magnet bore.
10.10.9. Run the two cables up to the Coldhead box and attach the cables as shown below, connecting to the
Coldhead and Recondenser Connection Ports.
10.10.10. Make sure the cables are straight between the monitor and the magnet. Coiled cable can affect the
accuracy of the readings.
1.5T - R Series
RuO Temperature Monitor
2171219 Connections at
Coldhead
3.0T - W, WB Series
RuO Temperature Monitor
2171219 Connections at
Coldhead

Page 333 of 607
10.10.11. Read the Recondenser temperature:
a. Rotate the switch on the RuO Temperature Monitor to the Recondenser position.
b. Depress the [Push to Read] button.
c. Let the readings stabilize for 10 seconds
d. Since the Recondenser reading will vary slightly, calculate the average of the high and low
readings.
10.10.12. Read the Coldhead temperature:
a. Rotate the switch in the Coldhead position, and depress the [Push to Read] button.
b. Let the readings stabilize for 10 seconds.
c. Wait a few minutes, then depress the [Push to Read] button again.
d. Let the readings stabilize for 10 seconds.
e. Average the first and second Coldhead readings.
f. If readings are not within the normal range, check battery output by connecting a DVM across
the red and black battery terminals on the front panel of the RuO Temperature Monitor. Battery
output should be above 8 VDC. When sampling, voltage will drop about 0.7 VDC.

Page 334 of 607
10.11. Magnet Electrical Checks
This section provides go/no go tests for internal magnet circuitry faults before ramping the magnet.

NA 1
Voltage Tester
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
♦ Make sure the magnet is at zero field before starting the Magnet Electrical Checks procedure.
♦ All measured superconducting coils must be cold (4.2K) for the Main Coil and BØ Coil resistance
♦ The Shim Lead Assembly must be fully “Engaged” in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement
and Disengagement in order to obtain resistance data.
♦ Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete Magnet Electrical
Checks. Refer to the Cover Removal section within this manual or the appropriate Service
Methods documentation (available through the support documentation library at
www.gehealthcare.com or your local GE Healthcare Service Representative) before continuing
10.11.3. “Engage" the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Engagement and Disengagement.
10.11.4. Locate the Shim Lead Connector Housing (shown below, in disengaged position for clarity).

Page 335 of 607
10.11.5. Locate the connector pins as noted in the following tables. Use a digital meter to measure the
resistance across the identified connector pins. Take note and utilize the appropriate table for the
unit under test.
a. Magnet Circuits Resistance Checks, Main Coil, Cold (4.2K)
b. Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K), Measured on Shim Lead
c. Superconducting Shim Coil Resistance Checks, Cold (4.2K), Measured on Shim Lead Pigtail Cable
10.11.6. Report any reading outside of the acceptable range to the Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team
Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center for future investigation before ramping the
magnet.

Resistance (Ohms)
Pins Typical
J5-1 on Shim Lead 9, 10 <6 <6

Page 336 of 607

Shim PS
W, WB Pins R W WB
Setting R Series
AX1 Z1 Z1 1, 19
AX2 Z2 Z2 2, 20
0.2 – 0.6
AX3 Z3 Z3 3, 21
AX4 Z4 Z4 4, 22
AX5 Z5 Z5 5, 23 NA
AX6 Z6 Z6 6, 24 NA
T1-1 C31 Z(X2-Y2) 13, 23
T1-2 C11+ X 16, 19
T1-3 C22+ Z2X 14, 21 0.2 – 0.6
P1-A 0.3 – 0.5 0.2 – 0.8
T1-4 C11- ZX 17, 20
T1-5 C22- X2-Y2 15, 22
T1-6 C33 X3 18, 24 NA
T2-1 S31 ZXY 11, 23
T2-2 S11+ Y 9, 19
T2-3 S22+ Z2Y 7, 21 0.2 – 0.6
T2-4 S11- ZY 10, 20
T2-5 S22- XY 8, 22
T2-6 S33 Y3 12, 24 NA
27 -33 or 12 - 15 or
22 – 28A 8.5 - 12B
J5-2
Transverse 1 7, 6 8 – 10 8.5 - 12 13 - 16
Transverse 2 8, 6 8 – 10 8.5 - 12 13 - 16

Page 337 of 607

Shim PS
W, WB Pins R W WB
Setting R Series
AX1 Z1 Z1 P2
AA, (K, L)
AX2 Z2 Z2 P2-W
0.2 – 0.7
AX3 Z3 Z3 P2
B, (M, N)
AX4 Z4 Z4 P2-W
AX5 Z5 Z5 P2 NA
C, P
AX6 Z6 Z6 P2-W NA
T1-1 C31 Z(X2-Y2) D, P
T1-2 C11+ X P2 F, (K, L)
T1-3 C22+ Z2X G, (M, N) 0.2 – 0.7
0.3 – 0.6 0.2 – 0.8
T1-4 C11- ZX F, (K, L)
T1-5 C22- X2-Y2 P2-W G, (M, N)
T1-6 C33 X3 D, P NA
T2-1 S31 ZXY E, P
T2-2 S11+ Y P2 H, (K, L)
T2-3 S22+ Z2Y J, (M, N) 0.2 – 0.7
T2-4 S11- ZY H, (K, L)
T2-5 S22- XY P2-W J, (M, N)
T2-6 S33 Y3 E, P NA

Page 338 of 607
10.12. Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) Checks
Check the basic functioning of the MRU weekly and full functioning yearly. If the MRU fails any check,
immediately stop all scanning activity and replace the MRU. Contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen
(MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center for assistance.
10.12.1. Perform weekly MRU checks in conformance with the vendor manual for the Magnet Rundown Unit
(See MRU Operating and Service Manual, GE P/N 5265188).
10.12.2. Perform yearly MRU checks in conformance with the vendor manual for the Magnet Rundown Unit
(See MRU Operating and Service Manual, GE P/N 5265188).

Page 339 of 607
10.13. Measuring the Helium Level in the Magnet Using a Handheld Meter (2362622)
The LHM-100 Meter (P/N 2362622) is a battery operated device. Make sure fresh batteries are always
available to use with this device.
10.13.1. Connect the male end of the cable to the meter.

10.13.2. Connect the female end of the cable to either the LHE 1 or LHE 2 connectors on the magnet
instrumentation box.
10.13.3. Flip up the toggle switch on the meter to select a horizontal bore magnet (LCC, for example).
10.13.4. Hold down the Read button on the meter until the reading stabilizes.
10.13.5. Read the helium level. (If the BAT LOW button illuminates, replace the 4 AA batteries in the meter.)

Page 340 of 607
10.14. Cryocooler Checks
The Cryocooler System consists of a Cryocooler Compressor, located in the Equipment Room, and a
Coldhead mechanically attached to the Cryostat Heat Shields. Both the first and second stage interface
points on the Cryocooler Coldhead Mounting Sleeve are equipped with temperature sensing silicon diodes
for monitoring and troubleshooting purposes. Perform Cryocooler Checks at installation when cryostat
pressure or boil-off is out of specification, and at the yearly Preventative Maintenance (PM) interval if the
check was not performed within the yearly interval.

RuO Temperature Monitor Kit (includes RuO Temperature
2189710 1
Monitor 2171219)
NA 1 Digital Thermometer
NA 1 2 Gallon (10 Liter) Bucket
ramped.
Compressor (F-50 Shown) Rear View
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Compressor Power Line
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines

Page 341 of 607
10.14.1. Turn the Cryocooler Compressor off and allow the static gas pressure to equalize on the gauge
located on the front panel of the unit.
10.14.2. Read the gauge-equalized pressure. The static pressure should be 1.60 to 1.65 Mpa. If the pressure is
outside this range, refer to the vendor's manual for troubleshooting instructions.
10.14.3. When the static gas pressure is within the specification range, turn on the Cryocooler Compressor.
Refer to vendor manual for acceptable dynamic pressure ranges.
10.14.4. Verify that the flow rate and temperature of the water supplied to the Cryocooler Compressor are
within the specification stated in below:
♦ Flow Rate: 1.85 gallons per minute (gpm), 6.66 liters per minute (lpm)
♦ Temperature: 39.2° to 82.4°F (4° to 28°C)
10.14.5. If the site does not have accurate measurements of flow rate and temperature:
a. Disconnect the water supply line from the Cryocooler Compressor, and run the water flow into a
2 gallon (10 liter) bucket. If a 2 gallon bucket fills in <64 seconds or a 10 liter bucket fills in <89
seconds, the flow rate meets the required 1.85 gallons per minute (gpm), 6.66 liters per minute
(lpm) minimum.
b. Measure the water temperature. The supply water temperature must be between 39.2°F (4°C)
and 82.4°F (28°C).
c. Reconnect the water supply line to the Cryocooler Compressor.
d. Check the water supply line for leaks, and repair as necessary.
e. Check the filter and the Magnet Monitor water flow meter for clogs.
10.14.6. Check Cryocooler temperatures. (Refer to Cryocooler Installation Section for the correct procedure.)
10.14.7. Read and the First Stage and Second Stage Shield temperatures.
10.14.8. Compare these readings to the guidelines given in below and to the initial readings obtained at
equilibrium. (Refer to Cryocooler Installation Section.) Temperature Guidelines:
Shield Temperature Conditions

Condition Specification LED on MTM-101
First Stage Coldhead Temp < 45K SI410 D1
Second Stage Recondenser Temp (RuO B) < 4.4K RuO
Second Stage Coldhead Temp (RuO A) See ΔT RuO
ΔT = RuO B - RuO A 0.0K < ΔT < 0.2K NA
Second Stage Recondenser Temp (SI410) NA SI410 D2
Magnet Helium Pressure 4.0 psig ± 0.1 psig Magnet Monitor
10.14.9. If any Shield temperature is out of range or differs drastically from the previous equilibrium
temperatures, check the eight mounting bolts of the Cryocooler Coldhead and ensure they are not
loose. (See Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement.)
10.14.10. If gas pressure and water supply are in specification and the mounting bolts are tight when shield
temperature is out of range, Cryocooler Coldhead replacement may be necessary. Contact your
Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online
Center before replacing the Coldhead.

Page 342 of 607
10.15. Magnet Quench Prevention
Follow the actions below to prevent a magnet quench and to minimize the impact of a quench should one
occur.
10.15.1. Before/during ramping:
♦ Verify that the MRU is connected and functional.
♦ Verify that the magnet's liquid helium level is
◊ > 80% for 1.5T LCC (R Series)
◊ > 95% for 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series).
♦ Make sure the Magnet Monitor is installed and functional before/during ramping.
♦ Make sure the Shim Lead is engaged in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
♦ Make sure gas flow is visible from the Main Lead Extensions' flow holes before starting a ramp.
♦ Verify that resistance checks are within the specification range, ensuring acceptable contact
resistance. Pay special attention to the Main Lead Extensions insertion steps to ensure low
contact resistance. Install Main Lead Extensions in conformance with “Connections for
Ramping.”
♦ Ramp the magnet in conformance with “Ramping Magnet to Field.”
10.15.2. Ramped Magnet:
♦ Verify that the Magnet Monitor remains completely functional at all times.
♦ Monitor all critical performance parameters continually during magnet operation.
◊ Verify that Cryostat pressure is within specification.
◊ Check magnet temperatures and helium usage at each service call.
♦ Maintain power to the Cryocooler Compressor and associated Chiller at all times. Make sure any
emergency back-up power to these components is working.
♦ Verify that the magnet's liquid helium level is > 40% at 4.0 psig ± 0.1 psig at all times during
magnet operation (call for emergency fill when level reaches 60% or lower). Refill in conformance
with “Liquid Helium Fill.”
♦ Do not allow a helium Dewar to empty and blow warm gas into the magnet's Fill Port during
liquid helium fill/refill.
♦ Do not insert warm object(s) or blow warm gas into any entry port (Vertical Penetration, Fill Port,
etc.) of the magnet.
♦ Strictly adhere to the rampdown requirements/prerequisites stated in “Magnet Rampdown to
Zero Field.”
♦ Engage the Shim Lead in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement.
♦ Insert the Main Lead Extensions in conformance with “Connections for Ramping.”

Page 343 of 607
10.16. Quench Recovery
10.16.1. Report ALL quenches by submitting the necessary information to the quench tracker/quench
reporting site and by notifying your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet
Support Team at the Online Center. Service a quenched magnet as soon as possible!
10.16.2. To maintain positive Cryostat pressure and prevent cryopumping and ice build-up, it is essential that
the following two steps are performed as soon as possible:
♦ Immediately turn off the Cryocooler to prevent cryopumping and icing in the Recondenser.
♦ Check and replace the Burst Disc and gaskets in conformance with “Burst Disc (2349529)
Replacement.” Make sure debris is cleared. Order a new Burst Disc for the magnet's Field Spares
Kit.
10.16.3. Order and replace liquid helium ASAP.
10.16.4. Before performing the next step, make sure positive Cryostat pressure is maintained. If necessary,
99.999% (“five nines") helium gas should be used to pressurize the system.
♦ Check for and remove any ice in the Vertical Penetration in conformance with the Vertical
Penetration Deicing subsection of “Ice Removal Procedures.”
10.16.5. Remove all Baffle Tree debris in the Vertical Penetration. Order and replace the Baffle Tree in
conformance with “Baffle Replacement.”
10.16.6. Purge the Recondenser with 4 bottles of 99.999% (“five nines") helium gas, inputting to the
Recondenser shield vent line and exiting through the magnet's helium vent by opening Vent Valve V2.
Refer to the Recondenser Deicing subsection of “Ice Removal Procedures.”
10.16.7. Connect a DVM between an engaged Main Lead Extension and an unpainted surface on the Cryostat
to check for a Main Coil grounding fault. If an open circuit is not indicated, contact your Regional
Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center.
10.16.8. Perform Magnet Electrical Checks as detailed within the Commissioning Check section of this manual.
10.16.9. Check the Pressure Gauge for damage, replacing if required.
10.16.10. Refill the magnet in conformance with “Liquid Helium Fill.”
10.16.11. Check Cryostat pressure after liquid helium fill and stabilization. Do not adjust Cryostat pressure at
this time.
♦ If a leak is suspected, check all external plumbing joints, relief valves, and the Burst Disc for
leaks. Repair as necessary and recheck for leaks.
♦ If pressure builds beyond the relief valve's 5 psig threshold, the valve will open. Perform
temperature/pressure troubleshooting in conformance with “Temperature, Pressure, & Leak
Troubleshooting.” Continued pressure/flow build-up could indicate Cryostat damage; contact
you Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online
Center.
10.16.12. Inspect the entire Vent System, clearing out any Burst Disc/Baffle Tree debris. Notify the site's
administration of any Vent System damage found.
10.16.13. Ramp the magnet in conformance with “Ramping Magnet to Field.”
10.16.14. Shim the magnet in conformance with “Shimming.”
10.16.15. After the system has stabilized maintain Cryostat pressure at 4.0 psig ± 0.1 psig.
10.16.16. Complete the necessary Quench reporting within 24 hours of the occurrence and submit the online
version to the On-Line Center within 24 hours of the occurrence.

Page 344 of 607
Chapter 11, Replacement and Maintenance

11. Replacement and Maintenance
Maintenance procedures should be performed at the intervals specified in Table below. Some procedures
require specially trained personnel.
Maintenance Intervals
Trained
Work Six As Service
Item Week Year
Day Months Specified Personnel
Required?
Check for presence of spare parts kit and service
- - X - - No
ladder for magnet
Inspect for damage at vertical stack and plumbing
- - X - - Yes
joints
Inspect VentGlas for damage - - - X - Yes
Check helium level on Magnet Monitor X - - - - Yes
Calculate helium boil-off rate - - X - - Yes
Check helium vessel operating pressure X - - - - Yes
Check Magnet Rundown Unit - X - X - Yes
Check Cryocooler operation - X - - - Yes
Check Cryocooler Compressor operation - X - - - Yes
Measure Cryostat Shield temperature using
- X - - - Yes
Magnet Monitor
Check Compressor cooling water flow rate - - X - - Yes
Replace Cryocooler Compressor Adsorber - - - - X Yes

Page 345 of 607
11.1. Cryocooler System Gas Pressure Adjustments
Compressor gas pressure must be within the range stated in the vendor's service manual for proper
operation of the Cryocooler. Use the following procedures to check and adjust the pressure to
specification, if required.

POTENTIAL HIGH PRESSURE GAS RELEASE!

POTENTIAL EXPLOSIVE RELEASE OF HIGH PRESSURE (~1.62 MPA, 16.5 KGF/CM*CM*G, 235 PSIG)
HELIUM GAS IF CRYOCOOLER SYSTEM COMPONENTS ARE HIT WITH SHARP EDGE OR TOUCHED WITH
POINTED OBJECT.
HANDLE EQUIPMENT WITH CARE. KEEP SHARP EDGED/POINTED OBJECTS AWAY FROM CRYOCOOLER
SYSTEM.

CONTACT WITH CONNECTORS LEADING AN ENERGIZED POWER SUPPLY/COMPRESSOR CAN CAUSE
ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
POWER SUPPLY.

Page 346 of 607
11.1.1. Tools and Test Equipment, Consumables

1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
High Pressure Helium Regulator (included in
46-294009P1 1
Coldhead/Compressor Service Kit 46-281088G4)
Helium Line Adapter Hose (included in Coldhead/Compressor
46-294002P1 1
Service Kit 46-281088G4)
5102120 1 Gas Charging Tool
Digital Voltmeter (DVM), Volt-Ohm Meter (VOM) or non-
NA 1
Nonmagnetic Tools Kit (magnets with magnetic fields ≤ 1.5T
46-320273G4 1
only)
Consumables
99.999% (“five nines”) Helium Gas, 235 SCF Nonmagnetic
NA 1
Cylinder

Page 347 of 607
11.1.2. Verify that the Cryocooler system is at equilibrium (i.e., Coldhead at ~ 4.2K) (refer to Temperature
Sensor Checks).
11.1.3. Check the operating (dynamic high-side) pressure of the Cryocooler system. Compare to the
specifications below.
a. The supply pressure gauge displays static pressure when the compressor is off and high-side
dynamic pressure when the compressor is on.
b. Charge Compressor in strict conformance with the Cryocooler System Gas Pressure Adjustments
procedure to prevent contamination. Contamination may result in noise at the Coldhead or
decreasing cooling capacity.
c. Cryocooler filling pressure varies with Compressor and Coldhead temperature. Make sure the
Cryocooler power is off and gas pressure has stabilized (static pressure) before making pressure
adjustments.
d. Operating (dynamic high-side) pressure checks done while the Cryocooler system is NOT at
equilibrium (i.e., the Coldhead is not at ~ 4.2K) will not be accurate.
Compressor Operating Pressures

Compressor Operating (Dynamic High Side) Pressure
Compressor and Coldhead MPa (Approx.) KgF/cm2G psig
F50 and RRDK-408 4K Two-Stage Coldhead 1.90 – 2.20 19.4 – 22.43 276-319
11.1.4. If the dynamic high-side pressure is outside the acceptable range:

a. Turn the Cryocooler system off.
b. Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power to the Cryocooler Compressor.
c. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
d. Allow the system to stabilize.
e. Check the static pressure and compare to the specification in the table below.
Compressor Static Gas Pressures

Compressor Static Gas Pressure at 20°C ( 68°F )
Compressor and Coldhead MPa (Approx.) KgF/cm2G psig
F50 and RRDK-408 4K Two-Stage Coldhead 1.60 – 1.65 16.3 – 16.8 232 - 239
11.1.5. If both the dynamic and static pressures are out of range, adjust static pressure to conformance with
Gas Pressure Adjustment instructions contained within the vendor manual.

Page 348 of 607
11.2. Helium Flexline Connections and Casing Replacement
Follow the procedures in this section to prevent helium loss and damage to the Coldhead and Aeroquip
fittings during flexible helium gas line (flexline) replacement and to clean Aeroquip fittings. Make sure the
gas line insulation is reinstalled on the new gas lines to prevent “spike" noise and image problems.
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD !

FLEXLINES WITH BROKEN AEROQUIP FITTINGS MAY DISCONNECT AND MOVE ERRATICALLY. DO NOT
PUT ANY BENDING FORCE ON AEROQUIP FITTINGS WHILE CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING HELIUM
FLEXLINES. A BENDING FORCE CAN RESULT IN BENDING OR BREAKAGE OF THE AEROQUIP STEMS.

FERROUS AND MAY BECOME PROJECTILES IF DISONNECTED IN THE PRESENCE OF A MAGNETIC FIELD.
DO NOT DISCONNECT 3T COLDHEAD RIGHT-ANGLE CONNECTORS FROM BOTH THE FLEXLINE AND
COLDHEAD IN THE PRESENCE OF A MAGNETIC FIELD.

1 in. Open End Wrench, Leybold #722-81-018 (included in
46-294150P13 1 Coldhead/Compressor Installation & Maintenance Kit 46-
281088G4)
1 3/ 16 in. Open End Wrench, Leybold #722-81-019 (included in
281088G4)
281088G4)
281088G4)
Consumables
As
NA Clean, lint-free, nonabrasive cloth or paper
Required
NA 1 Isopropyl Alcohol, bottle
As
NA (Commercial leak detector fluids available through HVAC
Required

Page 349 of 607
Replacement Parts, 1.5T LCC (R Series)

2154505-2 1 Helium Return Line, 20 m (65.6 ft), Run 622
2154502-2 1 Helium Supply Line, 20 m (65.6 ft), Run 621
Replacement Parts, 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series)

2154505-2 1 Helium Return Line, 20 m (65.6 ft), Run 622
2154502-2 1 Helium Supply Line, 20 m (65.6 ft), Run 621
11.2.1. Do not put any bending force on Aeroquip fittings while connecting/disconnecting helium flexlines. A
bending force will create difficulty in the rapid engagement/ disengagement required to prevent
helium loss and system contamination. Do support the gas lines when connecting/disconnecting to
the Coldhead at the top of the magnet or to the Compressor.
11.2.2. Order and technique are important when connecting helium flexlines to prevent inoperative
11.2.3. Flexline Connection Sequence for Leybold Shield Coolers
a. Connect the return line (green mark) and the supply line (red mark) to the Compressor.
b. Then connect the return line (green mark) to the Coldhead.
c. Finally connect the supply line (red mark) to the Coldhead.

Page 350 of 607
11.2.4. Connecting Aeroquip Couplings
a. Remove the caps and plugs from the system gas connections and thread them together for
storage. (System gas connections are shipped with caps and plugs to keep the fittings clean and
free from damage.)
b. Wipe the faces of the couplings with a lint-free cloth to insure they are clean and free of chips
and dust.
c. Make sure the face seal is in place on the inside periphery of the male coupling and is not
damaged. See illustration below.
Section through Disconnected and Connected Aeroquip Couplings
d. To make the connection, start the hose-side union nut onto the male connector by hand.
(Excessive gas will escape if the fittings are not aligned properly during connection or
disconnection.)

Page 351 of 607
e. Using Aeroquip wrenches, hold the stationary part of the female coupling while turning the
union nut with the other wrench. See illustrations below.
f. As the poppet begins to open there will be a slight venting of gas from the fitting. Continue to
tighten the connection until the female coupling is firmly seated against the face seal on the
male coupling. The required torques are:
◊ 35 ft-lbs (47.5 N-m) for a ½-inch connection
◊ 45 ft-Ibs (61.0 N-m) for a ¾-inch connection.
Proper 2-Wrench
Connection
Technique for
Aeroquip Coupling
Flexline Connection/Disconnection Technique

Page 352 of 607
11.2.5. Disconnecting Aeroquip Couplings - To disconnect the gas line at the Coldhead:
a. Make sure the male couplings at the Compressor and Coldhead DO NOT ROTATE when
disconnecting lines. Avoid torsional forces on the flex sections.
b. First use one wrench to turn the female coupling union nut about 1/ 8 turn, while holding the male
coupling with the other wrench. This will overcome the initial torque required to break the
connection without loosening the male connector from its adapter.
c. Make sure the hose does not rotate to avoid a torsional force on the hose.
d. Place the second wrench on the stationary part of the female coupling and continue to unthread
the union nut. Make sure the male connector does not rotate when disconnecting.
e. Make sure the bulkhead jam nut is secure and the male coupling does not rotate when removing
the gas line.
11.2.6. Disconnecting Aeroquip Couplings - To disconnect the gas line at the Compressor:
a. Make sure the male couplings at the Compressor and Coldhead DO NOT ROTATE when
disconnecting lines. Avoid torsional forces on the flex sections.
b. Turn the union nut on the female coupling while holding the stationary part of female coupling
with a second wrench. Since the male coupling is bulkheaded to the Compressor front panel with
a lock washer, the male coupling should not rotate from its adapter while removing.
c. When the hoses are disconnected, check each coupling to make sure the face seal is in place.
(While the hose is venting during disconnection, the face seal is often blown out of its gland and
into the female coupling. Failure to remove the seal from the female coupling will cause the
connection to leak when reconnected, with or without another face seal installed.)
d. If all seals are in place, replace the dust caps and plugs to the coupling halves.
11.2.7. Replacing Flexline Insulation Casing
a. Corrugated plastic tubing is used to isolate helium gas lines from each other and from ground to
prevent spike noise. If the supplied tubing does not fully cover the helium gas lines, order
additional tubing to fully cover the lines.
b. If gas line casing is damaged then perform the following, otherwise reuse the casing.
c. Slide the old insulated tubing off the gas line.
d. Install new Corrugated Plastic Tubing (2251611) around both flexlines to the Coldhead
11.2.8. Cleaning Aeroquip Couplings (refer to illustrations below)
a. Stop the Cryocooler system. Check the Pressure Gauge on the Compressor Unit.
b. Disconnect the Supply Flex Line from the Coldhead.
c. Disconnect the Return Flex Line from the Coldhead. If you heard GAS LEAKING SOUND from the
Female Aeroquip Connector on the Return Flex Line, remove the Return Flex Line from the
Cryocooler System, and install the New Return Flex Line.
d. Clean the Female Aeroquip Connector (coldhead side) on the Return Flex Line.
e. Check the Female Aeroquip Connector on the Return Flex Line.
f. First, connect the Return Flex Line to the Coldhead. Next, connect the Supply Flex Line to the
Coldhead.
g. Check the leak on the Aeroquip Connectors with SNOOP LIQUID.
h. Check the Pressure Gauge on the Compressor Unit. Fill Helium Gas if necessary.

Page 353 of 607
Clean the Female Aeroquip Connector (coldhead side)
Cleaning Procedure Completed

Page 354 of 607
11.3. Main Lead Extension Contact Band Replacement

NA 1 Flat Head Screwdriver
Consumables
As
NA Clean, lint-free, nonabrasive cloth or paper
Required
As
NA Isopropyl Alcohol
Required
Replacement Parts
Main Lead Extension Contact Band (included in Magnet
46-281256P1 2
Ramping Equipment Kit 46-260703G7)
Contact Bands (see ridges)
Contact Band Cavity

And Seating Surface
Cleaned with Non-Abrasive
Cloth.

Page 355 of 607
11.3.1. Insert a flat head screwdriver into the ½-inch (12.7 mm) diameter contact opening on the end of the
Main Lead Extension. See illustration below.
Contact Band Removal
11.3.2. Engage the Contact Band's louvers with the screwdriver tip and gradually pry the old Contact Band
out of the contact opening without scoring the contact opening's wall.
11.3.3. Clean the cavity in which the Contact Band seats with a nonabrasive cloth and a degreasing solution
such as isopropyl alcohol. (The contact area on which the Contact Band seats is silver plated and
must be cleaned with a nonabrasive cloth and cleaning solution before a new Contact Band is
inserted.)
11.3.4. Obtain and inspect a new Contact Band (46-281256P1).
11.3.5. Roll the new Contact Band into a uniform cylinder of less than ½-inch (12.7 mm) diameter and fully
insert it into the contact opening. See illustration below.
11.3.6. Make sure the Contact Band has expanded against walls of the contact opening and is fully seated
below rim of the opening.
Contact Band Insertion

Page 356 of 607
11.4. Ice Removal
Ice can form in the Shim Lead Assembly, Shim Lead Connector, Instrumentation Connector and the Vent
Plumbing because of the cryopumping of air entering through a ruptured Burst Disc, open Fill, Vent or
Ramp Lead Ports, or leaks at relief valves, plumbing joints and fittings. Ice tends to form on the cold walls
and platform of the Vertical Penetration and at the entry of the shield exhaust plumbing. Icing of the
Recondenser can also result from the migration of ice and moisture into the colder areas of the cryostat.
Ice in the Vertical Penetration may result in a minor thermal short, causing an increase in Cryocooler
temperature and magnet pressure and/or the inability to install the Ramp Leads or Fill Stinger. Ice plugs in
the plumbing will restrict or prevent venting through cryostat Vent Valve V2. An ice plug in the
Recondenser will interfere with the recondensing cycle and result in a temperature drop at the Cryocooler
and Recondenser and a simultaneous pressure increase in the cryostat.
Check the flow through Vent Valve V2. If the flow from V2 is restricted, DO NOT open any other ports. Check
the vessel pressure reading on the mechanical gauge and on Magnet Monitor. Turn off the Coldhead and
see if pressure builds over time. If there is no flow from V2 and no increase in vessel pressure with the
Coldhead off, immediately contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet
Support Team at the Online Center before continuing.
Maintaining a positive pressure inside the cryostat and making routine leak checks will minimize
cryopumping and ice formation. See Temperature, Pressure, & Leak Troubleshooting. When resistance
measurements of the magnet's electrical circuits are performed in conformance with Magnet Electrical
Checks and the resistance readings are open or intermittent, it is usually due to icing in the
Instrumentation Connector. Use the troubleshooting guide in Temperature, Pressure, & Leak
Troubleshooting, to determine the location and extent of the suspected ice before starting any Ice
Removal procedure. Make sure all DANGERS, WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are complied with before starting
any Ice Removal procedure.

Page 357 of 607
There are eight processes for de-icing the magnet:
• Removing ice from the Shim Lead and Sav-Con
o Level 1 involves removing ice from the Sav-Con Connector so the Shim Lead can be reseated
without ramping the magnet down.
o Level 2 consists of removing ice from the Service Turret using warm helium gas. This requires
the magnet to be ramped down. Try Level One Deicing before progressing to Level Two.
• Removing ice from the Penetration (Service Turret De-Icing)
o Level 1 consists of coring through ice that has built up in the magnet turret. This allows for
magnet ramp-down and fill.
o Level 2 consists of removing ice from the Service Turret using warm helium gas. This requires
the magnet to be ramped down. Try Level One Deicing before progressing to Level Two.
• Removing ice from the Recondenser
o Level 1 Recondenser de-icing involves using a power supply to generate heat within the
magnet to remove ice around the Recondenser and vent and drain tubes. This procedure can
be performed with the magnet at field.
o Level 2 Recondenser de-icing procedure uses the same ice removal strategy as Level One
Deicing, but also removes the Coldhead to improve warming. Try Level One Deicing before
progressing to Level Two.
o Level 3 Recondenser de-icing procedure uses the same ice removal strategy as Level Two
Deicing, but also forces warmed helium purge gas through the 40K shield cooling shield. Try
Level Two Deicing before progressing to Level Three.
o Level 4 Recondenser de-icing involves a complete magnet warm-up. Contact your Regional
Magnet & Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center
before attempting a Level 4 Recondenser de-icing.

Page 358 of 607




3. VENT CRYOSTAT DOWN TO 0.2 PSIF THROUGH VENT VALVE V2.

PROCEDURE.

A MAGNET QUENCH DURING ICE REMOVAL COULD RESULT IN RAPID EXPULSION OF LIQUID HELIUM
THROUGH THE VERTICAL PENETRATION. MAKE SURE MAGNET IS RAMPED DOWN TO ZERO FIELD
BEFORE STARTING ICE REMOVAL.

CONTACT WITH CONNECTORS LEADING TO AN ENERGIZED COMPRESSOR CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL
SHOCK. DISCONNECT INPUT POWER TO THE COMPRESSOR AND FOLLOW LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
PROCEDURES TO MAKE SURE POWER IS NOT SUPPLIED TO THE COMPRESSOR.

Page 359 of 607
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
46-271135P1 1 or 2 Flexible Hose, 40-ft (12.2 m)
46-306717G1 1 Nonmagnetic Gas Cylinder Cart
5263845 1 Universal Deicing Tool Kit
2300306-2 1 Universal Coldhead Replacement Tool Kit
Sav-Con and Instrumentation Lead Installation/Removal Kit
46-294872G3 1
(includes Connector Insertion Tool 46-281934P1)
2232674 (Fixed Site) or
1 Coldhead Insertion and Purge Cover Tool Kit
2380985 (Mobile Site)
NA 1 Tygon Tubing, 20-ft (6.1 m)
5180672 1 Coldsleeve Heater Kit
2385069 1 3.0T Coldhead Transport Kit
2348452 1 3T Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
NA 1 Flashlight

Page 360 of 607
Tools & Test Equipment, cont.
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
NA 4 Gaseous Helium, 235 SCF Nonferrous Cylinder with Regulator
Leak detection fluid (e.g., Snoop, Bird Dog Quart Spray P/N
NA 1
DOG-1Q, Big Blue P/N Rt100S or Rt100G or Leak- Tec)
11.4.1. Ice Removal, Required Conditions:

a. If the site has Magnet Monitor proprietary software, connect to the Magnet Monitor and turn off
the alarm for vessel pressure. Turn the vessel pressure control to a high value of 0.5 psig and a
low value of 0.4 psig.
b. The Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate must be installed when working on
the magnet to protect side-mounted components from damage.
c. Make sure the area is secure and that all required Warning Signs are posted to meet the safety
requirements stated in Chapter 1, Safety, before starting this procedure.
d. Make sure the magnet room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
e. Make sure the magnet room door is propped open (or the hatch is opened if a mobile van) before
f. Maintain a positive pressure inside the Cryostat, and keep all valves closed in strict conformance
with the Ice Removal procedure to minimize cryo-pumping of air.
g. Turn off the Cryocooler before depressurizing and opening the cryostat to prevent the migration
of ice and moisture into the Recondenser.
h. Do NOT allow the Vertical Penetration to remain open during deicing procedures to prevent air
and moisture from entering and cryo-pumping the walls. Cover the open vertical stack
immediately with the Cover Plate.
11.4.2. Set the MagMon3 to pre-fill mode. This will control pressure to 1 psi. This feature lasts for 7 days.

Page 361 of 607
11.4.3. Shim Lead and Sav-Con De-Icing, Level 1
a. Reduce vessel pressure to less than 0.4 psi. (Best practice is to reset operating pressure on the
MM3 to 0.2 - 0.4 psi one to two days prior to start of the de-ice, if possible. This will save you
from having to vent the magnet down and reduce the helium loss.)
b. Open the V2 valve; once magnet pressure is less than 0.2 psi, open the Nupro valve on the Shim
Lead and slowly lower the Shim Lead until it reaches the top of the Sav-Con connector or ice.
c. Close Nupro valve and V2 valve.
Location of V2 and Nupro Valves

Page 362 of 607
d. Connect the 20 ft. gas line to the 3 ft. gas line.
e. Connect the Flow meter and Helium gas hose to the bottle of helium gas (try to keep the flow
gauge vertical, on a large size cylinder it must be angled slightly – see illustration below).
Flow Meter and Gas Hose Connections
He Gas Hose Connected to Nupro

Valve
f. Open V2 valve.
g. Slowly open Nupro valve. Monitor pressure on magnet to ensure that it stays below 0.4 psi.
h. Let helium gas flow over the Sav-Con Connector for 1 minute. Maintain flow rate at 80CFH (use
scale marked 20 – 140 of Helium gas).
i. After 1 minute, close the Nupro and V2 valves. Lower the shim lead and attempt to seat it in the
Sav-Con (make sure the shim lead is aligned with the key-way). ALWAYS make sure that the
Nupro and V2 valves are CLOSED when attempting insertion and/or when helium gas is NOT
flowing.
j. If this shim lead does not seat, slowly open the V2 Valve and then the Nupro valve (monitor
pressure on magnet to ensure that it stays below .4 psi) and allow helium gas to flow over the
Sav-Con connector for 2 minutes with the flow rate set to 130 CFH. DO NOT EXCEED THE GAS
HELIUM FLOW RATE OF 130 CFH. **WARNING** POSSIBLE QUENCH IF YOU EXCEED THE GAS
HELIUM FLOW RATE OF 140 CFH.

Page 363 of 607
k. After 2 minutes, close the Nupro and V2 valves. Lower the shim lead and attempt to seat it in the
Sav-Con (make sure the shim lead is aligned with the key-way). ALWAYS make sure that the
Nupro and V2 valves are CLOSED when attempting insertion and/or when helium gas is NOT
flowing.
l. Repeat steps L & M as necessary (up to ten times) – it may take several attempts in order to clear
all the ice from the Sav-Con. (If the pressure builds to over 0.4psi, vent using the V2 valve.)
m. Once the shim lead is fully seated in the Sav-Con, verify that you correction coil and heater
circuit continuity.
n. Once continuity has been established disconnect gas line from shim lead and ensure that the V2
and Nupro valves are completely closed.
o. If the issue persists and you are unable to clear the Sav-Con, contact the Regional Magnet &
Cryogen (MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center for further
instructions.

Page 364 of 607
11.4.4. Shim Lead and Sav-Con De-Icing, Level 2
a. Either turn the Magnet Monitor power off, or disable the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm and
Vessel Pressure Control. (This will prevent false alarms and long-term heater operation.)
b. Make sure the Shim Lead is disengaged, then engage the Shim Lead in conformance with Shim
Lead Engagement and Disengagement.
c. Perform Shim Coil resistance checks per Magnet Commissioning Chapter, Magnet Electrical
Checks.
◊ If the checks are successful, deicing is not required.
◊ If the checks are not successful or the Shim Lead cannot be engaged, proceed to the next
step.
d. Ramp down the magnet if at field using the 50 ft. (15.24 m) Auxiliary Rampdown Cable (2217315)
in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.
e. Turn off the Cryocooler to prevent ice migration into the Recondenser.
◊ Turn the Coldhead Drive Switch On (up position), located on the Compressor's back panel.
◊ Place the Drive Switch on the Compressor's front panel in the O (Off) position.
◊ Run the Coldhead for only 10 seconds with the Compressor turned off to prevent pressure
build-up in the Coldhead, then turn OFF the Coldhead Drive Switch and the Compressor's
Main Power Switch.
◊ Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Compressor. Verify that no voltage is present by
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 365 of 607
f. Vent the magnet down to 0.2 psig by opening/closing Vent Valve V2.

Page 366 of 607
g. Assemble the regulator and Tygon tubing to a helium cylinder.
◊ Remove the orifice plug and nut at the end of the Shim Lead Nupro Vent Valve.
◊ Assemble the other end of the Tygon tube over the exhaust stem.
Warming Shim Lead
h. Partially open Vent Valve V2, and immediately open the Nupro Vent Valve. Blow warm helium
gas through the Shim Lead at 4 psig for five (5) minutes with the Shim Lead engaged/partially
engaged.
i. Attempt to engage the Shim Lead Connector. If successful:
◊ Close the Nupro Vent Valve and Vent Valve V2
◊ Perform Shim Coil resistance checks per Magnet Commissioning Chapter, Magnet Electrical
Checks.
◊ Remove the Tygon tubing, and replace the orifice plug and nut.
◊ If the checks are successful, deicing is not required.
◊ If the checks are not successful or the Shim Lead cannot be engaged, proceed to the next
step.

Page 367 of 607
j. Disengage the Shim Lead, and lock it in the Up position in conformance with Shim Lead
Engagement and Disengagement.
k. Make sure magnet pressure is 0.2 psig, venting the magnet as required.
l. Perform the next two steps rapidly to prevent cryo-pumping of air into the Vertical Stack. Make
sure Lexan Cover Plate 46-294765G1 is on the Service Platform and the holes are plugged before
removing the Shim Lead Assembly.
◊ Loosen and remove the eight ¼-20 retaining bolts (identified in illustration below), and
remove the Shim Lead Assembly.
◊ Immediately cover the Vertical Penetration with the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate 46-
294765G1, and align the scribe mark toward the Vent Adapter.
Warming Shim Lead
m. Secure the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate onto the Vertical Penetration with the eight ¼-20
retaining bolts removed earlier.

Page 368 of 607
n. Attach Deicing Purge Tube 2347725 to the end of the Tygon tubing, and purge the tube at 4 psig.
o. Remove the plugs on the Cover Plate, and insert the Deicing Purge Tube through the hole closest
to the Shim Lead Connector.
Purge Tube Insertion
p. Remove ice by directing an 8 to 10 psig flow of warm helium gas onto the Shim Lead connector
inside the Vertical Penetration and other affected areas while Vent Valve V2 is partially open.
q. Shine the flashlight through the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate, and verify that all ice is removed
inside.
r. Remove any remaining ice on the inside of the Vertical Penetration. (Some bending of the Deicing
Purge Tube may be required.)
s. Shine the flashlight through the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate again. When all ice is removed,
close V2, and remove the Lexan Cover Plate.
t. Temporarily disconnect the Instrumentation Lead Connector using the Latching LEMO Connector
Removal Tool (5145459).
u. Direct an 8 to 10 psig flow of warm helium gas at the connector until all ice is removed, then
reconnect the Instrumentation Lead Connector.
v. Replace the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead and Baffle Replacement.

Page 369 of 607
w. Perform Shim Coil resistance checks per Magnet Commissioning Chapter, Magnet Electrical
Checks. If the checks are not successful, replace the Shim Lead Sav-Con Connector in
conformance with Sav-Con Connector Replacement.
x. Perform all MRU checks in upon completion of Vertical Penetration ice removal to make sure no
Instrumentation Lead Connector damage has occurred. Correct any damage found by
reconnecting the Instrumentation Lead Connector or replacing the Instrumentation Lead
Assembly.
y. After completing the above step, remove LOTO, connect input power to the Compressor, and
turn on the Cryocooler.
z. Leak check the magnet in conformance with Temperature, Pressure and Leak Troubleshooting.
Repair any leaks found.
aa. Return the Magnet Monitor to normal operation by re-enabling the Magnet Monitor's Master
Alarm and Vessel Pressure Control or by turning Magnet Monitor power on.

Page 370 of 607
11.4.5. Ramp/Fill Port Deicing, Level 1 (Level 1 Service Turret De-Icing)
a. This procedure is performed when the quantity of ice in the magnet prevents interaction with
the ramp pins or the fill port in the penetration. Ice buildup is usually due to an air leak
somewhere. It is advisable to locate the leak and correct it.
b. Reduce the vessel pressure down to ≤ 0.2 psi by opening Vent Valve V2.
c. Slowly insert the Non-insulated Coring Tool (2280035) into either the (+) ramp port or (-) ramp
port.
d. Once the ice build-up stops the tool, rotate the tool back and forth while gently pushing down.
(The sawing action will cut through the ice down to the top of the ramp pin.)
e. Remove the tool once it has hit bottom and use Insulated Ramping Port Tool (5248857) with the
same motion. (The tool will cut through the remaining ice to the bottom of the pin.)
◊ There is an indicator line on the tool that allows the user to determine how deep to go in the
penetration. There are two lines, one for LCC and one for SIV, clearly marked on the rod to
avoid confusion. Do not allow the tool to go any deeper than this line.
f. Repeat the process for the other port, and remove the tool.
Ramp Port Deicing -

Non-insulated Tool
Ramp Port Deicing -

Insulated Tool
g. To deice the fill port, insert the Non-insulated Tool (5248765) slowly into the fill port of the
magnet.
h. Once the ice buildup stops the tool, rotate the tool back and forth while gently pushing down.
(The sawing action will cut through the ice down to the top of the fill tube.)
i. Remove the tool once it has hit bottom, and use Insulated Fill Port Coring Tool (5248857) with the
same motion. (The tool will cut through the remaining ice to the bottom of the fill tube.)
Fill Port Deicing - Fill Port Deicing -

Non-insulated Tool Insulated Tool

Page 371 of 607
k. In the situation where a magnet is sited in a low ceiling environment, the Ramp Port Coring Tool
(5248766) and Fill Port Coring Tool (5248851) are used. The tool requires a three-step insertion
process. The pictures below are for the fill port; the ramp port process is the same.
l. Insert the bottom piece.
m. Thread the middle shaft onto the bottom shaft.
n. Screw the top onto the middle shaft.
o. Repeat the above process for the ramp ports, and remove both tools when finished.
Fill Port Deicing in Low

Ceiling Condition -
Ceiling Condition -
Inserting Middle Piece
Inserting Bottom Piece
of Tool
of Tool

Ceiling Condition -
Inserting Top Piece of
Tool

Page 372 of 607
11.4.6. Vertical Penetration Deicing, Level 2 (Level 2 Service Turret De-Icing)
a. Make sure the Vertical Penetration is clear of any obstructions before inserting/ extracting any
tools/apparatus to prevent possible magnet damage. When removing ice in the Vertical
Penetration, avoid contacting the Instrumentation Lead Connector with ice clearing tools.
Contact could damage the lead or connector.
b. Either turn Magnet Monitor power off, or disable the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm and Vessel
Pressure Control. (This will prevent false alarms and long-term heater operation.)
c. Ramp down the magnet (if at field) in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.
d. Turn off the Cryocooler to prevent ice migration into the Recondenser.
◊ Turn the Coldhead Drive Switch ON (up position), located on the Compressor's panel.
(Shown below.)
buildup in the Coldhead, then turn OFF the Coldhead Drive Switch and the Compressor's
Main Power Switch.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 373 of 607
e. Vent the magnet down to 0.2 psig by opening/closing Vent Valve V2. (Shown below.)
f. Make sure magnet pressure is 0.2 psig, venting the magnet as required.

Page 374 of 607
g. Perform the next steps rapidly to prevent cryo-pumping of air into the Vertical Stack. In addition,
make sure Lexan Cover Plate 46-294765G1 is on the Service Platform and the holes are plugged
before removing the Top Cover Plate Assembly.
◊ Loosen and remove the eight ¼-20 retaining bolts securing the Top Cover Plate Assembly
(see illustration above) and remove it.
◊ Immediately cover the Vertical Penetration with the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate 46-
294765G1, and align the scribe mark toward the Vent Adapter.
◊ Secure the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate onto the Vertical Penetration with the eight ¼-20
retaining bolts removed earlier.
◊ Attach Deicing Purge Tube 2347725 to the end of the Tygon tubing, and purge the tube at 4
psig.
Lexan Cover Plate
h. Remove the plugs on the Cover Plate, and insert the Deicing Purge Tube through one of the
Ramp Lead holes. (Shown below.)
Purge Tube
Insertion

Page 375 of 607
i. Remove ice by directing an 8 to 10 psig flow of warm helium gas onto the Vertical Penetration
and other affected areas while Vent Valve V2 is partially open.
j. Shine the flashlight through the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate, and verify that all ice is removed
inside.
k. Remove any remaining ice on the inside of the Vertical Penetration. (Some bending of the Deicing
Purge Tube may be required.)
l. Shine a flashlight through the Lexan Penetration Cover Plate. When all ice is removed, close V2,
and remove the Lexan Cover Plate.
m. Temporarily disconnect the Instrumentation Lead Connector using the Latching LEMO Connector
Removal Tool (5145459).
n. Direct an 8 to 10 psig flow of warm helium gas at the connector until all ice is removed, then
reconnect the Instrumentation Lead Connector.
o. Perform all MRU checks in upon completion of Vertical Penetration ice removal to make sure no
Instrumentation Lead Connector damage has occurred. Correct any damage found by
reconnecting the Instrumentation Lead Connector or replacing the Instrumentation Lead
Assembly.
p. After completing the above step, remove LOTO, connect input power to the Compressor, and
turn on the Cryocooler.
q. Leak check the magnet in conformance with Temperature, Pressure and Leak Troubleshooting.
Repair any leaks found.
r. Return the Magnet Monitor to normal operation by re-enabling the Magnet Monitor's Master
Alarm and Vessel Pressure Control or by turning Magnet Monitor power on.

Page 376 of 607
11.4.7. Recondenser Deicing – Level 1
If the recondenser RuO temperature is around 3.9K, there is most likely ice on the recondenser. When
checking temperatures of the recondenser, use a hand-held RuO meter. The MagMon3 is not accurate
enough to diagnose recondenser icing. Always evaluate the magnet, start with the Level One
procedure, and proceed to the Level Four procedure only if the Level One procedure fails to clear the
ice.
a. Check the flow through Vent Valve V2. If the flow from V2 is restricted, slightly open the Fill Port.
If there is no flow from V2 or the Fill Port, immediately contact your Regional Magnet & Cryogen
(MAC) Team Leader or the Magnet Support Team at the Online Center before continuing.
b. Evaluate the magnet's condition before taking any action involving changes to the magnet
operating condition. Confirm that the magnet is not operating in Controlled Zero Boil-Off (CØBO)
condition, where the heater maintains the magnet pressure at 4 psig ±0.1 psig, before
continuing.
c. Verify that the Magnet Monitor functions properly for CØBO operation. Correct any problems
found, and recheck for CØBO operation as noted in previous step.
d. Verify flow through the shield vent line either by frost on the 5.25 psig relief valve line at point “A"
or by momentarily cracking the ½-in. NPT plug at point “B" (both are shown below).
e. Determine if the second stage Coldhead temperature is ≤4.0K.

f. If the shield vent line is blocked, remove and inspect the 5.25 psig relief valve. Remove any
blockage and reinstall the valve.
g. If the shield vent line is still blocked and/or the coldhead temperature is ≤4.0K, proceed with
Level One Deicing. The Level One Deicing procedure denies cooling flow to the Recondenser and
expands shield trapped gas back through the Recondenser using the DVw De-ice Heater Kit
(5342456).
h. Verify that the helium level is <90% with ≥4.0 psig or <85% at 1 to 2 psig. (A helium level greater
than this could result in an overfill condition and block the Recondenser cycle.)

Page 377 of 607
i. If the pressure is ≥4.0 psig, partially open Vent Valve V2 and vent down to 4 psig. If the shield
vent line is blocked, remove the 5.25 psig relief valve and leave the end open.
j. Make sure the Coldhead is off during Level One Deicing to prevent any re-icing of purged
contaminants in the Recondenser. Shut down the compressor to prevent pressure build-up in
the Coldhead as follows:
◊ Turn ON (upward) the Coldhead Drive Switch on the Compressor's back panel.
build-up in the Coldhead, then turn Off the Coldhead Drive Switch and the Compressor's
Main Power Switch.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 378 of 607
k. After 4 hours, check the Coldhead 2nd stage temperature (SI-410 D2) and make sure it is greater
than 80K. Open the 0.5 inch NPT plug for 15 – 20 seconds (allow ice to be purged), then
immediately close the NPT plug.
l. Remove LOTO, reconnect input power to the Compressor, turn the Coldhead On, and reset the
Magnet Monitor for CØBO operation (4.0 psig, ±0.1 psig).
m. Monitor the Recondenser/Coldhead temperature difference (ΔT) as well as Coldhead
performance to verify ΔT is <0.2K and the second-stage Recondenser temperature is ≤4.4K.
◊ If the Recondenser resumes normal operation, but the Coldhead does not, allow the
Coldhead several days to clean up internal contaminants before proceeding with further
corrective action.
◊ If the Recondenser does not return to normal operation, proceed to the next section, Level
Two Deicing.
◊ If the Coldhead operation does not return to the operating specifications found in Magnet
Commissioning Chapter, Magnet Functional Checks within a few days, replace the
Coldhead.
n. If the 5.25 psig safety valve was removed before deicing, reinstall the valve and check for leaks.

Page 379 of 607
a. The Level Two Deicing procedure uses the same ice removal strategy as Level One Deicing, but
also removes the Coldhead to improve warming. Try Level One Deicing before progressing to
Level Two.
b. Make sure the Coldhead is Off during Level Two Deicing to prevent any re-icing of purged
contaminants in the Recondenser.
c. Make sure all Tools and Test Equipment, Consumables, and Replacement Parts required for a
complete Coldhead change-out in conformance with Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead
Replacement are in the site area before proceeding.
d. Verify that the helium level is <90% with ≥4.0 psig or <85% at 1 to 2 psig.
e. Either turn Magnet Monitor power off, or disable the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm and Vessel
f. If the pressure is ≥4.0 psig, vent the magnet down through Vent Valve V2 to 4 psig. Monitor
pressure throughout the Level Two Deicing procedure, and vent through V2 as required to keep
cryostat pressure at 4 psig.
◊ No venting should occur through the 5.25 psig relief valve line during this Level Two Deicing
procedure.

Page 380 of 607
g. Prepare for Coldhead removal in conformance with the Removal Preparation subsection of Two-
Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement.
◊ Listen as the Coldhead relief valve opens and makes hissing sounds while the Coldhead
warms. Popping sounds indicate trapped contaminants.
h. Remove the Coldhead in conformance with the appropriate (Fixed/Mobile) Coldhead Extraction
subsection of Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement.
i. Install Coldsleeve Heater 5145460 in conformance with the Sleeve Warm-Up subsection of Two-
◊ Open Vent Valve V2 as required during to maintain cryostat pressure at 4 psig.
Coldsleeve Heater Kit 5180672
150 W Cartridge
Heater (P/N
5440278)
j. Warm the Coldsleeve's second stage to approximately 275K as indicated by the SI-410 Diode
reading on the Magnet Monitor, Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer, or MTM-101 Handheld
Magnet Temperature Meter.
◊ Open Vent Valve V2 as required during to maintain cryostat pressure at 4 psig.
◊ Heating the Coldhead Sleeve to >275k may damage instrumentation wiring inside the
magnet or lead to a magnet quench. Do not heat the Coldhead Sleeve to >275k.

Page 381 of 607
k. Keep the Coldhead Sleeve at 275K. Open the 0.5 inch NPT plug for 15 – 20 seconds (allow ice to
be purged), then immediately close the NPT plug. Open Vent Valve V2 as required during to
maintain cryostat pressure at 4 psig.
l. Reinstall the Coldhead in conformance with the Coldhead Replacement and the Coldhead
Interface Adjustment subsections of Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement.
m. Return the magnet to CØBO operation, and observe cryostat performance.
◊ The pressure may stay high for up to two days because the shields have warmed. The
Recondenser should recover in one day.
◊ CØBO operation will resume when the shield temperature is <45K.
n. Monitor the Recondenser/Coldhead second stage temperature difference (ΔT) as well as
Coldhead performance to verify ΔT is <0.2K and the second-stage Recondenser temperature is
≤4.4K.
Three Deicing.
Commissioning Chapter, Magnet Functional Checks within a few days, replace the
Coldhead.

Page 382 of 607
a. The Level Three Deicing procedure uses the same ice removal strategy as Level Two Deicing, but
also forces warmed helium purge gas through the 40K shield cooling shield. Try Level Two
Deicing before progressing to Level Three.
◊ Make sure the Coldhead is Off during Level Three Deicing to prevent any reicing of purged
contaminants in the Recondenser.
◊ Make sure all Dangers, Warnings, Cautions and Notices are complied with before and
during Level Three Deicing.
◊ Make sure all Tools and Test Equipment, Consumables, and Replacement Parts required for
a complete Coldhead change-out in conformance with Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead
Replacement are in the site area before proceeding.
◊ Four full helium gas cylinders are required for Level Three Deicing.
b. Ramp the magnet down to zero field in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.
c. Prepare for Coldhead removal in conformance with the Removal Preparation subsection of Two-
d. Remove the Coldhead in conformance with the appropriate (Fixed/Mobile) Coldhead Extraction
subsection of Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement.
e. Install Coldsleeve Heater 5145460 in conformance with the Sleeve Warm-Up subsection of Two-
150 W Cartridge
Heater (P/N
5440278)

Page 383 of 607
f. Warm the Coldsleeve’s second stage to approximately 275K as indicated by the SI-410 Diode
reading on the Magnet Monitor, Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer, or MTM-101 Handheld
Magnet Temperature Meter.
g. Connect a helium gas cylinder (235 scf, 99.9995% pure) with regulator to a flexible gas hose and
proceed as follows:
◊ Remove the 0.5 inch NPT plug from the plumbing assembly.
◊ Connect the flexible Helium gas hose to the plumbing fitting using a hose adaptor.
Recondenser
Purge Set-Up
h. Make sure the regulator handle is backed out (CCW) to avoid regulator damage, then open the
gas cylinder slowly. The high pressure gauge should indicate 2,100 to 2,400 psig (150 to 170
kg/cm2) if the cylinder is full. Have four full helium gas cylinders available.
i. Open the cylinder valve, set a low pressure gas flow at 1 psig, and purge the apparatus for one
minute.

Page 384 of 607
j. Open Vent Valve V2, increase purge gas pressure to 0.5 psig, and listen for gas flow in the V2
lines to ensure gas continues flowing during the purge process.
k. Monitor cryostat pressure during the purge to make sure it is ≤0.3 psig. Use V2 to regulate
pressure.
l. Heat the helium purge gas with the heating apparatus. Do NOT allow the gas temperature to
exceed 315K (180°F, 85°C).

Page 385 of 607
m. After a trickle flow of purge gas for five (5) minutes, slowly increase the purge gas regulator
pressure to 4 psig. If gas flow is not present, the Recondenser may have an ice plug.
◊ Temporarily increase gas pressure to 10 psig to blow out any ice plug, then return to the 4
psig setting.
◊ If an ice plug is still present, allow the Recondener Level Two Deicing procedure to warm
the Recondenser at 275K for one hour, then temporarily raise the gas pressure to 10 psig
again.
n. When the purge is complete, close Valve V2, remove the gas line from the Coldbox elbow, and
immediately reconnect the ½ in. shield vent line.
o. Remove the Level Two deicing apparatus.
p. Reinstall the Coldhead in conformance with the Coldhead Replacement and the Coldhead
Interface Adjustment subsections of Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement.
q. Monitor the Recondenser/Coldhead second stage temperature difference (ΔT) as well as
Coldhead performance to verify ΔT is <0.2K and the second-stage Coldhead temperature is
≤4.3K.
Functional Checks within a few days, replace the Coldhead.
Four Deicing.
a. The Level Four Deicing procedure is a complete magnet warm up and dry purge.
b. Try Level One Deicing before progressing to Level Four.
c. If Level One Deicing, has failed to deice the magnet, ramp down the magnet in conformance with
Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.
d. Once ramped down, warm and dry purge the magnet in conformance with Cryostat Warm-Up.

Page 386 of 607
11.5. 1.5T LCC (R Series) Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement
Maintenance of cryocooler temperatures within specification is essential for proper operation of a zero
boil-off magnet. Coldhead replacement is required when elevated thermal station (first or second stage)
temperature problems are isolated to the Coldhead, complete cryocooler system, or from catastrophic
failure of the Coldhead. (See Temperature, Pressure, & Leak Troubleshooting for fault isolation of Coldhead
problems.) It is important to change out Coldheads as soon as defects are uncovered. Make sure a new
Coldhead and all required tools/equipment are on site before starting this procedure. Perform the change-
out rapidly to minimize temperature rise in the magnet.

PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD!

THE COLDHEAD CAN COME CRASHING DOWN (DUE TO WEIGHT) OR TOWARD THE MAGNET (DUE TO
MAGNETIC ATTRACTION) AND CAUSE INJURY IF THE LCC MOBILE SITE COLDHEAD LIFTING TOOL'S
ASCENDER IS NOT POSITIONED CORRECTLY WHEN THE COLDHEAD IS MOVED TO/FROM THE MAGNET.
MAKE SURE THE LCC MOBILE SITE COLDHEAD LIFTING TOOL'S ASCENDER IS POSITIONED CLOSE TO
THE CLEAT ASSEMBLY BEFORE MOVING A COLDHEAD TO/FROM THE MAGNET. THE ASCENDER ACTS AS
A SAFETY BACK-UP MECHANISM TO ENSURE THE COLDHEAD DOES NOT COME CRASHING DOWN.


A MAGNET QUENCH DURING PROCEDURE COULD RESULT IN RAPID EXPULSION OF LIQUID HELIUM
BEFORE STARTING THE BURST DISC REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.


Page 387 of 607

MANNER POSSIBLE. EXCEPT WHEN MOVING FERROUS MATERIAL TO AND FROM ITS NATIVE LOCATION
ON OR NEAR THE MAGNET, THE STATIC MAGNETIC FIELD IN ANY PORTION OF THE SERVICE PATH
SHALL NOT EXCEED 200 GAUSS.
SERVICED.

PROCEDURE.

SHOCK. WHENEVER THE INPUT POWER TO THE COMPRESSOR IS DISCONNECTED, FOLLOW
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES TO MAKE SURE POWER IS NOT SUPPLIED TO THE COMPRESSOR.

INJURIES CAN RESULT FROM FAILURE TO USE THE COLDHEAD INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOL AND/OR
FROM NOT HAVING THAT TOOL SECURELY INSTALLED BEFORE REMOVING THE COLDHEAD. ONLY
REPLACE COLDHEADS USING THE COLDHEAD INSERTION/ EXTRACTION TOOL.


Page 388 of 607

• REMOVE ALL LOOSE FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL FROM THE MAGNET ROOM. MAKE SURE ALL
EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS USED IN THE MAGNET ROOM ARE NON-FERROMAGNETIC.
• DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE CARRYING FERROMAGNETIC MATERIALS (INCLUDING CARDIAC
PACEMAKERS, NEUROSTIMULATORS OR STEEL PLATES) INSIDE THE 5 GAUSS ZONE.
POTENTIAL BURN HAZARD!

SKIN BURNS CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH THE HEATER OR THE EXITING GAS. DO NOT TOUCH
THE HEATER OR COME IN CONTACT WITH THE EXITING GAS.

DO NOT BRING A SHOP VACUUM CLOSE TO A RAMPED MAGNET. LOCATE THE VACUUM CANISTER
AWAY FROM THE FIELD AND USE A NONMAGNETIC EXTENSION HOSE.

THE FERROMAGNETIC MATERIALS IN A COLDHEAD WILL BE STRONGLY ATTRACTED TO THE MAGNET'S
FIELD WHEN WITHIN 18 IN. (500 MM) OF THE MAGNET.
DO NOT ALLOW COLDHEAD WITHIN 18 IN. (500 MM) OF MAGNET UNLESS ITS SECURED TO THE
COLDHEAD HOIST OR SAFELY ON THE INSERTION RAIL. WHEN MOVING COLDHEAD TO/FROM MAGNET:
• KEEP COLDHEAD >18 IN. (500 MM) FROM MAGNET,
• KEEP COLDHEAD SECURELY UNDER CONTROL AT ALL TIMES, AND
• DO NOT POSITION YOUR BODY BETWEEN THE COLDHEAD AND THE MAGNET.

STAINLESS STEEL SERVICE FIXTURES/TOOLS HAVE A SLIGHT MAGNETIC ATTRACTION IN A 3 TESLA
FIELD. THEY CAN BECOME PROJECTILES IF NOT HANDLED CAREFULLY/SECURELY WITHIN 18 IN. (500
MM) OF THE MAGNET. ALWAYS MAINTAIN CONTROL OF STAINLESS STEEL SERVICE FIXTURES/ TOOLS
WITHIN 18 IN. (500 MM) OF THE MAGNET.

HEAVY OBJECT
THE COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET TOGETHER WEIGH APPROXIMATELY 50 LBS (22.7 KG). BE
PREPARED TO SUPPORT THE WEIGHT WHEN REMOVING THE COLDHEAD AND BRACKET FRON THE
INSERTION RAIL’S END.

Page 389 of 607
11.5.1. Tools and Test Equipment
5393536
1 per
person
1 per Pair: Insulated Leather Gloves (for opening/closing the Motor
NA
Person Shield and handling the removed Coldhead)
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
2305056 1 Vacuum Pump, 10 millitorr (10 microns; 0.0004 millibar)
2214919 1 Coldhead Stand (Holding Tool)
2232674 (Fixed Site) or
1 Coldhead Insertion and Purge Cover Tool Kit
2380985 (Mobile Site)
46-301477G2 1 Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer Kit, optional
46-294804G1 1 Nonmagnetic Coldhead Wrenches Kit
46-258150P1 1 Nonmagnetic Helium Cylinder Cart

Page 390 of 607
Tools & Test Equipment, continued.
Shop Vacuum with >20 ft. (>6 m) nonmagnetic ~1 in. (~25 mm)
NA 1
diameter extension hose
Cardboard Box or Proven Non-ferromagnetic Equivalent (for
NA 1 transporting the 50 lbs, 22.7 kg Coldhead and Carriage
Bracket to/from the magnet at fixed sites)
NA 1 Tweezers, Long
ramped.
NA 1 Flashlight
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
2171620 1 Coldhead Replacement Gasket Kit
Pump-Out Port Dual O-Ring Plug (included in Universal
2236606 1
Coldhead Replacement Tool Kit 2300306-2)
NA 1 Full, nonmagnetic cylinder(s) of nitrogen gas (if available)
46-260802P1 1 Roll of Aluminum Tape, 0.5 in. (12.6mm) wide
46-260802P6 1 Roll of Aluminum Tape, 0.125 in. (3mm) wide
NA 1 Roll of Permacel Tape, 0.006 x .5 in. (0.15 x 12.6 mm)
Vacuum Grease (included in Universal Coldhead Replacement
46-252065P24 1
Tool Kit 2300306-2)
NA 1 Scotch-BriteTM Scour Pads (or equivalent)
Replacement Parts
High Efficiency Sumitomo Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead
Assembly, Assembly within FRU Kit 5438959 (Note:
5412719 1
New/reconditioned high efficiency Coldhead must be
inspected and free of defects before bringing to the site.)

Page 391 of 607
a. Make sure the area is secure and that all required Warning Signs are posted to meet the safety
requirements stated in the Chapter 1, Safety, before starting this procedure.
c. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete this procedure.
Refer to the appropriate Service Methods documentation (available through the support
d. Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
e. Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open before starting this procedure.
11.5.3. Either turn Magnet Monitor power off or disable the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm and Vessel
11.5.4. Position the Service Platform approximately centered between the magnet's patient and service end
flanges, and set up the Service Platform in conformance with Service Platform Set-Up.

Page 392 of 607
11.5.5. Immediately upon site arrival, shut down the compressor to prevent pressure buildup in the Coldhead
as follows:
a. Turn the Coldhead Drive Switch ON (upward), located on the Compressor's panel.
b. Place the Drive Switch on the Compressor's panel in the O (Off) position.
c. Run the Coldhead for ONLY 10 seconds with the Compressor turned off to prevent pressure
buildup in the Coldhead, then turn OFF the Coldhead Drive Switch and the Compressor's Main
Power Switch.
d. Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power to the Compressor, and verify that no voltage is
e. Make sure gas lines are removed immediately after power is disconnected to prevent
contamination of gas lines and Compressor.
f. Do not put any bending force on Aeroquip fittings while connecting/disconnecting helium
flexlines. A bending force will create difficulty in the rapid engagement/disengagement required
to prevent helium loss and system contamination. Do support the gas lines when
connecting/disconnecting to the Coldhead at the top of the magnet or to the Compressor.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 393 of 607
11.5.6. Once Coldhead power is disconnected, immediately:
a. Disconnect the Coldhead power cable at the Coldhead.
b. Disconnect the helium gas lines at the Coldhead in conformance with Helium Flexline
Connections and Casing Replacement.
Coldhead Flexline and Power Connection Locations
0.25-20 UNC Socket Head Cap Screw
Flexline Connection
Motor Shield Jack Screw

Coldhead Power Connection
Flexline Connection
11.5.7. Remove enclosures required for Coldhead access in conformance with service enclosure removal
instructions.
11.5.8. Remove the 0.25-20 UNC socket head cap screw in the end of the motor shield. Put the screw in a
secure place for replacement later.
11.5.9. Open the Coldhead Motor Shield by threading the Motor Shield Jack Screw into the hole (doing so will
separate the upper half of the motor shield from the bottom half). See illustration above.
11.5.10. Clean all vacuum fittings on the apparatus shown below. Then lightly coat O-rings with vacuum
grease to ensure vacuum seals are tight.
Coldhead
Gas/Vacuum Service
Apparatus

Page 394 of 607
11.5.11. Attach the seal-off operator to the pump-out port on the Coldhead sleeve. Tighten the seal-off
operator to the pump-out port by holding the body of the operator and tightening the nut with a
wrench.
11.5.12. Connect the service adapter to the seal-off operator. (See illustration above.)
11.5.13. Standard configuration using a nitrogen cylinder:
a. Secure a nitrogen cylinder to a nonmagnetic gas cylinder cart.
b. Remove the cylinder cap.
c. Connect the gas regulator to the nitrogen gas cylinder.
d. Connect the Nitrogen Gas Line (2303724) from the gas regulator to the Service Adapter's gas
inlet valve (green handle). See illustrations below.
Coldhead Gas/Vacuum
Service Adapter and
Connections
Nitrogen Gas Cylinder

to Service Adapter

Page 395 of 607
e. Make sure the regulator handle is backed out counterclockwise (CCW) to avoid regulator
damage, then open the gas cylinder slowly. (The high pressure gauge should indicate 2100 to
2400 psig if the cylinder is full.)
f. Open the gas inlet valve and set a low pressure gas flow (1 psig), as indicated on the regulator
gauge.
g. Proceed with gas purge (open the vacuum port valve (black handle) on the adapter, and allow
gas to flow out for 30 seconds to purge).
11.5.14. Emergency configuration using helium gas from the magnet:
a. The use of nitrogen cylinders is the preferred method for Coldhead replacement. If there is an
emergency situation and nitrogen cylinders are not available, boiled-off helium gas from the
magnet may be used as a backup option. If helium gas is used, the Cold Sleeve MUST be
backfilled with air and evacuated with 10 cycles after the Coldhead insertion.
b. Place the Helium Vent Hose (5111361) on the service platform where it is readily accessible.
c. Connect Helium Vent Hose 5111361 to the Shim Lead's Nupro Valve.
Helium Gas Connection to Service Adapter
d. Connect the Helium Vent Hose's quick connect fitting to the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve
(green handle) shown above.
e. Open the Nupro Valve.
11.5.15. Open the vacuum port valve (black handle) on the adapter, and allow gas to flow out for 30 seconds
to purge the assembly of air.
11.5.16. Close the vacuum port and gas inlet valves.

Page 396 of 607
11.5.17. Make sure the black and green handles on the Service Adapter are closed, then connect the vacuum
pump apparatus as shown below. Apply a light coat of vacuum grease to the centering O-rings.
Vacuum Pump Apparatus Set-Up
11.5.18. Turn on the vacuum pump, open the vacuum valve (black handle) on the Service Adapter, and allow
the pump to evacuate the vacuum line and Service Adapter to <20 millitorr (<20 microns) as read on
the Digital Vacuum Meter. Close the vacuum valve.
11.5.19. Repeat opening and closing the vacuum valve (black handle) two more times while pumping.
11.5.20. When 50 millitorr (50 microns) is reached, close the vacuum valve (black handle), and observe the
vacuum meter to ensure the Service Adapter and Seal-Off Operator are leak tight. If the gauge rises
>200 millitorr (>200 microns) over 30 seconds, suspect a leak and:
a. Turn off the vacuum pump and temporarily open the green handle to bring the apparatus to
atmospheric pressure.
b. Remove the vacuum line and reassemble the Seal-Off Operator and Service Adapter.
c. Repeat process until the system is leak tight.
11.5.21. When the apparatus is leak tight, open the vacuum valve (black handle), and make sure the vacuum is
≤ 50 millitorr (≤ 50 microns) before continuing to the next step.
11.5.22. Push in and rotate the black handle of the Seal-Off Operator clockwise (CW) to engage the plug in the
Pump-Out Port. When the handle is engaged, pull the handle out to open the Pump- Out Port.
11.5.23. Immediately check the vacuum on the digital vacuum meter for a reading of ≤50 millitorr (≤50
microns). A reading of >> 100 millitorr (>> 100 microns) indicates a poor vacuum in the sleeve that
may cause cooling problems. If this condition occurs:
a. Pump out the sleeve again to achieve a vacuum <100 millitorr (<100 microns).
b. Operate the Coldhead to establish final temperature. The Service Adapter has a 5 psig relief
valve to prevent the build-up of excess pressure in the Coldhead sleeve when any nitrogen,
frozen to the Coldhead, regassifies during Coldhead warm-up. Some audible escaping gas may
be encountered.

Page 397 of 607
11.5.24. Loosen and remove the eight Coldhead mounting bolts and Belleville washers. (See below.) Discard
the washers (they will be replaced with new washers from the Coldhead changeout kit). Save the
Coldhead mounting bolts. These will be used to mount the new Coldhead and will make sure the
proper interface spacing is maintained. Bolts are installed through the sleeve flange.
Coldhead Mounting
11.5.25. Re-thread two Coldhead mounting bolts without Belleville washers 3 to 4 threads deep into holes 180°
apart. These two bolts ensure that the Coldhead can be contained when gas pressure is applied. Save
these bolts and washers to mount the new Coldhead.
11.5.26. Close the vacuum valve (black handle), and open the gas inlet valve (green handle). Fill the vacuum
space in the sleeve with nitrogen gas at a small positive pressure (1 to 3 psig on the low-pressure
regulator) to break the Coldhead away from the first and second stage contacts.

Page 398 of 607
11.5.27. If required to dislodge the Coldhead, carefully insert a large nonmagnetic screwdriver or other similar
nonmagnetic, wedge-shaped tool in the gap between the sleeve flange and transition flange. (Shown
below.)
a. Gradually pry the transition flange away from the sleeve flange by tapping the end of a
screwdriver or wedge while moving it around the circumference of the gap, or
b. Use two nonmagnetic M10 bolts as a jackscrew to apply a separating force between the
Coldhead sleeve flange and the transition flange.
c. The jackscrew technique shown below can be used to break the indium seal between the
second-stage heat station of the sleeve and the Coldhead. Use two nonmagnetic M10 hex-head
bolts inserted 180° apart. Torque bolts to apply force between Coldhead sleeve flange and
transition flange.
Dislodging the Coldhead
11.5.28. Make sure nitrogen gas is flowing through the pump-out port connection and that the Coldsleeve
Heater, the separate cover plate and the Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool are within reach before
proceeding.
11.5.29. When the Coldhead breaks away from the first and second stage contacts, remove the remaining two
bolts and partially extract the Coldhead until the Transition Flange O-Ring is exposed.
11.5.30. Commence with Coldhead extraction. (Partial extraction of the Coldhead is required for Coldhead
Insertion Fixture installation.)

Page 399 of 607
11.5.31. Coldhead Extraction, Fixed Site
a. Slide the Coldhead out 5/16 to 3/8 in. (8 to 10 mm) from the Sleeve to allow assembly of the Fixed
Site Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixture's sleeve clamp onto the sleeve flange. Position the
clamp straddling the sleeve flange and aligned with the holes in the flange's bottom. Insert the
clamping bolts and tighten. Do not slide the Coldhead out too far. Maintain contact between the
Coldhead transition flange and the Sleeve cavity to prevent the Coldhead first stage from
dropping onto the Sleeve.
Major Components, LCC Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixtures
Mobile Site Coldhead Insertion

Fixed Site Coldhead Insertion Fixture (2228876) Fixture (2379888)
Fixed Site Coldhead Insertion/Removal

Fixture 2228876 Installation

Page 400 of 607
b. Slide the carriage bracket of the Insertion/Removal Fixture onto and along the insertion rail until
it contacts the Coldhead flange. Tightly fasten the carrying bracket to the Coldhead transition
flange's two bottom threaded holes using the bracket's bolts.
c. Pull the Coldhead and carriage bracket out to the end of the insertion rail. Use Caution. The
Coldhead and carriage bracket together weigh approximately 50 lbs (22.7 kg). Be prepared to
support the weight when removing the coldhead and bracket from the insertion rail's end.
d. Gradually pull the Coldhead and carriage bracket off the insertion bar, supporting the weight
with the carriage bracket and the Coldhead Motor.
e. Work Assistant: Position a cardboard box (or proven nonmagnetic equivalent) on the floor at the
end of the Service Ladder/Platform.
f. Coldheads contain ferrous material that will be attracted to a magnet at field. Injuries can
happen during the following step(s) if not performed carefully. Do not allow the coldhead to
contact the magnet vessel during removal or replacement. Always keep one hand supporting
the Coldhead motor, especially when near the magnet's rear.
◊ Carefully lower the removed Coldhead off the service platform to the work assistant on the
floor, and into the cardboard box.
◊ Work assistant: Securely grip the cardboard box containing the removed Coldhead, and
carefully drag it to the wall and outside the magnet room. (Do NOT come near the magnet
bore.) It is not recommended to hand carry more than 35 lbs (15.9 kg). Dragging a
cardboard box containing the 50 lb (22.7 kg) Coldhead and carriage bracket is preferred
when moving a Coldhead to or from the magnet. Do NOT use a cart unless it is proven not
to contain magnetic materials before use.

Page 401 of 607
11.5.32. Coldhead Extraction, Mobile Site
a. Attach the rope to the mobile site Coldhead Lifting Tool's Angle Bracket as shown below.
b. Attach the ascender to the rope (shown below).
c. Raise the rail stop on the mobile site's rail by lifting the top section and rotating it as shown in
the illustration below.

Page 402 of 607
d. Slide the angle bracket onto the mobile site's rail.
◊ The magnet vent at AK mobile sites interferes with normal angle bracket mounting. Mount
the angle bracket backward so the pulleys and cleat are facing the right side of the mobile
wall.
◊ Without the Rail Stop, the angle bracket can run off the rail's end and cause personal injury
below (due to weight) or toward the magnet (due to magnetic attraction). Make sure the Rail
Stop is re-engaged once the angle bracket is mounted to avoid the angle bracket exiting
the rail's end.
e. Re-engage the rail stop so that the angle bracket cannot slide out of the rail.
◊ If the angle bracket does not fit onto the Rail Assembly, loosen the four Allenhead screws on
the bottom of the angle bracket. (Shown above.)

Page 403 of 607
f. For AK Vans ONLY:
◊ Removing the AK van crossbeam will expose edges that may be rough. Wear gloves when
handling the removable crossbeam in an AK van.
◊ Dismount the removable internal crossbeam as follows:
I. Position the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting Tool's Pulley Assembly over the removable
section of the AK van's internal crossbeam as shown.
II. Secure the removable section of the crossbeam to the Pulley Assembly using the end
of the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting Tool's rope not attached to the tool. Make sure
there is enough loose rope between the two tied ends to reach the floor.
III. Remove the removable section's retaining bolts (three bolts at the van's exterior wall
and two at the interior junction plate).
IV. Carefully slide the removable crossbeam section on the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting
Tool to the rear of the mobile unit.
• Use one hand to support the crossbeam section and the other to control the
pulley's rope and Ascender.
• Make sure the crossbeam section stays clear of the magnet and van walls.
V. Lower the crossbeam section to rest on the floor at the van's rear wall. Avoid
obstructing the exit path.
AK Van's Removable Internal Crossbeam

Page 404 of 607
g. Slide the Coldhead out 5/16 to 3/8 in. (8 to 10 mm) from the Sleeve to allow assembly of the LCC
Mobile Site Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixture's sleeve clamp onto the sleeve flange. Position
the clamp straddling the sleeve flange and aligned with the holes in the flange's bottom. Insert
the clamping bolts and tighten.
LCC Mobile Site Coldhead

Insertion/Removal Fixture
2379888 Installation
h. Slide the carriage bracket of the Insertion/Removal Fixture onto and along the insertion rail until
it contacts the Coldhead flange. Tightly fasten the carrying bracket to the Coldhead transition
flange's two bottom threaded holes using the bracket's bolts. (See the illustrations above and
below.)

Page 405 of 607
i. Attach the carriage bracket to the Pulley Assembly's carabiner latch.
j. Rotate the Coldhead to clear the Coldhead Sleeve and mobile unit's walls.
k. Pull the Coldhead and Carriage Bracket out to the end of the insertion rail.
l. Gradually pull the Coldhead and carriage bracket off the insertion bar, supporting the weight
with the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting Tool and one hand under the Coldhead Motor.
m. Carefully slide the Coldhead on the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting Tool to the rear of the mobile
unit. When raising or lowering the Coldhead, use one hand to support the weight of the
Coldhead and the other hand to raise or lower the Coldhead using the rope and Ascender.
n. Work Assistant: Position a cardboard box (or proven nonmagnetic equivalent) on the floor at the
rear of the mobile unit.
o. When the Coldhead is at the rear of the mobile unit, carefully lower the Coldhead into a
cardboard box on the floor.
p. Work assistant: Securely grip the cardboard box containing the removed Coldhead, and carefully
drag it to the wall and outside the magnet room. Do NOT come near the magnet bore.

Page 406 of 607
11.5.33. After the Coldhead is removed, immediately install Coldsleeve Heater 5145460 onto the Coldhead
sleeve flange. (The relief valve on the removed Coldhead may exhaust helium gas with a popping or
hissing sound as it warms up.)
11.5.34. Close gas inlet valve (green handle) on the Service Adapter.
11.5.35. Disconnect the gas line (Nitrogen Gas Line 2303724 or Helium Vent Hose 5111361 being used) from
the Service Adapter and connect it to the gas line connection on the Coldsleeve Heater. (See
illustrations below.)
150 W Cartridge
Heater (P/N
5440278)

Page 407 of 607
11.5.36. If using nitrogen gas, set the gas flow to 3 to 4 psig on the regulator low-pressure gauge. If using
helium gas from the magnet, gas pressure will be equal to the magnet pressure. A pressure close to 4
psig expedites sleeve warm-up. A plastic clamp may be used to reduce helium flow. This will prevent
the pressure from dropping too quickly. Make sure gas is flowing before plugging in the Coldsleeve
Heater. Gas flow helps prevent heater element burn-out. Do not exceed a monitored Recondenser
temperature of 285° to prevent possible internal damage.
Plastic Clamp on Vent Hose
11.5.37. Plug in the Coldsleeve Heater. Make sure warmed gas is exiting the slit in the exhaust tubing on the
Coldsleeve Heater.
11.5.38. Secure the Coldsleeve Heater's cover plate. Continue the gas flow to warm the sleeve and heat
stations to the required temperature while preparing the new Coldhead.
11.5.39. Warm the sleeve's second stage to ≈275 K as monitored by the Recondenser SI-410 Diode readout on
the Magnet Monitor. (SI-410 temperatures can be monitored on a laptop computer connected to the
Magnet Monitor.)
11.5.40. When the sleeve in heated, shine flashlight light through the Coldsleeve Heater's cover plate to
observe the first and second stage heat stations inside the Coldhead sleeve.
11.5.41. Do NOT keep the Coldsleeve Heater's cover plate off the sleeve flange for an extended time period (>1
minute at a time) to minimize cryopumping and icing of the first stage heat station.
11.5.42. If indium is present on the first or second stage heat stations inside the sleeve:
a. Temporarily remove the Coldsleeve Heater and the indium with the Indium Removal Tool
(2365037) or a nonmagnetic long-handled flat-head screwdriver, being careful not to scratch the
copper heat station. Indium material on the heat station may be warmed using the warm gas
from the nitrogen gas supply line to make it easier to remove. A separate cover plate is included
in the Universal Coldhead Replacement Tool Kit that can be used while cleaning out the sleeve.
b. When all indium is removed, use a Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent) and long tweezers to
polish the heat stations.
c. Evacuate all residues in the sleeve with a shop vacuum. Securely position the canister of the
vacuum away from the magnet's field, and vacuum using a nonmagnetic extension hose at least
20 ft. (6 m) long.

Page 408 of 607
11.5.43. If the old Coldhead will not be reinstalled, use the packaging materials from the new Coldhead to
return the old Coldhead. If the old Coldhead is being reinserted, make sure it is at room temperature
and free of moisture before starting this Coldhead Replacement procedure to prevent a poor
interface and a contaminated sleeve. Warm the Coldhead with a heat gun if necessary. New gaskets,
getter bag (charcoal packet) and O-ring are required.
11.5.44. Coldhead Preparation
a. Remove the new Coldhead and gasket kit from its packaging. Place these on the Coldhead Stand
(Holding Tool). Save the shipping container and packing material for return if damage is found. If
reinstalling the old Coldhead, make sure it is dry and at room temperature.
b. Inspect the Coldhead using the illustration below as a reference.
◊ Items identified in the illustration must be present and installed approximately where
shown.
◊ The RuO sensor must be securely mounted in area shown.
◊ The RuO wire wrapping may be slightly different than the configuration shown. Make sure
the RuO sensor wires are not broken or disconnected, the insulation is intact, and the
tape/clamps are secure.
c. Inspect the electrical cable and connector. Make sure it is not cracked or broken and that no
wires are loose or exposed (insulation split or missing).
d. Remove the Transition Flange O-Ring (46-281247P1) from its packaging and inspect for any
visible damage (i.e. broken, nicked, cut, etc.)
e. Clean the O-ring and the O-ring groove in the transition flange with a lint-free cloth or towel.
Apply a thin film of vacuum grease to the entire surface of the O-ring.
f. Slide the lubricated O-ring over the two stations of the Coldhead, and place in the groove of the
transition flange. (Shown below)
g. Clean the first stage heat station with a Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent) to remove all
residues before installing its gasket.
Coldhead O-Ring Placement

Page 409 of 607
h. Make sure the 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) wide aluminum tape strips are indented into the notches in the
first stage surface and the 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) wide circumferential tape wrap does NOT cover the
second stage vent hole. Both are required to allow adequate second stage venting during
vacuum pumping.
i. While assembling the new indium gaskets on the first and second stage heat stations of the
Coldhead, wear the cloth gloves provided in the Gasket Kit.
j. Place the large indium gasket on the large copper first stage heat station of the Coldhead.
k. Secure the gaskets to the surface of the station by putting pressure on the gasket, forcing the
indium into the small notches in the surface of the station. (See illustration below.)
◊ To prevent the large gasket falling from off the Coldhead during installation, use 0.125 in. x
1 in. (3.2 mm x 25.4 mm) strips of aluminum tape (46-260802P6), followed by a 0.25 in. (6.4
mm) wide circumferential tape wrap (46-260802P1) cut lengthwise with a gap left at the
second stage vent hole.
◊ Do not use Permacel tape (46-252282P1) on the first stage.
◊ Make sure the second stage vent hole is not covered. Aluminum tape 46-260802P1 is 0.5 in.
(12.6 mm) wide and must be cut lengthwise into 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) wide strips before usage.
Installation of
Indium
Gaskets

Page 410 of 607
l. Clean the second stage heat station with a Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent) to remove all
residues before installing its gasket.
m. Place the indium wire gasket over the Coldhead second stage, orienting the gasket's length with
the motor and perpendicular to the RuO sensor.
1. Fold the gasket's wire loops over the station's side.
2. Tape circumferentially with 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) wide aluminum (46-260802P1 cut lengthwise)
or Permacel (46-252282P1) tape. Be careful not to damage the small RuO sensor wires. (See
illustration above.)
3. On the first stage, aluminum tape must be used. On the second stage, either aluminum (46-
260802P1) or Permacel (46-252282P1) tape can be used. Aluminum tape 46-260802P1 and
Permacel tape 46-252282P1 are 0.5 in. (12.6 mm) wide.
n. Install a getter bag (charcoal packet) to the side of the second stage with two circumferential
wraps using 0.5 in. (12.6 mm) wide by 7.5 in. (190 mm) Permacel tape. Do not use aluminum tape
to install the getter bag (charcoal packet). Make sure the bag is tightly secured in place. (Shown
below.)
Second Stage
Indium Wire
Gasket
Getter Bag (Charcoal Packet)
Permacel Tape

Page 411 of 607
o. Apply a thin film of anti-seize compound to the eight hex-head bolts that were removed. Make
sure that all bolts have the same number and orientation of washers shown below.
11.5.45. Make sure the following critical conditions are confirmed prior to inserting new Coldhead into sleeve:
a. Shine a flashlight through the Plexiglas cover, and ensure that no visible ice is present on the
first and second stage heat stations of the Coldhead sleeve before turning off the gas flow and
removing the cover. If ice is present, remove it with warm nitrogen gas.
b. Make sure a new Coldhead is completely prepared and ready for insertion before removing the
Plexiglas cover. Insert the new Coldhead immediately after cover removal to prevent
cryopumping in the sleeve.
c. Do NOT exceed a Recondenser temperature of 285° to prevent possible internal damage.

Page 412 of 607
11.5.46. Recondener Purge During Coldhead Changeout: Once the coldhead sleeve has reached a
temperature of 275K, remove the NPT plug located adjacent to the 5.25 psia relief valve. This will
allow any ice or moisture in the recondenser that may have been warmed up or dislodged during the
process to escape out the recondenser tubing. Allow the gas to flow from the recondenser and out
the recondenser plumbing for a minimum of 10 seconds and a maximum of 15 seconds, then replace
the NPT plug. After re-installing the NPT plug allow the sleeve to warm back up to 275K before
inserting the new coldhead. It will take approximately five to ten minutes for the sleeve to reach 275K
again after the re-insertion of the NPT plug.
11.5.47. Read the recondenser temperature as monitored by the SI-410 Diode read-out on the Magnet
Monitor. If the temperature is 275K ±10K, turn off the flow of gas, and disconnect the gas hose. (SI-410
temperatures can be monitored on a laptop computer connected to the Magnet Monitor.)
11.5.48. Remove the Coldsleeve Heater.
11.5.49. Connect the gas hose to the gas inlet valve (green handle) on the Service Adapter.
11.5.50. Open the gas valve (green handle). If using nitrogen gas, set the flow to 1 psig on the low pressure
regulator. If using helium gas, the flow will be magnet pressure.

Page 413 of 607
11.5.51. Coldhead Insertion, Fixed Site
a. Remove the carriage bracket from the insertion rail of the Fixed Site Coldhead Insertion Tool.
Major Components, LCC Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixtures
Mobile Site Coldhead Insertion

Fixed Site Coldhead Insertion Fixture (2379886)
Fixture (2379888)

Page 414 of 607
b. Assemble the carriage bracket onto the Coldhead transition flange by tightening the bracket's
screws.
Connecting Carriage Bracket to Coldhead Transition Flange
c. Make sure the insertion rail's sleeve clamp is secured to the Coldhead sleeve. Tighten the clamp's
screws to secure the rail to the sleeve, if not already tight.
Connecting Insertion Rail to Sleeve Flange
d. Work Assistant: Position the prepared replacement Coldhead and carriage bracket in a
cardboard box (or proven nonmagnetic equivalent).

Page 415 of 607
e. Transport new Coldhead to the Coldhead sleeve without delays and in strict conformance with
this Coldhead Replacement procedure to minimize exposure to magnetic field and degassing of
the motor.
f. Securely grip the cardboard box containing the Coldhead, and carefully drag alongside the
magnet room wall to the Service Ladder/Platform. Do NOT come near the magnet bore.
g. Carefully lift and place the Coldhead and carriage bracket onto the Service Ladder/Platform,
keeping it away from the magnet bore and outer surface of the magnet.
h. Check the orientation of the Coldhead Motor shield, and orient the Coldhead's motor to match.
Carefully lift and slide the Coldhead and carriage bracket onto the insertion rail with the
Coldhead Motor turned toward the plumbing area of the magnet. Make sure to NOT pinch the
transition flange O-ring when inserting the Coldhead into the sleeve.
i. Slide the Coldhead and carriage bracket along the insertion rail until the Coldhead enters the
sleeve, and the Transition Flange O-Ring is inside the sleeve flange.
Inserting Coldhead into Sleeve
j. Remove the carriage bracket from the Coldhead flange.

Page 416 of 607
11.5.52. Coldhead Insertion, Mobile Site
a. Temporarily remove the Belleville washers from two bolts. (These will be used to insert the new
Coldhead.)
b. Assemble the carriage bracket of the LCC Mobile Site Coldhead Insertion Tool onto the Coldhead
transition flange by tightening the bracket's screws. (See illustration below.)
Connecting Carriage Bracket to Coldhead Transition Flange

Page 417 of 607
c. Assemble the insertion rail's sleeve clamp onto the sleeve flange, and tighten the clamp's
screws. (Shown below.)
Connecting Insertion Rail to Sleeve Flange
d. Make sure the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting Tool is assembled and the rail stops set in
conformance to previously described process (Coldhead Extraction for Mobile Sites). If the site is
an AK van, make sure the internal crossbeam section is removed in conformance with process
described in Coldhead Extraction for Mobile Sites section.

Page 418 of 607
e. Carefully attach the new Coldhead to the pulley of the Mobile Site Coldhead Lifting Tool at the
rear of the mobile.
f. Raise the Coldhead until the pulley is at maximum height.
g. Slowly move the Coldhead along the mobile site's rail system to the mounting location.
Transport new Coldhead to the Coldhead sleeve without delays and in strict conformance with
this Coldhead Replacement procedure to minimize exposure to magnetic field and degassing of
the motor.
h. Use the Lifting Tool to support the Coldhead's weight, and carefully slide the Coldhead and
carriage bracket onto the insertion rail with the Coldhead Motor turned toward the plumbing
area of the magnet. Avoid pinching the transition flange O-ring when inserting the Coldhead into
the sleeve.
i. Slide the Coldhead and carriage bracket along the insertion rail until the Coldhead enters the
sleeve and the transition flange O-ring is inside the sleeve flange.
j. Remove the carriage bracket from the Coldhead flange.

Page 419 of 607
11.5.53. Temporarily remove the Belleville washers from three bolts. (Use new Belleville washers from the
Coldhead change-out kit. Do not reuse Belleville washers.)
11.5.54. Insert the three bolts prepared without Belleville washers in the mounting holes spaced 90°, 135° and
135° around the Coldhead flange. This is the initial 3-bolt tightening pattern shown below. Make sure
to maintain an even gap between the transition and sleeve flanges around the full circumference
during insertion and tightening.
3-Bolt and 8-Bolt Tightening Patterns and Sleeve/Transition Flange Gap

Page 420 of 607
11.5.55. Thread and evenly tighten the three bolts, giving each a quarter turn at a time, until the O-ring is fully
captured into the sleeve. Immediately close the gas flow valve (green handle) on the Service Adapter.
11.5.56. Remove the three bolts and re-assemble with new Belleville washers on each bolt. Make sure the
Belleville washers are in the proper orientation (as shown below) on all eight bolts.
11.5.57. Thread and evenly tighten six Coldhead mounting bolts with Belleville washers into the Coldhead
transition flange until a 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) gap exists between the Coldhead transition flange and the
Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixture mounting bracket. (Two mounting holes are blocked by the
Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixture bracket.)
11.5.58. Remove the insertion rail from the Coldhead sleeve, saving the clamping bolts in their holes in the
insertions rail's sleeve clamp.
11.5.59. Assemble the remaining two mounting bolts with Belleville washers in the proper orientation into the
Coldhead transition flange. (See above.) Make gap adjustments before the Belleville washers are
compressed. Make only small adjustments at a time to prevent cocking the Coldhead and placing a
bending moment on the mounting bolts.
11.5.60. Continue tightening the Coldhead mounting bolts in the staggered pattern shown above until the gap
between the Belleville washer stacks on all bolts is 0.015 in. (0.38 mm).

Page 421 of 607
11.5.61. Gap adjustments can be made before fully tightening the mounting bolts by using two flat-head
screwdrivers wedged between the transition and sleeve flanges. Gap adjustments can also be made
by temporarily removing the desired mounting bolt, inserting and fully threading a M10 x 50 mm (2
in.) long hex-head bolt through the transition flange and using that bolt like a jack screw against a flat
washer on the sleeve flange to wedge open the gap slightly. (See below.)
Adjusting Sleeve and Transition

Flange Gap Using M10 Jackscrews

Page 422 of 607
11.5.62. If using helium gas instead of nitrogen gas (this is mandatory if helium gas is used during the
Coldhead replacement. Magnet thermal performance will be compromised if this step is skipped.):
a. Disconnect the Helium Vent Hose from the Swagelok fitting at the magnet Top Cover Plate.
Immediately close the fitting with the cap. Disconnect the helium vent hose from the Service
Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle).
b. Connect the Backfill Air Hose (5111335) to the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle).
c. Route the Backfill Air Hose to outside the magnet room.
d. Connect the In-Line Desiccant Filter's (2391747) female fitting to the Backfill Air Hose's 0.25 NPT
pipe thread outside the magnet room.
e. Make sure NOT to lose the plugs in either end of the In-Line Desiccant Filter. Replug the filter
immediately after use to prevent filter contamination between uses.
Air Backfill Connections
f. With the vacuum pump operating, open the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle) and
vacuum valve (black handle). Evacuate the Backfill Hose for 10 seconds, then close the gas inlet
valve (green handle).
g. Evacuate the sleeve space while the vacuum valve (black handle) remains open.
h. When the vacuum reaches 100 millitorr (100 microns), close the vacuum valve (black handle).
i. Open the Service Adapter's gas flow valve (green handle) to allow air from the Backfill Air Hose to
flow into the sleeve.
j. When the pressure within the sleeve reaches 1 atmosphere, close the gas flow valve (green
handle).
k. Repeat Step “g” through Step “j” a total of ten times (i.e., ten evacuation/backfill cycles).
l. After the tenth time, proceed to “Open the Service Adapter’s vacuum……”

Page 423 of 607
11.5.63. If using nitrogen gas:
a. With the vacuum pump operating, open the Service Adapter's vacuum valve (black handle) to
evacuate the sleeve space.
b. When the vacuum reaches 50 millitorr (50 microns), close the vacuum valve (black handle).
c. Open the Service Adapter's gas flow valve (green handle) to allow nitrogen gas to flow into the
sleeve.
d. When the pressure within the sleeve reaches 1 atmosphere, close the gas flow valve (green
handle).
e. Repeat process a second time (i.e., two evacuation/backfill cycles).
Vacuum Pump Apparatus Setup

Page 424 of 607
11.5.64. Open the Service Adapter's vacuum valve (black handle), and continue evacuating the sleeve while
performing Coldhead Interface Adjustment.
11.5.65. For Coldhead Interface Adjustment be aware of the following:
a. It is very important to establish complete contact between the second-stage heat station of the
Coldhead and sleeve to have a minimal temperature gradient and good heat transfer from the
Recondenser.
b. A poor temperature gradient will result in increased cryostat pressure and less time between a
Cryocooler shutdown from a power outage or improper cooling and the loss of helium through
the relief valve.
c. Observance of the second stage Coldhead and Recondenser temperatures is necessary to
determine that complete contact is made. The temperature difference must be within
specification.
d. It is important to perform all Coldhead adjustments prior to turning the Coldhead on. This will
allow the second stage gasket to compress and fill the gaps at the second stage interface before
the gasket cools and hardens in the sleeve.
11.5.66. Tighten the Coldhead bolts a half-turn each in the staggered pattern shown below to set the gap
between Belleville washers on all bolts evenly with a 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) feeler gauge.
a. Wait one minute, and repeat the bolt tightening, setting the gap between Belleville washers
evenly with a 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) feeler gauge.
b. After another minute, tighten all bolts again and use a 0.003 to 0.005 inch (0.08 to 0.13 mm)
feeler gauge to set the same gap between Belleville washers on all bolts.
c. Make sure an even gap is maintained between the transition and sleeve flanges around the full
circumference.

Page 425 of 607
11.5.67. Allow the Coldhead to sit warm and the sleeve to evacuate for 15 minutes, checking and maintaining
a 0.003 to 0.005 in. (0.08 to 0.13 mm) Belleville washer gap on all Coldhead bolts.
a. Do NOT apply any bending force on Aeroquip fittings while connecting/disconnecting helium
to prevent helium loss and system contamination. Support the gas lines when connecting or
disconnecting to the Coldhead at the top of the magnet or to the Compressor.
b. Make sure the helium flexlines are connected in the sequence stated below. Gas back pressure
may prevent the Coldhead from starting if gas lines are connected in the reverse sequence.
Order and technique are important when connecting helium flexlines to prevent inoperative
c. Make sure the O-ring on the female Aeroquip fitting at the Coldhead is present and in good
condition.
11.5.68. During the 15-minute period the Coldhead sits warm, connect the Coldhead gas lines in the following
sequence:
a. First, the return flexline (green mark).
b. Second, the supply flexline (yellow mark).
11.5.69. Make sure the digital vacuum meter reads <20 millitorr (<20 microns), and the sleeve was evacuated
for at least 15 minutes.
a. Close the Pump-Out Port Operator by pushing the knob in and gently rotating it clockwise (CW).
b. Rotate the knob counterclockwise (CCW) until the knob extension is fully disengaged from the
pump-out port. Do not pull the knob out at this time.
11.5.70. When the Pump-Out Port Operator is closed, close the Service Adapter's vacuum valve (black handle).
a. Observe the vacuum meter while pulling out the pump-out port knob about 2 in. (50 mm). A
decreasing reading means the vacuum has increased due to the pump-out port plug moving
during operation.
b. If no change is observed, continue with Coldhead Replacement.
11.5.71. Remove LOTO and connect the Coldhead power cable in conformance with Cryocooler Installation
and Checkout.
11.5.72. Turn off the vacuum pump, and open the gas inlet valve (green handle) to vent system. Disconnect
and remove all apparatus. If helium gas was used, remember to disconnect and plug the desiccant
filter, and reattach the quick disconnect fitting to the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle)
using two wrenches.
11.5.73. Close the Coldhead motor shield, and resecure using the .25-20UNC stainless steel sockethead cap
screws removed earlier.
11.5.74. Check the Belleville washer gaps, and tighten as necessary to achieve 0.003 in. to 0.005 in. (0.08 to
0.13 mm) gaps.
11.5.75. Turn the Cryocooler on, connect the MTM-101 Magnet Temperature Meter (5119507), and monitor
second stage temperatures for Coldhead and Recondenser cool-down.

Page 426 of 607
11.5.76. When temperature equilibrium is reached, make sure the:
a. Recondenser temperature is <4.4K.
b. Coldhead/Recondenser second stage temperature difference is <0.2K.
c. The RuO sensor reading of second stage Coldhead temperature may show a small oscillation of
0.1 to 0.3K due to Displacer motion and sampling rate. If this occurs, average the maximum and
minimum temperature readings.
d. If the readings are out of acceptable range, repeat the Coldhead replacement procedure with
the same Coldhead.
11.5.77. Replace enclosures removed.
11.5.78. Return the Magnet Monitor to normal operation by re-enabling the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm
and Vessel Pressure Control or by turning Magnet Monitor power on.

Page 427 of 607
11.6. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead Replacement
Maintenance of cryocooler temperatures within specification is essential for proper operation of a zero
boil-off magnet. Coldhead replacement is required when elevated thermal station (first or second stage)
temperature problems are isolated to the Coldhead, complete cryocooler system, or from catastrophic
failure of the Coldhead. (See Temperature, Pressure, & Leak Troubleshooting for fault isolation of Coldhead
problems.) It is important to change out Coldheads as soon as defects are uncovered. Make sure a new
Coldhead and all required tools/equipment are on site before starting this procedure. Perform the change-
out rapidly to minimize temperature rise in the magnet.
The 3.0T field strength of the W and WB Series magnets requires special tooling, 3T Coldhead Transport
Tool 2375543, to move the Coldhead to and from the Coldhead Sleeve.






Page 428 of 607

MANNER POSSIBLE. EXCEPT WHEN MOVING FERROUS MATERIAL TO AND FROM ITS NATIVE LOCATION
ON OR NEAR THE MAGNET, THE STATIC MAGNETIC FIELD IN ANY PORTION OF THE SERVICE PATH
SHALL NOT EXCEED 200 GAUSS.
SERVICED.

PROCEDURE.

UNPROTECTED SKIN WILL BE SEVERELY DAMAGED IF IT CONTACTS A REMOVED COLDHEAD'S FIRST OR
SECOND STAGE STATIONS. WEAR CRYOGEN GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING (LONG-SLEEVE
SHIRT, ETC.) WHEN REMOVING A COLDHEAD. DO NOT TOUCH THE FIRST OR SECOND STAGE STATIONS
OF A REMOVED COLDHEAD.


REPLACE COLDHEADS USING THE COLDHEAD INSERTION/ EXTRACTION TOOL.

Page 429 of 607
POTENTIAL BURN HAZARD!

SKIN BURNS CAN RESULT FROM CONTACT WITH THE HEATER OR THE EXITING GAS. DO NOT TOUCH
THE HEATER OR COME IN CONTACT WITH THE EXITING GAS.



DO NOT BRING A SHOP VACUUM CLOSE TO A RAMPED MAGNET. LOCATE THE VACUUM CANISTER
AWAY FROM THE FIELD AND USE A NONMAGNETIC EXTENSION HOSE.


STAINLESS STEEL SERVICE FIXTURES/TOOLS HAVE A SLIGHT MAGNETIC ATTRACTION IN A 3 TESLA
FIELD. THEY CAN BECOME PROJECTILES IF NOT HANDLED CAREFULLY/SECURELY WITHIN 18 IN. (500
MM) OF THE MAGNET. ALWAYS MAINTAIN CONTROL OF STAINLESS STEEL SERVICE FIXTURES/ TOOLS
WITHIN 18 IN. (500 MM) OF THE MAGNET.

THE 3T COLDHEAD TRANSPORT TOOL'S BEAM IS SLIGHTLY FERROMAGNETIC. INJURY CAN RESULT IF
NOT HANDLED CAREFULLY/SECURELY WITHIN 18 IN. (500 MM) OF THE MAGNET. DO NOT ASSEMBLE
THE BEAM LESS THAN 18 IN. (500 MM) FROM THE MAGNET.

Page 430 of 607

DO NOT LIFT OR CARRY A COLDHEAD DIRECTLY PAST THE MAGNET BORE TO PREVENT THE COLDHEAD
BEING DRAWN INTO THE BORE. NEVER POSITION YOUR BODY BETWEEN THE COLDHEAD AND THE
MAGNET BORE/CORNERS.


REPLACE COLDHEADS USING THE COLDHEAD INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOL.

THE COLDHEAD MOTOR SHIELD IS MADE OF FERROMAGNETIC MATERIAL AND HAS A LARGE
ATTRACTIVE FORCE TO THE MAGNET. DO NOT LOOSEN OR REMOVE THE MOTOR SHIELD MOUNTING
SCREWS UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE!
POTENTIAL CRUSH HAZARD!

BECAUSE THE FERROMAGNETIC COLDHEAD MOTOR SHIELD IS ATTRACTED TO THE MAGNET, THE
MOTOR SHIELD CAN PINCH/CRUSH FINGERS TRAPPED BETWEEN IT AND THE MAGNET. MAKE SURE THE
M12 MOTOR SHIELD JACK SCREW EXTENDS ~0.5 IN. (~12 MM) BEYOND THE MOTOR SHIELD OUTER
HALF BEFORE CLOSING THE MOTOR SHIELD.WEAR LEATHER GLOVES AND USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN PIVOTING THE MOTOR SHIELD'S OUTER HALF TO EXPOSE THE COLDHEAD. DO NOT PUT
FINGERS OR HANDS BETWEEN THE MOTOR SHIELD'S TWO HALVES.
POTENTIAL IMPACT HAZARD!

GAS PRESSURE DURING COLDHEAD REMOVAL MAY CAUSE THE COLDHEAD TO POP OUT, POTENTIALLY
CAUSING INJURY UPON IMPACT. KEEP AWAY FROM THE END OF A COLDHEAD DURING COLDHEAD
REMOVAL.

A LOOSE COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET IN A 3 TESLA FIELD WILL BE IMMEDIATELY ATTRACTED
TO THE MAGNET. KEEP THE RAIL STOP IN THE END OF THE INSERTION RAIL. DO NOT ALLOW THE
COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET TO SLIDE OFF THE INSERTION RAIL BEFORE BEING FULLY
SUPPORTED BY THE COLDHEAD HOIST.

Page 431 of 607

COLDHEAD INSERTION AND EXTRACTION REQUIRES BOTH PERSONS TO BE ON THE SERVICE
LADDER/PLATFORM.

HEAVY OBJECT!
LIFTING/CARRYING MORE THAN 35 LBS (15.9 kg) CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURIES. IT IS NOT
RECOMMENDED TO HAND CARRY MORE THAN 35 POUNDS (15.9 kg). DRAGGIN A CARDBOARD BOX
CONTAINING THE 55 POUND (25 kg) COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET IS PREFERRED WHEN
MOVING A COLDHEAD TO/FROM THE MAGNET. DO NOT USE A CART UNLESS IT IS PROVEN NOT TO
CONTAIN MAGNETIC MATERIALS.

THE COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET WILL BE ATTRACTED TOWARD THE MAGNET. DO NOT PULL
THE COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET OFF THE INSERTION RAIL UNTIL FULLY READY TO SUPPORT
AND FULLY CONTROL THEIR MOVEMENT USING THE HOIST.
POTENTIAL TRIP HAZARD!

THE 3T COLDHEAD TRANSPORT TOOL HOIST ROPE MUST BE LONG ENOUGH FOR THE HOIST TO
OPERATE PROPERLY. FEET ENTANGLED IN LOOSE ROPE ON/NEAR THE FLOOR CAN CAUSE ONE TO
TRIP/FALL. KEEP LOOSE ROPES AWAY FROM YOUR FEET TO AVOID ENTANGLING THEM IN IT AND
TRIPPING/FALLING.
HEAVY OBJECT
THE COLDHEAD AND CARRIAGE BRACKET TOGETHER WEIGH APPROXIMATELY 55 LBS (25 KG). BE
PREPARED TO SUPPORT THE WEIGHT WHEN REMOVING THE COLDHEAD AND BRACKET FRON THE
INSERTION RAIL’S END.

Page 432 of 607
Do NOT attempt to remove or install a Coldhead on a 3.0 Tesla magnet without using the 3T Coldhead
Transport Tool 2375543. Assembly of this tool requires two people.
• Practice assembling the tool at least once before arriving on site. Make any necessary adjustments,
including those recommended by the Guide Rail Cassette manufacturer at that time.
• Preassemble the Transport Tool's Tower and its Beam sections according to the instructions below
and outside of the magnet room if space permits. If not, assemble them as far away from the magnet
as possible.
Transport new Coldhead to the Coldhead sleeve without delays and in strict conformance with this
Coldhead Replacement procedure to minimize exposure to magnetic field and degaussing of the
motor.
Always have assistance when moving the Transport Tool's Beam.

Always have assistance when pinning the Transport Tool's Beam in place. Pinning requires a nearly
exact alignment; move the Tower as required.
Always have assistance when raising the Transport Tool's Tower to full height.

Page 433 of 607
5393536
1 per
person
1 per Pair: Insulated Leather Gloves (for opening/closing the Motor
NA
Person Shield and handling the removed Coldhead)
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
2305056 1 Vacuum Pump, 10 millitorr (10 microns; 0.0004 millibar)
2214919 1 Coldhead Stand (Holding Tool)
46-301477G2 1 Lakeshore 208 Digital Thermometer Kit, optional
46-294804G1 1 Nonmagnetic Coldhead Wrenches Kit
2385069 1 3.0T Coldhead Transport Kit
2348452 1 3T Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool

Page 434 of 607
Tools & Test Equipment, continued.
Shop Vacuum with >20 ft. (>6 m) nonmagnetic ~1 in. (~25 mm)
NA 1
diameter extension hose
Cardboard Box or Proven Non-ferromagnetic Equivalent (for
NA 1 transporting the 50 lbs, 22.7 kg Coldhead and Carriage
Bracket to/from the magnet at fixed sites)
NA 1 Tweezers, Long
ramped.
NA 1 Flashlight
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
2171620 1 Coldhead Replacement Gasket Kit
Pump-Out Port Dual O-Ring Plug (included in Universal
2236606 1
Coldhead Replacement Tool Kit 2300306-2)
NA 1 Full, nonmagnetic cylinder(s) of nitrogen gas (if available)
46-260802P1 1 Roll of Aluminum Tape, 0.5 in. (12.6mm) wide
46-260802P6 1 Roll of Aluminum Tape, 0.125 in. (3mm) wide
NA 1 Roll of Permacel Tape, 0.006 x .5 in. (0.15 x 12.6 mm)
Vacuum Grease (included in Universal Coldhead Replacement
46-252065P24 1
Tool Kit 2300306-2)
NA 1 Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent)
Replacement Parts
High Efficiency Sumitomo Two-Stage Cryocooler Coldhead
Assembly, Assembly within FRU Kit 5438959 (Note:
5412719 1
New/reconditioned high efficiency Coldhead must be
inspected and free of defects before bringing to the site.)

Page 435 of 607
c. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete this procedure.
d. Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
e. Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open before starting this procedure.
f. Do NOT attempt to remove or install a Coldhead on a 3.0 Tesla magnet without using the 3T
Coldhead Transport Tool 2375543. Assembly of this tool requires two people.
◊ Practice assembling the tool at least once before arriving on site. Make any necessary
adjustments, including those recommended by the Guide Rail Cassette manufacturer at
that time.
◊ Preassemble the Transport Tool's Tower and its Beam sections according to the
instructions below and outside of the magnet room if space permits. If not, assemble them
as far away from the magnet as possible.
11.6.3. Either turn Magnet Monitor power off or disable the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm and Vessel
11.6.4. Position the Service Platform approximately centered between the magnet's patient and service end
flanges, and set up the Service Platform in conformance with Service Platform Set-Up.

Page 436 of 607
11.6.5. Install the Coldhead Transport Tool:
a. Examine the Transport Tool's braided nylon rope and No. 36 nylon twine cord and replace if
necessary. The Transport Tool uses two pieces of 0.25 in. (6 mm) diameter braided nylon rope cut
at ~15 ft. (4,600 mm) length and one piece of #36 nylon twine release cord cut at ~ 8 ft. (2,400
mm) length. (Nylon rope/twine will unravel unless the ends are taped, wrapped in thread or
lightly melted.)
b. Examine the Hoist's rope, and order a replacement if necessary.
c. Clear an area at least 10 ft. (3 m) long x 3 ft. (1 m) wide in front of the Service Ladder/ Platform as
shown below.
Assembled Transport Tool 2375543 Beside Magnet

Page 437 of 607
d. Attach the Transport Tool's legs to the Tower Base. Always use two legs on the Magnet side. Use
all four legs when space permits. (See the two illustrations below.) (If the passage into the
Magnet Room is narrow, attach the legs as far from the magnet and inside the room as
practical.)
e. Attach the Tower Channels to the Tower Base using four 0.5-13 UNC x 2 in. hex bolts as shown.
f. Attach the Middle Tower to the Tower Channels with two 0.5-13 UNC x 2.5 in. hex bolts per
channel as shown.
Tower Base

Page 438 of 607
g. Slide the Upper Tower Frame into the Middle Tower as far as possible. (The Upper Tower Frame
will be raised after the Transport Tool's Beam is pinned to the Tower inside the magnet room.
(Skip this step only if both service personnel are tall enough to pin Transport Tool's Beam to the
Tower while the Tower is fully raised. Beam pinning can be further lowered by sliding the Middle
Tower into the Tower Channels.
Coldhead Transport
Tool Tower at Full
Height

Page 439 of 607
h. Assemble the Transport Tool's Beam using 0.5-13 UNC x 2 in. hex bolts and M6 x 30 socket-head
cap screws as shown in the two illustrations that follow.
◊ Make sure the fasteners are tight, including all of the M6 x 25 mm sockethead cap screws
used to secure the Guide Rail to the Beam's square tubing.
◊ Any loose bolts/cap screws can allow the Beam to sag sufficiently to impede passage of the
Guide Rail Cassette.
Coldhead Transport Tool Beam
Connecting Beam Sections

Page 440 of 607
i. Move the Guide Rail Cassette along one piece of the Guide Rail. If cassette movement is loose,
tight or uneven, adjust the cassette (from the vendor manual) as follows:
1. Lay the Guide Rail on a flat surface with the datum line (reference groove on one side of the
rail) facing away from you. Anchor the rail to keep it from slipping when sliding resistance is
applied to the cassette.
2. Set the roller cassette on the rail with the adjustment screw facing toward you with the
datum line on the rail away from you. Do not install the wipers on the cassette at this time.
3. Make sure the four bolts on top of the adjustable side of the cassette are slightly loose, and
the bolts on top of the fixed side are tight before adjusting the drag screw. Do not try
adjusting the cassette with the top plates bolted tight.
4. While sliding the cassette along the rail, adjust the drag adjustment set screw inward for
more drag or outward for less. Feel for an even amount of resistance as the drag screw is
turned in and out.
5. Tighten the top plate bolts hand tight, and then tighten them by ¾ turn with a wrench. Do
not overtighten. (Tightening the top plate bolts will add some resistance.)
6. Move the cassette along the rail, again. It should move evenly. If either of the following
conditions exist, repeat Step process to tune sliding resistance.
∗ If the cassette hops, it is too tight.
∗ If there is play in the top plate, the cassette is too loose.
7. If the cassette was not used previously, install a clip-on plastic wiper at each end of the
cassette. (Each clip-on plastic wiper holds a lubricated cleaning pad to help keep the rail
clean and cassette movement smooth. The wipers will add some resistance.)
j. Run the Guide Rail Cassette along the full guide rail length. If the Guide Rail Cassette does not
smoothly move from one section of rail to the next, tighten the bolts connecting the rail sections.
Guide Rail Cassette Section

Page 441 of 607
k. Verify that a ~15 ft. (4,600 mm) length of 0.25 in. (6 mm) diameter braided nylon rope is attached
to each end of the Guide Rail Cassette as shown below.
Assembled Hoist and Guide Rail Cassette (Raised Beam)
l. Verify that an ~8 ft. (2,400 mm) length of No. 36 twine release cord is attached to the End-of-Rail
Latch Screw shown above.
m. Coil and securely bundle the each length of rope and the length of twine.
n. Run the Guide Rail Cassette along the Guide Rail until it latches in the End-of-Rail Latch as shown
below.
Latched Guide Rail Cassette and Coiled Ropes

Page 442 of 607
o. Tie the rope and twine the coils to the Release Cord Eyebolt to keep loose rope/twine off the floor
during the next step.
p. Carefully carry the Transport Tool's Magnet End Support Frame to the Service Ladder/Platform
inside the Magnet Room. Avoid taking the frame close to the Magnet's Bore since the magnetic
field will have a substantial Eddy Current effect on the frame.
q. Lift the Magnet End Support Frame, and place its hooks over the Service Ladder/Platform's end
safety rail as shown below.
Mounting Magnet End

Support Frame to Service
Ladder/Platform's
End Rail
r. Secure the Magnet End Support Frame to the Service Ladder/Platform's end safety rail using
four 3/ 8 -16 UNC x 3.5 in. knurled thumb screws. (See the illustration above.)
s. Carefully carry the Transport Tool's Tower into the Magnet Room.
◊ Place the Tower to the left of the magnet's patient end with the tower's vertical
components 4.5 ft. (1,370 mm) in front of the Service Ladder/Platform.
◊ Orient the Tower with the tabs to attach the Beam facing the magnet.
t. Carefully carry the assembled Beam into the room, and rest the Beam's magnet end on the
Service Ladder/Platform away from the magnet. Orient the Beam with the End-of-Rail Latch
toward the Tower.
◊ Always have assistance when moving, raising or pinning the Transport Tool's Tower or
Beam in place.
◊ Pinning requires a nearly exact alignment; move the Tower as required.

Page 443 of 607
u. Pin the Beam in place:
◊ Pin the Beam's tower end between the tabs on top of the Upper Tower Support Frame using
its 5/ 16 -18 UNC x 2.88 in. knurled thumb screw.
◊ Pin the Beam's magnet end between the tabs on top of the Magnet End Support Frame
using its 5/ 16 -18 UNC x 2.88 in. knurled thumb screw.
Attaching Ends of Transport Beam
v. Untie each length of rope and twine from the Release Cord Eyebolt, and uncoil each length of
rope/twine.

Page 444 of 607
w. While facing the Tower, thread the 0.25 in. (6 mm) diameter braided nylon rope through the rope
guide on the Upper Tower Frame and the other length through the rope guide on the Magnet
End Support Frame as shown below.
Rail Guide Cassette's Rope and End-of-Rail Latch Release Cord
x. Drape the No. 36 twine release cord's loose end over the top of the Upper Tower Frame as shown
above.

Page 445 of 607
y. Raise the Upper Tower Frame to the position shown below, and securely fasten using 0.5-13 UNC
x 2 in. hex bolts (shown below) to adjust the Tower Base's location as required to keep the Tower
vertical.
Coldhead Transport Tool

Tower at Full Height
Raising Upper Tower

Frame
z. Raise the Middle Tower to its full height if the Middle Tower was previously lowered. Securely
fasten using 0.5-13 UNC x 2.5 in. hex bolts.

Page 446 of 607
11.6.6. Immediately upon site arrival, shut down the compressor to prevent pressure buildup in the Coldhead
as follows:
Power Switch.
e. Make sure gas lines are removed immediately after power is disconnected to prevent
contamination of gas lines and Compressor.
f. Do not put any bending force on Aeroquip fittings while connecting/disconnecting helium
to prevent helium loss and system contamination. Do support the gas lines when
connecting/disconnecting to the Coldhead at the top of the magnet or to the Compressor.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 447 of 607
11.6.7. Once Coldhead power is disconnected, immediately:
a. Disconnect the Coldhead power cable at the Coldhead.
b. Disconnect the helium gas lines from the right-angle flexline connectors at the Coldhead in
conformance with Helium Flexline Connections and Casing Replacement.
Coldhead Flexline and Power Connection Locations

Page 448 of 607
11.6.8. Open and secure the Coldhead Motor Shield 5103953:
a. Remove the M8 x 16 Cap Screw securing the motor shield closed.
b. Using a nonmagnetic wrench, turn the M12 x 100 Jack Screw (shown below) to open the motor
shield's hinged section approximately 1 in. (25 mm).
c. Secure the motor shield in its open position using the cap screw that was removed previously.
d. Retract the M12 Jack Screw to leave approximately 0.5 in. (12 mm) exposed as shown below.
Opening Coldhead Motor

Shield Using Jack Screw
Coldhead Motor Shield

Pinned Fully Open

Page 449 of 607
11.6.9. Clean all vacuum fittings on the apparatus shown below. Then lightly coat O-rings with vacuum
grease to ensure vacuum seals are tight.
Coldhead
Gas/Vacuum Service
Apparatus
11.6.10. Attach the seal-off operator to the pump-out port on the Coldhead sleeve. Tighten the seal-off
operator to the pump-out port by holding the body of the operator and tightening the nut with a
wrench. (See illustration above.)
11.6.11. Connect the service adapter to the seal-off operator. (See illustration above.)

Page 450 of 607
11.6.12. Standard configuration using a nitrogen cylinder:
a. Secure a nitrogen cylinder to a nonmagnetic gas cylinder cart.
b. Remove the cylinder cap.
c. Connect the gas regulator to the nitrogen gas cylinder.
d. Connect the Nitrogen Gas Line (2303724) from the gas regulator to the Service Adapter's gas
inlet valve (green handle). See illustrations below.
Coldhead Gas/Vacuum
Service Adapter and
Connections
Nitrogen Gas Cylinder

to Service Adapter

Page 451 of 607
e. Make sure the regulator handle is backed out counterclockwise (CCW) to avoid regulator
damage, then open the gas cylinder slowly. (The high pressure gauge should indicate 2100 to
2400 psig if the cylinder is full.)
f. Open the gas inlet valve and set a low pressure gas flow (1 psig), as indicated on the regulator
gauge.
g. Proceed with gas purge (open the vacuum port valve (black handle) on the adapter, and allow
gas to flow out for 30 seconds to purge).
11.6.13. Emergency configuration using helium gas from the magnet:
a. The use of nitrogen cylinders is the preferred method for Coldhead replacement. If there is an
emergency situation and nitrogen cylinders are not available, boiled-off helium gas from the
magnet may be used as a backup option. If helium gas is used, the Cold Sleeve MUST be
backfilled with air and evacuated with 10 cycles after the Coldhead insertion.
b. Inspect the magnet pressure gauge and make sure the magnet pressure is between 4 and 5 psi.
c. Place the Helium Vent Hose (5111361) on the service platform where it is readily accessible.
d. Open the cap on the 0.25 inch Swagelok fitting located at the Top Cover Plate. See illustration
below. Make sure the Swagelok fitting cap is kept in a safe place for later use.
e. As soon as the cap is opened, connect the Helium Vent Hose (5111361) to the Swagelok fitting at
the Top Cover Plate.
f. Connect the Helium Vent Hose's quick connect fitting to the Service Adaptor's gas inlet valve
(green handle). See illustration below.
Helium Gas Connection to Service Adapter
11.6.14. Open the vacuum port valve (black handle) on the adapter, and allow gas to flow out for 30 seconds
to purge the assembly of air.
11.6.15. Close the vacuum port and gas inlet valves.

Page 452 of 607
11.6.16. Make sure the black and green handles on the Service Adapter are closed, then connect the vacuum
pump apparatus as shown below. Apply a light coat of vacuum grease to the centering O-rings.
Vacuum Pump Apparatus Set-Up
11.6.17. Turn on the vacuum pump, open the vacuum valve (black handle) on the Service Adapter, and allow
the pump to evacuate the vacuum line and Service Adapter to <20 millitorr (<20 microns) as read on
the Digital Vacuum Meter. Close the vacuum valve.
11.6.18. Repeat opening and closing the vacuum valve (black handle) two more times while pumping.
11.6.19. When 50 millitorr (50 microns) is reached, close the vacuum valve (black handle), and observe the
vacuum meter to ensure the Service Adapter and Seal-Off Operator are leak tight. If the gauge rises
>200 millitorr (>200 microns) over 30 seconds, suspect a leak and:
a. Turn off the vacuum pump and temporarily open the green handle to bring the apparatus to
atmospheric pressure.
b. Remove the vacuum line and reassemble the Seal-Off Operator and Service Adapter.
c. Repeat process until the system is leak tight.
11.6.20. When the apparatus is leak tight, open the vacuum valve (black handle), and make sure the vacuum is
≤ 50 millitorr (≤ 50 microns) before continuing to the next step.
11.6.21. Push in and rotate the black handle of the Seal-Off Operator clockwise (CW) to engage the plug in the
Pump-Out Port. When the handle is engaged, pull the handle out to open the Pump- Out Port.
11.6.22. Immediately check the vacuum on the digital vacuum meter for a reading of ≤50 millitorr (≤50
microns). A reading of > 100 millitorr (> 100 microns) indicates a poor vacuum in the sleeve that may
cause cooling problems. If this condition occurs:
a. Pump out the sleeve again to achieve a vacuum <100 millitorr (<100 microns).
b. Operate the Coldhead to establish final temperature. The Service Adapter has a 5 psig relief
valve to prevent the build-up of excess pressure in the Coldhead sleeve when any nitrogen,
frozen to the Coldhead, regassifies during Coldhead warm-up. Some audible escaping gas may
be encountered.

Page 453 of 607
11.6.23. Loosen and remove the eight Coldhead mounting bolts and Belleville washers. (See below.) Discard
the washers (they will be replaced with new washers from the Coldhead changeout kit). Save the
Coldhead mounting bolts. These will be used to mount the new Coldhead and will make sure the
proper interface spacing is maintained. Bolts are installed through the sleeve flange.
Coldhead Mounting
11.6.24. Re-thread two Coldhead mounting bolts without Belleville washers 3 to 4 threads deep into holes 180°
apart. These two bolts ensure that the Coldhead can be contained when gas pressure is applied. Save
these bolts and washers to mount the new Coldhead.
11.6.25. Close the vacuum valve (black handle), and open the gas inlet valve (green handle). Fill the vacuum
space in the sleeve with nitrogen gas at a small positive pressure (1 to 3 psig on the low-pressure
regulator) to break the Coldhead away from the first and second stage contacts.

Page 454 of 607
11.6.26. If required to dislodge the Coldhead, carefully insert a large nonmagnetic screwdriver or other similar
nonmagnetic, wedge-shaped tool in the gap between the sleeve flange and transition flange. (Shown
below.)
a. Gradually pry the transition flange away from the sleeve flange by tapping the end of a
screwdriver or wedge while moving it around the circumference of the gap, or
b. Use two nonmagnetic M10 bolts as a jackscrew to apply a separating force between the
Coldhead sleeve flange and the transition flange.
c. The jackscrew technique shown below can be used to break the indium seal between the
second-stage heat station of the sleeve and the Coldhead. Use two nonmagnetic M10 hex-head
bolts inserted 180° apart. Torque bolts to apply force between Coldhead sleeve flange and
transition flange.
Dislodging the Coldhead
11.6.27. Make sure nitrogen gas is flowing through the pump-out port connection and that the Coldsleeve
Heater, the separate cover plate and the Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool are within reach before
proceeding.
11.6.28. When the Coldhead breaks away from the first and second stage contacts, remove the remaining two
bolts and partially extract the Coldhead until the Transition Flange O-Ring is exposed.
11.6.29. Commence with Coldhead extraction. (Partial extraction of the Coldhead is required for Coldhead
Insertion/Removal Tool installation.)

Page 455 of 607
11.6.30. 3T Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool (2348452) Assembly
a. Slide the Insertion/Removal Tool's carriage bracket onto and along the Insertion Rail (shown
below) until the hole in the insertion rail's end is visible.
b. Insert the rail stop through the hole.
c. Position the carriage bracket against the rail stop, and tighten the carriage bracket's wing nut
and locking knob.
Major Components, 3T Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool
d. Carry the insertion rail and carriage bracket along the wall and to the Service Ladder/Platform.
e. Position the Coldhead Hoist even with the Coldhead, using the hoist carriage's 0.25 in. (6 mm)
diameter braided nylon rope (installed at the two ends of the rail guide in ) to move the hoist
carriage along the Transport Tool's beam.
f. Raise/lower the hoist's rope until the hoist's carabineer can reach the insertion rail's Rail Stop
Hole.
◊ When raising the hoist's carabineer without an attached Coldhead/Carriage Bracket, apply
a moderate downward force to the hoist's carabineer.
◊ When lowering the hoist's carabineer without an attached Coldhead/Carriage Bracket,
position the hoist's rope at a high angle to disengage the hoist's safety cleat, and apply
moderate downward force to the hoist's carabineer.
g. With the Carriage Bracket locked to the insertion rail, remove the rail stop and quickly attach the
hoist's carabineer to the rail stop hole. (This allows the hoist to carry some of the weight and to
help stabilize the insertion rail and carriage bracket in the following steps.)
h. Slide the Coldhead out 5/ 16 to 3/ 8 in. (8 to 10 mm) from the Sleeve to allow assembly of the 3T
Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool's sleeve clamp onto the sleeve flange. Do NOT slide the
Coldhead out too far in this step. Maintain contact between the Coldhead Transition Flange and
the Sleeve cavity to prevent the Coldhead first stage from dropping onto the Sleeve.

Page 456 of 607
i. Slide the carriage bracket along the insertion rail all the way to the Sleeve Clamp End. (The
carriage bracket will not clear the Coldhead's supply line after the insertion rail and sleeve clamp
are tightened in place.)
j. Position the insertion rail's sleeve clamp, straddling the Sleeve flange and aligned with the holes
in the flange's right side. Insert the clamping bolts and firmly tighten.
3T Coldhead Insertion/Removal Tool

Installation
k. Bring the Insertion/Removal Tool's carriage bracket in contact with the Coldhead Flange. Tightly
fasten the carriage bracket to the Coldhead Transition Flange's two threaded holes using the
bracket's bolts.
l. When the insertion rail is firmly attached to the Coldhead flange and the carriage bracket is
attached to the Coldhead, unhook the hoist's carabineer from the Rail Stop Hole, and reinsert the
rail stop.

Page 457 of 607
11.6.31. Coldhead Extraction
a. Carefully slide the Coldhead and carriage bracket out along the insertion rail to approximately 1
in. (25 mm) from the end of the rail, then tighten the carriage bracket's wing nut and locking
knob to prevent slipping off the rail. (The Coldhead, Insertion/Removal Tool and Transport Tool
are now in the position shown below.) (Proceed once the Coldhead is locked at the end of the
insertion rail.)
Coldhead at End of Insertion Rail
b. Hook the carabineer latch the carriage bracket's top hoisting hole (shown below), then remove
the rail stop from the end of the insertion rail.
Hoist Attachment and Rail Stop Locations

Page 458 of 607
c. Tighten the hoist's rope to support the Coldhead's weight, and secure the rope in the Hoist
Carriage.
d. Loosen the carriage bracket's locking knob and wing nut to allow the carriage bracket to slide
easily along the insertion rail with minimum rotation/twisting.
e. Firmly grasp the carriage bracket and Coldhead Motor, and gradually pull the Coldhead and
carriage bracket off the insertion rail while supporting the weight with the hoist. (The hoist's rope
must be engaged in the hoist carriage's safety cleat to support the weight.)
Coldhead Motor Facing Away from

Magnet
f. Lift the Coldhead as high as possible using the hoist carriage, then engage the hoist's rope in the
hoist safety cleat to hold the Coldhead at that height. (The Coldhead should be kept rotated with
the Coldhead motor away from the magnet.)

Page 459 of 607
g. Using the hoist carriage's rope, pull the hoist carriage along the Transport Tool Beam until the
hoist carriage engages the end-of-rail latch.
Hoist Carriage Engaging End-

of-Rail Latch
Discovery MR750 3.0T

Magnet and Cryogens
Subsystem
Carriage Bracket Attached to

Carabineer Latch (Fully Raised)

Page 460 of 607
h. Work Assistant: Position a cardboard box (or proven non-ferromagnetic equivalent) on the Tower
base on the side away from the magnet.
◊ It is not recommended to hand carry more than 35 lbs. (15.9 kg). Dragging a cardboard box
containing the 55 lbs. (25 kg) Coldhead and carriage bracket is preferred when moving a
Coldhead to/from the magnet.
◊ Do not use a cart unless it is proven not to contain magnetic materials.
i. Slowly lower and guide the Coldhead and Carriage Bracket around the Tower and into the
cardboard box on the floor as shown below.
Lowering Coldhead Using

Hoist

Page 461 of 607
j. Disconnect the hoist's carabineer latch. (See illustration below.)

k. Securely grip the cardboard box containing the removed Coldhead, and carefully drag it to the
wall, then outside the magnet room. Avoid coming near the magnet bore, or positioning your
body between the Coldhead and the bore.
l. Proceed with Sleeve Warm Up, and leave the following in place:
◊ Ladder/Platform and Coldhead Transport Tool,
◊ Insertion rail attached to the sleeve flange, and
◊ Carriage bracket secured to the removed Coldhead.

Page 462 of 607
11.6.32. Sleeve Warm Up
a. After the Coldhead is removed, immediately install Coldsleeve Heater 5145460 onto the
Coldhead sleeve flange. (The relief valve on the removed Coldhead may exhaust helium gas with
a popping or hissing sound as it warms up.)
b. Close gas inlet valve (green handle) on the Service Adapter.
c. Disconnect the gas line (Nitrogen Gas Line 2303724 or Helium Vent Hose 5111361 being used)
from the Service Adapter and connect it to the gas line connection on the Coldsleeve Heater.
(See illustrations below.)
150 W Cartridge
Heater (P/N
5440278)

Page 463 of 607
d. If using nitrogen gas, set the gas flow to 3 to 4 psig on the regulator low-pressure gauge. If using
helium gas from the magnet, gas pressure will be equal to the magnet pressure. A pressure close
to 4 psig expedites sleeve warm-up. A plastic clamp may be used to reduce helium flow. This will
prevent the pressure from dropping too quickly. Make sure gas is flowing before plugging in the
Coldsleeve Heater. Gas flow helps prevent heater element burn-out. Do not exceed a monitored
Recondenser temperature of 285° to prevent possible internal damage.
Plastic Clamp on Vent Hose
11.6.33. Plug in the Coldsleeve Heater. Make sure warmed gas is exiting the slit in the exhaust tubing on the
Coldsleeve Heater.
11.6.34. Secure the Coldsleeve Heater's cover plate. Continue the gas flow to warm the sleeve and heat
stations to the required temperature while preparing the new Coldhead.
11.6.35. Warm the sleeve's second stage to ≈275 K as monitored by the Recondenser SI-410 Diode readout on
the Magnet Monitor. (SI-410 temperatures can be monitored on a laptop computer connected to the
Magnet Monitor.)
11.6.36. When the sleeve in heated, shine flashlight light through the Coldsleeve Heater's cover plate to
observe the first and second stage heat stations inside the Coldhead sleeve.
11.6.37. Do NOT keep the Coldsleeve Heater's cover plate off the sleeve flange for an extended time period (>1
minute at a time) to minimize cryopumping and icing of the first stage heat station.
11.6.38. If indium is present on the first or second stage heat stations inside the sleeve:
a. Temporarily remove the Coldsleeve Heater and the indium with the Indium Removal Tool
(2365037) or a nonmagnetic long-handled flat-head screwdriver, being careful not to scratch the
copper heat station. Indium material on the heat station may be warmed using the warm gas
from the nitrogen gas supply line to make it easier to remove. A separate cover plate is included
in the Universal Coldhead Replacement Tool Kit that can be used while cleaning out the sleeve.
b. When all indium is removed, use a Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent) and long tweezers to
polish the heat stations.
c. Evacuate all residue in the sleeve with a shop vacuum. Securely position the canister of the
vacuum away from the magnet's field, and vacuum using a nonmagnetic extension hose at least
20 ft. (6 m) long.

Page 464 of 607
11.6.39. If the old Coldhead will not be reinstalled, make sure the right-angle flexline connectors on the old
Coldhead are near room temperature, then disconnect them in conformance with Helium Flexline
Connections and Replacement. Temporarily set the right-angle flexline connectors aside. Use the
packaging materials from the new Coldhead to return the old Coldhead.
11.6.40. If the old Coldhead is being reinserted, make sure it is at room temperature and free of moisture
before starting this Coldhead Replacement procedure to prevent a poor interface and a
contaminated sleeve. Warm the Coldhead with a heat gun if necessary. New gaskets, getter bag
(charcoal packet) and O-ring are required.
11.6.41. Coldhead Preparation
a. Remove the new Coldhead and gasket kit from its packaging. Place these on the Coldhead Stand
(Holding Tool). Save the shipping container and packing material for return if damage is found. If
reinstalling the old Coldhead, make sure it is dry and at room temperature.
b. Inspect the Coldhead using the illustration below as a reference.
◊ Items identified in the illustration must be present and installed approximately where
shown.
◊ The RuO sensor must be securely mounted in area shown.
◊ The RuO wire wrapping may be slightly different than the configuration shown. Make sure
the RuO sensor wires are not broken or disconnected, the insulation is intact, and the
tape/clamps are secure.
c. Inspect the electrical cable and connector. Make sure it is not cracked or broken and that no
wires are loose or exposed (insulation split or missing).
d. Remove the Transition Flange O-Ring (46-281247P1) from its packaging and inspect for any
visible damage (i.e. broken, nicked, cut, etc.)
e. Clean the O-ring and the O-ring groove in the transition flange with a lint-free cloth or towel.
Apply a thin film of vacuum grease to the entire surface of the O-ring.
f. Slide the lubricated O-ring over the two stations of the Coldhead, and place in the groove of the
transition flange. (Shown below)
g. Clean the first stage heat station with a Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent) to remove all
residue before installing its gasket.
Coldhead O-Ring Placement

Page 465 of 607
h. Make sure the 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) wide aluminum tape strips are indented into the notches in the
first stage surface and the 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) wide circumferential tape wrap does NOT cover the
second stage vent hole. Both are required to allow adequate second stage venting during
vacuum pumping.
i. While assembling the new indium gaskets on the first and second stage heat stations of the
Coldhead, wear the cloth gloves provided in the Gasket Kit.
j. Place the large indium gasket on the large copper first stage heat station of the Coldhead.
k. Secure the gaskets to the surface of the station by putting pressure on the gasket, forcing the
indium into the small notches in the surface of the station. (See illustration below.)
◊ To prevent the large gasket falling from off the Coldhead during installation, use 0.125 in. x
1 in. (3.2 mm x 25.4 mm) strips of aluminum tape (46-260802P6), followed by a 0.25 in. (6.4
mm) wide circumferential tape wrap (46-260802P1) cut lengthwise with a gap left at the
second stage vent hole.
◊ Do not use Permacel tape (46-252282P1) on the first stage.
◊ Make sure the second stage vent hole is not covered. Aluminum tape 46-260802P1 is 0.5 in.
(12.6 mm) wide and must be cut lengthwise into 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) wide strips before usage.
Installation of
Indium
Gaskets

Page 466 of 607
l. Clean the second stage heat station with a Scotch-BriteTM Scour pad (or equivalent) to remove all
residue before installing its gasket.
m. Place the indium wire gasket over the Coldhead second stage, orienting the gasket's length with
the motor and perpendicular to the RuO sensor.
1. Fold the gasket's wire loops over the station's side.
2. Tape circumferentially with 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) wide aluminum (46-260802P1 cut lengthwise)
or Permacel (46-252282P1) tape. Be careful not to damage the small RuO sensor wires. (See
illustration above.)
3. On the first stage, aluminum tape must be used. On the second stage, either aluminum (46-
260802P1) or Permacel (46-252282P1) tape can be used. Aluminum tape 46-260802P1 and
Permacel tape 46-252282P1 are 0.5 in. (12.6 mm) wide.
n. Install a getter bag (charcoal packet) to the side of the second stage with two circumferential
wraps using 0.5 in. (12.6 mm) wide by 7.5 in. (190 mm) Permacel tape. Do not use aluminum tape
to install the getter bag (charcoal packet). Make sure the bag is tightly secured in place. (Shown
below.)
Second Stage
Indium Wire
Gasket
Getter Bag (Charcoal Packet)
Permacel Tape

Page 467 of 607
o. Apply a thin film of anti-seize compound to the eight hex-head bolts that were removed. Make
sure that all bolts have the same number and orientation of washers shown below.

Page 468 of 607
p. If a new Coldhead is being installed, connect the right-angle flexline connectors to the Coldhead
(as shown below) in conformance with Helium Flexline Connections and Casing Replacement.
Make sure they are oriented to face the magnet's service end after the Coldhead is installed.
(Areoquip fittings on flexlines, cold heads, and 3T coldhead Right-Angle connectors are ferrous
material. Do not disconnect 3T cold head Right-Angle connectors from both the flexline and cold
head in the magnetic field.)
Final Orientation of Right-Angle

Flexline Connectors
q. Do NOT apply any bending force on Aeroquip fittings while connecting/disconnecting helium
to prevent helium loss and system contamination. Support the gas lines when
connecting/disconnecting to the Coldhead at the top of the magnet.

Page 469 of 607
11.6.42. Remove the Coldhead Hoist's carriage bracket from the old Coldhead. Tightly fasten the carriage
bracket to the two threaded holes on the replacement Coldhead's Transition Flange using the bracket
bolts.
11.6.43. Make sure the Ladder/Platform, Coldhead Transport Tool and hoist carriage are still positioned.
11.6.44. Make sure the following critical conditions are confirmed prior to inserting new Coldhead into sleeve:
a. Shine a flashlight through the Plexiglas cover, and ensure that no visible ice is present on the
first and second stage heat stations of the Coldhead sleeve before turning off the gas flow and
removing the cover. If ice is present, remove it with warm nitrogen gas.
b. Make sure a new Coldhead is completely prepared and ready for insertion before removing the
Plexiglas cover. Insert the new Coldhead immediately after cover removal to prevent
cryopumping in the sleeve.
c. Do NOT exceed a monitored Recondenser temperature of 285° to prevent possible internal
damage.
11.6.45. Recondener Purge During Coldhead Changeout: Once the coldhead sleeve has reached a
temperature of 275K, remove the NPT plug located adjacent to the 5.25 psia relief valve. This will
allow any ice or moisture in the recondenser that may have been warmed up or dislodged during the
process to escape out the recondenser tubing. Allow the gas to flow from the recondenser and out
the recondenser plumbing for a minimum of 10 seconds and a maximum of 15 seconds, then replace
the NPT plug. After re-installing the NPT plug allow the sleeve to warm back up to 275K before
inserting the new coldhead. It will take approximately five to ten minutes for the sleeve to reach 275K
again after the re-insertion of the NPT plug.
11.6.46. Read the recondenser temperature as monitored by the SI-410 Diode read-out on the Magnet
Monitor. If the temperature is 275K ±10K, turn off the flow of gas, and disconnect the gas hose. (SI-410
temperatures can be monitored on a laptop computer connected to the Magnet Monitor.)
11.6.47. Remove the Coldsleeve Heater.
11.6.48. Connect the gas hose to the gas inlet valve (green handle) on the Service Adapter.
11.6.49. Open the gas valve (green handle). If using nitrogen gas, set the flow to 1 psig on the low pressure
regulator. If using helium gas, the flow will be magnet pressure.
11.6.50. Work Assistant: Position the prepared replacement Coldhead and carriage bracket in a cardboard
box (or proven nonferromagnetic equivalent).
11.6.51. Securely grip the cardboard box containing the Coldhead, and carefully drag along the Magnet Room
wall, then to the Tower base. Transport new Coldhead to the Coldhead sleeve without delays and in
strict conformance with this Coldhead Replacement procedure to minimize exposure to magnetic
field and degaussing of the motor.

Page 470 of 607
11.6.52. Make sure the End-of-Rail Latch is engaged, holding the Guide Rail Cassette away from the magnet,
then attach the carriage bracket to the hoist carabineer latch.

11.6.53. Securely lift the Coldhead to just below the hoist carriage, and engage the hoist's rope to hold the
Coldhead at that height. Turn the Coldhead to point parallel to the magnet's bore.
Lifting Coldhead using Hoist

Page 471 of 607
11.6.54. Using the hoist carriage's rope pull the hoist carriage along the Transport Tool Beam until the
carriage bracket is above the insertion rail. (See the previous illustration.)
11.6.55. Carefully lower the Coldhead and carriage bracket using the Coldhead hoist's rope until the carriage
bracket is just below the height of the insertion rail's end. (The hoist's rope must be engaged in the
hoist's safety cleat to support the weight and maintain control.)
11.6.56. The Coldhead motor faces up on a 3.0T magnet. Any other orientation, within 18 in. (500 mm) of the
magnet, may partially degauss the Coldhead motor. Align the carriage bracket's opening with the
insertion rail by adjusting the hoist height and horizontal position, and rotating the carriage bracket
to position the Coldhead to the left of the insertion rail with the Coldhead motor facing up.
11.6.57. Carefully slide the carriage bracket onto the insertion rail with Coldhead Motor facing up. Use the
Coldhead hoist to carry the weight. (The hoist's rope must be engaged in the hoist's safety cleat to
support the weight and maintain control.)
11.6.58. Tighten the carriage bracket's wing nut and security knob.
11.6.59. Insert the 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) Safety Bolt into the hole at the end of the insertion rail.
11.6.60. Disconnect the carabineer latch from the carriage bracket.
11.6.61. Loosen the carriage bracket's security knob and the wing nut enough to allow carriage bracket
movement along the insertion rail. (See illustration above)
11.6.62. Slide the carriage bracket and Coldhead along the insertion rail until the Coldhead nears the sleeve.
11.6.63. Adjust the carriage bracket's wing nut and lift the Coldhead slightly into full alignment with the
sleeve. (The weight of the carriage bracket and Coldhead will cause the Coldhead to approach the
sleeve slightly below straight on. Minor lifting is required for the Coldhead to enter the sleeve without
damaging the O-ring.)

Page 472 of 607
11.6.64. Lift the Coldhead slightly, and carefully push the Coldhead along the insertion rail until the Coldhead
enters the sleeve and the transition flange O-ring is inside the Sleeve Flange. Make sure NOT to pinch
the Transition Flange O-ring when inserting the Coldhead into the sleeve.
Transition Flange
O-Ring Still
Exposed

Page 473 of 607
11.6.65. Temporarily remove the Belleville washers from three bolts. (Use new Belleville washers from the
Coldhead change-out kit. Do not reuse Belleville washers.)
11.6.66. Insert the three bolts prepared without Belleville washers in the mounting holes spaced 90°, 135° and
135° around the Coldhead flange. This is the initial 3-bolt tightening pattern shown below. Make sure
to maintain an even gap between the transition and sleeve flanges around the full circumference
during insertion and tightening.
11.6.67. Disconnect the carriage bracket from the Coldhead flange. (See illustration above)
3-Bolt and 8-Bolt Tightening Patterns and Sleeve/Transition Flange Gap

Page 474 of 607
11.6.68. Thread and evenly tighten the three bolts, giving each a quarter turn at a time, until the O-ring is fully
captured into the sleeve. Immediately close the gas flow valve (green handle) on the Service Adapter.
11.6.69. Remove the three bolts and re-assemble with new Belleville washers on each bolt. Make sure the
Belleville washers are in the proper orientation (as shown below) on all eight bolts.
11.6.70. Thread and evenly tighten six Coldhead mounting bolts with Belleville washers into the Coldhead
transition flange until a 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) gap exists between the Coldhead transition flange and the
Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixture mounting bracket. (Two mounting holes are blocked by the
Coldhead Insertion/Removal Fixture bracket.)
11.6.71. Detach the insertion rail from the Coldhead Sleeve, saving the clamping bolts in their holes in the
insertions rail's sleeve clamp.
11.6.72. Carry the Insertion Rail and Carriage Bracket away from the Service Ladder/Platform, along the wall
and out of the room.
11.6.73. Assemble the remaining two mounting bolts with Belleville washers in the proper orientation into the
Coldhead transition flange. (See above.) Make gap adjustments before the Belleville washers are
compressed. Make only small adjustments at a time to prevent cocking the Coldhead and placing a
bending moment on the mounting bolts.
11.6.74. Continue tightening the Coldhead mounting bolts in the staggered pattern shown above until the gap
between the Belleville washer stacks on all bolts is 0.015 in. (0.38 mm).

Page 475 of 607
11.6.75. Gap adjustments can be made before fully tightening the mounting bolts by using two flat-head
screwdrivers wedged between the transition and sleeve flanges. Gap adjustments can also be made
by temporarily removing the desired mounting bolt, inserting and fully threading a M10 x 50 mm (2
in.) long hex-head bolt through the transition flange and using that bolt like a jack screw against a flat
washer on the sleeve flange to wedge open the gap slightly. (See below.)
Adjusting Sleeve and Transition

Flange Gap Using M10 Jackscrews

Page 476 of 607
11.6.76. If using helium gas instead of nitrogen gas (this is mandatory if helium gas is used during the
Coldhead replacement. Magnet thermal performance will be compromised if this step is skipped.):
a. Disconnect the Helium Vent Hose from the Swagelok fitting at the magnet Top Cover Plate.
Immediately close the fitting with the cap. Disconnect the helium vent hose from the Service
Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle).
b. Connect the Backfill Air Hose (5111335) to the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle).
c. Route the Backfill Air Hose to outside the magnet room.
d. Connect the In-Line Desiccant Filter's (2391747) female fitting to the Backfill Air Hose's 0.25 NPT
pipe thread outside the magnet room.
e. Make sure NOT to loosen the plugs in either end of the In-Line Desiccant Filter. Replug the filter
immediately after use to prevent filter contamination between uses.
Air Backfill Connections
f. With the vacuum pump operating, open the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle) and
vacuum valve (black handle). Evacuate the Backfill Hose for 10 seconds, then close the gas inlet
valve (green handle).
g. Evacuate the sleeve space while the vacuum valve (black handle) remains open.
h. When the vacuum reaches 100 millitorr (100 microns), close the vacuum valve (black handle).
i. Open the Service Adapter's gas flow valve (green handle) to allow air from the Backfill Air Hose to
flow into the sleeve.
j. When the pressure within the sleeve reaches 1 atmosphere, close the gas flow valve (green
handle).
k. Repeat Step “g” through Step “j” a total of ten times (i.e., ten evacuation/backfill cycles). If the
time required for the fifth pump down/backfill cycle is not noticeably less than for the first cycle,
helium gas is contaminating the backfill. Verify that the Backfill Air Hose is reaching
uncontaminated air and all connections, delivering air to the sleeve, are air tight.
l. After the tenth time, proceed to “Open the Service Adapter’s vacuum……”

Page 477 of 607
11.6.77. If using nitrogen gas:
a. With the vacuum pump operating, open the Service Adapter's vacuum valve (black handle) to
evacuate the sleeve space.
b. When the vacuum reaches 50 millitorr (50 microns), close the vacuum valve (black handle).
c. Open the Service Adapter's gas flow valve (green handle) to allow nitrogen gas to flow into the
sleeve.
d. When the pressure within the sleeve reaches 1 atmosphere, close the gas flow valve (green
handle).
e. Repeat process a second time (i.e., two evacuation/backfill cycles).
Vacuum Pump Apparatus Setup

Page 478 of 607
11.6.78. Open the Service Adapter's vacuum valve (black handle), and continue evacuating the sleeve while
performing Coldhead Interface Adjustment.
11.6.79. For Coldhead Interface Adjustment be aware of the following:
a. It is very important to establish complete contact between the second-stage heat station of the
Coldhead and sleeve to have a minimal temperature gradient and good heat transfer from the
Recondenser.
b. A poor temperature gradient will result in increased cryostat pressure and less time between a
Cryocooler shutdown from a power outage or improper cooling and the loss of helium through
the relief valve.
c. Observance of the second stage Coldhead and Recondenser temperatures is necessary to
determine that complete contact is made. The temperature difference must be within
specification.
d. It is important to perform all Coldhead adjustments prior to turning the Coldhead on. This will
allow the second stage gasket to compress and fill the gaps at the second stage interface before
the gasket cools and hardens in the sleeve.
11.6.80. Tighten the Coldhead bolts a half-turn each in the staggered pattern shown below to set the gap
between Belleville washers on all bolts evenly with a 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) feeler gauge.
a. Wait one minute, and repeat the bolt tightening, setting the gap between Belleville washers
evenly with a 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) feeler gauge.
b. After another minute, tighten all bolts again and use a 0.003 to 0.005 inch (0.08 to 0.13 mm)
feeler gauge to set the same gap between Belleville washers on all bolts.
c. Make sure an even gap is maintained between the transition and sleeve flanges around the full
circumference.

Page 479 of 607
11.6.81. Allow the Coldhead to sit warm and the sleeve to evacuate for 15 minutes, checking and maintaining
a 0.003 to 0.005 in. (0.08 to 0.13 mm) Belleville washer gap on all Coldhead bolts.
a. Do NOT apply any bending force on Aeroquip fittings while connecting/disconnecting helium
to prevent helium loss and system contamination. Support the gas lines when connecting or
disconnecting to the Coldhead at the top of the magnet or to the Compressor.
b. Make sure the helium flexlines are connected in the sequence stated below. Gas back pressure
may prevent the Coldhead from starting if gas lines are connected in the reverse sequence.
Order and technique are important when connecting helium flexlines to prevent inoperative
c. Make sure the O-ring on the female Aeroquip fitting at the Coldhead is present and in good
condition.
11.6.82. During the 15-minute period the Coldhead sits warm, connect the Coldhead gas lines in the following
sequence:
a. First, the return flexline (green mark).
b. Second, the supply flexline (yellow mark).
11.6.83. Make sure the digital vacuum meter reads <20 millitorr (<20 microns), and the sleeve was evacuated
for at least 15 minutes.
a. Close the Pump-Out Port Operator by pushing the knob in and gently rotating it clockwise (CW).
b. Rotate the knob counterclockwise (CCW) until the knob extension is fully disengaged from the
pump-out port. Do not pull the knob out at this time.
11.6.84. When the Pump-Out Port Operator is closed, close the Service Adapter's vacuum valve (black handle).
a. Observe the vacuum meter while pulling out the pump-out port knob about 2 in. (50 mm). A
decreasing reading means the vacuum has increased due to the pump-out port plug moving
during operation.
b. If no change is observed, continue with Coldhead Replacement.
11.6.85. Remove LOTO and connect the Coldhead power cable in conformance with Cryocooler Installation
and Checkout.
11.6.86. Turn off the vacuum pump, and open the gas inlet valve (green handle) to vent system. Disconnect
and remove all apparatus. If helium gas was used, remember to disconnect and plug the desiccant
filter, and reattach the quick disconnect fitting to the Service Adapter's gas inlet valve (green handle)
using two wrenches.

Page 480 of 607
11.6.87. Make sure the M12 motor shield jack screw extends ~0.5 in. (~12 mm) beyond the motor shield as
shown below, and close the Coldhead motor shield's hinged section.
11.6.88. Unscrew the motor shield jack screw to allow the motor shield to close, then secure the motor shield
closed using the M8 motor shield pin.
11.6.89. Reinstall the 0.25-20 UNC stainless steel socket-head cap screws (removed earlier) in the end of the
motor shield.
Jack Screw
Position for Motor
Shield Closing
Closing
Motor Shield

Page 481 of 607
11.6.90. Check the Belleville washer gaps, and tighten as necessary to achieve 0.003 in. to 0.005 in. (0.08 to
0.13 mm) gaps.
11.6.91. Turn the Cryocooler on, connect the MTM-101 Magnet Temperature Meter (5119507), and monitor
second stage temperatures for Coldhead and Recondenser cool-down.
11.6.92. When temperature equilibrium is reached, make sure the:
a. Recondenser temperature is between 4.42 and 4.58K.
b. Coldhead and Recondenser second-stage temperature difference is between 0.05 and 0.19K.
c. The RuO sensor reading of second stage Coldhead temperature may show a small oscillation of
0.1 to 0.3K due to Displacer motion and sampling rate. If this occurs, average the maximum and
minimum temperature readings.
d. If the readings found in the previous step are out of acceptable range, make minor adjustments
if possible, and/or repeat the Coldhead Replacement procedure with the same Coldhead.
11.6.93. Replace enclosures removed.
11.6.94. Disassemble the 3T Coldhead Transport Tool, and return to its case along with the 3T Coldhead
Insertion/Removal Tool. For ease of packing and reassembly of the Transport Tool:
a. Place each bolt back in its bolt hole as the tool is disassembled. (This keeps the bolt used for the
hole in the hole.)
b. Disassemble the Guide Rail as shown below, leaving the alignment blocks attached to one Guide
Rail section. Store the M6 x 30 mm socket-head cap screws in the kit's small plastic box.
Disconnecting
Beam Sections
11.6.95. Return the Magnet Monitor to normal operation by re-enabling the Magnet Monitor's Master Alarm
and Vessel Pressure Control or by turning Magnet Monitor power on.

Page 482 of 607
11.7. Burst Disc Replacement





PROCEDURE.


Page 483 of 607
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
46-271135P1 1 Flexible Helium Hose, 40 ft. (12.2 m)
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
NA 1 Medium Grade Extension Cord, 12 to 20 ft (3.5-6 m)
ramped.
NA 1 Flashlight
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
NA 1

Page 484 of 607
Replacement Parts
10 psig Ceramic Burst Disc
2349529 1 (If the Burst Disc from the Field Spare Parts Kit is used, order a
new Burst Disc (2349529) for the kit.)
46-281101P1 1 Plenum O-Ring
46-281101P8 1 Vent Adapter O-Ring

b. The magnet must be at zero field in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field before
starting the Burst Disc Replacement procedure.
c. The Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate must be installed when working on
d. Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete this procedure.
e. Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
f. Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open before starting this procedure.
g. If the site has Magnet Monitor proprietary software, connect to the Magnet Monitor and turn off
h. Make sure power to the Coldhead/Cryocooler is turned off before starting this Burst Disc
Replacement procedure to prevent migration of cryopumped moisture and ice formation in the
Recondenser.

Page 485 of 607
11.7.3. Burst Disc replacement is required as a result of a rupture during a magnet quench or a defect. To
avoid cryopumping, replace a ruptured Burst Disc as soon as the vent pipe has no frost on it. Ice
blocks can form inside the exhaust lines and Vertical Stack if the Burst Disc is not replaced promptly.
The Burst Disc and retaining assembly is designed to minimize gasket leaks. Burst Disc also
eliminates thermal expansion prestress problems. The design, shown below, contains a Teflon
encased O-ring mounted in the Plenum Flange to contact the cold/pressure side of the Burst Disc.
Burst Disc and Retaining

Ring Assembly
11.7.4. If the magnet is ramped, ramp the magnet down to zero field in conformance with Magnet
Rampdown to Zero Field.

Page 486 of 607
11.7.5. Make sure power to the Coldhead & Cryocooler is turned off before starting the Burst Disc
Replacement procedure to prevent migration of cryopumped moisture and ice formation in
Recondenser. Shut down the compressor as follows:
Power Switch.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line
Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 487 of 607
11.7.6. Loosen all six retaining bolts sufficiently on the Burst Disc Retaining Assembly to prevent any binding
when the Burst Disc is removed and replaced.
Burst Disc Bolt and Washer Assembly
11.7.7. Remove the top two retaining bolts. Make sure the Belleville and flat washers are placed onto the
bolts after removal in the same orientation as before removal and that the nuts are screwed onto the
bolt to retain the hardware.
Bolts and Burst Disc Removal

Page 488 of 607
11.7.8. Loosen (remove if necessary) the two middle retaining bolts. Make sure the Belleville and flat washers
are placed onto the bolts after removal in the same orientation as before removal and that the nuts
are screwed onto the bolt to retain the hardware.
11.7.9. Loosen (but do not remove) the lower two bolt-washer-nut assemblies to allow the vent stack to move
more freely. Adjust until the burst disc may slide out. Do not remove them.
Screws at the Bottom of the Vent Stack
11.7.10. Grab the metal tab on the Burst Disc, and pull straight up to remove the old Burst Disc. Note the
orientation of the Disc.
a. If the old Burst Disc binds during removal, gently spread the gap between the Plenum and the
Captured Flange with a blunt object, such as a box-end wrench.
b. Be careful not to dislodge the O-ring in the Plenum Flange or scratch the sealing surface of the
Flange when removing the old Burst Disc and inserting the new one.
c. If the O-ring is dislodged, grease the O-ring with vacuum grease and firmly reinstall it in the
groove of the Plenum Flange.
11.7.11. Clean any Burst Disc fragments out of the bottom of the Vent Adapter.

Page 489 of 607
11.7.12. Orient the new Burst Disc with the Garlok Gasket facing the Vent Adapter and the metal tab oriented
as shown below.
Burst Disc Orientation
11.7.13. Disconnect copper plumbing in the front and back. This is necessary to allow the Vent Adapter to
move freely.
11.7.14. Insert the new Disc by pushing it straight down into the vacated gap left by the old Disc as shown
below. If binding occurs, gently spread the gap between the Plenum and Captured Flange with a
blunt object, such as a nonmagnetic box-end wrench.
Burst Disc Insertion

Page 490 of 607
11.7.15. When the Burst Disc is fully in place, replace the retaining bolts and washers in the same orientation
and position from which they were removed. Do not overtighten the retaining bolts in the following
step. Continued tightening after the Belleville washers are flattened will result in over torqueing and
may damage the Burst Disc. Bolts must be tightened in a “star” or “opposing” pattern.
3 2
5
6
1
4
11.7.16. Tighten the retaining bolts (if required, use a propane torch to remove ice and warm the bolts before
tightening):
a. Hand tighten all six nuts on the vent adapter.
b. Tighten the bolt at the 1st Position ¾ turn.
c. Hand tighten the remaining bolts.
d. Tighten the bolt at the 2nd Position ¾ turn.
1st Position 2nd Position

Page 491 of 607
e. Hand tighten the remaining bolts.
f. Tighten the bolt at the 3rd Position ¾ turn.
g. Hand tighten the remaining bolts.
h. Tighten the bolt at the 4th Position ¾ turn.
3rd Position 4th Position
i. Hand tighten the remaining bolts.

j. Tighten the bolt at the 5th Position ¾ turn.
k. Hand tighten the remaining bolts.
l. Tighten the bolt at the 6th Position ¾ turn.
5th Position 6th Position
m. Perform a leak check.

n. If a leak is present, repeat tightening sequence, tightening by 1/4 turn until the leak stops.
11.7.17. Make sure the metal tag on the Burst Disc is not in contact with anything metal. (This is to eliminate a
possible source of spike noise.)
11.7.18. Leak test the plenum O-ring gasket side of the Burst Disc. Repair any leaks found.

Page 492 of 607
11.7.19. If a magnet fill is not immediately scheduled at Disc replacement, pressurize the magnet with helium
gas to 4 psig:
a. Connect helium gas hose 46-271135P16 to a cylinder (with Regulator 46-258151P1) of 99.999%
helium gas (GHe).
b. Remove the 0.50 in. NPT plug on the V3 plumbing. (See illustrations below.)
c. Connect the helium hose's 0.5 inch NPT fitting to V3.
d. Open the cylinder's regulator and pressurize the magnet to 4 psig.
e. When 4 psig magnet pressure is reached, close the cylinder's regulator, and disconnect the hose
from the magnet.
Temporary Helium
Gas Pressurization
Set-Up, LCC Magnet
11.7.20. Leak check the Burst Disc installation and the entire plumbing system in conformance with
Temperature, Pressure, & Leak Troubleshooting.

Page 493 of 607
11.8. Shim Lead and Baffle Replacement
The Shim Lead Assembly is designed with a replaceable Baffle Assembly. Following a quench, the Shim
Lead Assembly will need to be removed to replace the Baffle Assembly. The Shim Lead Assembly should
only need replacing if it is determined that a fault exists.



BEFORE STARTING THE BAFFLE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.


PROCEDURE.


Page 494 of 607
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
46-294872G3 1 Sav-Con and Instrumentation Lead Installation/Removal Kit
46-271135P1 1 Flexible Helium Hose, 40 ft. (12.2 m)
ramped.
NA 1 Flashlight
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
Consumables
NA 1
2119594 or Permatex (1 oz. tube: 2119594) or Bostik (4 oz. can: 46-
1
46-294151P8 294151P8) antiseize lubricant
46-252065P19 1 Roll Teflon Tape

Page 495 of 607
Replacement Parts
Shim Lead Connector Housing Assembly (2180821) or
2180821 or
1 Reduced Height Shim Lead Connector Housing Assembly
2283170
(2283170)
2180818 1 Baffle Assembly
46-281101P5 1 Teflon Shim Lead O-Ring

♦ Make sure the area is secure and that all required Warning Signs are posted to meet the safety
♦ The magnet must be at zero field in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field before
starting the Baffle Replacement procedure.
♦ The Service Platform with Side Shield/Side Protection Plate must be installed when working on
♦ Removal of some magnet enclosure components may be required to complete this procedure.
♦ Make sure the Magnet Room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
♦ Make sure the Magnet Room door is propped open before starting this procedure.
♦ If the site has Magnet Monitor proprietary software, connect to the Magnet Monitor and turn off
11.8.3. Ramp the magnet down to zero field in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.

Page 496 of 607
11.8.4. Shut down the compressor as follows:
Power Switch.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch

Page 497 of 607
11.8.5. Slowly open Vent Valve V2 and vent the magnet until internal pressure is <0.3 psig on the Cryostat
Pressure Gauge. Close V2.

Page 498 of 607
11.8.6. Disconnect Connectors J1-A from P1-A and P5 from J5 on the Shim Lead Connector Housing. See the
illustration below.
Shim Lead Assembly
11.8.7. Disengage the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.

Page 499 of 607
11.8.8. Perform the following two steps rapidly to prevent cryopumping of air into the Vertical Penetration.
Make sure the Lexan Cover Plate (46-294765G1) is on the Service Ladder/Platform before removing
the Top Cover Assembly.
a. Loosen and remove the eight 0.25-20 UNC retaining bolts along with the eight 0.25 in. nominal
flat washers, and remove the Top Cover Assembly.
b. Immediately cover the Vertical Penetration with the Lexan Cover Plate (46-294765G1). Alignment
of the Lexan Plate's scribe mark to the Vent Adaptor is not necessary for the Baffle Replacement
procedure.
Lexan Cover Plate
11.8.9. Secure the Lexan Cover Plate onto the Vertical Penetration with the eight .25-20UNC retaining bolts
and the 0.25 in. nominal flat washers removed in the previous step.

Page 500 of 607
11.8.10. Baffle Replacement - Replacement of the Baffle Assembly is necessary after a quench or if damaged
when the Shim Lead Assembly is removed.
a. Remove the Shim Lead Assembly as previously described above.
b. Place the Shim Lead Assembly in the Engaged position in conformance with Shim Lead
Engagement and Disengagement. This is necessary for the Baffle Assembly to clear the stainless
steel Guide Sleeve. (See the illustration below.)
Baffle Assembly
Replacement
c. Remove the three hex-head screws that secure the Baffle Assembly to the Shim Lead Assembly.
d. Remove the defective Baffle Assembly and discard.
e. Install the Baffle Assembly (2180818) by carefully lifting near the slit of each baffle while
simultaneously pushing the Baffle Assembly onto the Shim Lead Assembly. (See illustration
above.)
◊ Starting from the bottom of the Baffle Assembly and working toward the top, continue this
process until the Baffle Assembly is attached to the Shim Lead Assembly G10 Tube.
◊ Make sure the Baffle Assembly circular cutouts are aligned to the circular cutouts in the
Rigid Baffle before securing to the Shim Lead.
f. Secure the Baffle Assembly to the Shim Lead Assembly using the three screws removed earlier.
g. Place the Shim Lead Assembly in the “Disengaged" position in conformance with Shim Lead
Engagement and Disengagement. Tighten the compression fitting on the Shim Lead Assembly.

Page 501 of 607
11.8.11. Reinstall the Shim Lead Assembly
a. Make sure the Vertical Penetration is clear of any obstructions before inserting/extracting any
tools/apparatus to prevent possible magnet damage.
b. Check for icing on the Sav-Con Connector by shining a flashlight through the Lexan Cover Plate.
c. If any icing exists, remove the ice by directing a 3 to 5 psig flow of warm helium gas at the
affected areas. This is done by removing the ¼ in. Pipe Plug in the Lexan Plate and inserting the
Helium Gas Tube to the ice point.
d. If the Shim Lead is being replaced:
I. Remove the Male Connector from the defective Shim Lead Assembly Connector Housing.
II. Place two ¼ in. Blank-Off Caps (if not already in place) on the open ends at the Male
Connector.
III. Wrap Teflon tape onto the male threads of the Male Connector before threading into the
replacement Shim Lead Connector Housing. (See illustration below.)
IV. Mount the Male Connector to the replacement Shim Lead Assembly Connector Housing
(normal height housing: 2180821; reduced height housing: 2283170).
Shim Lead Assembly

Page 502 of 607
e. Make sure that a functional Shim Lead Assembly is on the Service Ladder/Platform and the Shim
Lead is in the retracted position. Do NOT leave the Vertical Penetration uncovered for any
significant period of time as cryo-pumping and icing may result.
f. Loosen and remove the eight 0.25-20 UNC retaining bolts along with the eight 0.25 in. nominal
flat washers and remove the Lexan Cover Plate.
g. Inspect the Shim Lead O-Ring (46-281101P5) at the top of the Vertical Penetration. Replace if
nicked, scratched or damaged. Use vacuum grease when installing the O-ring.
h. Make sure the Blank-Off Caps are in place and the Shim Lead is carefully inserted into the
Vertical Penetration to prevent cold shock and possible permanent damage of the Shim Leads.
i. Carefully replace the Shim Lead Assembly into the Vertical Penetration. Make sure that the Shim
Lead O-Ring (46-281101P6) is properly seated in the Vertical Penetration.
j. Align the scribe mark on the Shim Lead Assembly Cover Plate with the Vertical Penetration
Exhaust Plenum.
k. Secure the Shim Lead Assembly to the Vertical Penetration with the 0.25-20 UNC retaining bolts
and the 0.25 in. nominal flat and lock washers removed earlier.
◊ Use of Permatex (1 oz. tube, 2119594) or Bostik (4 oz. can, 46-294151P8) anti-seize lubricant
is recommended.
◊ The Shim Lead Connector is keyed and must be aligned with the keyway in the Sav-Con
Connector in order to engage. When contact is felt between the Shim Lead andthe Sav-Con
Connector, the Shim Lead will depress approximately ¼ in. (6 mm) to fully seat the
connectors.
l. Loosen the compression fitting, and push the Shim Lead down to engage the connector. See the
illustration below.

Page 503 of 607
m. Tighten the compression fitting.
n. Open Helium Vent Valve V2 and vent the Cryostat down to 0.2 psig.
o. Remove the Blank-Off Cap, reconnect the ¼ in. Shim Lead Exhaust Plumbing to the Male
Connector on the Shim Lead Connector Housing, and tighten and leak test the fitting.
p. Allow the Cryostat to build pressure to 1 psig, then check for leaks around the O-ring in the
Vertical Penetration and at the Shim Lead compression fittings. Repair any leaks found. Engage
the Shim Lead in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement.
q. Make sure Connectors J1-A and P5 are connected to the Shim Lead Connector Housing at P1-A
and J5, respectively.
11.8.12. Perform 4psi leak check in conformance with Leak Troubleshooting section. Repair any leaks found.
11.8.13. Reramp in conformance with Ramping Magnet to Field.
11.8.14. After the magnet is ramped and shimmed (if the Baffle Assembly was replaced), stable, and all
ramping and shimming cables are removed from the magnet, place the Shim Lead Assembly in the
Disengaged position in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement.

Page 504 of 607
11.9. Sav-Con Connector Replacement





PROCEDURE.


Page 505 of 607
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
Nonmagnetic Pipe Wrench, 1.75 in. (45 mm) minimum jaw
NA 1
opening
NA 1 Lumber, 2 in. x 4 in. x 24 in. (50 mm x 100 mm x 600 mm)
ramped.
NA 1 Flashlight
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)

Page 506 of 607
Consumables
NA 1
Replacement Parts
46-281101P5 1 Teflon Shim Lead O-Ring (included in Field Spares Kit, 5265652


Page 507 of 607
Power Switch.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch
11.9.5. Make sure the Vertical Penetration is clear of any obstructions before inserting/extracting any

Page 508 of 607
11.9.6. Slowly open Vent Valve V2 and vent the magnet until internal pressure is <0.2 psig on the Cryostat
Pressure Gauge. Close V2.

Page 509 of 607
11.9.7. Sav-Con Connector Removal
a. Assemble the Sav-Con Connector Insertion/Removal Tool (46-294310G1) to the Lexan Tool Plate
(46-294306G1) by removing the knob on the tool shaft, and inserting the shaft through the
center hole in the Lexan plate. (See the illustration below.)
Sav-Con Connector Replacement/Removal Tool

(from Sav-Con and Instrumentation Lead Installation/Removal Kit)
b. Position the connector end of the Sav-Con Connector Insertion/Removal Tool toward the Lexan
Tool Plate, and align the tool's keyway to the dimple shown below.
Assembling Sav-Con Tool

and Plate
c. Tighten the knurled nut to hold the tool in place, then reassemble the knob to the tool's shaft.

Page 510 of 607
d. Remove the Shim Lead Assembly and Instrumentation Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim
Lead and Baffle Replacement and Instrumentation Lead Assembly Replacement, respectively.
Store carefully.
e. Immediately position the assembled Sav-Con Tool and Plate (shown above) on top of the Vertical
Penetration with arrow oriented as shown below.
◊ Immediately after the Shim Lead Assembly is removed, quickly place the assembled Sav-
Con Tool and Plate (shown above) onto the Vertical Penetration to prevent icing.
◊ Always replace the Shim Lead O-Ring when performing Sav-Con Connector Replacement.
Sav-Con Tool and Plate

Assembly Alignment to
Turret
f. Allow the flow of helium gas, exiting through holes in the Lexan Tool Plate, to subside.
g. Make sure a new Shim Lead O-Ring (46-281101P5) is in its groove on top of the Vertical
Penetration, and firmly sandwiched between the Sav-Con Tool Assembly and the Vertical
Penetration.
h. Bolt the Sav-Con Tool Assembly's Lexan Plate in place using the bolts removed earlier.
i. Shine a flashlight through the Lexan Tool Plate, and locate the Sav-Con Connector and its
retaining screws. Check for any ice build-up.
1. If ice builds up on the Sav-Con Connector or associated hardware during Sav-Con
Connector Replacement, insert a helium gas tube through one of the holes in the Lexan
Tool Plate to the iced area.
2. Blow warm helium gas at 15 psig to remove the ice, then allow the flow of helium gas to
subside.

Page 511 of 607
j. Locate the two Sav-Con Connector Retaining Screws directly below insertion holes in the Lexan
Tool Plate. (See the illustration below.)
◊ Sav-Con Retaining Screws are captured by a locking nut under the Sav-Con Flange to
prevent them from falling off the flange during removal.
Sav-Con Connector
Retaining Screw and Keyway
Locations
k. Lower the Screw Insertion/Removal Tool (46-294292G1) through one of the two appropriate
holes to contact the Allen head on either Sav-Con Retaining Screw.
l. Push downward to engage the Screw Insertion/Removal Tool with a Sav-Con Retaining Screw
and loosen each screw.
m. Withdraw the Screw Insertion/Removal Tool.
n. Loosen the knurled nut holding the Sav-Con Connector Insertion/Removal Tool.

Page 512 of 607
o. Push downward and carefully align the keyways of the two mating connectors, then seat the
Sav-Con Connector Insertion/Removal Tool onto the Sav-Con Connector. (See the illustration
below.)
◊ The Sav-Con Tool Screws are needed to grip the Sav-Con Connector for easy removal.
Sav-Con Tool Assembly and

Connector Mating
p. Insert the Screw Insertion/Removal Tool through the appropriate holes in the Lexan Tool Plate,
and engage each screw on the Sav-Con Connector Tool.
q. Carefully thread the Sav-Con Tool Screws into the threaded bolt heads of the Sav-Con Connector
and tighten lightly.
r. Remove the Screw Insertion/Removal Tools.
s. Pull upward with the Sav-Con Tool to remove the Sav-Con Connector from the G10 Connector/
Platform. Tighten the knurled nut to secure the tool.
t. Remove the Lexan Tool Plate and Sav-Con Tool Assembly, and quickly replace with the Lexan Top
Cover.

Page 513 of 607
11.9.8. Sav-Con Connector Replacement
b. Remove the old Sav-Con Connector from the tool, and insert a replacement Sav-Con Connector
onto the Sav-Con Tool. Lightly tighten the tool's screws onto the Sav-Con threaded bolt-head
screws.
c. Remove the Lexan Top Cover from the Vertical Penetration, and immediately position the Sav-
Con Tool Assembly (shown below) over the Vertical Penetration. Orient the scribe markon the
Lexan Tool Plate towards the Vent Adapter.
Sav-Con Tool Assembly and

Connector Mating
d. Allow the flow of helium gas, exiting through holes in the Lexan Tool Plate, to subside.
e. Make sure a new Shim Lead O-Ring (46-281101P5) is in its groove on top of the Vertical
Penetration, and firmly sandwiched between the Sav-Con Tool Assembly and the Vertical
Penetration.
f. Bolt the Sav-Con Tool Assembly's Lexan Plate in place using the bolts removed earlier.
g. Shine a flashlight through the Lexan Tool Plate, and locate the Sav-Con Connector and its
retaining screws. Check for any ice build-up.
1. If ice builds up on the Sav-Con Connector or associated hardware during Sav-Con
Connector Replacement, insert a helium gas tube through one of the holes in the Lexan
Tool Plate to the iced area.
2. Blow warm helium gas at 15 psig to remove the ice, then allow the flow of helium gas to
subside.

Page 514 of 607
h. Loosen the knurled nut and lower the Sav-Con Tool Assembly.
i. Carefully engage the Sav-Con Connector into the mating G10 Connector/Platform.
◊ Always make sure to align all keyways on all connectors.
j. Locate the Sav-Con Connector Retaining Screws directly below insertion holes in the Lexan Tool
Plate.
k. Lower the Screw Insertion/Removal Tool to contact the Allen head of the Sav-Con Retaining
Screws.
l. Engage and hand tighten the Sav-Con Retaining Screws.
m. Withdraw the Screw Insertion/Removal Tool.
n. Unscrew the Sav-Con Tool Assembly's screws from the Sav-Con Connector. Disengage, pull the
Sav-Con Tool Assembly upward, and secure it in place with the knurled nut.
o. Remove the Sav-Con Tool Assembly from the Vertical Penetration, and replace with the Lexan
Top Cover.
11.9.9. Check for and remove any ice before reinstalling the Shim Lead Assembly.
11.9.10. Inspect the Shim Lead O-Ring (46-281101P6) at the top of the Vertical Penetration. Replace if nicked,
scratched or damaged. Use vacuum grease when installing the O-ring.
11.9.11. Reinstall the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead and Baffle Replacement and the
Shim Lead exhaust plumbing.
11.9.12. Perform 4psi leak check in conformance with Leak Troubleshooting section. Repair any leaks found.
11.9.13. Engage the Shim Lead in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement before
reramping the magnet.
11.9.14. Ramp the magnet in conformance with Ramping Magnet to Field section.

Page 515 of 607
11.10. Instrumentation Lead Assembly Replacement





PROCEDURE.


Page 516 of 607
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
NA 1
Voltage Tester
46-306883G1 1 Heat Gun
Nonmagnetic Pipe Wrench, 1.75 in. (45 mm) minimum jaw
NA 1
opening
NA 1 Lumber, 2 in. x 4 in. x 24 in. (50 mm x 100 mm x 600 mm)
ramped.
NA 1 Flashlight
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)

Page 517 of 607
Consumables
NA 1
2119594 or Permatex (1 oz. tube: 2119594) or Bostik (4 oz. can: 46-
1
46-294151P8 294151P8) antiseize lubricant
46-252065P19 1 Roll Teflon Tape
NA 1 Roll Masking Tape
Replacement Parts
2354044 or Instrumentation Lead Assembly (G10 Sleeve Assembly or G10
1
5130298 Sleeve Assembly with Latching LEMO)
46-281101P5 1 Teflon Shim Lead O-Ring (included in Field Spares Kit,5265652
Teflon Instrumentation Lead Connector Port O-Ring (included
46-281101P9 1
in Field Spares Kit, 5265652
Teflon Vertical Penetration O-Ring (included in Field Spares
46-281101P6 1
Kit, 5265652


Page 518 of 607
Power Switch.
Main Power Switch
Helium Supply
Helium Return
Drive Switch
Coldhead Power Line

Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Water Lines
CH Drive Switch
11.10.5. Turn off all level sensor, diode and main heater sources. Disconnect the Instrumentation Box
Assembly (5306594) at connector P1-C.
Instrumentation
Connector Location

Page 519 of 607
11.10.7. Check the Instrumentation Connector Housing (identified above) at the Plenum (G-10 Sleeve) end after
disconnecting P1-C. A red groove around the forward end of the housing indicates a ‘locking’ LEMO
connector, which requires the use of Latching Instrumentation LEMO Connector Removal Tool
5145459 for removal.
11.10.8. Make sure the Lexan Top Cover 46-294765G1 (with ¼ in. Pipe Plugs already installed) is immediately
accessible for mounting on the Plenum Assembly when the Baffle Assembly is removed.
46-294872G3

Page 520 of 607
11.10.9. Open Vent Valve V2 to depressurize the Cryostat to 0.2 psig. Close V2.

Page 521 of 607
11.10.10. Loosen and remove the four retaining bolts holding the Vent Adaptor to the Plenum Assembly.
Instrumentation
Connector Location
11.10.11. Remove the Shim Lead Assembly according to Shim Lead and Baffle Replacement.
11.10.12. Immediately place the Lexan Top Cover over the opening, and secure (finger tight) with the eight bolts
removed earlier. (Aligning the scribe mark on Lexan Top Cover towards the Vent is not necessary for
this Instrumentation Lead Assembly Replacement procedure.)
11.10.13. Disconnect the 0.25 inch (6 mm) Instrumentation Lead Vent Line from the Male Connector on top of
the Instrumentation Connector housing.
Feed-Through
Instrumentation Assembly and O-Ring
Connector Housing
Instrumentation
Lead Male
Connector
Location
Plenum Assembly
11.10.14. Loosen and remove the Male Connector from the top of the defective Instrumentation Lead Assembly.
11.10.15. Loosen the compression fitting, and remove the four socket-head bolts holding the Feed-Thru
Assembly to the Plenum Assembly. (See illustration above.)
11.10.16. Remove the Feed-Thru Assembly and O-Ring from the Instrumentation Lead Assembly.

Page 522 of 607
11.10.17. Disconnect plumbing at the V2 Valve outlet.
Instrumentation
Connector Location
V2 Valve Outlet
Disconnect Location
11.10.18. Remove the eight bolts securing the Plenum Assembly to the Vertical Penetration Flange.
11.10.19. Remove the Plenum Assembly by carefully lifting the edge away from connector enough to clear the
flange of the Instrumentation Lead Assembly, and slide it off the end of the Instrumentation
Connector Housing.
Plenum Assembly Removal

Page 523 of 607
11.10.20. Removal Using Latching Instrumentation LEMO Connector Removal Tool 5145459 (process must be
performed rapidly to prevent cryopumping and frost buildup.)
a. Loosen and remove the four bolts holding the Instrumentation Assembly Sleeve to the Vertical
Penetration Flange. (See the illustration below.)
b. Locate Latching Instrumentation LEMO Connector Removal Tool 5145459, and warm it with the
heat gun to remove any moisture.
◊ Make sure there is no moisture or other contamination on the Connector Insertion/Removal
Tool.
◊ Any moisture remaining on the tool may result in the tool freezing to the connector.
c. Shine a flashlight through the Instrumentation Assembly Sleeve, and inspect the Instrumentation
Lead Connector for frost. Remove visible frost by inserting a helium gas hose and blowing warm
helium gas at 15 psig on the frosted location.
d. With the flashlight still shining through the Instrumentation Assembly Sleeve, insert the Latching
Instrumentation LEMO Connector Removal Tool into the Vertical Penetration between the
Instrumentation Lead Connector and the negative (-) Main Lead Extension Connector. (See
below.) (Repeated application of helium gas on the Instrumentation Lead Connector may be
needed if excessive icing prevents disconnection of the Instrumentation Lead Connector.)
Attaching
Latching
Instrumentatio
n LEMO
Connector
Removal Tool
5145459

Page 524 of 607
e. With the open section of the holder facing toward the LEMO connector, turn the Latching
Instrumentation LEMO Connector Removal Tool counterclockwise (CCW) and forward, snapping
the tool onto the LEMO connector. See illustrations below.
G10 Platform
Connectors
Attaching Latching Instrumentation

LEMO Connector Removal Tool
to Instrumentation Lead Connector
f. Press the knob down, and turn the knob clockwise to screw the Latching Instrumentation LEMO
Connector Removal Tool onto the LEMO connector, until fully engaged.
g. Press the knob down, and pull the handle upward until the LEMO connector disengages.
h. Remove the Latching Instrumentation LEMO Connector Removal Tool and the Instrumentation
Lead Assembly.
i. Immediately place the Lexan Plenum Cover (46-318561P1) over the Vertical Penetration Flange,
and secure with the bolts removed previously.

Page 525 of 607
11.10.21. Instrumentation Lead Replacement
b. Wrap a piece of masking tape around the end of the Connector Insertion Removal Tool opposite
the threaded end. (The tape will be used to mark the location of the LEMO Connector keyway in.)
c. Screw the Connector Insertion/Removal Tool onto the new LEMO Connector. Place a mark on the
masking tape to indicate the location of the LEMO Connector keyway. (See below.)
LEMO Connector
Keyway Identification
d. Remove the Lexan Plenum Cover installed earlier.

e. Install a new Turret O-Ring (46-281101P6) on the Vertical Penetration Flange for the new
Instrumentation Lead Assembly. Use vacuum grease when installing the new O-ring.
f. Warm the insertion end of the Instrumentation Lead Assembly and the Connector
Insertion/Removal Tool to remove any moisture.
g. Insert the new Instrumentation Lead Assembly into the Penetration Flange. (Study the location of
the keyways on the Connector P101 and on J101 for easy installation. Before connecting the
Instrumentation Lead's LEMO Connector P101 to J101, and make sure there is no ice build-up on
J101.)
h. Secure the new Instrumentation Lead Assembly to the Penetration Flange with the four bolts
removed earlier.

Page 526 of 607
i. Shine a flashlight into the Vertical Penetration. Position the Instrumentation Lead Connector
(using the previously attached Connector Insertion/Removal Tool) at the bottom of the Vertical
Penetration, and insert into J101 until properly seated. (See above and below for keyway
alignment.)
Position of LEMO
Connector Keyway
j. Unscrew the Connector Insertion/Removal Tool from the Instrumentation Lead Connector and
remove it.
k. Quickly replace the Turret O-Ring (46-281101P6), and mount the Plenum Assembly with its new
Instrumentation Lead Assembly onto the Vertical Penetration Flange using the bolts removed in.
(Apply vacuum grease to the O-ring before replacement.)
l. Install a new Instrumentation Lead Connector Port O-Ring (46-281101P9) and the Feed-Thru
Assembly that was removed earlier. Tighten the compression nut.
m. Clean the threads of the Male Connector removed earlier and wrap with Teflon Tape. Install the
Male Connector on the new Instrumentation Lead Assembly and tighten until snug.
n. Attach the 0.25 inch (6 mm) Instrumentation Vent Line removed earlier.
o. Reconnect the plumbing assembly to the V2 valve outlet.
p. Reconnect the Vent Adaptor to the Plenum Assembly with the bolts removed earlier. (The Vent
Adapter will sag due to the weight of the vent, making reconnection difficult. Use 2 x 4 x 24 in. (50
x 100 x 600 mm) lumber to assist in leveraging the Vent Adapter to align the bolt holes.)
q. Reinstall the burst disc.
r. Remove the Lexan Top Cover.
s. Immediately install the Baffle Assembly into the Vertical Penetration with the scribe mark on the
Baffle Assembly Cover Plate aligned with the Vertical Penetration Exhaust Plenum. (Carefully
lower the Baffle Assembly into the Vertical Penetration to prevent damage to the baffles.) Secure
with the eight ¼-20 screws and washers removed previously.

Page 527 of 607
t. Prepare the Shim Lead Assembly by replacing the old O-ring with a new Shim Lead O-Ring (46-
281101P5). Use vacuum grease when installing the O-ring.
u. Immediately install the Shim Lead Assembly into the Vertical Penetration with the scribe mark on
the Shim Lead Cover Plate aligned with the Vertical Penetration Exhaust Plenum. Secure with the
eight ¼-20 screws and washers removed previously.
◊ Carefully lower the Shim Lead Assembly into the Vertical Penetration to prevent damage to
the baffles.
◊ The Shim Lead Assembly must be in the Disengaged position.
◊ Check for ice build-up on the mating Shim Lead Assembly Connector J100 before installing
the Shim Lead Assembly.
v. Reconnect the 0.25 inch (6 mm) Exhaust Plumbing to side of the Shim Lead Receptacle Box.
w. Pressurize the magnet with helium gas to 4 psig:
1. Connect helium gas hose 46-271135P16 to a cylinder (with Regulator 46-258151P1) of
99.999% helium gas (GHe).
2. Remove the 0.50 in. NPT plug on the V3 plumbing. (See illustrations below.)
3. Connect the helium hose's 0.5 inch NPT fitting to V3.
4. Open the cylinder's regulator and pressurize the magnet to 4 psig.
5. When 4 psig magnet pressure is reached, close the cylinder's regulator, and disconnect the
hose from the magnet.
Temporary Helium
Gas Pressurization
Set-Up, LCC Magnet

Page 528 of 607
11.10.22. Leak test the Instrumentation Lead and Shim Lead Assembly mountings and all plumbing connections
using Snoop Liquid Leak Detector (46-252065P71). Correct any leaks found.
11.10.23. Reconnect P1-C to J1-C, and perform the checks as outlined in Temperature Sensor Checks.
11.10.24. Engage the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and Disengagement.
11.10.25. Ramp the magnet back up to field in conformance with Ramping Magnet to Field.
11.10.26. Disengage the Shim Lead Assembly in conformance with Shim Lead Engagement and
Disengagement.
11.10.27. Check the Instrumentation Lead and LEMO connector for damage by performing the MRU checks in
Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) Checks. Verify proper readings on the MagMon3.
11.10.28. Perform all MRU checks upon completion of Instrumentation Lead Assembly replacement to make
sure no Instrumentation Lead or LEMO connector damage has occurred. Correct any damage found
by reconnecting the LEMO connector or replacing the Instrumentation Lead Assembly.

Page 529 of 607
11.11. Preparation for Site Removal
Perform the following procedures from this manual in sequence:
11.11.1. Ramp down the magnet in conformance with Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field.
11.11.2. If the magnet is to be moved by air or sea or over land inside a closed container such as an “ISO" box,
remove the liquid helium from the helium vessel using the procedure in Cryostat Warm-Up, to warm
the magnet to > 5K. Large quantities of liquid helium in the helium vessel may be recovered using the
procedure in Cryostat Warm-Up if empty helium Dewars are available.
11.11.3. When the bottom diode temperature starts to rise the liquid helium has been removed and the
procedure may be stopped.
11.11.4. Removal of helium from the helium vessel by breaking magnet vacuum will result in large quantities
of helium gas being vented through the magnet vent system and damage to the internal magnet
insulation.
11.11.5. Move the magnet in conformance with Direction 5475706, Magnet Handling for 1.5T R and HM Series
Magnets and 3.0T W, WB and UA Series Magnets. The latest revision of this document is available
through the support documentation library at gehealthcare.com or through your GE Healthcare Field
Service Representative.

Page 530 of 607
11.12. Depressurizing Cryocooler Items for Disposal
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD !

HIGHLY PRESSURIZED AIR BLAST MAY CAUSE EYE INJURY. WEAR GLOVES AND GOGGLES WHEN
PERFORMING ANY OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES.

5262081 1 Male Relief Tool
5272260 1 Female Relief Tool
NA 1 Adjustable Wrench
11.12.1. Depressurizing an Adsorber

a. Being sure to wear gloves and eye protection. Point tool away from people or any body parts.
b. Screw on the female relief tool until you hear the helium gas escaping.
c. After the helium gas has bled off, remove tool and fitting off of the adsorber to eliminate the
chance of pressure building back up.
d. Dispose of the adsorber in whatever fashion is appropriate for your locality. It cannot be reused
or rebuilt.
Female Tool on the Adsorber Adsorber with

Female Tool Removed

Page 531 of 607
11.12.2. Depressurizing Helium Compressor Lines
a. Being sure to wear gloves and eye protection, point tool away from people or any body parts.
b. Screw on the male tool until you hear the helium gas escaping.
c. After helium gas has bled off, remove tool and fitting off of the end of hose to eliminate the
chance of pressure building back up.
d. Dispose of the hose in whatever fashion is appropriate for your locality. It cannot be reused or
rebuilt.
Male Tool on Compressor

Compressor Line with
Line
Male Tool Removed
11.12.3. Depressurizing the Compressor

a. Being sure to wear glove and eye protection. Point tool away from people or body parts.
b. Screw on the female tool until you hear the helium gas escaping.
c. After the helium gas has bled off, remove the tool.
Female Tool on Compressor Compressor with Female Tool Removed

Page 532 of 607
Chapter 12, Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field

12. Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field


EXPLOSION HAZARD!
LIQUID CRYOGENS CAN LIQUEFY ATMOSPHERIC OXYGEN, PRODUCING A HIGHLY COMBUSTIBLE
OXYGEN LIQUID. NO SMOKING IN MAGNET AND CRYOGEN STORAGE ROOMS!



SHOCK.
POWER SUPPLY.

Page 533 of 607

PROCEDURE.

• LOCATE POWER SUPPLIES AS FAR AWAY FROM THE MAGNET AS THE CABLES AND ROOM GEOMETRY
ALLOWS.

THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH, RAPIDLY RELEASING CRYOGENIC GASES IF THE LIQUID HELIUM LEVEL
DROPS TOO LOW DURING MAGNET RAMPDOWN. MAKE SURE THE MAGNET IS ≥70% FULL OF LIQUID
HELIUM BEFORE STARTING TO RAMP DOWN THE MAGNET.

TURNING ON THE MAIN HEATER SWITCH WHILE PERFORMING RESISTANCE CHECKS WILL CAUSE A
MAGNET QUENCH. MAKE SURE THE MAIN HEATER SWITCH STAYS OFF DURING RESISTANCE CHECKS.

IF THE AXIAL SHIM HEATER SWITCH IS NOT “ON” DURING THE ENTIRE RAMPDOWN PROCESS, A
MAGNET QUENCH CAN OCCUR AND IRREPARABLE SHIM COIL DAMAGE CAN RESULT. THE POWER
SUPPLY WILL NOT PASS CURRENT TO THE MAIN LEAD EXTENSIONS WITH THE AXIAL SHIM HEATER
OFF. MAKE SURE THE AXIAL SHIM HEATER SWITCH REMAINS “ON” DURING THIS ENTIRE PROCEDURE.

INCORRECT CONNECTION POLARITY AND POWER SUPPLY CURRENT SETTINGS CAN CAUSE THE
MAGNET'S MAIN COILS TO QUENCH AND CAN BURN UP THE POWER SUPPLY WHEN TURNING ON THE
MAIN SWITCH.


Page 534 of 607

APPLYING POWER THROUGH THE SHIM LEAD, BEFORE THE SHIM LEAD IS SUFFICIENTLY COOLED OR
WHILE THE SHIM LEAD'S VENT VALVE IS CLOSED, MAY RESULT IN A MAGNET QUENCH. MAKE SURE THE
SHIM LEAD'S NUPRO VENT VALVE IS OPEN AND FROSTING IS VISIBLE ON THE SHIM LEAD HOUSING
BEFORE TURNING ON THE SHIM COIL POWER SUPPLY.


THE MAGNET MAY QUENCH IF THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY EXPERIENCES LARGE OUTPUT
FLUCTUATIONS AND/OR EXCESSIVE RIPPLE. MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS ROUTINELY
CALIBRATED AT AN APPROVED FACILITY.

Page 535 of 607
12.1. Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field, Tools and Test Equipment
5393536
1 per
person
NA
person pants)
1 per
person
1 per
NA Safety Glasses
person
1 per
person
1 pkg
of 25
46-194427P321 1
5395802 or 1 of the
5395802-100 noted
46-294204G1 or Fixed Main Lead Extension (46-294204G1) or Flexible Main
1
2287029 Lead Extension (2287029, for low ceiling height sites)
2353394-3 1 1000 Amp Ramp Cable Kit with Ground (2353394-4)
2193922 or
2276755 or 1
5116737
Collector 5103278)
2217315 1 Auxiliary Rampdown Cable
Digital Voltmeter (DVM), Volt- Ohm Meter (VOM) or non-
NA 1
Retractable Shim Lead Assembly (2173354) or
2173354 or
1 Retractable Shim Lead Assembly, Short (2285073) for site with
2285073
low ceiling height
5271012 1 3T Rampdown Unit

Page 536 of 607
Tools & Test Equipment, continued
ramped.
Refer to Service
Platform Set-Up
NA 1
Representative)
NA 1 Cardboard Box or Nonferromagnetic Frame

Page 537 of 607
12.2. Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field, Required Conditions
Rampdown is performed using the Shim Lead unless the Shim Lead cannot be engaged into the Shim Lead
Connector (P100) in the magnet Vertical Penetration due to ice or damage to the P100's Sav-Con
Connector. In this case, rampdown is performed using Auxiliary Rampdown Cable 2217315.
requirements stated in Chapter 1, Safety, before starting rampdown procedure.
12.2.3. Locate the Main Power Supply outside the magnet room, and remove all loose ferromagnetic
materials from the Magnet Room before starting magnet rampdown.
12.2.4. Make sure the magnet room exhaust fan is on and operational before starting this procedure.
12.2.5. Make sure the magnet room door is propped open (or the hatch is opened if a mobile van) before
12.2.6. Fill the magnet to the required helium level in conformance with Liquid Helium Fill before continuing
with this Magnet Rampdown to Zero Field procedure.
12.2.7. Set up MetroLab Teslameter (46-255839P2) and appropriate Teslameter Probe for single-point
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Use No. 5 Teslameter Probe (46-255839P104)
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Use No. 6 Teslameter Probe (2295525-5)
Disengagement. If the Shim Lead cannot be engaged, ramp down in accordance with Magnet
Rampdown Using Auxiliary Cable.
12.2.9. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Main Power Supply and the Shim Power Supply. Verify that
no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
12.2.10. Replace the Main Lead Contact Bands in conformance to Main Lead Extension Contact Band
Replacement.
12.2.11. Connect the Switch Heater Cable (46-281667G1) between the Instrumentation Box (P304) at the
magnet and the Main Power Supply (J3).

Page 538 of 607
12.3. 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnet Rampdown Using Shim Lead and Manual Ramp Shim Power
Supply (P/N 46-260777G3)
Perform this procedure if you are using a manual ramping shim power supply (P/N 46-260777G3) and are
able to engage the Shim Lead. If the Shim Lead cannot be engaged, ramp down the magnet in
conformance Magnet Rampdown with the Auxiliary Cable and Manual Ramping Power Supply (P/N 46-
260776G4).
Disengagement. If the Shim Lead cannot be engaged, ramp down the magnet in conformance
Magnet Rampdown with the Auxiliary Cable and Manual Ramping Power Supply (P/N 46-260776G4).
12.3.4. Verify that the Main Switch Heater Current is set at 810±10mA on the power supply.
Replacement.

Page 539 of 607
12.3.7. Connect Power Supply Jumper Cable (as detailed in Appendix, “Connect Power Supply Jumper Cable”).
Always install the Pre-Ramp Grounding Circuit and verify Main Lead Extension grounding to Cryostat
ground before inserting or extracting any Main Lead Extension.
12.3.8. Connect the Shim Coil Power Supply to the magnet by making all cable connections in conformance
with Connections for Ramping and Shimming.
12.3.9. Open the Shim Lead's Nupro Vent Valve and allow frost to appear on the Shim Lead Connector
Housing before removing shim currents.
12.3.10. Remove LOTO and connect the input power supply cable to the Shim Coil Power Supply.
♦ This section allows removal of all shim currents to find and document the actual main magnetic
field strength to use as a target parking frequency when reramping the magnet. This will enable
parking the magnet at a more accurate frequency and prevent retuning the rest of the system.
12.3.11. Set the Main Power Switch on the Shim Coil Power Supply to the On position.
12.3.12. Set the Shim Coil Power Supply (shown below) to all last recorded Transverse 1 Currents.

(Front Panel)
12.3.13. Make sure the current polarities are correct.

Page 540 of 607
12.3.14. Set the Transverse 1 Heater Switch on the Shim Power Supply to I (on).
a. Transverse 1 = 610 mA, ±10 mA;
b. Transverse 2 = 610 mA, ±10 mA
c. Axial = 710 mA, ±10 mA.
d. If any current level is not correct, adjust the adjustment screw on the rear of the Shim Power
Supply.
e. Allow a few minutes for the heater to drive the switches resistive.
12.3.16. Slowly adjust all Shim Current controls to zero.
♦ The magnetic field strength reading on the Teslameter should change as the Axial Shim Currents
are adjusted down to zero.
♦ If no change is noticed in the Teslameter reading, the Axial Heater Switch may still be persistent.
If this occurs, wait an additional two minutes before continuing to decrease currents.
12.3.17. Set the Heater Switch to O (off).
12.3.18. Repeat process for Transverse 2, then the Axial Shim Coils.
12.3.19. Set the Main Power Switch on the Shim Power Supply to Off. Disconnect all cables, and LOTO input
power. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
♦ The frequency displayed on the Teslameter after the shim currents are removed is the target
frequency when the magnet is reramped. Make note of this value for later use.
12.3.21. Make sure the input power cable for the Magnet Power Supply is disconnected and LOTO applied.
12.3.22. Connect the Main Power Supply and Main Lead Extensions to the magnet by making all cable
connections in conformance with Connections for Ramping and Shimming.

Page 541 of 607
12.3.23. Set the Heater 1 Main and Heater 2 Shim Axial switches to the O (Off) position. (Shown below.)

12.3.24. Set the Current Adjust and Voltage Adjust controls to zero (fully CCW).
12.3.25. Remove LOTO and connect the input power to the Main Power Supply.
12.3.26. Disconnect Power Supply Jumper Cable. Once the Main Lead Extensions are inserted, disconnect and
remove the Power Supply Jumper Cable from the power supply while wearing non-absorbent leather
gloves with NO holes or tears. This removes the short across the power supply and enables magnet
ramping up and down. The Power Supply Grounding Cable should remain connected while ramping
up and down.
12.3.27. Set the Main Power and Power On switches to ON.
12.3.28. Set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to I (on).
12.3.29. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is off.
12.3.30. Connect a DVM or equivalent measuring device to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads.
12.3.31. Set the Current Adjust Controls on the Magnet Power Supply to maximum (fully CW).
12.3.32. Observe the Digital Current Meter and slowly turn the Voltage Control (CW) to the current value noted
below through the Main Leads, Main Lead Extensions and the persistent Main Switch.
12.3.33. Obtain the voltage reading on the DVM. Adjust contact resistance (as detailed in Appendix, “Adjusting
Contact Resistance”) to achieve the required level. Higher resistances will add more heat to the
magnet, increasing boil-off and possibly causing a quench during ramping. Do not proceed until after
the DVM voltage is
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series) ≤ 150 millivolts at 750 Amps.

Page 542 of 607
12.3.36. Turn the Current Adjust and Voltage controls to zero (fully CCW).
12.3.37. If a Quench occurs during change of magnetic field, immediately turn the Voltage Adjust and Current
12.3.38. Ice will build up around the Ramp Lead Hold-Down Tool flow holes during the rampdown procedure.
Remove ice as needed to maintain helium gas flow through the flow holes.
12.3.39. Retrieve the Main Coil connection polarity and latest final parking current.
12.3.40. Make sure the Axial Shim Heater (Shim Power Supply Controls) is on, and the Main Leads are
connected with the polarity obtained in the earlier step.
♦ The Axial Shim Heater must remain ON throughout the rampdown procedure.
12.3.41. Set the Main Power Supply's Voltmeter Select Switch to MAIN COIL position.

Page 543 of 607
12.3.42. Set the Main Power Supply's Current Adjustment Controls to 10 amps more than the parking current
retrieved earlier.
12.3.43. Set the Voltage Control to adjust the Main Power Supply's output current to the parking current value
retrieved earlier.
12.3.44. Set the Heater 1 Main Switch to I (On).
12.3.45. Allow approximately one minute for the Main Switch to go normal.
12.3.46. When the Main Switch is normal, slowly decrease the Voltage Control (CCW) until -0.1 V is observed
across the power supply voltmeter (Main Coil position).
12.3.47. Continue to adjust the power supply voltage, using the Voltage Control during rampdown in
conformance with the voltages read on the DVM and Main Coil current ranges in the appropriate
table below.
1.5T LCC (R Series) Rampdown Using Auxiliary Cable Profile

Main Coil Voltage Main Coil Current Range
-0.10 Volts Start to 720 Amps
-0.30 Volts 720 to 700 Amps
Gradually turn the Voltage Control to zero
(fully CCW ) then turn the Current Controls 500 to 0 Amps
to zero (fully CCW).
12.3.48. Observe the voltmeter reading with the power supply's Voltmeter Select Switch in the MAIN COIL
position. (A zero reading on the power supply's digital Voltage and Current Meters indicates that the
magnet is fully discharged.)
12.3.49. When the magnet is fully discharged,
a. Set the Heater 1 Main Switch to O (Off).
b. Set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switches to O (Off).
c. Set the Main Power and Power On switches to OFF.
using a DVM or equivalent measuring device. The Pressure Controller will maintain helium vessel
pressure.

Page 544 of 607
12.3.53. Remove one Main Extension at a time in the following sequence:
a. Open Valve V2, and bleed vessel pressure down below 1.0 psig. (Do not allow pressure to go
below 0.2 psig as read on the magnet pressure gauge or Magnet Monitor.) Close V2.
b. Remove all ice around the ramp lead port compression fitting on the first Main Lead Extension to
be removed.
removed.

Helium Fill
Tape Chains
Port Cap
(not shown)
up and down.

Page 545 of 607
12.4. 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnet Rampdown with the Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply
(5395802 or 5395802-100)
The process of using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply in auto mode is Class M and applies only to
Replacement.

Page 546 of 607
12.4.7. Disconnect and LOTO input power to the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply. Verify that no voltage is
12.4.8. Connect the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply and Main Lead Extensions to the magnet by making all
cable connections in conformance with Connections for Ramping.
12.4.10. Set the Heater 1 Main and Heater 2 Shim Axial switches to the OFF position.
12.4.11. Set the Current Adjustment and Voltage Controls for the main current to OFF on the front of the
supply (see the following illustration).
Auto-Ramp Power Supply (5395802 or 5395802-100) Power Connections
12.4.13. Disconnect Power Supply Jumper Cable. Once the Main Lead Extensions are inserted, disconnect
Power Supply Jumper Cable. This removes the short across the power supply and enables magnet
up and down.

Page 547 of 607
12.4.15. Set the Power Supply's three On switches to ON.
12.4.16. Initialized the Auto-Ramp Software:
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): In the dist directory, start the Auto-Ramp Shim software by clicking the
12.4.17. Enter the Magnet Series (R) and Serial Number.
12.4.18. Then select Field for location and Magnet in configuration as
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): Series_R_1_5T_Ramp_Down

Configuration for 1.5T LCC (R Series) shown as example.
12.4.19. Click [Initialize the Software] to begin.

12.4.20. Click [Manual & Auto Ramp Shim Tool] to begin the shim control part of the program.
12.4.21. Click the Ramp Controls Tab.

Page 548 of 607
supply and Teslameter. Make sure the result comes back reporting Pass next to the Test
Communication button as shown in the following illustration.
12.4.23. Before ramping down the magnet, you need to remove the correction coil currents. If an LVS shim file
exists on this computer, load in the last LV Shim file using the file input on the left side as shown in the
illustration above, then click [Old <- New] to transfer the New values to the Old locations. If a file is not
available enter the last recorded values in the boxes shown under the Old values.

Page 549 of 607
12.4.25. Click [zero out New] to set the New values to zero.
12.4.26. Under Automation parameters, make sure the Select groups drop down is set to All Groups. Check the
Auto Load box and click [Start] to remove the currents in the magnet. See illustration “Shim Control
Screen in the Control Software.”
12.4.27. If you are taking out the currents manually, set the correct group where the currents are entered and
step through the steps on the right waiting a few minutes between Set Old Currents and Open heater
steps and the completion of Set New Currents and Close Heater.
12.4.28. Once all the shim currents from all three groups are out, set the Main Power Switch on the power
supply to Off.
12.4.31. Click the Ramp Controls tab.

Page 550 of 607
Ramp Controls Tab (Configuration for 1.5T LCC (R Series) shown as example.)
12.4.33. Click [SET] to set a maximum current point at

♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 800A
12.4.34. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF on the auto software screen as well as showing 0 amps on
the front of the power supply. Then set the Axial / BØ Heater Switch to On by clicking the slider bar.

Page 551 of 607
12.4.36. Observe the current rise in the Axial Heater Power Supply Ammeter (800 to 820 mA) to verify circuit
continuity.
12.4.37. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads.
12.4.38. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current as noted below through the main leads.
Use the two arrows on the coarse and fine adjustments to reach the desired voltage. (See the
following illustration.) Slowly adjust the Voltage to set the desires current through the Main Leads,
Main Lead Extensions, and persistent Main Switch. Current will not be delivered if the Axial / BØ
heater is not on.
♦ 1.5T LCC (R Series): 750A

(Configuration for 1.5T LCC (R Series) shown as example.)
the DVM voltage is

Page 552 of 607
12.4.42. Turn the Voltage controls to OFF.
12.4.44. Make sure the Axial Shim Heater (see the following illustration) is on, and the Main Leads are
connected with the polarity obtained in the previous step.
Ramp Controls Screen
12.4.45. The Axial/BØ Shim Heater must remain on throughout the ramp down procedure.
12.4.46. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current through the main leads matching the
parking current. Use the two arrows on the course and fine adjustments to reach the desired current
(see illustration above). Current will not be delivered if the Axial/BØ Heaters switch is OFF.

Page 553 of 607
12.4.47. Turn the Main Switch Heater on using the drop down menu shown above and wait 1 minute for the
Main Switch to go normal.
12.4.48. Check the Auto ramp down box to choose to have the power supply auto-ramp the magnet, then click
the [Start] button to begin the process. See illustration above.
12.4.49. If the automation needs to be stopped, click [Stop] in the Ramp – Down section and then adjust the
voltage as needed. To resume automatic ramping, click the [Start] button.
12.4.50. To manually ramp down the magnet, use the voltage controls shown above to follow the appropriate
ramp down procedure in the manual ramp down procedure.
12.4.52. Observe the voltmeter reading with the power supply. A zero reading on the power supply digital
voltage and current meters indicates that the magnet is fully discharged.
12.4.53. When the magnet is fully discharged, click [Stop] on the automation from the Ramp Controls screen
(illustration above).
12.4.54. Turn off the Main Heater and the Axial/BØ heaters. The Main Heater must be turned off through the
drop down menu at the top of the control screen (illustration above).
12.4.55. Set the Main Power Switches on the back of the supply to OFF as well as the main switch on the front.

Page 554 of 607
12.4.57. After ramping down the magnet, turn OFF the main power supply.
12.4.60. Plug and remove one Main Extension at a time in the following sequence:
be removed.
removed.

Helium Fill
Tape Chains
Port Cap
(not shown)
up and down.

Page 555 of 607
12.5. 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnet Rampdown with the Auxiliary Cable and Manual Ramping
Power Supply (P/N 46-260776G4)
The Auxiliary Rampdown Cable (2217315) is used to ramp down a magnet when the Shim Lead cannot be
engaged in the Shim Lead Connector (P100) in the magnet Vertical Penetration due to ice or damage to the
P100's Sav-Con Connector. This cable connects the Main Coil Heater via the J1C connector on the magnet
penetration and J3 on the Main Power Supply. Main Coil voltage will not be accessible with this wiring
configuration. Use a DVM with the Voltage Sense Leads connected to the Main Lead Extensions to
approximate the Main Coil voltage.
Use Auxiliary Rampdown Cable 2217315 and the procedure below ONLY when the Shim Leads cannot be
engaged in the P100 Connector. Do NOT contact the Shim Lead Connector (P100) or the Main Lead Pins
with metallic or conductive tools/materials since the Auxiliary Rampdown Cable may leave current in the
Superconductive Shim Coils. This current can transfer to the Main Coils.
Replacement.

Page 556 of 607
12.5.6. Disconnect the Instrumentation Connector P1C from Connector J1C on the Plenum (shown below).
Connect Auxiliary Rampdown Cable 2217315 between connector J3 on the power supply and
connector J1C.
Instrumentation Connector P1C

Location
connections in conformance with Connections for Ramping and Shimming, but using the Auxiliary
Rampdown Cable instead of the Switch Heater Cable.

Page 557 of 607

12.5.12. Disconnect Power Supply Jumper Cable. Once the Main Lead Extensions are inserted, disconnect the
Power Supply Jumper Cable from the power supply. This removes the short across the power supply
and enables magnet ramping up and down. The Power Supply Grounding Cable should remain
connected while ramping up and down.
the DVM voltage is

Page 558 of 607
12.5.19. If the voltage exceeds the above noted requirements during the test, follow the procedure for
12.5.24. Make sure the Main Leads are connected with the polarity obtained in the previous step. Main Coil
voltage is not directly accessible with the Shim Lead connector disengaged. Use DVM readings with
the Voltage Sense Leads connected to the Main Lead Extensions for the steps below. This voltage
approximates the Main Coil voltage, and will prevent the rampdown voltage from exceeding the
recommended value.
12.5.25. Make sure the DVM is connected to the Voltage Sense Leads (shown below) from the Main Lead
Extensions.

Helium Fill
Port Cap

Page 559 of 607
12.5.26. Set the Current Adjust Controls on power supply to 10 amps more than the parking current retrieved
earlier.
12.5.27. Set the Voltage Control to adjust the power supply output current to the parking current value
retrieved earlier.
12.5.30. When the Main Switch is normal, slowly decrease the Voltage Control (CCW) until -0.1 V is observed on
the DVM.
table below.
1.5T LCC (R Series) Rampdown Using Auxiliary Cable Profile

(fully CCW ) then turn the Current Controls 500 to 0 Amps
12.5.32. Observe the voltmeter reading with the power supply's Voltmeter Select Switch in the MAIN COIL
position. (A zero reading on the power supply's digital Voltage and Current Meters indicates that the
magnet is fully discharged.)
12.5.33. When the magnet is fully discharged,
a. Set the Heater 1 Main Switch to O (Off).
b. Set the Main Power and Power On switches to OFF.
using a DVM or equivalent measuring device. The Pressure Controller will maintain helium vessel
pressure.

Page 560 of 607
be removed.
removed.

Helium Fill
Tape Chains
Port Cap
(not shown)
up and down.

Page 561 of 607
12.6. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnet Rampdown Using Shim Lead and Manual Ramp Shim
Power Supply (P/N 46-260777G3)
Perform this procedure if you are using a manual ramping shim power supply (P/N 46-260777G3) and are
able to engage the Shim Lead. If the Shim Lead cannot be engaged, ramp down the magnet in
conformance Magnet Rampdown with the Auxiliary Cable and Manual Ramping Power Supply (P/N 46-
260776G4).
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Use No. 6 Teslameter Probe (2295525-5)
Replacement.

Page 562 of 607
12.6.6. Connect Power Supply Jumper Cable (as detailed in Appendix, “Connect Power Supply Jumper
Cable”). Always install the Pre-Ramp Grounding Circuit and verify Main Lead Extension grounding to
Cryostat ground before inserting or extracting any Main Lead Extension.
12.6.9. Remove LOTO and connect the input power supply cable to the Shim Coil Power Supply.
12.6.10. Set the Main Power Switch on the Shim Coil Power Supply to the On position.
12.6.11. Set the Shim Coil Power Supply (shown below) to all last recorded Transverse 1 Currents.

(Front Panel)
12.6.12. Make sure the current polarities are correct.

Page 563 of 607
12.6.13. Set the Transverse 1 Heater Switch on the Shim Power Supply to I (on).
a. Transverse 1 = 610 mA, ±10 mA;
b. Transverse 2 = 610 mA, ±10 mA
c. Axial = 710 mA, ±10 mA.
d. If any current level is not correct, adjust the adjustment screw on the rear of the Shim Power
Supply.
e. Allow a few minutes for the heater to drive the switches resistive.
12.6.15. Slowly adjust all Shim Current controls to zero.
♦ The magnetic field strength reading on the Teslameter should change as the Axial Shim Currents
are adjusted down to zero.
♦ If no change is noticed in the Teslameter reading, the Axial Heater Switch may still be persistent.
If this occurs, wait an additional two minutes before continuing to decrease currents.
12.6.16. Set the Heater Switch to O (off).
12.6.17. Repeat process for Transverse 2, then the Axial Shim Coils.
12.6.18. Set the Main Power Switch on the Shim Power Supply to Off. Disconnect all cables, and LOTO input
power. Verify that no voltage is present by using a DVM or equivalent measuring device.
connections in conformance with Connections for Ramping and Shimming.

Page 564 of 607
12.6.22. For 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) ONLY – IF USING THE 3.0T Ramp Down Unit (5271012) –
a. Connect the 3.0T Ramp Down Unit (5271012) to the magnet power supply and the magnet
b. Unpack the unit and connect the two 12 VDC power supplies to appropriate power (100 to 240
VAC, single phase, 50 to 60 Hz).
c. Verify fans on the front of the unit are working.
d. Cycle through the switches and listen for the audible operation of the solenoids.
e. Leave all 4 switches in the down position.
f. Attach the paired red cable on the rear of the Ramp Down Unit to the + output of the ramp
power supply.
g. Attach the positive ramp cable going to the magnet’s + ramp lead to the remaining lug on the
Ramp Down Unit.
3.0T Magnet
Ramp Down
Unit

Page 565 of 607

up and down.
12.6.28. Set the Heater 2 Shim Axial Switch to I (on).
12.6.29. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is off.
the DVM voltage is
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps.

Page 566 of 607
12.6.40. Make sure the Axial Shim Heater (Shim Power Supply Controls) is on, and the Main Leads are
connected with the polarity obtained in the earlier step.
♦ The Axial Shim Heater must remain ON throughout the rampdown procedure.
12.6.41. Set the Main Power Supply's Voltmeter Select Switch to MAIN COIL position.
12.6.42. Set the Main Power Supply's Current Adjustment Controls to 10 amps more than the parking current
retrieved earlier.
12.6.43. Set the Voltage Control to adjust the Main Power Supply's output current to the parking current value
retrieved earlier.
12.6.46. When the Main Switch is normal, slowly decrease the Voltage Control (CCW) until -0.3 V is observed
across the power supply voltmeter (Main Coil position).
table below.
3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Rampdown Profile

-6.00 Volts
(The voltage will approach zero as the current 248 to 0 Amps
approaches zero.)
(fully CCW ) then turn the Current Controls At 0 Amps

Page 567 of 607
be removed.
removed.

Helium Fill
Tape Chains
Port Cap
(not shown)
up and down.

Page 568 of 607
12.7. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Magnet Rampdown with the Auto Ramping Shim Power Supply
(5395802 or 5395802-100)
The process of using the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply in auto mode is Class M and applies only to
a. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≥70%
a. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Use No. 6 Teslameter Probe (2295525-5)
Replacement.

Page 569 of 607
12.7.9. Set the Heater 1 Main and Heater 2 Shim Axial switches to the OFF position.
12.7.10. Set the Current Adjustment and Voltage Controls to OFF on the front of the supply (see the following
illustration).
Auto-Ramp Power Supply (5395802 or 5395802-100) Power Connections
up and down.

Page 570 of 607
12.7.14. Set the Power Supply's three On switches to ON.
12.7.15. Initialized the Auto-Ramp Software:
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): In the dist directory, start the Auto-Ramp Shim software by clicking the
12.7.16. Enter the Magnet Series (W or WB) and Serial Number.
12.7.17. Then select Field for location and Magnet in configuration as
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): Series_W_3_0T_Ramp_Down

Configuration for 1.5T LCC (R Series) shown as example.
Magnet
Configuration
12.7.18. Click [Initialize the Software] to begin.

12.7.19. Click [Manual & Auto Ramp Shim Tool] to begin the shim control part of the program.

Page 571 of 607
12.7.21. Before ramping down the magnet, you need to remove the correction coil currents. If an LVS shim file
exists on this computer, load in the last LV Shim file using the file input on the left side as shown in the
illustration above, then click [Old <- New] to transfer the New values to the Old locations. If a file is not
available enter the last recorded values in the boxes shown under the Old values.

Page 572 of 607
12.7.23. Click [zero out New] to set the New values to zero.
12.7.24. Under Automation parameters, make sure the Select groups drop down is set to All Groups. Check the
Auto Load box and click [Start] to remove the currents in the magnet. See Illustration “Shim Control
Screen in the Control Software.”
12.7.25. If you are taking out the currents manually, set the correct group where the currents are entered and
step through the steps on the right waiting a few minutes between Set Old Currents and Open heater
steps and the completion of Set New Currents and Close Heater.
12.7.26. Once all the shim currents from all three groups are out, set the Main Power Switch on the power
supply to Off.
12.7.29. Connect the Auto-Ramp Shim Power Supply and Main Lead Extensions to the magnet by making all
cable connections in conformance with Connections for Ramping.

Page 573 of 607
12.7.30. For 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) ONLY – IF USING THE 3.0T Ramp Down Unit (5271012) –
a. Connect the 3.0T Ramp Down Unit (5271012) to the magnet power supply and the magnet
b. Unpack the unit and connect the two 12 VDC power supplies to appropriate power (100 to 240
VAC, single phase, 50 to 60 Hz).
c. Verify fans on the front of the unit are working.
d. Cycle through the switches and listen for the audible operation of the solenoids.
e. Leave all 4 switches in the down position.
f. Attach the paired red cable on the rear of the Ramp Down Unit to the + output of the ramp
power supply.
g. Attach the positive ramp cable going to the magnet’s + ramp lead to the remaining lug on the
Ramp Down Unit.
3.0T Magnet
Ramp Down
Unit

Page 574 of 607
12.7.31. Click on the Ramp Controls tab.
Ramp Controls Tab (Configuration for 3.0T LCC (WB Series) shown as example.)
12.7.33. Click [SET] to set a maximum current point at

♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 400A
12.7.34. Make sure the Main Heater Switch is OFF on the auto software screen as well as showing 0 amps on
the front of the power supply. Then set the Axial / BØ Heater Switch to On by clicking the slider bar.

Page 575 of 607
12.7.36. Connect a Digital Voltmeter (DVM) to the end of the Voltage Sense Leads.
12.7.37. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current as noted below through the main leads.
Use the two arrows on the coarse and fine adjustments to reach the desired voltage. (See the
following illustration.) Slowly adjust the Voltage to set the desires current through the Main Leads,
Main Lead Extensions, and persistent Main Switch. Current will not be delivered if the Axial / BØ
heater is not on.
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): 375A

(Configuration for 3.0T LCC (WB Series) shown as example.)
the DVM voltage is
♦ 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps.

Page 576 of 607
12.7.41. Turn the Voltage controls OFF.
12.7.43. Make sure the Axial Shim Heater (see the following illustration) is on, and the Main Leads are
connected with the polarity obtained in the previous step.
Main Heater Menu
12.7.44. The Axial/BØ Shim Heater must remain on throughout the ramp down procedure.
12.7.45. Set the Power supply voltage to obtain a Main Coil current through the main leads matching the
parking current. Use the two arrows on the course and fine adjustments to reach the desired current
(see illustration above). Current will not be delivered if the Axial/BØ Heaters switch is OFF.

Page 577 of 607
12.7.46. Turn the Main Switch Heater on using the drop down menu shown above and wait 1 3 minutes for the
Main Switch to go normal.
12.7.47. Check the Auto ramp down box to choose to have the power supply auto-ramp the magnet, then click
the [Start] button to begin the process. See illustration below.
Starting the Auto-Ramp Process
12.7.48. If the automation needs to be stopped, click [Stop] in the Ramp – Down section and then adjust the
voltage as needed. To resume automatic ramping, click the [Start] button.
12.7.49. To manually ramp down the magnet, use the voltage controls shown above to follow the appropriate
ramp down procedure in the manual ramp down procedure.
3.0T LCC (W, WB Series) Rampdown Profile

-6.00 Volts
(The voltage will approach zero as the current 248 to 0 Amps
approaches zero.)
At 0 Amps
then turn the Current Controls to zero.

Page 578 of 607
12.7.54. Plug and remove one Main Extension at a time in the following sequence:
be removed.
removed.

Helium Fill
Tape Chains
Port Cap
(not shown)
up and down.

Page 579 of 607
Chapter 13, Appendix

13. Appendix
13.1. Connect Power Supply Jumper Cable.
13.1.1. Note: Always install the Pre-Ramp Grounding Circuit and verify Main Lead Extension grounding to
Cryostat ground before inserting or extracting any Main Lead Extension.
13.1.2. Note: Once the Main Lead Extensions are inserted, disconnect and remove the Power Supply Jumper
Cable from the power supply while wearing non-absorbent leather gloves with NO holes or tears. This
removes the short across the power supply and enables magnet ramping up and down. The Power
Supply Grounding Cable should remain connected while ramping up and down.
13.1.3. Disconnect the female twist connector lugs from the 3ft (1M) Power Supply Jumper Cable and connect
the lugs to the positive (+) and negative (-) power supply output terminals. See illustration below.
Power Supply

Connector Connector
Negative (-)
Power Supply Ground
Cable
Negative (-)
Power Cables
Positive (+) Power
Cables

Page 580 of 607
13.1.4. Connect one twist connector lug of the Power Supply Jumper Cable to the power supply’s positive (+)
terminal. Make sure the twist connector is fully engaged. See below.
Female twist
connector
with lug
13.1.5. Connect the other twist connector lug of the Jumper Cable to the power supply’s negative (-) terminal.
Make sure the twist connector is fully engaged.
13.1.6. Connect the 0.375in. lug of the 50ft. Power Supply Grounding Cable to the power supply’s positive (+)
terminal.
13.1.7. Connect the Grounding Cable’s 0.5in. lug to the magnet’s grounding lug. See below for images of
grounding stud location example on the magnet feet. NOTE: If the magnet’s grounding connected to
the RF Common Bus Bar at the Penetration Panel, the 50ft. Power Supply Grounding Cable can be
connected between the power supply and the magnet or PDU ground wire clamp on the RF Common
Bus Bar if more convenient. If the magnet is not grounded to the Penetration Panel, the Grounding
Cable must be connected to the Cryostat Grounding Stud.
13.1.8. Verify that the resistance between the Vacuum Vessel at the Vertical Penetration and each Main Lead
Extension connection is zero Ohms as read on a DVM or equivalent. See below.

shown)

Page 581 of 607
13.2. Adjusting Contact Resistance
13.2.1. Higher resistances will add more heat to the magnet, increasing boil-off and possibly causing a
quench during ramping. If the DVM voltage exceeds the required level, perform one or more of the
following to reduce contact resistance:
a. Required Levels:
Extensions cool.
readings.
Extensions.
(approximately)
down.
g. While pressing down, rotate each lead twice: 15⁰ back and 15⁰ forth from initial position.
(approximately).
a. The Main Lead Extension Contact Bands replaced as directed in Connections for Ramping are
Band Replacement.
b. The Main Leads are damaged and need replacing.
a. 1.5T LCC (R Series): ≤ 150 millivolts at 750 Amps
b. 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series): ≤ 100 millivolts at 375 Amps

Page 582 of 607
13.3. Magnet Monitor Interface Diagram
Magnet Monitor Interface Diagram
Cabinet Room Magnet Room

Cable Part Number Run Cable Part Number Run
G 46-328000G980 831 A 2214062 832
H* 46-328000G975 824 B 2222797 830
J* 46-328000G977 825 C 46-328000G976 829
K 46-328000G978 826 D 46-328000G974 828
L 46-328578P1 827 E 46-328000G979 823
M 46-328000G981 833 F 2204485
* Cable numbers for mobiles and translocatables
are H: 46-317359G975 and J: 46-317359G977.

Page 583 of 607
13.4. MRU Interconnect Diagram, 1.5T LCC (R Series) Magnet and 3.0T LCC (W, WB Series)
Magnet

Page 584 of 607
13.5. Cryocooler System Interconnects

Page 585 of 607
13.6. Magnet Thermal System Schematic

Page 586 of 607
13.7. Magnet System Wiring: Sleeve Connections

Page 587 of 607
13.8. Magnet System Wiring: Shim Lead Connections

Page 588 of 607
13.9. Instrumentation Box Assembly 2204623 Wiring

Page 589 of 607
13.10. Shim Lead Pigtail Adapter Cable 2135362 Wiring

Page 590 of 607
13.11. Shim Coil Power Supply Cable 46-260726G1

Page 591 of 607
13.12. Voltage Monitor and Switch Heaters Cable 46-260724G1
13.13. Liquid Helium Monitor Circuit Wiring (Cables)

Page 592 of 607
13.14. Main Coil Heater Rundown Wiring

Page 593 of 607
13.15. RuO Circuit and Pinouts, Recondensor Vacuum Sleeve
13.16. RuO Circuits and Pinouts, Coldhead Transition Flange

Page 594 of 607
13.17. 1000 Amp Superconducting Main Coil Service Power Supply (46-260776G4)
Cabinet Model ESS 7.5-1000-2-D-1236
Designator Rating and Type Connection

P4 208/220 VAC, 50-60 Hz -
Input Power AC Input, Main Power
TB1 30 Amp, 602Y
Supply
Main Terminal Red (+) Main Lead
1000 Amp Bus Bar
Positive (+) Extension
Output Main Terminal Black (-) Main Lead
1000 Amp Bus Bar
Connections Negative (-) Extension
1 Amp, MS3106A20- Heater Wire Harness
J3
27P P3
CB1 Cabinet 3 Pole, 25 Amp, 250VAC
Fuses and
CB1 Supply 3 Pole, 25 Amp, 250VAC -
Circuit Breakers
F1 1 Amp, 250 VAC, MDA

Page 595 of 607
13.18. Shim Coil Power Supply

Input Power P4 208/220 VAC, 50-60 Hz -
25 Amp, MS3012A28- S/C Shim Coil Wire
J2
20S Harness P1
Output 25 Amp, MS3012A28- S/C Shim Coil Wire
J2-W
Connections 20S Harness P2
J3
27P P3
CB1 Cabinet 3 Pole, 25 Amp, 250VAC
6.25 Amp, 250 Volt,
Fuses and F1 (Typ., 6 Places)
MDA -
Circuit Breakers
F1, F5 4 Amp, 250 VAC, MDA
F2, F3, F4 1 Amp, 250 VAC, MDA

Page 596 of 607
13.19. Auto Ramp Shim Coil Power Supply (5395802 or 5395802-100)

P4 208 VAC -
Input Power AC Input, Main Power
TB1 30 Amp, 602Y
Supply
Main Terminal Red (+) Main Lead
800 Amp Bus Bar
Positive (+) Extension
Output Main Terminal Black (-) Main Lead
800 Amp Bus Bar
Connections Negative (-) Extension
J3
27P P3

Page 597 of 607
13.20. P4 – Shim and Main Coil Power Supply AC Inputs
Pin Signal
G Ground
W Neutral
X Phase A
Y Phase B
Z Phase C
4 Pole, 5 Wire
Twist-Lock Flange Inlet
30A 120/208V 3-Phase Y
NEMA L21-30R

Page 598 of 607
13.21. J3 – Switch heater Output (MSA3102A20-27S)
Shim Coil Service Power Main Coil Service Power

Phase III Power Supply Supply Supply
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
A - A - A -
B Main Switch Heater + B - B Main Switch Heater +
C - C - C -
D Main Switch Heater - D - D Main Switch Heater -
E Transverse 1 + E Transverse 1 + E -
F Transverse 1 - F Transverse 1 - F -
G - G - G -
H - H - H -
I Axial Switch Heater + I Axial Switch Heater + I Axial Switch Heater +
J Axial Switch Heater - J Axial Switch Heater - J Axial Switch Heater -
K Transverse 2 + K Transverse 2 + K -
L Transverse 2 - L Transverse 2 - L -
M Main Coil V + M - M Main Coil V +
N Main Coil V - N - N Main Coil V -

Page 599 of 607
13.22. Magnet Monitor Cable A (Run 832): 2214062
13.23. Magnet Monitor Cables D (Run 828) and H (Run 824): 46-271609G29

Page 600 of 607
13.24. Magnet Monitor Cable C (Run 829): 46-271601G29

Page 601 of 607
13.25. Magnet Monitor Cable B (Run 830) to Cable Interface (Run 829): 2222797

Page 602 of 607
13.26. Magnet Monitor Cables E (Run 823) and K (Run 826): 46-271603G29
13.27. Magnet Monitor Cable F: 2204485

Page 603 of 607
13.28. Magnet Monitor Cable G (Run 831): 2204488-5
13.29. Magnet Monitor Cable L (Run 827): 46-328578P1

Page 604 of 607
13.30. Magnet Monitor Cable J (Run 825): 46-271600G29
13.31. Magnet Monitor Cable M (Run 833): 2225805-1

Page 605 of 607
13.32. J2 - Shim Coil Power Supply Output (MSA3102A28-20S)

A AX1 D T1-1 K/L * AX1, T1-2, T2-2 Returns
B AX3 E T2-1 M/N * AX3, T1-3, T2-3 Returns
C AX5 F T1-2 P AX5, T1-1, T2-1 Returns
G T1-3 * Pins Paralled
H T2-2
J T2-3
13.33. J2-W – Shim Coil Power Supply Output (MSA3102A28-20S)

A AX2 D T1-6 K/L * AX2, T1-4, T2-4 Returns
B AX4 E T2-6 M/N * AX4, T1-5, T2-5 Returns
C AX6 F T1-4 P AX6, T1-6, T2-6 Returns
G T1-5 * Pins Paralled
H T2-4
J T2-5

Page 606 of 607
13.34. Optional Shim Coil Power Supply Output (MSA3102A20-27S)

A Channel A = ZY H ZX Return Q Channel F = Z3
B ZY Return J - R Z3 Return
C - K - S Channel E = Z2
D - L Channel D = X2-Y2 T Z2 Return
E Channel B = XY M X2-Y2 Return U -
F XY Return N - V -
G Channel C = ZX P -

Page 607 of 607

Magnet Activ Shim

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magnet Activ Shim

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

Magnet & Cryogen Manual

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 2 of 607

Important Information, Language

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 3 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 4 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 5 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 6 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 7 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 8 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 9 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 10 of 607

Merger of 2192624, Revision 21

Typo or Format Change

Validation Refer to information contained within HII log.

Training No change to existing techniques.

Communication Upon release.

Labeling, (list) Document is a Service Note (classified as Labeling)

Other Documents, (list)

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 11 of 607

1.2. Superconducting Magnets, Introduction

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 12 of 607

1.3. Safety Alert Usage

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 13 of 607

1.4. Safety Procedures for Servicing Highly Ferrous Devices

Highly Ferrous Material Pre-Work Checklist

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 14 of 607

1.5. Magnet Safety

Magnet Field Exclusion Zone Magnet Field Exclusion Zone

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 15 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 16 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 17 of 607

Authorized Personnel Sign,

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 18 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 19 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 20 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 21 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 22 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 23 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 24 of 607

1.6. Handling of Ferrous Material

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 25 of 607

1.7. Emergency Rampdown of Magnetic Field

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 26 of 607

Field Decay Times

Primary MRU Remote MRU

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 27 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 28 of 607

Remove enclosure cover from front of Remove protective cover from

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 29 of 607

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 30 of 607

2.2. Documentation Organization

2.3. Damage in Transportation

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 31 of 607

2.4. Magnet Commissioning Flowchart

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 32 of 607

2.5. Vendor Manual Matrix

GE Model Vendor Model GE Manual Part Vendor Manual

Direction 5495019, Revision 001 Page 33 of 607

POTENTIAL FATAL INJURY!

POTENTIAL ASPHYXIATION HAZARD

POTENTIAL COLD BURN HAZARD!

POTENTIAL PINCH HAZARD